The Most Up-To-Date Owner'S Manual, Radio and Warranty Books

2022 RAM 1500
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing
what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you will find the app an important
extension of your Ram vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go
directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
U.S. CANADA
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,

RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
MOPAR.COM/OM OWNERS.MOPAR.CA 2022 RAM 1500

OWNER’S MANUAL
©2021 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. FIRST EDITION V1
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google. 22_DT_OM_EN_USC
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in
This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation
changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also
to install them on products previously manufactured. dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It
substitution therefore. is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. for common questions.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle,
Booklet by calling 1-866-726-4636 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com. visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the
Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public
vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and transportation.
lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary,
service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when
servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
22_DT_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................ 10 1
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ................................................................................. 19 2
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ......................................................106 3
4 STARTING AND OPERATING .............................................................................................. 140 4
5 MULTIMEDIA .............................................................................................................................. 233 5
6 SAFETY ......................................................................................................................................... 312 6

7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ..................................................................................................... 371 7
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................... 393 8
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................466
9
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE ..................................................................................................... 477
10
11 INDEX ..............................................................................................................................................481
11
INTRODUCTION REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL) .........27 SEATS ...................................................................... 35

How To Use Remote Start................................27 Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) —
SYMBOLS KEY........................................................ 11
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .....27 If Equipped .......................................................36
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS........................... 11 Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)....................37
To Arm The System ..........................................28
CONSUMER INFORMATION — TRUCK-CAMPER To Disarm The System .....................................28 Power Adjustment (Front Seats) —
LOADING ................................................................. 11 Rearming Of The System .................................28 If Equipped .......................................................38
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ......... 13 Security System Manual Override...................28 Heated Seats — If Equipped ...........................39
SYMBOL GLOSSARY.............................................. 13 DOORS ....................................................................28 Ventilated Seats — If Equipped .......................40
Manual Door Locks ..........................................28 Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers ........................41
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Power Door Locks — If Equipped ....................29 Head Restraints ...............................................41
KEYS ....................................................................... 19 Power Side Steps — If Equipped .....................30 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION —
Key Fob .............................................................19 Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry............30 IF EQUIPPED........................................................... 43
SENTRY KEY ........................................................... 22 Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit — Introducing Voice Recognition ........................43
IGNITION SWITCH ................................................. 23 If Equipped........................................................32 Basic Voice Commands ...................................43
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition .........................23 Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped ..............32 Get Started .......................................................43
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (GASOLINE) .... 24 Child-Protection Door Lock System — Additional Information .....................................44
How To Use Remote Start................................25 Rear Doors........................................................32 DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS —
To Exit Remote Start Mode..............................25 STEERING WHEEL ..................................................33 IF EQUIPPED........................................................... 44
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation — Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column...................33 MIRRORS................................................................ 45
If Equipped........................................................26 Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ............34 Inside Rearview Mirror.....................................45
Remote Start Comfort Systems — DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED.....34 Illuminated Vanity Mirror .................................46
If Equipped........................................................26 Programming The Memory Feature ................35 Outside Mirrors ................................................47
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer Linking And Unlinking The Key Fob Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors —
Activation — If Equipped ..................................26 To Memory ........................................................35 If Equipped .......................................................47
Remote Start Abort Message ..........................26 Memory Position Recall ...................................35 Power Mirrors ...................................................48
Power Folding Outside Mirrors For Automatic High Beam Headlamp Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
Standard And Trailer Tow — If Equipped.........48 Control — If Equipped ......................................55 If Equipped .......................................................67
Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped...............49 Flash-To-Pass ...................................................55 Climate Voice Recognition — If Equipped.......68
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped..........................49 Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ..............56 Operating Tips .................................................68
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped......49 Parking Lights And Panel Lights......................56 INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT............... 69
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER Automatic Headlights With Wipers .................56 Storage .............................................................69
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED ............................ 49 Headlight Delay ................................................56 USB/AUX Control..............................................75
Before You Begin Programming Lights-On Reminder .........................................56 Electrical Power Outlets...................................76
HomeLink®.......................................................50 Fog Lights — If Equipped .................................57 Power Inverter — If Equipped ..........................77
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels ............50 Turn Signals......................................................57 Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped .............79
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling Lane Change Assist — If Equipped..................57 WINDOWS ............................................................. 79
Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device ...................50 Cargo Lights/Trailer Spotter Lights/ Power Windows ................................................79
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Trailer Hitch Light With Bed Lights — Automatic Window Features ...........................80
Door Opener .....................................................51 If Equipped........................................................57 Reset Auto-Up ..................................................80
Programming HomeLink® To A Battery Saver ....................................................59 Window Lockout Switch...................................81
Miscellaneous Device ......................................52 INTERIOR LIGHTS ..................................................59 Power Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped.....81
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Courtesy Lights.................................................59 Manual Sliding Rear Window —
Button ...............................................................52 Illuminated Entry .............................................60 If Equipped .......................................................81
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .........52 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS...............61 Wind Buffeting .................................................81
Security .............................................................53 Windshield Wiper Operation............................61 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ..................... 82
Troubleshooting Tips........................................53 Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ................62 Single Pane Power Sunroof — If Equipped .....82
EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................. 54 CLIMATE CONTROLS .............................................62 Dual Pane Power Sunroof — If Equipped........83
Headlight Switch...............................................54 Automatic Climate Control HOOD....................................................................... 85
Multifunction Lever .........................................55 Descriptions And Functions ............................62 To Open The Hood............................................85
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) ......................55 Manual Climate Control Descriptions And To Close The Hood ...........................................86
High/Low Beam Switch ...................................55 Functions .........................................................65
TAILGATE ................................................................ 86 PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES .................128
Opening.............................................................86 GASOLINE............................................................. 108 Red Warning Lights....................................... 128
Closing...............................................................86 Premium Instrument Cluster Yellow Warning Lights................................... 131
Locking Tailgate................................................86 Descriptions — Gasoline ............................... 109 Yellow Indicator Lights.................................. 134
Multifunction Tailgate — If Equipped ..............87 BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — Green Indicator Lights .................................. 136
Tailgate Removal .............................................88 DIESEL .................................................................. 110 White Indicator Lights................................... 137
Bed Step — If Equipped....................................90 Base / Midline Instrument Cluster Blue Indicator Lights ..................................... 137
PICKUP BOX .......................................................... 92 Descriptions — Diesel.................................... 111 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ......138
Bed Rail Tie-Down System — If Equipped ......93 PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED...................................... 94 DIESEL .................................................................. 113 Cybersecurity................................................. 138
Locking And Unlocking RamBox......................94 Premium Instrument Cluster EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
RamBox Cargo Storage Bins............................94 Descriptions — Diesel ................................... 114 MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS...............................139
RamBox Safety Warning ..................................96 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY...................... 114
Bed Divider — If Equipped................................97 Instrument Cluster Display Location and STARTING AND OPERATING
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED ...... 98 Controls.......................................................... 115 STARTING THE ENGINE ......................................140
Tonneau Cover Components ...........................98 Oil Life Reset ................................................. 116 Automatic Transmission ............................... 141
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Folding For Display Menu Items ...................................... 116 Tip Start Feature .......................................... 141
Driving Or Removal...........................................99 Head-Up Display (HUD) — If Equipped ........ 122 Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Ignition .................. 141
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Installation ............. 102 Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Messages .... 124 Normal Starting Using ENGINE START/
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Cleaning ................. 105 Displays.......................................................... 125 STOP Button — Gasoline Engine .................. 141
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Warning AutoPark ........................................................ 142
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR Messages....................................................... 125 If Engine Fails To Start ................................. 143
INSTRUMENT PANEL Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fault Warning Normal Starting Using ENGINE START/
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — Messages....................................................... 126 STOP Button — Diesel Engine....................... 144
GASOLINE .............................................................106 Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Cold Weather Operation
Message — Electrical Load Reduction (Below –22°F Or −30°C) ............................ 145
Base / Midline Instrument Cluster
Actions — If Equipped.................................... 127 After Starting ................................................. 145
Descriptions — Gasoline ............................... 107
Starting Fluids — Diesel Engine Only ........... 145
NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE .........146 ACTIVE-LEVEL FOUR CORNER AIR PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK
Cold Weather Precautions ............................ 146 SUSPENSION SYSTEM ASSIST SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED........................186
Engine Idling .................................................. 147 (OFF-ROAD GROUP) — IF EQUIPPED................. 169 ParkSense Sensors....................................... 187
Stopping The Engine ..................................... 148 Description .................................................... 169 ParkSense Warning Display ......................... 187
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED..........149 Air Suspension Modes .................................. 171 ParkSense Display ........................................ 187
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS — Instrument Cluster Display Messages ......... 171 Enabling And Disabling Front And/Or
GASOLINE ENGINE ..............................................150 Operation ....................................................... 171 Rear ParkSense ............................................ 190
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS — AXLE LOCK SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ................ 172 Service The ParkSense Park Assist
DIESEL ENGINE ....................................................150 LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL — System ........................................................... 190
PARKING BRAKE .................................................150 IF EQUIPPED ........................................................ 173 Cleaning The ParkSense System ................. 190
Electric Park Brake (EPB) ............................. 150 POWER STEERING ............................................. 173 ParkSense System Usage Precautions........ 191
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION..............................153 Electric Power Steering ................................ 173 PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
Ignition Park Interlock ................................... 154 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINES SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .....................................192
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock ONLY — IF EQUIPPED.......................................... 174 Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense
(BTSI) System ................................................ 154 STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED............. 174 Active Park Assist System............................. 192
8-Speed Automatic Transmission ................ 154 Autostop Mode .............................................. 174 Parallel/Perpendicular Parking Space
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Assistance Operation.................................... 193
IF EQUIPPED ........................................................160 Autostop......................................................... 174 LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ..............................196
Four-Position Electronically Shifted To Start The Engine While In LaneSense Operation ................................... 196
Transfer Case — If Equipped ........................ 160 Autostop Mode .............................................. 175 Turning LaneSense On Or Off....................... 196
Five-Position Electronically Shifted To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start LaneSense Warning Message...................... 197
Transfer Case — If Equipped ........................ 162 System ........................................................... 175 Changing LaneSense Status ........................ 198
ACTIVE-LEVEL FOUR CORNER AIR To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ...............199
SUSPENSION SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .............165 System ........................................................... 175 SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM —
Description..................................................... 165 System Malfunction ...................................... 176 IF EQUIPPED ........................................................200
Air Suspension Modes .................................. 167 CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — Forward Facing Camera With Tire
Instrument Cluster Display Messages ......... 167 IF EQUIPPED ........................................................ 176 Lines — If Equipped....................................... 203
Operation ....................................................... 168 Cruise Control................................................ 176
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ..................... 178
TRAILER CAMERAS — IF EQUIPPED .................203 Trailer And Tongue Weight............................ 217 MULTIMEDIA
Trailer Surround View Camera System — Trailer Reverse Steering Control .................. 217
UCONNECT SYSTEMS..........................................233
If Equipped..................................................... 203 Towing Requirements .................................. 219
CYBERSECURITY..................................................233
AUX Camera — If Equipped ........................... 206 Towing Tips ................................................... 225
SNOWPLOW......................................................... 225 UCONNECT SETTINGS ........................................234
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GASOLINE
Before Plowing............................................... 226 Customer Programmable Features ............ 235
ENGINE .................................................................207
Snowplow Prep Package Model UCONNECT INTRODUCTION................................259
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL
Availability...................................................... 226 System Overview .......................................... 259
ENGINE .................................................................208
Over The Road Operation With Snowplow Safety And General Information .................. 261
Avoid Using Contaminated Fuel ................... 208 UCONNECT MODES .............................................262
Bulk Fuel Storage — Diesel Fuel................... 209 Attached......................................................... 226
Operating Tips ............................................... 226 Steering Wheel Audio Controls..................... 262
Diesel Exhaust Fluid...................................... 209
General Maintenance ................................... 226 Radio Mode .................................................. 262
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Storage........................ 209
RECREATIONAL TOWING Media Mode ................................................. 270
Adding Diesel Exhaust Fluid ......................... 209
(BEHIND MOTORHOME) .................................... 227 Phone Mode ................................................. 272
VEHICLE LOADING ...............................................211
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES —
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) .......... 211
Vehicle ........................................................... 227 IF EQUIPPED ........................................................282
Payload .......................................................... 211
Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Is My Vehicle Connected? ............................ 282
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)................ 211
Drive Models.................................................. 228 Introduction To Connected Vehicle
Tire Size.......................................................... 212
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Services ........................................................ 283
Rim Size ......................................................... 212
Drive Models.................................................. 228 Getting Started With Connected Vehicle
Inflation Pressure .......................................... 212
DRIVING TIPS....................................................... 230 Services ........................................................ 284
Curb Weight ................................................... 212
Driving On Slippery Surfaces ....................... 230 Using SiriusXM Guardian™ .......................... 286
Loading .......................................................... 212
Driving Through Water ................................. 231 Manage My SiriusXM Guardian™
TRAILER TOWING ................................................212
Off-Road Driving Tips .................................... 232 Account .......................................................... 297
Common Towing Definitions......................... 213
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer
Weight ............................................................ 216
Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)............... 217
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS ...........................297 OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED ................... 306 Safety Checks You Should Make
Connected Services SOS FAQs — Off-Road Pages Status Bar .......................... 307 Inside The Vehicle ........................................ 368
If Equipped .................................................... 298 Vehicle Dynamics ......................................... 308 Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Connected Services Remote Door Accessory Gauge ........................................... 309 Make Outside The Vehicle............................ 369
Lock/Unlock FAQs ........................................ 298 Pitch & Roll .................................................... 310 Exhaust Gas................................................... 370
Connected Services Roadside Suspension .................................................... 311 Carbon Monoxide Warnings ........................ 370
Assistance FAQs ........................................... 298 Forward Facing Camera................................ 311
Connected Services Send & Go FAQs — IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If Equipped .................................................... 298 SAFETY HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS .........................371
Connected Services Vehicle Finder FAQs ... 299 SAFETY FEATURES.............................................. 312 ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ......372
Connected Services Stolen Vehicle Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ..................... 312 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING .........................375
Assistance FAQs — If Equipped ................... 299 Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ....... 313 Preparations For Jacking .............................. 375
Connected Services Remote Vehicle AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS.......................... 319 Jack Location................................................. 376
Start FAQs ..................................................... 299
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — Removal Of Jack And Tools .......................... 376
Connected Services Remote
If Equipped .................................................... 319 Removing The Spare Tire ............................. 378
Horn & Lights FAQs ....................................... 300
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Jacking Instructions ...................................... 379
Connected Services Account
With Mitigation — If Equipped ...................... 325 To Stow The Flat Or Spare ........................... 382
FAQs — If Equipped ....................................... 300
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .... 328 Reinstalling The Jack And Tools................... 383
Data Collection & Privacy.............................. 302
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ................... 334 JUMP STARTING ..................................................384
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES......302
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....... 334 Preparations For Jump Start ........................ 384
Regulatory And Safety Information .............. 303
Important Safety Precautions ...................... 334 Jump Starting Procedure .............................. 385
PERFORMANCE PAGES — IF EQUIPPED...........303
Seat Belt Systems ........................................ 335 REFUELING IN EMERGENCY –
Timers ............................................................ 304 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ...... 341 IF EQUIPPED ........................................................386
Gauges ........................................................... 304 Child Restraints ............................................ 354 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ...........................387
G-Force........................................................... 305 SAFETY TIPS ........................................................ 368 MANUAL PARK RELEASE ...................................388
Dynamometer (Dyno)/Engine....................... 305
Transporting Passengers.............................. 368 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..............................389
Vehicle Dynamics .......................................... 306
Transporting Pets ....................................... 368
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE..........................390 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE..................................... 408 TIRES .....................................................................444

Two-Wheel Drive Models............................... 391 Engine Oil — Gas Engine .............................. 409 Tire Safety Information ................................. 444
Four-Wheel Drive Models.............................. 392 Engine Oil Filter ............................................ 409 Tires — General Information......................... 451
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped .......... 392 Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............................... 410 Tire Types....................................................... 455
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM Draining Fuel/Water Separator Spare Tires — If Equipped............................. 455
(EARS) ..................................................................392 Filter — Diesel Engine ................................... 412 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care......................... 457
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR).........................392 Underbody Mounted Fuel Filter Snow Traction Devices ................................. 458
Replacement — Diesel Engine...................... 413 Tire Rotation Recommendations ................ 460
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Priming If The Engine Has Run Out DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
Of Fuel — Diesel Engine ................................ 414 UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ....................460
SCHEDULED SERVICING — GASOLINE
Intervention Regeneration Strategy — Treadwear...................................................... 460
ENGINE .................................................................393
Message Process Flow (Diesel Engine) ....... 414 Traction Grades............................................. 461
Maintenance Plan ......................................... 394 Diesel Exhaust Fluid...................................... 415 Temperature Grades..................................... 461
SCHEDULED SERVICING — DIESEL Air Conditioner Maintenance........................ 415 STORING THE VEHICLE .......................................461
ENGINE .................................................................398 Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ................... 418 BODYWORK..........................................................461
Maintenance Plan — Diesel Fuel Up To B5 Body Lubrication ........................................... 418 Protection From Atmospheric Agents .......... 461
Biodiesel ....................................................... 399 Windshield Wiper Blades.............................. 419 Body And Underbody Maintenance ............. 462
Additional Maintenance — B6 To B20 Exhaust System ............................................ 420 Preserving The Bodywork ............................. 462
Biodiesel ........................................................ 402 Cooling System ............................................. 421 INTERIORS ...........................................................464
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ....................................403 Charge Air Cooler — Inter-Cooler Seats And Fabric Parts ................................. 464
3.6L Engine With Stop/Start ........................ 403 (Diesel Engine) .............................................. 424 Plastic And Coated Parts .............................. 465
5.7L Engine Without Stop/Start................... 404 Brake System ............................................... 425 Leather Surfaces........................................... 465
5.7L Engine With Stop/Start ........................ 405 Automatic Transmission .............................. 426 Glass Surfaces ............................................. 465
3.0L Diesel Engine ........................................ 406 Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle
Checking Oil Level ......................................... 407 Fluid Level...................................................... 427
Adding Washer Fluid ..................................... 407 Transfer Case ................................................ 427
Maintenance-Free Battery ............................ 408 Fuses.............................................................. 427
Pressure Washing ......................................... 408 Bulb Replacement......................................... 438
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE ........ 469 WARRANTY INFORMATION................................479
Diesel Fuel Specifications ............................ 470 MOPAR® PARTS .................................................479
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN).........466
Biodiesel Fuel Requirements ....................... 470 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ..........................479
BRAKE SYSTEM ..................................................466
FLUID CAPACITIES .............................................. 472 In The 50 United States And
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS................... 473 Washington, D.C............................................ 479
SPECIFICATIONS..................................................466
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................ 476 In Canada ...................................................... 479
Torque Specifications ................................. 466
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ..........................480
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE GENERAL INFORMATION....................................480
ENGINE..................................................................467
3.6L Engine.................................................... 467 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
5.7L Engine.................................................... 467 FOR YOUR VEHICLE ........................................... 477
Reformulated Gasoline................................. 468 Prepare For The Appointment ...................... 477
Materials Added To Fuel ............................... 468 Prepare A List ................................................ 477
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ......................... 468 Be Reasonable With Requests..................... 477
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................................ 477
Vehicles.......................................................... 468 FCA US LLC Customer Center....................... 477
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ...... 468 FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center............... 477
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Mexico............................................................ 478
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline...................... 469 Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands................ 478
Fuel System Cautions ................................... 469 Customer Assistance For The Hearing
Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .................... 478
Service Contract ........................................... 478
10
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Ram vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers
differently from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version
of this vehicle was designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering,
transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with experience. When driving
off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial
and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision Ú page 230.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its
customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before
driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the
text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced
throughout the Owner's Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in
this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For
this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized
dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Ram vehicle best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care
about your satisfaction.
11
SYMBOLS KEY VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS

These statements are against operating The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body modifications or
WARNING! procedures that could result in a collision, bodily special equipment installed by van conversion/camper manufacturers/body 1
injury and/or death. builders. US residents refer to the Warranty Information, Section 2.1.C.
These statements are against procedures that Canadian residents refer to the “What Is Not Covered” section of the Warranty
CAUTION! Information. Such equipment includes video monitors, DVD/Blu-Ray™,
could result in damage to your vehicle.
heaters, stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and service on these
A suggestion which will improve installation, items, contact the applicable manufacturer.
NOTE: operation, and reliability. If not followed, may
result in damage. CONSUMER INFORMATION — TRUCK-CAMPER LOADING
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier
TIP: This information is provided in fulfillment of the requirement by the United
use of the product or functionality.
States Government, Department of Transportation, National Highway Traffic
PAGE REFERENCE Safety Administration, that “every manufacturer of trucks that are capable of
ARROW accommodating slide-in campers, manufactured on or after April 1, 1973 shall
Follow this reference for additional information on
provide... at the time of original purchase to the first person who purchases the
a particular feature.
truck”... information on Truck Camper Loading.
A slide-in camper document is provided in your vehicle’s glove compartment
FOOTNOTE that contains your Vehicle Identification Number, truck model, cargo weight
Supplementary and relevant information rating, and the forward/rearward limit of a camper. To obtain additional
pertaining to the topic. dimensional and technical specifications for your vehicle, please visit
https://www.ramtrucks.com.
Figure 1 illustrates the dimensions describing the forward and rearward limits
of the zone in which the Center of Gravity (CG) of a slide-in camper must be
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important located, to provide satisfactory vehicle handling and to prevent overload of the
information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings. front and rear axles.
Figure 2 illustrates a proper match between truck and camper.
12
NOTE:
The camper Center of Gravity falls within the specified zone.
A — Forward Limit of Camper CG

B — Rearward Limit of Camper CG
13
When the truck is used to carry a slide-in camper, the total cargo load of the
truck consists of the manufacturer’s camper weight figure, the weight of
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
installed additional camper equipment not included in the manufacturer’s Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
camper weight figure, the weight of camper cargo, and the weight of precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to 1
passengers in the camper. The total cargo load should not exceed the truck’s follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the definition of
cargo weight rating and the camper’s CG should fall within the truck’s each symbol Ú page 128.
recommended CG zone when installed. NOTE:
Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and
your vehicle. When the truck camper is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh the current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
front and rear wheels separately, to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads
should not exceed either of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR). The total of Red Warning Lights
the axle loads should not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
If weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to get the total weight Air Bag Warning Light
below the ratings. Ú page 128
NOTE:
These ratings are also provided on the vehicle certification label located on Battery Charge Warning Light
the driver’s side B-pillar. See Ú page 211 for more information. Ú page 129
For any additional instructions, please contact your conversion/camper
manufacturer or an authorized dealer. Brake Warning Light
Ú page 128
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING! Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 129
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious
injury or death.
14
Red Warning Lights Red Warning Lights
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
Ú page 129 Ú page 131
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light Vehicle Security Warning Light

Hood Open Warning Light

Ú page 130 Yellow Warning Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning Light

Oil Pressure Warning Light Ú page 131
Ú page 130
Air Suspension Fault Warning Light

Oil Temperature Warning Light Ú page 131
Ú page 130
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light

Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light Ú page 131
Ú page 130
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light

Tailgate Open Warning Light Ú page 133
Ú page 130
15
Yellow Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights
Electronic Park Brake Warning Light Service Stop/Start System Warning Light 1
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light Service 4WD Warning Light
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light Service LaneSense Warning Light
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL) Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light

Ú page 132 Yellow Indicator Lights
Air Suspension Payload Protection Indicator Light

Low Fuel Warning Light Ú page 134
Ú page 132
Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator Light

Rear Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light Ú page 134
Ú page 133
Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator Light

Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light Ú page 134
Ú page 133
16
Yellow Indicator Lights Yellow Indicator Lights
Air Suspension Normal Height Indicator Light Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Indicator Light
Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height Indicator Light NEUTRAL Indicator Light

Air Suspension Ride Height Raising Indicator Light Trailer Merge Assist Indicator Light
Air Suspension Ride Height Lowering Indicator Light TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
Cargo Light Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light

Entry/Exit Indicator Light 4WD Indicator Light

Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light 4WD Low Indicator Light
17
Yellow Indicator Lights Green Indicator Lights
4WD High Indicator Light ECO Mode Indicator Light 1

Wait To Start Light Indicator Light Front Fog Indicator Light

Water In Fuel Indicator Light LaneSense Indicator Light

Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light

Green Indicator Lights Ú page 136
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Light

Ú page 136 Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
Ú page 136
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected
Indicator Light Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light With A Premium Instrument
Cluster Display 4WD AUTO Indicator Light
18
White Indicator Lights White Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
Cruise Control Ready Indicator LaneSense Indicator Light

Cruise Control SET Indicator Light With Base/Midline Instrument

Cluster Display
Blue Indicator Lights
Ú page 137
High Beam Indicator Light
Ú page 137
19
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

KEYS NOTE:
 The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if
KEY F OB the key fob is located next to a mobile phone, 2
laptop, or other electronic device. This may
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which result in poor performance.
supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE), Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), remote  If your vehicle is equipped with a Wireless
air suspension lowering (if equipped), and Remote Charging Pad, the key fob may not be detected
Start (if equipped). The key fob allows you to lock if it is placed within 6 inches (15 cm) of the pad
or unlock all doors, tailgate, and the RamBox (if Ú page 79.
equipped) as well as activate the Panic Alarm from  With the ignition in the ON position and the
distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m). The vehicle moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE
key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle commands are disabled.
to activate the system. The key fob also contains
an emergency key, which is stored in the rear of the Key Fob
key fob.
1 — LED Indicator Light
2 — Unlock
3 — Tailgate Lowering (If Equipped)
4 — Air Suspension Remote Lowering
(If Equipped)
5 — Lock
6 — Remote Start (If Equipped)
7 — PANIC
8 — Emergency Key
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
In case the ignition switch does not change with Key Left Vehicle Feature The following conditions must be met for the
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or vehicle to lower remotely:
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the
fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be  The vehicle must not already be in Entry/Exit
vehicle while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the
verified by referring to the instrument cluster ride height.
ON/RUN or START position, the message “Key Left
display, which will display directions to follow.
Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument cluster  The vehicle battery must be fully charged.
NOTE: display along with an interior chime. An exterior
 All doors must be closed.
A low key fob battery condition may be indicated by audible and visual alert will also be activated to
a message in the instrument cluster display, or by warn the driver.  The key fob must be out of the vehicle.
the LED light on the key fob. If the LED key fob light The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times  Gear selector must be in PARK.
no longer illuminates from key fob button pushes, along with a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior
then the key fob battery requires replacement
NOTE:
lights. Ensure the vehicle is clear of all objects, pets, and
Ú page 480.
NOTE: people prior to remote lowering.
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Tailgate Canceling Remote Lowering
 The doors have to be open and then closed in
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob order for the vehicle to check for the presence of Vehicle lowering can be canceled at anytime.
once to unlock the driver’s door, or, twice within a key fob; the Key Left Vehicle feature will not When vehicle lowering is canceled, the vehicle will
five seconds to unlock all doors, the tailgate and activate until all of the doors are closed. raise to the next defined level and lock out the
the RamBox (if equipped). To lock all the doors and
 These alerts will not be activated in situations remote lowering feature for five seconds until a
the tailgate, push the lock button once.
where the vehicle’s engine is left running with new request is made.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will the key fob inside. To cancel vehicle lowering, push the key fob air
flash and the illuminated entry system will be
Air Suspension (Remote Lowering Of The suspension lowering button one time during the
activated. When the doors are locked, the turn
lowering process. When vehicle lowering is
signals will flash and the horn will chirp. Vehicle) — If Equipped
canceled, the horn will chirp two times and the turn
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first For easy entry and loading, your vehicle signal lamps will flash four times. Once raising is
push of the unlock button. The horn chirp when the can be lowered by pushing the key fob air completed, the horn will chirp one time.
lock button is pushed can be programmed on/off suspension lowering button two times.
When air suspension lowering is
NOTE:
within Uconnect Settings Ú page 234.
requested using the key fob, the vehicle will send a More information on air suspension is provided
series of chirps and flashes to alert the customer later in this manual, see Ú page 165.
that the operation has begun and will continue
these alerts until it successfully lowers.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob 4. Remove the battery by using your thumb to
slide the battery downward and back toward
The replacement battery model is one CR2450
the key ring.
battery.
NOTE:
 Customers are recommended to use a battery 2
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin
battery dimensions may not meet the original
OEM coin battery dimensions.
 Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard- Emergency Key Removal
ouswaste/perchlorate for further information.
1 — Emergency Key
 Do not touch the battery terminals that are on 2 — Emergency Key Release Button
the back housing or the printed circuit board. Key Fob Battery Location
 Do not replace the coin battery if the LED on the
2. Hold the key fob with the button side facing NOTE:
key fob above the top row buttons blinks when
down, and locate the small rectangular gap on When replacing the battery, ensure the (+) sign on
a button is pressed. The coin battery should last
the left side between the housing and the back the battery is facing upward. Avoid touching the
a minimum of three years with normal vehicle
cover of the key fob. Use a small screwdriver new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
usage.
(or similar tool) to pry open the left side of the battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean
1. Remove the emergency key (1) by pushing fob cover while applying pressure until the it with rubbing alcohol.
the emergency key release button (2) on the cover snaps open.
side of the key fob, and pulling the emergency
3. Next, locate the gap on the right side of the key
key out with your other hand.
fob, which is positioned further to the edge
than the left side gap. Pry open the right side,
and remove the back cover.
5. Replace the battery by using your thumb to

push down and slide the battery under the WARNING! WARNING!
small lip on the top edge of the opening.  The integrated key fob contains a coin cell  Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle
battery. Do not ingest the battery; there is a and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
chemical burn hazard. If the coin cell battery is unattended.
swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns
 Always remember to place the Keyless
in just two hours and can lead to death.
Enter ‘n Go Ignition™ in the OFF position.
 If you think a battery may have been swal-
lowed or placed inside any part of the body, Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
seek immediate medical attention. authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
 Keep new and used batteries away from programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
children. If the battery compartment does not electronics. A blank key fob is one that has never
close securely, stop using the product and been programmed.
Key Fob Battery Replacement keep it away from children. NOTE:
6. To assemble the key fob case, line up the top  When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
edge of the back cover with the top of the fob, Programming And Requesting Additional serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
and press the edges into the interlocking Key Fobs authorized dealer.
hinges until all edges snap together with no Programming the key fob may be performed by an  Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to
large visual gaps. authorized dealer. match the vehicle locks.
7. Reinsert the emergency key until it locks into NOTE:
place.
 Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
SENTRY KEY
NOTE: cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
The key fob battery should only be replaced by another vehicle. unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
qualified technicians. If the battery requires engine. The system does not need to be armed or
 Only key fobs that are programmed to the
replacement, see an authorized dealer. activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle The push button ignition can be placed in the
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to have been programmed to the vehicle electronics following modes:
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, Ú page 480. OFF
only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The IGNITION SWITCH  The engine is stopped
system cannot reprogram a key fob obtained from  Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks, 2
another vehicle. KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION alarm, etc.) are still available
After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position, This feature allows the driver to operate the ACC
the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three ignition switch with the push of a button as long as  Engine is not started
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on the key fob is in the passenger compartment.  Some electrical devices are available
after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a
problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light The START/STOP ignition button has several (e.g. power sunroof, power windows, etc.)
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates operating modes that are labeled and will ON/RUN
that someone attempted to start the engine with illuminate when in position. These modes are OFF,
 Driving position
an invalid key fob. In the event that a valid key fob ACC, ON/RUN, and START.
 All electrical devices are available (e.g. climate
is used to start the engine but there is an issue
controls, heated seats, etc.)
with the vehicle electronics, the engine will start
and shut off after two seconds. START
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal  The engine will start (when foot is on the brake)
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than NOTE:
10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the If the ignition switch does not change the mode by
electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle pushing the button, the key fob may have a low or
serviced as soon as possible by an authorized depleted battery. In this situation, a back up
dealer. method can be used to operate the ignition switch.
Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency
CAUTION! key) of the key fob against the START/STOP
Keyless Push Button Ignition
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not ignition button and push to operate the ignition
compatible with some aftermarket Remote Start 1 — OFF switch.
systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle 2 — ACC (Accessory)
starting problems and loss of security protection. 3 — ON/RUN
 For more information on normal engine starting,

WARNING! see Ú page 140.
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,  When opening the driver's door and the ignition
or in a location accessible to children, and do is in the ON/RUN position (engine not running),
not leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go Ignition™ in a chime will sound to remind you to place the
the ON/RUN position. A child could operate ignition in the OFF position. In addition to the
power windows, other controls, or move the chime, the message “Ignition or Accessory ON”
vehicle. will display in the cluster.
 Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
Back Up Starting Method may cause serious injury or death.
(GASOLINE)
WARNING! This system uses the key fob to start the
CAUTION! engine conveniently from outside the
 When exiting the vehicle, always remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. vehicle while still maintaining security.
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves.
The system has a range of approximately
Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with 328 ft (100 m).
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold
 Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended weather and to reach a comfortable climate in all
NOTE: ambient conditions before the customer enters
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.  The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle the vehicle.
Children should be warned not to touch the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ system if it is located next
to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic
NOTE:
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
selector. device; these devices may block the key fob’s
wireless signal and prevent the Keyless reduce this range Ú page 480.
(Continued)
Enter ‘n Go™ system from starting the vehicle.
 If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low,

WARNING! the vehicle will start and then shut down in WARNING!
 Do not start or run an engine in a closed 10 seconds.  Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains  The parking lights will turn on and remain on garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and during Remote Start mode. Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and
 For security, power window and power sunroof
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and 2
can cause serious injury or death when can cause serious injury or death when
operation (if equipped) are disabled when the
inhaled. inhaled.
vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
 Keep key fobs away from children. Operation  Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
 The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN posi-
of the Remote Start system, windows, door tion before the Remote Start sequence can be of the Remote Start system, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious repeated for a third cycle. locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death. injury or death.
All of the following conditions must be met before
the engine will remote start:
HOW TO U SE R EMOTE S TART  Gear selector in PARK TO EXIT R EMOTE START M ODE
Push and release the Remote Start button on the  Doors closed To drive the vehicle after a Remote Start, unlock
key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle the doors using the key fob or Passive Entry and
 Hood closed
doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and the disarm the Vehicle Security system (if equipped).
horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the  Hazard switch off Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in the  Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed) press the brake pedal and push and release the
Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle.  Battery at an acceptable charge level
START/STOP ignition button.
Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts  PANIC button not pushed
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if
the engine off. the Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed
 Fuel meets minimum requirement again, or if the engine is allowed to run for the
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button, and
place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.  System not disabled from previous Remote entire 15 minute cycle. Once the ignition is placed
Start event in the ON/RUN position, the climate controls will
NOTE: resume the previously set operations
 Vehicle Security system not active
 With Remote Start, the engine will only run for (temperature, blower control, etc.).
15 minutes.  Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illumi-
nated
 Remote Start can only be used twice.
NOTE: menu screen within Uconnect Settings NOTE:

 To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system Ú page 234. In warm weather, the driver vented These features will stay on through the duration of
will disable for two seconds after receiving a seat feature will automatically turn on when the Remote Start, or until the ignition is placed in the
valid Remote Start request. Remote Start is activated and is programmed in ON/RUN position. The climate control settings will
the comfort menu screen. The vehicle will adjust change, and exit the automatic defaults, if
 For vehicles equipped with the Keyless
the climate control settings depending on the manually adjusted by the driver while the vehicle is
Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry feature, the outside ambient temperature. in Remote Start mode. This includes turning the
message “Remote Start Active — Push Start
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — climate controls off using the OFF button.
Button” will display in the instrument cluster
display until you push the START/STOP ignition If Equipped REMOTE START WINDSHIELD W IPER
button. The climate controls automatically adjust to an
optimal temperature and mode, dependent on the
DE–ICER A CTIVATION — I F EQUIPPED
REMOTE START F RONT DEFROST outside ambient temperature. When the ignition is When Remote Start is active and the outside
ACTIVATION — IF E QUIPPED placed in the ON/RUN position, the climate ambient temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C),
controls will resume their previous settings. the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting
When Remote Start is active, and the outside
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped Remote Start will resume its previous operation. If
ambient temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was active, the timer
system will automatically activate front defrost for  In ambient temperatures of 40°F (4.5°C) or and operation will continue.
15 minutes or less. The time is dependent on the below, the climate settings will default to
ambient temperature. Once the timer expires, the maximum heat, with fresh air entering the REMOTE START ABORT M ESSAGE
system will automatically adjust the settings cabin. If the front defrost timer expires, the
depending on ambient conditions. See “Remote vehicle will enter Mix Mode. The following messages will display in the
Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in the next instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to
 In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to remote start, or exits Remote Start prematurely:
section for detailed operation.
78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be based
 Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
REMOTE START C OMFORT SYSTEMS — on the last settings selected by the driver.
 Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
I F EQUIPPED  In ambient temperatures of 78°F (26°C) or
above, the climate settings will default to MAX  Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear A/C, Bi-Level mode, with Recirculation on.  Remote Start Cancelled — Too Cold
defrost will automatically turn on in cold weather.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate  Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
The heated steering wheel and driver heated seat
control settings, see Ú page 62.
feature will turn on if programmed in the comfort  Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
The message will stay active until the ignition is To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button, and
placed in the ON/RUN position. place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. WARNING!
All of the following conditions must be met before  Do not start or run an engine in a closed
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL) the engine will remote start: garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
This system uses the key fob to start the  Gear selector in PARK
engine conveniently from outside the
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and 2
 Doors closed can cause serious injury or death when
vehicle while still maintaining security.
 Hood closed inhaled.
The system has a range of approximately
328 ft (100 m).  Hazard switch off  Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
NOTE:  Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed) of the Remote Start system, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious
 Obstructions between the vehicle and the key  Battery at an acceptable charge level injury or death.
fob may reduce this range.  PANIC button not pushed
 The Remote Start system will wait for the Wait  Fuel meets minimum requirement
To Start indicator light to extinguish before
 System not disabled from previous remote start
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
cranking the engine. This allows time for the The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle
engine pre-heat cycle to heat the cylinder air, event
doors, hood, tailgate, and the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
and is normal in cold weather. For further infor-  Vehicle Security system not active
Ignition for unauthorized operation. While the
mation on the Wait To Start indicator light and  Water In Fuel indicator light is not illuminated Vehicle Security system is armed, interior switches
the pre-heat cycle, see Ú page 135. for door locks and tailgate release are disabled. If
 Wait To Start indicator light is not illuminated
HOW TO U SE R EMOTE S TART  Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illumi-
something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security
system will provide the following audible and
Push and release the Remote Start button on the nated
visible signals:
key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle For additional functions of the Remote Start
 The horn will pulse.
doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and the system, see Ú page 25.
horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the  The turn signals will flash.
engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in the  The Vehicle Security Light, located in the upper
Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle. right corner of the instrument cluster display,
Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts will flash.
the engine off.
TO ARM THE SYSTEM  Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the
disarm the system. battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Security system will remain armed when the
system:
NOTE:
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash,
 The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
disarm the Vehicle Security system. Use of the Vehicle Security system.
the OFF position.
door key cylinder when the system is armed will
 For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry, sound the alarm when the door is opened. REARMING O F T HE SYSTEM
make sure the vehicle’s keyless ignition
 The Vehicle Security system remains armed If something triggers the alarm and no action is
system is OFF.
when the power tailgate (if equipped) is opened taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock using the tailgate button on the key fob. turn the horn off after a 29 second cycle (with five
the vehicle:
 If Passive Entry (if equipped) is used to unlock seconds between cycles and up to eight cycles if
 Push the lock button on the interior power the tailgate, the Vehicle Security system is the trigger remains active) and then rearm itself.
door lock switch with the driver and/or disarmed and the rest of the vehicle doors will
passenger door open. remain locked unless all doors are set to unlock SECURITY S YSTEM MANUAL O VERRIDE
 Push the lock button on the exterior Passive on first press within Uconnect Settings. The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock
Entry door handle with a valid key fob avail-  When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the the doors using the manual door lock.
able in the same exterior zone Ú page 30. interior power door lock switches will not unlock
 Push the lock button on the key fob. the doors. DOORS
3. If any doors are open, close them. The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect
your vehicle. However, you can create conditions MANUAL D OOR L OCKS
TO DISARM T HE S YSTEM where the system will give you a false alarm. If one The power door locks can be manually locked from
of the previously described arming sequences has inside the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using occurred, the Vehicle Security system will arm lock each door, push the door lock knob on each
any of the following methods: regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. door trim panel downward. To unlock the front
 Push the unlock button on the key fob. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the doors, pull the inside door handle to the first
alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle detent. To unlock the rear doors, pull the door lock
 Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock
Security system. knob on the door trim panel upward. If the lock
the door Ú page 30.
knob is down when the door is closed, the door will

WARNING! POWER D OOR L OCKS — IF EQUIPPED
lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not inside
the vehicle before closing the door.  For personal security and safety in the event The power door lock switches are located on each
of a collision, lock the vehicle doors before you front door panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock
NOTE: the doors.
Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the drive as well as when you park and leave the
Vehicle Security system. vehicle. 2
 When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the keyless ignition is in the OFF position,
remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock
your vehicle.
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the Power Door Lock Switches
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
Front Door Lock Knob The driver’s door will unlock automatically if the
selector.
keys are detected inside the vehicle when the door
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, lock button on the front door panel is used to lock
or in a location accessible to children, and do the door. This will occur for two attempts. Upon the
not leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in third attempt, the doors will lock even if the key is
the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could inside.
operate power windows, other controls, or NOTE:
move the vehicle. If the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device, the wireless
signal may get blocked, and the driver’s door may
not unlock automatically.
Rear Door Lock Knob

If the door lock switch is pushed while the ignition you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side
is in ACC or ON/RUN and the driver's door is open, having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons. With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
the doors will not lock. NOTE: (1.5 m) of the door handle, grab the handle to
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from  Passive Entry may be programmed on or off unlock the vehicle. Grabbing the driver’s door
inside the vehicle without first unlocking the door. within Uconnect Settings Ú page 234. handle will unlock the driver door automatically.
The door may be unlocked manually by raising the Grabbing the passenger door handle will unlock all
 The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
lock knob. doors and the tailgate automatically.
Passive Entry system if it is located next to a
POWER S IDE STEPS — I F EQUIPPED mobile phone, laptop, or other electronic device;
these devices may block the key fob’s wireless
The Power Side Steps will extend a step for easier signal and prevent the Passive Entry system
entry and exit of the vehicle. from locking/unlocking the vehicle.
When configured for “Auto” mode, the Power Side  Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated
Steps will deploy when any of the doors are approach (low beams, license plate lamp, posi-
opened, or when the deploy setting is activated tion lamps) for whichever time duration is set
through the touchscreen. When configured for between 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds. Passive Entry
“Store” mode, the steps will not deploy unless the Unlock also initiates two flashes of the turn
setting is selected manually through the “Controls” signal lamps.
menu within the touchscreen.
 If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/ Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
If the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h), or if snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the
the retract setting is selected within Uconnect unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a
NOTE:
Settings Ú page 234, the steps will retract. slower response time.  Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock
when you grab hold of the front driver’s door
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — PASSIVE  If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and
handle, depending on the selected setting in the
E NTRY no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
Uconnect system Ú page 234.
vehicle will relock and (if equipped) will arm the
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to Vehicle Security system.  All doors will unlock when the front passenger
the vehicle’s key fob and a feature of Keyless door handle is grabbed regardless of the
Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry. This feature allows driver’s door unlock preference setting.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key When any of these situations occur, after all open
(FOBIK-Safe) doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally executed. If it detects a Passive Entry key fob
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, inside the vehicle, the vehicle will unlock and alert
the Passive Entry system is equipped with an the customer.
automatic door unlock feature which will function if NOTE: 2
the ignition is in the OFF position. The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid
There are five situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the
search in any passive entry vehicle: vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors when
any of the following conditions are true:
 A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry
 The doors are manually locked using the door Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
key fob while a door is open.
lock knobs. NOTE:
 A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.  Three attempts are made to lock the doors DO NOT grab the door handle when pushing the
using the door panel switch and then the doors door handle lock button. This could unlock the
 A lock request is made by the door panel switch are closed. door(s).
while the door is open.
 There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the
 When the Vehicle Security system is in pre-arm vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of a Passive Entry
or armed status and the tailgate transitions door handle.
from opened to closed.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Tailgate
 When the tailgate transitions from open to
closed and remote start is active. With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either front door handle,
pushing the Passive Entry lock button will lock the
vehicle.
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking

NOTE: AUTOMATIC UNLOCK D OORS ON E XIT — CHILD-P ROTECTION DOOR LOCK

 After pushing the door handle button, you must I F E QUIPPED SYSTEM — R EAR DOORS
wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles To provide a safer environment for small children
handle. This is done to allow you to check if the with power door locks after the following sequence riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped
vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle of actions: with a Child-Protection Door Lock system.
without the vehicle unlocking. 1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat
 If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect enabled within the Uconnect system. blade screwdriver, and rotate the dial to the lock or
Settings, the key protection described in 2. All doors are closed. unlock position. When the system on a door is
"Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key engaged, that door can only be opened by using
3. The gear selector was not in PARK, then is the outside door handle even if the inside door lock
(FOBIK-Safe)" remains active/functional.
placed in PARK. is in the unlocked position.
 The Passive Entry system will not operate if the
4. Any door is opened.
key fob battery is depleted.
 The LED light on the key fob will not blink if AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS —
the key fob battery is low or fully depleted,
but a low key fob battery condition will still I F E QUIPPED
support the Passive Entry system function- The auto door lock feature default condition is
ality. When the key fob battery is low, the enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock
instrument cluster will display a message automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds
indicating that the key fob battery is low 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature is
Ú page 480. enabled/disabled in the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 234.
Child Lock Control
NOTE: NOTE:
 When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is Always use this device when carrying children.
engaged, the door can be opened only by using After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
the outside door handle even though the inside system on both rear doors, check for effective
door lock is in the unlocked position. engagement by trying to open a door with the
 After disengaging the Child-Protection Door
internal handle. Once the Child-Protection Door 2
Lock system is engaged, it is impossible to open
Lock system, always test the door from the
the doors from inside the vehicle. Before getting
inside to make certain it is in the unlocked posi-
out of the vehicle, be sure to check that there is
tion.
no one left inside.
 After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
system, always test the door from the inside to
make certain it is in the locked position.
STEERING WHEEL To unlock the steering column, push the control
 For emergency exit with the system engaged, TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering
pull up on the door lock knob (unlocked posi- column, move the steering wheel upward or
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the
tion), roll down the window, and open the door
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen steering column, pull the steering wheel outward
with the outside door handle.
or shorten the steering column. The tilt/ or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
telescoping lever is located on the steering column in position, push the control upward until
WARNING!
column, below the multifunction lever. fully engaged.
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a
collision. Remember that the rear doors cannot WARNING!
be opened from the inside door handle when the
Child Protection Door Locks are engaged. Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or
driving with the steering column unlocked, could
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
HEATED S TEERING WHEEL — WARNING!

NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each
I F EQUIPPED  Persons who are unable to feel pain to the can be linked to either memory position 1 or 2.
The steering wheel contains a heating skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, The driver memory settings switch is located on the
element that helps warm your hands in diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, driver door, next to the door handle, and consists
cold weather. The heated steering wheel alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical of three buttons:
has only one temperature setting. Once conditions must exercise care when using the
 The set (S) button, which is used to activate the
the heated steering wheel has been turned on, it steering wheel heater. It may cause burns
memory save function.
will stay on until the operator turns it off. The even at low temperatures, especially if used
heated steering wheel may not turn on when it is for long periods.  The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall
already warm. either of two saved memory profiles.
 Do not place anything on the steering wheel
The heated steering wheel button is located on the that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
center of the instrument panel below the radio or steering wheel covers of any type or mate-
screen, and within the Climate or Controls screen rial. This may cause the steering wheel heater
of the touchscreen. to overheat.
 Press the heated steering wheel button once to
turn the heating element on.
 Press the heated steering wheel button a
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
second time to turn the heating element off. This feature allows the driver to save up to two
different memory profiles for easy recall through a
NOTE: memory switch. Each memory profile saves
The engine must be running for the heated desired position settings for the following features: Memory Settings Switch
steering wheel to operate.
 Driver’s seat
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 26.  Easy Entry/Exit seat operation (if equipped)
 Adjustable pedals (if equipped)
 Side mirrors
PROGRAMMING T HE M EMORY FEATURE NOTE: To recall the memory settings for driver one or two,
Before programming your key fob you must select push the desired memory button number (1 or 2)
To create a new memory profile, perform the the “Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” feature or the unlock button on the key fob linked to the
following: through the Uconnect system Ú page 234. desired memory position.
NOTE: To program your key fob, perform the following: A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the
Saving a new memory profile will erase the 1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF memory buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. When 2
selected profile from memory. position. a recall is canceled, the driver seat will stop
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN moving. A delay of one second will occur before
2. Select a desired memory profile 1 or 2. another recall can be selected.
position (do not start the engine).
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., driver’s seat, outside mirrors,
release the set (S) button on the memory
switch.
SEATS
adjustable pedals (if equipped), and radio Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system
station presets). 4. Push and release button (1) or (2) accordingly.
of the vehicle.
“Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the
3. Push the set (S) button on the memory switch,
instrument cluster. WARNING!
and then push the desired memory button
(1 or 2) within five seconds. The instrument 5. Push and release the lock button on the
 It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
cluster display will display which memory key fob within 10 seconds.
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
position has been set. riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
NOTE:
Your key fob can be unlinked from your memory ously injured or killed.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in settings by pushing the set (S) button, followed by  Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a pushing the unlock button on the key fob within vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
memory profile. 10 seconds. seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
LINKING A ND U NLINKING T HE KEY F OB MEMORY POSITION R ECALL killed.
T O MEMORY NOTE:  Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in and using a seat belt properly.
Your key fob can be programmed to recall one of
PARK, a message will display in the instrument
two saved memory profiles.
cluster display.
MANUAL A DJUSTMENT (FRONT S EATS) — Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment

I F E QUIPPED The recline lever is located on the outboard side of
the seat. To recline the seat, lean forward slightly,
WARNING! lift the lever, lean back to the desired position and
release the lever. To return the seatback to its
 Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is normal upright position, lean forward and lift the
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat lever. Release the lever once the seatback is in the
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt upright position.
might not be adjusted properly and you could
be injured. Adjust the seat only while the
vehicle is parked. Manual Seat Adjustment Bar
 Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against slide the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar
your chest. In a collision you could slide under once you have reached the desired position. Then,
the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally using body pressure, move forward and rearward
injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have
is parked. latched.
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward WARNING!

Manual Recline Lever
Adjustment  Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could WARNING!
Both front seats are adjustable forward or
result in loss of control which could cause a
rearward. The manual seat adjustment handle is
collision and serious injury or death.  Do not stand or lean in front of the seat while
located under the seat cushion at the front edge of
actuating the handle. The seatback may swing
each seat.  Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
forward and hit you causing injury.
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
Serious injury or death could result from a  To avoid injury, place your hand on the seat-
poorly adjusted seat belt. back and actuate the handle, then position
the seatback in the desired position.
Front Bench Seat — If Equipped Reclining Rear Seats — If Equipped

The seat is divided into three segments. The The recliner handle is located on the front of the
outboard seat portions are each 40% of the total rear outboard seat cushions. To adjust the
width of the seat. If equipped, the back of the seatback, lift upward on the handle, and slide the
center portion (20%) easily folds down to provide seat bottom forward. The lower portion of the
an armrest/center storage compartment. seatback will tilt rearward. When you reach the 2
desired position, release the handle.
Center Portion Folded Forward
MANUAL A DJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS)

WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top
of the seatback. This could impair visibility or
Center Portion Of Front Bench Seat become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop
or collision. Rear Seat Recliner Handle Locations
NOTE:
This feature is not available if vehicle is equipped
with rear bench seat.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious injury
or death.
POWER ADJUSTMENT (F RONT SEATS) — Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward

WARNING!
I F EQUIPPED The seat can be adjusted both forward and
 Adjusting a seat while driving may be
rearward by using the power seat switch. The seat
Some models may be equipped with eight-way will move in the direction of the switch. Release the dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
power driver and passenger seats. The power seat switch when the desired position has been result in loss of control which could cause a
switches are located on the outboard side of the reached. collision and serious injury or death.
driver and passenger seat cushions. There are two
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down  Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
power seat switches that are used to control the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
movement of the seat cushion and the seatback. The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Serious injury or death could result from a
by using the power seat switch. The seat will move poorly adjusted seat belt.
in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.  Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down your chest. In a collision you could slide under
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up the seat belt, which could result in serious
or down using the power seat switch. The front of injury or death.
the seat cushion will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached. CAUTION!
Reclining The Seatback Do not place any article under a power seat or
Power Seat Switches The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward impede its ability to move as it may cause
1 — Power Seat Switch or rearward by using the power seat switch. damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
The seat will move in the direction of the switch. become limited if movement is stopped by an
2 — Power Seatback Switch
Release the switch when the desired position is obstruction in the seat’s path.
reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry
and Easy Exit positions are stored in each memory
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger This feature provides automatic driver’s seat
setting profile Ú page 34.
seats may also be equipped with a 2-way or a positioning to enhance driver mobility when
4-way power lumbar adjustment. The power entering and exiting the vehicle. NOTE:
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of The distance the driver’s seat moves depends on The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled or disabled
the power seat. Push the switch forward to where you have the driver’s seat positioned when through the programmable features in the 2
increase the lumbar support. Push the switch you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position. Uconnect system Ú page 234.
rearward to decrease the lumbar support. If
equipped with a 4-way adjustment, pushing  When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the HEATED S EATS — IF E QUIPPED
upward or downward on the switch will raise and OFF position, the driver’s seat will move about
lower the position of the support. 2.4 inches (6 cm) rearward if the driver’s seat WARNING!
position is greater than or equal to 2.7 inches
(6.77 cm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will  Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
return to its previously set position when you skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
place the ignition into the ACC or ON/RUN posi- diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
tion. alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical
condition must exercise care when using the
 When you remove the key fob from the ignition, seat heater. It may cause burns even at low
the driver’s seat will move to a position temperatures, especially if used for long
0.3 inches (0.77 cm) forward of the rear stop if periods of time.
the driver’s seat position is between 0.9 inches
and 2.7 inches (2.27 cm and 6.77 cm) forward  Do not place anything on the seat or seatback
of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previ- that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
Power Lumbar Switch ously set position when you place the ignition to or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to
the ACC or ON/RUN position. overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been over-
heated could cause serious burns due to the
 The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled
increased surface temperature of the seat.
when the driver’s seat position is less than
0.9 inches (2.27 cm) forward of the rear stop. At
this position, there is no benefit to the driver by
moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped VENTILATED S EATS — I F EQUIPPED
The heated seat control buttons are On some models, the two rear outboard
Front Ventilated Seats
located on the center stack below the seats may be equipped with heated
radio screen, or within the Uconnect seats. There are two heated seat The ventilated seat control buttons are
system. switches that allow the rear passengers located on the center stack below the
to operate the seats independently. The heated radio screen, or within the Uconnect
 Push the heated seat button once to turn the
seat switches for each heater are located on the system. The fans operate at three
HI setting on.
rear of the center console. speeds, HI, MED and LO.
 Push the heated seat button a second time to
You can choose from HI, MED, LO, or OFF heat  Press the ventilated seat button once to
turn the MED setting on.
settings. Indicator lights in each switch indicate the choose HI.
 Push the heated seat button a third time to turn level of heat in use.  Press the ventilated seat button a second time
the LO setting on.
 Push the heated seat button once to turn the to choose MED.
 Push the heated seat button a fourth time to HI setting on.  Press the ventilated seat button a third time to
turn the heating elements off.
 Push the heated seat button a second time to choose LO.
NOTE: turn the MED setting on.  Press the ventilated seat button a fourth time to
 Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt turn the ventilation off.
 Push the heated seat button a third time to turn
within two to five minutes. the LO setting on. NOTE:
 The engine must be running for the heated The engine must be running for the ventilated
 Push the heated seat button a fourth time to
seats to operate. turn the heating elements off. seats to operate.
 The level of heat selected will stay on until the For information on use with the Remote Start
NOTE:
operator changes it. system, see Ú page 26.
The level of heat selected will stay on until the
For information on use with the Remote Start operator changes it.
system, see Ú page 26.
Rear Ventilated Seats — If Equipped HEAD R ESTRAINTS Front Head Restraints

If equipped, the two outboard rear seats Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of Your vehicle is equipped with front four-way driver
will have ventilated seats. The rear injury by restricting head movement in the event of and passenger head restraints.
ventilated seat control switches are a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
located on the rear of the center console. so that the top of the head restraint is located head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
The fans operate at three speeds: HI, MED, and LO. the adjustment button, located at the base of the
2
above the top of your ear.
Push the ventilated seat buttons to toggle through head restraint, and push downward on the head
the speeds, or to turn the feature off. WARNING! restraint.
NOTE:  All occupants, including the driver, should not NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until The head restraints should only be removed by
seats to operate. the head restraints are placed in their proper qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck either of the head restraints require removal, see
PLASTIC GROCERY B AG RETAINERS injury in the event of a crash. an authorized dealer.
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag  Head restraints should never be adjusted
handles are attached to the underside of the rear while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
seat cushion. To access these hooks, lift the rear with the head restraints improperly adjusted
seat cushion upward. or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
NOTE:
Do not reverse the head restraints (making the
rear of the head restraint face forward) in an
attempt to gain additional clearance to the back of
your head. Head Restraint Adjustment Button Location
To adjust the head restraint forward, pull the top of NOTE:

the head restraint toward the front of the vehicle If your vehicle is equipped with a front bench seat,
as desired and release. To adjust the head the center head restraint is not adjustable or
restraint rearward, pull the top of the head removable.
restraint to the forward most position and release.
The head restraint will return to the rear most WARNING!
position.  All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
the head restraints are placed in their proper
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash. Release Button
 Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle WARNING!
with the head restraints improperly adjusted Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
or removed could cause serious injury or lowered position could result in serious injury or
death in the event of a collision. death in a collision. Always make sure the
outboard head restraints are in their upright
Upright Position Rear Head Restraints positions when the seat is to be occupied.
The outboard head restraints are non-adjustable,
but can be folded down for improved rearward The center head restraint is not adjustable or
visibility. Push the button on the outboard side of removable.
the head restraint to release. To return the head NOTE:
restraint to its upright position, push up on the The head restraints should only be removed by
head restraint until it locks back into place. qualified technicians, for service purposes only.
If any of the head restraints require removal, see
an authorized dealer.
For child restraint tethering, see Ú page 334.
Forward Adjustment
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION — If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar or in the
Apps menu of your 8.4-inch touchscreen, you have
GET S TARTED
IF EQUIPPED the Uconnect 5 NAV system. If not, you have a The VR button is used to activate/deactivate
Uconnect 5 with 8.4-inch display system. your Voice Recognition system.
I NTRODUCING V OICE RECOGNITION
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these 1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile
2
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice The basic Voice Commands below can be given at
device and feature compatibility and to find
Commands and tips you need to know to control any point while using your Uconnect system.
phone pairing instructions.
your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR) system. This Push the VR button or for the Uconnect 5/ 2. Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
system is only available on the Uconnect 3 With 5 NAV, say the vehicle’s Wake Up word, “Hey passenger conversations are examples of
5-inch Display, Uconnect 5 NAV With 8.4-inch Uconnect”. After the beep, say: noise that may impact recognition.
Display, and the Uconnect 5 NAV With 12-inch
 “Cancel” to stop a current voice session. 3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
Display.
 “Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice while facing straight ahead. The microphone is
Commands. located in the headliner and aimed at the
 “Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
driver.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice 4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you
Recognition system’s status. must first push either the VR or Phone button,
wait until after the beep, then say your Voice
NOTE: Command. You can also say the vehicle “Wake
On Uconnect 5 systems, the factory default Wake Up” word and state your command. Some
Up word is set to “Hey Uconnect” and can be repro- examples of “Wake Up” words include “Hey
grammed through the Uconnect Settings. Uconnect” or “Hey Ram”.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display

5. You can interrupt the help message or system ADDITIONAL I NFORMATION

prompts by pushing the VR or Phone button
and saying a Voice Command from the current © 2021 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
category. Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar
Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc. Ú page 480.
For Uconnect system support, call
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)
or visit DriveUconnect.com (US) or
DriveUconnect.ca (Canada). Adjustable Pedals Switch
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is
in REVERSE or when the Cruise Control system or
IF EQUIPPED Adaptive Cruise Control system is on. If there is an
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons attempt to adjust the pedals when the system is
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow locked out, the following messages will appear (on
1 — Push To Answer An Incoming Phone Call a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel vehicles equipped with an instrument cluster):
2 — For The Uconnect 5/5 NAV System Vehicles tilt and seat position. This feature allows the brake
and accelerator pedals to move toward or away  Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control
Equipped With Navigation: Push The Voice Recog- Engaged
from the driver to provide improved position with
nition Button To Begin Radio, Media, Navigation,
the steering wheel.  Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse
Climate, Start Or Answer A Phone Call, And Send
Or Receive A Text The adjustable pedal switch is located on the NOTE:
2 — For The Uconnect 5/5 NAV System Vehicles instrument panel, below the headlight switch.  Always adjust the pedals to a position that
Not Equipped With Navigation: Push The Phone allows full movement of the pedal.
Button To Answer An Incoming Phone Call  Further small adjustments may be necessary to
3 — Push The Hang-up Button To End A Call find the best possible seat/pedal position.
 For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory

Settings Ú page 34, you can use your key fob or
MIRRORS Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left,
the memory switch on the driver’s door trim I NSIDE REARVIEW M IRROR and right. The mirror should be adjusted to center
panel to return the adjustable pedals to
on the view through the rear window.
pre-programmed positions. Manual Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, glare from vehicles behind you.
2
WARNING! and right. The mirror should be adjusted to center
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is on the view through the rear window. NOTE:
moving. You could lose control and have an The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be
accident. Always adjust the pedals while the when the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the
reduced by moving the small control under the
vehicle is parked. driver’s rear view.
mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the
vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned on
the day position (toward the windshield). or off through the touchscreen.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable
pedals or impede its ability to move, as it may
cause damage to the pedal controls. Pedal
travel may become limited if movement is
stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable
pedal's path. Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
Adjusting Rearview Mirror never spray any cleaning solution directly onto
the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth
and wipe the mirror clean.
Digital Rearview Mirror — If Equipped Push the menu button next to the on/off control/ I LLUMINATED VANITY MIRROR
toggle to access the following mirror options:
The Digital Rearview Mirror provides a high To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down
definition, wide and unobstructed view of the road  Brightness
one of the visors and lift the cover.
behind while driving.  Tilt
Position the mirror in the regular Automatic  Pan (if equipped)
Dimming Mirror mode, then activate the Digital
Use the left and right buttons to scroll through
Rearview Mirror mode.
menu options.
To activate the Digital Rearview Mirror, pull the
When not in use, push the on/off forward toward
on/off control lever on the bottom of the mirror
the windshield to return the mirror to the regular
rearward toward the driver.
Automatic Dimming Mirror.
NOTE:
The Digital Rearview Mirror is not as effective
during nighttime driving in low light applications
due to low ambient light levels. In the event that it Lift Cover For Illuminated Mirror
provides the user with less than expected vision,
the mirror can be reverted to a normal reflective
Automatic Dimming Mirror by pushing the control/
toggle forward in the vehicle and putting the mirror
Digital Rearview Mirror
into Automatic Dimming Mirror mode.
1 — On/Off Control/Toggle
2 — Menu Button
3 — Left Scroll Button
4 — Right Scroll Button
“Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor — OUTSIDE MIRRORS Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
If Equipped The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the center All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for of the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve the either forward or rearward to resist damage. The
additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to optimal view. hinges have three detent positions:
block out the sun.  Full forward position
NOTE: 2
1. Fold down the sun visor. If your vehicle is equipped with puddle lamps  Full rearward position
2. Unclip the visor from the corner clip. under the outside mirrors, they can be turned off  Normal position
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window. through the Uconnect system Ú page 234.
CAUTION!
4. Extend the sun visor for additional sun WARNING!
blockage. It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside full rearward position to resist damage when
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away entering a car wash or a narrow location.
than they really are. Relying too much on side
convex mirrors could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside OUTSIDE AUTOMATIC DIMMING
mirror when judging the size or distance of a MIRRORS — IF E QUIPPED
vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
The driver’s outside mirror and if equipped, the
passenger’s outside mirror, will automatically dim
for glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is
controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror.
The mirrors will automatically adjust for headlight
“Slide-On-Rod” Extender glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
NOTE:
The sun visor can also be extended while the sun
visor is against the windshield for additional sun
blockage through the front of the vehicle.
POWER M IRRORS If the mirror does not fold automatically, check for
ice or dirt buildup at the pivot area, which can
The power mirror switch is located on the driver's cause excessive drag.
side door trim panel.
Power Mirror Movement

Power mirror preselected positions can be
controlled by the optional Driver Memory Settings
feature Ú page 34. Power Folding Mirror Switch
Power Mirror Controls
POWER F OLDING O UTSIDE M IRRORS Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
1 — Left Mirror Selection
FOR STANDARD AND TRAILER TOW — You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if
2 — Mirror Direction Control
3 — Right Mirror Selection
I F E QUIPPED the following occurs:
 The mirrors are accidentally blocked while
The power folding mirrors can be folded rearward
folding.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select and unfolded into the normal driving position.
 The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/
buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
unfolded (by hand or by pushing the power
adjust a mirror, push the mirror select button for between the power mirror switches L (left) and
folding mirror switch).
the mirror that you want to adjust. Using the mirror R (right). Push the switch once and the mirrors will
control switch, push on any of the four arrows for fold in, push the switch a second time and the  The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
the direction that you want the mirror to move. mirrors will return to the normal driving position.  The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving
If the mirror is manually folded after a powered speeds.
cycle, a potential extra button push is required to
get the mirrors back to the normal driving position.
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold A small blindspot mirror is located next to the main The outside mirrors will then return to the original
them by pushing the button (this may require mirror and can be adjusted manually. position when the vehicle is shifted out of
multiple attempts). This resets them to their REVERSE. If the vehicle is equipped with Driver
normal driving position. Memory Settings, this feature will be linked to the
programmable settings.
TRAILER TOWING MIRRORS —
NOTE: 2
I F EQUIPPED The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be
These mirrors are designed with an adjustable turned on and off using the Uconnect system
mirror head to provide a greater vision range when Ú page 234.
towing extra-wide loads. To change position
inboard or outboard, the mirror head should be UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
rotated (flipped in or out).
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED
Blindspot Mirror
HEATED M IRRORS — I F EQUIPPED

These mirrors are heated to melt frost or
ice. This feature will be activated
whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped) Ú page 62.
TILT SIDE MIRRORS IN REVERSE —
I F E QUIPPED
Trailer Towing Position This feature provides automatic outside mirror
HomeLink® Buttons
NOTE: positioning which will assist with the driver’s
Fold the trailer towing mirrors prior to entering an ground visibility. The outside mirrors will move
automated car wash. slightly downward from the present position
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE.
Use this QR code to access your programmed to the HomeLink® system. Make I DENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A
digital experience. sure your hand-held transmitter is programmed to
activate the device you are trying to program your R OLLING C ODE O R N ON-R OLLING C ODE
 HomeLink® replaces up to
three hand-held transmitters HomeLink® button to. DEVICE
that operate devices such as Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the Before programming a device to one of your
garage door openers, motor- garage before you begin programming. HomeLink® buttons, you must determine whether
ized gates, lighting, or home It is recommended that you erase all the channels the device has a rolling code or non-rolling code.
security systems. The HomeLink® unit is of your HomeLink® before you use it for the first Rolling Code Devices
powered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery. time.
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a
 The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the
overhead console or sunvisor designate the ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK® good indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically,
devices manufactured after 1995 have rolling
three different HomeLink® channels. C HANNELS codes. A device with a rolling code will also have a
 To operate HomeLink®, push and release any To erase the channels, follow this procedure: “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the
of the programmed HomeLink® buttons. These antenna is attached to the device. The button may
buttons will activate the devices they are 1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position. not be immediately visible when looking at the
programmed to with each press of the corre- device. The name and color of the button may vary
sponding HomeLink® button. 2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink® slightly by manufacturer.
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until
 The HomeLink® indicator light is located above NOTE:
the HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
the center button. The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button
NOTE: NOTE: you normally use to operate the device.
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security Erasing all channels should only be performed Non-rolling Code Devices
system is active Ú page 480. when programming HomeLink® for the first time. Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not
Do not erase channels when programming addi-
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING tional buttons.
have a rolling code. These devices will also not
have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
HOMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the Radio Frequency signal, it is
recommended that a new battery be placed in the
hand-held transmitter of the device that is being
PROGRAMMING H OMELINK® TO A plugged in before moving on to the rolling code/ Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
non-rolling code final steps.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER 1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink®
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps button and observe the HomeLink® indicator
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to NOTE: light. If the HomeLink® indicator light stays
activate your garage door opener motor, follow the on constantly, programming is complete.
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling
steps below:
code final step 2, after completing rolling code 2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to 2
NOTE: final step 1. confirm that the garage door opener motor
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this 1. At the garage door opener motor (in the operates. If the garage door opener motor
procedure. You do not need to erase all channels garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” does not operate, repeat the steps from the
when programming additional buttons. button. This can usually be found where the beginning.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN hanging antenna wire is attached to the
position. garage door opener motor. Firmly push and WARNING!
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 to release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
 Your motorized door or gate will open and
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the 2. Return to the vehicle and push the
close while you are programming the universal
HomeLink® button you wish to program, while programmed HomeLink® button three times
transmitter. Do not program the transmitter if
keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view. (holding the button for two seconds each
people or pets are in the path of the door or
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you time). If the garage door opener motor
gate.
want to program while you push and hold the operates, programming is complete.
garage door opener transmitter button you are 3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to  Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or
trying to replicate. confirm that the garage door opener motor confined area while programming the trans-
operates. If the garage door opener motor mitter. Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink® does not operate, repeat the final steps for the
rolling code procedure. colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly. when inhaled and can cause you and others to
Once this happens, release both buttons. be severely injured or killed.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is
PROGRAMMING H OMELINK® TO A 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
without starting the engine. cycling process to prevent possible overheating of
MISCELLANEOUS D EVICE the garage door or gate motor.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button
The procedure on how to program HomeLink® to a until the HomeLink® indicator light begins to 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
miscellaneous device follows the same procedure flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the NOTE:
as programming to a garage door opener button. For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™,
Ú page 51. Be sure to determine if the device has
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with place the ignition in the RUN position. Make sure
a rolling code, or non-rolling code before beginning
Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink® To A while programming HomeLink® with the engine on
the programming process.
Garage Door Opener” Ú page 51, and follow that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that
NOTE: all remaining steps. the garage door remains open at all times.
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require trans- 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches
mitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button
seconds of transmission, which may not be long
enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during
P ROGRAMMING you wish to program while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some For programming transmitters in Canada/United
U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the 3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink®
States that require the transmitter signals to
same manner. The procedure may need to be button while you push and release (cycle) your
“time-out” after several seconds of transmission:
performed multiple times to successfully pair the hand-held transmitter every two seconds until
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require HomeLink® has successfully accepted the
device to your HomeLink® buttons.
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after frequency signal. The indicator light will flash
REPROGRAMMING A S INGLE several seconds of transmission, which may not be slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal
HOMELINK® BUTTON during programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change
flash rates. When it changes, it is
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out
programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or
been previously trained, without erasing all the in the same manner.
longer in rare cases. The garage door may
channels, follow the procedure below. Be sure to open and close while you are programming.
determine whether the new device you want to
program the HomeLink® button to has a rolling
code, or non-rolling code.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® SECURITY If you have any problems, or require assistance,
button and observe the indicator light. please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or Internet at HomeLink.com for information or
NOTE: turn in your vehicle. assistance.
 If the indicator light stays on constantly,
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the
for 20 seconds until the indicator flashes. Note WARNING! 2
that all channels will be erased. Individual  Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
HomeLink® button is pushed.
channels cannot be erased. dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the
 To program the two remaining HomeLink®
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled garage while programming the transceiver.
buttons, repeat each step for each
when the Vehicle Security system is active. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels. TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS  Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the universal
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device If you are having trouble programming transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if
for programming, plug it back in at this time. HomeLink®, here are some of the most common people, pets or other objects are in the path of
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button solutions: the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with
(Canadian/Gate Operator)  Replace the battery in the garage door opener a garage door opener that has a “stop and
To reprogram a channel that has been previously hand-held transmitter. reverse” feature as required by Federal safety
trained, follow these steps:  Push the LEARN button on the garage door standards. This includes most garage door
opener to complete the training for a rolling opener models manufactured after 1982. Do
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. not use a garage door opener without these
code.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button safety features.
 Did you unplug the device for programming and
until the indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Do not release the button. remember to plug it back in?
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with

“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming”
Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS NOTE:

For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight
HEADLIGHT SWITCH switch clockwise from the parking lights and
instrument panel lights position to the first detent
The headlight switch is located on the left side of to turn on headlights, parking lights, and
the instrument panel. This switch controls the instrument panel lights. Rotate the headlight
operation of the headlights, parking lights, switch to the second detent for the AUTO position.
automatic headlights (if equipped), instrument
panel light dimming, cargo light/trailer spotter CAUTION!
lights (if equipped), and fog lights (if equipped).
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada) solvents, steel wool or other abrasive materials
to clean the lenses.
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Fog Switch
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
NOTE:
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control  Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight
and fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter
5 — Push Cargo Light Switch
and less susceptible to stone breakage than
glass lights. Plastic is not as scratch resistant as
NOTE: glass and therefore different lens cleaning
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a head- procedures must be followed.
Headlight Switch light switch without the OFF position. In order to  To minimize the possibility of scratching the
turn the exterior lights off, the headlight switch lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping
1 — Rotate Headlight Control must be rotated to AUTO position.
2 — Push Fog Light Switch with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is on,
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control the parking lights, taillights, license plate light and
5 — Push Cargo Light Switch instrument panel lights are also turned on. To turn
off the headlights, rotate the headlight switch back
to the O (off) position.
MULTIFUNCTION L EVER  On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights  Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
may deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of of the vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to
the steering column. that side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstruc-
the hazard warning lights are activated). tions on the windshield or camera lens will
HIGH/LOW B EAM SWITCH
cause the system to function improperly. 2
 If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Head-
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument lamp Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must
panel to switch the headlights to high beams. be re-aimed to ensure proper performance. See
Pulling the multifunction lever back will turn the a local authorized dealer.
Multifunction Lever low beams on.
 To opt out of the Advanced Auto High Beam
DAYTIME RUNNING L IGHTS (DRLS) AUTOMATIC HIGH B EAM HEADLAMP Sensitivity Control (default) and enter Reduced
High Beam Sensitivity Control (not recom-
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) come on CONTROL — I F EQUIPPED mended), toggle the high beam lever six full on/
whenever the engine is running, and the low The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control off cycles within 10 seconds of placing the igni-
beams are not on. The lights will remain on until system provides increased forward lighting at night tion in the ON position. The system will return to
the ignition is placed in the OFF or ACC position, or by automating high beam control through the use the default setting upon placing the ignition in
the parking brake is engaged. of a camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror the OFF position.
NOTE: or a windshield mounted camera. These cameras
FLASH-T O-P ASS
 For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime detect vehicle specific light and automatically
Running Lights will automatically deactivate switch from high beams to low beams until the You can signal another vehicle with your headlights
when the front fog lights are turned on. approaching vehicle is out of view. by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you.
NOTE: This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on,
 If allowed by law in the country in which the
and remain on, until the lever is released.
vehicle was purchased, the Daytime Running  The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
Lights can be turned on and off using the Ucon- can be turned on or off by selecting “ON” under
nect system Ú page 234. “Auto Dim High Beams” within your Uconnect
Settings Ú page 234, as well as turning the
headlight switch to the AUTO position.
AUTOMATIC H EADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS W ITH W IPERS HEADLIGHT DELAY

This system automatically turns the headlights on If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic To assist when exiting the vehicle, the headlight
or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the Headlights, it also has this delay feature will leave the headlights on for up to
system on, rotate the headlight switch to the AUTO customer-programmable feature. When your 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when the
position. headlights are in the automatic mode and the ignition is placed in the OFF position while the
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature engine is running, they will automatically turn on headlight switch is on, and then the headlight
is also on. This means the headlights will stay on when the wiper system is on. This feature is switch is cycled off. Headlight delay can be
for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition programmable through the Uconnect system cancelled by either turning the headlight switch on
into the OFF position. To turn the automatic Ú page 234. then off, or by placing the ignition in the ON
headlights off, turn the headlight switch out of the If your vehicle is equipped with the Rain Sensing position.
AUTO position. Wiper system Ú page 62, and it is activated, the NOTE:
NOTE: headlights will automatically turn on after the  This feature can be programmed through the
The engine must be running before the headlights wipers complete five wipe cycles within Uconnect system Ú page 234.
will turn on in the Automatic Mode. approximately one minute. They will turn off
 The headlight delay feature is automatically
approximately four minutes after the wipers
activated if the headlight switch is left in the
PARKING LIGHTS AND PANEL L IGHTS completely stop.
AUTO position when the ignition is placed in the
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel NOTE: OFF position.
lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To When your headlights come on during the daytime,
turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight the instrument panel lights will automatically dim LIGHTS-O N R EMINDER
switch back to the O (off) position. to the lower nighttime intensity.
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are
NOTE: left on after the ignition is placed in the OFF
For vehicles sold in Canada, the first headlight position, the vehicle will chime when the driver’s
switch position is the parking lights and instrument door is opened.
panel lights position (instead of the OFF position).
To turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight
switch to the AUTO position.
FOG LIGHTS — I F EQUIPPED The fog lights will operate only when the parking LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
lights are on or when the vehicle headlights are on
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking low beam. An indicator light located in the Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down,
lights or low beam headlights and push the fog instrument cluster will illuminate when the fog without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
light switch located within the headlight switch. lights are on. The fog lights will turn off when the signal will flash three times then automatically
Pushing the fog light switch a second time will turn turn off.
button is pushed a second time, when the 2
the front fog lights off. headlight switch is rotated to the O (off) position, or
the high beam is selected.
CARGO L IGHTS/TRAILER SPOTTER
If the fog lights are off, one of the fog lights will
LIGHTS/TRAILER HITCH L IGHT W ITH
illuminate depending on the direction in which the BED LIGHTS — I F EQUIPPED
vehicle is turning. This will provide increased
The cargo light, bed lights, trailer spotter lights, and
visibility while turning, depending on the angle of
trailer hitch light are turned on by pushing the
the steering wheel.
cargo light button located on the lower half of the
TURN SIGNALS headlight switch.
Move the multifunction lever up or down to

activate the turn signals. The arrows on each side
Fog Light Button of the instrument cluster flash to show proper
operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective
outside light bulb.
Cargo/Bed Lights Button On Headlight Switch
Fog Light Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)

When the vehicle is stationary, these lights can When these lights are activated using the button
also be turned on using the switch located just on the headlight switch the cargo lights, trailer
inside the pickup box, on the lower part of the bed spotter lights, and trailer hitch light will remain
light lens. A telltale will illuminate in the instrument illuminated when the vehicle transmission is in
cluster display when these lights are on. Pushing PARK, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE. The lights will turn
the switch a second time will turn the lights off. off when the vehicle transmission is placed in
DRIVE.
When the vehicle is placed in the REVERSE
position, the trailer hitch light will turn on
automatically. The trailer hitch light will turn off
Cargo/Bed Lights Button On Headlight Switch when the vehicle is placed in the DRIVE position.
(Vehicles Sold In Canada) NOTE:
The bed lights are not affected by gear selection.
NOTE:
For vehicles shipped to or sold in the states of
California or Mississippi, the cargo, bed, and mirror
Bed Light Switch (Without RamBox) spotter lights will not work while the vehicle is in
motion. In every other state, the cargo and mirror
The cargo light and bed lights (if equipped) will turn spotter lights will turn off when the vehicle is in
on for approximately 30 seconds when a key fob motion, but the bed light will remain on.
unlock button is pushed, as part of the Illuminated
Entry feature.
Cargo Lights
BATTERY SAVER Front Map/Reading Lights

Timers are set to both the interior and exterior The overhead console lights can also be operated
lights to protect the life of your vehicle’s battery. individually as reading lights by pushing the
corresponding buttons.
After 10 minutes, if the ignition is OFF and any door
is left open or the dimmer control is rotated all the 2
way up to the topmost position, the interior lights
will automatically turn off.
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is ON.
The headlights will automatically turn off after Front Courtesy/Reading Lights
eight minutes while the ignition is in the OFF 1 — Driver’s Reading Light On/Off Button
position. 2 — Dome Defeat Button
3 — Passenger’s Reading Light On/Off Button
INTERIOR LIGHTS Front Courtesy/Reading Lights 4 — Dome On Button
COURTESY LIGHTS 1 — Reading Light On/Off Buttons
Three types of rear courtesy/reading lights are
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the 2 — Dome Defeat Button
available for your vehicle.
doors are opened or the Dome ON button is 3 — Dome ON Button
pushed on the overhead console. If your vehicle is  Push button on/off
equipped with Remote Keyless Entry and the  Push lens on/off
unlock button is pushed on the key fob, the
 Push round puck lens on/off (if equipped with
courtesy and dome lights will turn on. When a door
Dual Pane Sunroof)
is open and the interior lights are on, and the Dome
Defeat button on the overhead console is pressed,
the interior lights will turn off.
NOTE: I LLUMINATED ENTRY

The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until the
switch is pushed a second time, so be sure they The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
have been turned off before exiting the vehicle. If key fob to unlock the doors or open any door.
the interior lights are left on after the ignition is This feature also turns on the approach lamps
turned off, they will automatically turn off after located beneath the outside mirrors (if equipped).
10 minutes. The lights will fade to off after approximately
Dimmer Controls 30 seconds, or they will immediately fade to off
The dimmer controls are inboard and adjacent to once the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN
the headlight switch located on the left side of the position from the OFF position.
instrument panel. Dimmer Controls (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only) The front courtesy overhead console and door
1 — Ambient Light Control courtesy lights will not turn off if the Dome ON
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control button on the overhead console is pushed. The
overhead and door courtesy lights will turn off after
10 minutes when the ignition is placed in the
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating OFF position to protect the battery.
the right dimmer control upward will increase the
The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
brightness of the instrument panel lights. Rotating
Dome Defeat button on the overhead console is
the left dimmer control will adjust the interior and
pushed.
ambient light levels when the headlights are on.
NOTE:
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with Illuminated
The dimming of the touchscreen is programmable
Dimmer Controls Approach lights under the outside mirrors, they will
through the Uconnect system Ú page 234.
also be turned off by pushing the Dome Defeat
1 — Ambient Light Control (If Equipped) button.
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The delay interval decreases as you rotate the
knob until it enters the low continual speed WARNING!
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located position. The delay can be regulated from a Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
on the multifunction lever on the left side of the maximum of about 18 seconds between cycles, to could lead to a collision. You might not see other
steering column. The front wipers are operated by a cycle every one second. The delay intervals will vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden
rotating a switch, located on the end of the lever. double in duration when the vehicle speed is icing of the windshield during freezing weather, 2
10 mph (16 km/h) or less. warm the windshield with the defroster before
Windshield Washers and during windshield washer use.
To use the windshield washer, push the washer
knob, located on the end of the multifunction lever, Mist
inward and hold. Washer fluid will be sprayed and When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray
the wiper will operate for two to three cycles after from a passing vehicle is needed, push the washer
the washer knob is released. knob, located on the end of the multifunction lever,
If the washer knob pushed while in the delay range, inward briefly and release. The wipers will cycle
the wiper will operate for several seconds after the one time and automatically shut off.
washer knob is released. It will then resume the NOTE:
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever intermittent interval previously selected. If the The mist feature does not activate the washer
washer knob is pushed while in the off position, the pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on
1 — Push End Inward wiper will turn on and cycle approximately three the windshield. The wash function must be used in
(Hold For Washer Or Short Press For Mist) times after the wash knob is released. order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
2 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer For information on wiper care and replacement,
system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture see Ú page 419.
WINDSHIELD WIPER O PERATION that meets or exceeds the temperature range of
your climate. This rating information can be found
Intermittent Wipers on most washer fluid containers.
The intermittent feature of this system was designed
for use when weather conditions make a single
wiping cycle, with a variable pause between cycles,
desirable. For maximum delay between cycles, rotate
the control knob upward to the first detent.
RAIN SENSING W IPERS — I F EQUIPPED The Rain Sensing system has protection features AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
for the wiper blades and arms, and will not operate
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the under the following conditions: DESCRIPTIONS AND F UNCTIONS
windshield and automatically activates the wipers.
 Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of
is first placed in the ON position, the Rain
four detent positions to activate this feature.
Sensing system will not operate until the wiper
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than
the multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is 3 mph (5 km/h), or the outside temperature is
the least sensitive, and wiper delay detent position greater than 32°F (0°C).
four is the most sensitive.
 Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
Wiper delay position three should be used for ignition is ON, and the automatic transmission
normal rain conditions. is in the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing
Positions one and two can be used if the driver system will not operate until the wiper switch is
desires less wiper sensitivity. Position four can be moved, vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph Uconnect 5 or 5 NAV With 8.4-inch Display Automatic
used if the driver desires more sensitivity. Place (5 km/h), or the gear selector is moved out of Temperature Controls
the wiper switch in the O (off) position when not the NEUTRAL position.
using the system.  Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
NOTE: equipped with a Remote Start system, Rain
 The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when
Sensing wipers are not operational when the
the wiper switch is in the low or high-speed posi- vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
tion.
 The Rain Sensing feature may not function prop-
CLIMATE CONTROLS
erly when ice, or dried salt water is present on The Climate Control system allows you to regulate
the windshield. the temperature, air flow, and direction of air
 Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or sili-
circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls are
cone may reduce Rain Sensing performance. located on the touchscreen, and on the sides of
Uconnect 5 NAV With 12-inch Display Automatic
the touchscreen or on the instrument panel below
 The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and the radio. Temperature Controls
off using the Uconnect system Ú page 234.
NOTE: outside conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or You can turn AUTO on in one of two ways:
Icons and descriptions can vary based upon high humidity are present. Recirculation can be  Press and release this button on the touch-
vehicle equipment. used in all modes. Recirculation may be screen.
MAX A/C Button unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed
out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on  Push the button on the faceplate.
Press and release the MAX A/C button on
the touchscreen to change the current
the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be Toggling this function will cause the system to 2
deselected manually without disturbing the mode switch between manual mode and automatic
setting to the coldest output of air. The control selection. Continuous use of the mode Ú page 67.
MAX A/C indicator illuminates when Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy
MAX A/C is on. Pressing the button again will cause Front Defrost Button
and window fogging may occur. Extended use of
the MAX A/C operation to exit. this mode is not recommended. Recirculation Press and release the Front Defrost
NOTE: mode may automatically adjust to optimize button on the touchscreen, or push and
customer experience for warming, cooling, release the button on the faceplate, to
 MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling
dehumidification, etc. change the current airflow setting to
performance. Defrost mode. The Front Defrost indicator
 The MAX A/C button is only available on the In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air comes
touchscreen. lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation from the windshield and side window demist
feature may be unavailable if conditions exist that outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the
A/C Button could create fogging on the inside of the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with
Press and release this button on the windshield. maximum temperature settings for best
touchscreen, or push the button on the
Auto Button windshield and side window defrosting and
faceplate to change the current setting. The defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode
A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is on. Set your desired temperature and press
AUTO. AUTO will achieve and maintain button, the climate system will return to the
Recirculation Button your desired temperature by previous setting.
Press and release this button on the automatically adjusting the blower speed
touchscreen, or push the button on the and air distribution. Air Conditioning (A/C) may be
faceplate, to change the system between active during AUTO operation to improve
Recirculation mode and outside air performance. AUTO mode is highly recommended
mode. The Recirculation indicator and the A/C for efficiency.
indicator illuminate when the Recirculation button
is pressed. Recirculation can be used when
Rear Defrost Button Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And SYNC Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost Down Buttons Press the SYNC button on the
button on the touchscreen, or push and These buttons provide the driver and passenger touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature
release the button on the faceplate, to with independent temperature control. on/off. The SYNC indicator illuminates
turn on the rear window defroster and the when SYNC is on. SYNC synchronizes the
Push the red button (or rotate knob if
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear passenger temperature setting with the driver
equipped) on the faceplate, press the red
Defrost indicator illuminates when the rear window temperature setting. Changing the passenger’s
button on the touchscreen, or press and
defroster is on. The rear window defroster temperature setting while in SYNC will
slide the temperature bar towards the
automatically turns off after 10 minutes. automatically exit this feature.
red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings. NOTE:
CAUTION! The SYNC button is only available on the touch-
Push the blue button (or rotate knob if
Failure to follow these cautions can cause screen.
equipped) on the faceplate, press the
damage to the heating elements: blue button on the touchscreen, or press Blower Control
 Use care when washing the inside of the rear and slide the temperature bar towards Blower Control regulates the amount of
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for air forced through the climate control
on the interior surface of the window. Use a cooler temperature settings. system. There are seven blower speeds
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping NOTE: available. Adjusting the blower will cause
parallel to the heating elements. Labels can automatic mode to switch to manual operation.
 The numbers within the temperature display will
be peeled off after soaking with warm water. The speeds can be selected using either the
only appear if the system is equipped with an
 Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
blower control knob on the faceplate or the
automatic climate control system.
abrasive window cleaners on the interior buttons on the touchscreen.
 Up and down buttons are only available on vehi-
surface of the window. Faceplate
cles equipped with a 12-inch display.
 Keep all objects a safe distance from the The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
window. control knob clockwise from the lowest blower
setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn
the blower control knob counterclockwise.
Touchscreen NOTE: MANUAL C LIMATE C ONTROL

Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets
DESCRIPTIONS AND F UNCTIONS
setting and the large blower icon to increase the
blower setting. Blower can also be selected by and warmer air from the floor outlets.
pressing the blower bar area between the icons. Floor Mode
Mode Control Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
2
Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode amount of air is directed through the
buttons on the touchscreen, or pushing defrost and side window demister
the Mode button on the faceplate, to outlets.
change the airflow distribution mode. Mix Mode
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so Air is directed through the floor, defrost,
air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor and side window demister outlets. This
outlets, defrost outlets, and demist outlets. setting works best in cold or snowy
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Manual
Panel Mode conditions that require extra heat to the
Temperature Controls
Air comes from the outlets in the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
instrument panel. Each of these outlets comfort while reducing moisture on the MAX A/C Setting
can be individually adjusted to direct the windshield.
Set the temperature control knob to the
flow of air. The air vanes of the center Climate Control OFF Button MAX A/C setting to change the current
outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and Press and release the OFF button on the setting to the coldest output of air.
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. touchscreen, or push the OFF button on Moving the temperature control knob
There is a shut-off wheel located below the air the faceplate (if equipped) to turn the away from the MAX A/C setting causes the
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow Climate Control on/off. MAX A/C operation to exit.
from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
A/C Button fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C The rear window defroster automatically turns off
can be deselected manually without disturbing the after 10 minutes.
Push the A/C button to engage the Air
mode control selection. Continuous use of the
Conditioning (A/C). The A/C indicator
Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy CAUTION!
illuminates when A/C is on.
and window fogging may occur. Extended use of
NOTE: Failure to follow these cautions can cause
this mode is not recommended.
damage to the heating elements:
 For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in On systems with Manual Climate Controls, the
Mix, Floor or Defrost mode, the A/C can be  Use care when washing the inside of the rear
Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode
turned off, but the A/C system shall remain to improve window cleaning operation. window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners
active to prevent fogging of the windows. Recirculation is disabled automatically if this mode on the interior surface of the window. Use a
is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping
 If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side
in this mode causes the LED in the control button parallel to the heating elements. Labels can
glass, select Defrost mode, and increase blower
to blink and then turn off. be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
speed if needed.
 Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
 If your air conditioning performance seems Front Defrost Setting
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C abrasive window cleaners on the interior
Turn the mode control knob to the Front surface of the window.
condenser (located in front of the radiator), for
Defrost mode setting. Air comes from the
an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a  Keep all objects a safe distance from the
windshield and side window demist
gentle water spray from the front of the radiator window.
outlets. When the defrost button is
and through the condenser.
selected, the blower level may increase. Use
Recirculation Button Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings Temperature Control
Push the Recirculation button to change for best windshield and side window defrosting
and defogging. Temperature Control regulates the temperature of
the system between recirculation mode the air forced through the climate system.
and outside air mode. The Recirculation Rear Defrost Button
indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate The temperature increases as you
Push and release the Rear Defrost turn the temperature control knob
when the Recirculation button is pressed.
Control button to turn on the rear window clockwise.
Recirculation can be used when outside
defroster and the heated outside mirrors
conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or The temperature decreases as you
(if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator
humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in turn the temperature control knob
illuminates when the rear window defroster is on.
all modes except for Defrost. Recirculation may be counterclockwise.
unavailable if conditions exist that could create
Blower Control Bi-Level Mode AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE C ONTROL

Blower Control regulates the amount of Air comes from the instrument panel (ATC) — I F EQUIPPED
air forced through the climate control outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
system. There are seven blower speeds of air is directed through the defrost and Automatic Operation
available. The blower speed increases as side window demister outlets. 1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the
you turn the blower control knob clockwise from NOTE: AUTO button on the touchscreen on the 2
the lowest blower setting. The blower speed Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi- Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
decreases as you turn the blower control knob tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets 2. Next, adjust the temperature that you would
counterclockwise. and warmer air from the floor outlets. like the system to maintain by adjusting the
Mode Control Floor Mode driver and passenger temperature control
Turn the mode control knob or press the buttons. Once the desired temperature is
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
mode control button (if equipped) to displayed, the system will achieve and
amount of air is directed through the
adjust airflow distribution. The airflow automatically maintain that temperature.
defrost and side window demister
distribution mode can be adjusted so air outlets. 3. When the system is set up for your comfort
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor level, it is not necessary to change the
outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets. Mix Mode settings. You will experience the greatest
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, efficiency by simply allowing the system to
Panel Mode
and side window demister outlets. This function automatically.
Air comes from the outlets in the setting works best in cold or snowy
instrument panel. Each of these outlets conditions that require extra heat to the NOTE:
can be individually adjusted to direct the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining  It is not necessary to move the temperature
flow of air. The air vanes of the center comfort while reducing moisture on the settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and windshield. automatically adjusts the temperature, mode,
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly
There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
as possible.
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.  The temperature can be displayed in US or
Metric units by selecting the US/Metric
customer-programmable feature within Ucon-
nect Settings Ú page 234.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the OPERATING T IPS Window Fogging
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the blower
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild,
fan will remain on low until the engine warms up.
suggested control settings for various weather rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
The blower will increase in speed and transition
conditions. windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase
into Auto mode.
the front blower speed. Do not use the
Manual Operation Override Summer Operation Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods,
This system offers a full complement of manual The engine cooling system must be protected with as fogging may occur.
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper Outside Air Intake
ATC display will be turned off when the system is corrosion protection and to protect against engine
overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of
being used in the manual mode.
MS.90032) is recommended. the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as
CLIMATE VOICE R ECOGNITION — leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may
Winter Operation reduce airflow, and if they enter the air distribution
I F EQUIPPED To ensure the best possible heater and defroster box, they could plug the water drains. In Winter
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep performance, make sure the engine cooling months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
everyone comfortable while you keep moving system is functioning properly and the proper slush, and snow.
ahead. amount, type, and concentration of coolant is Cabin Air Filter
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during
Winter months is not recommended, because it The Climate Control system filters out dust and
beep, say one of the following commands: pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to
may cause window fogging.
 “Set driver temperature to 70 degrees” service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced
Vacation/Storage when needed.
 “Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
For information on maintaining the Climate Control Stop/Start System — If Equipped
Did you know: Voice Command for Climate may system when the vehicle is being stored for an
only be used to adjust the interior temperature of extended period of time, see Ú page 461. While in an Autostop, the Climate Control system
your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to may automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin
adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if comfort. Customer settings will be maintained
equipped. upon return to an engine running condition.
Operating Tips Chart INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT If equipped with a covered upper glove
compartment, push the release button to open.
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS STORAGE To open the lower glove compartment, pull the
Set the mode control to release handle.
Glove Compartment
(Panel Mode), (A/C) on,
Hot Weather The glove compartment is located on the WARNING! 2
And Vehicle and blower on high. Roll down
passenger side of the instrument panel and
Interior Is the windows for a minute to Do not operate this vehicle with a glove
features both an upper and lower storage area.
Very Hot flush out the hot air. Adjust compartment in the open position. Driving with
the controls as needed to the glove compartment open may result in injury
achieve comfort. in a collision.
Turn (A/C) on and set the
Warm Weather mode control to (Panel Door Storage — If Equipped
Mode). Front Door Storage
Cool Sunny Operate in (Bi-Level Mode). Storage areas are located in the door trim panels.
Rear Door Storage
Set the mode control to
Cool & Humid Storage areas are located in the door trim panels.
(Floor Mode) and turn
Conditions (A/C) on to keep Glove Compartment
windows clear.
1 — Upper Glove Compartment Release Button
Set the mode control to
(If Equipped)
(Floor Mode). If windshield
Cold Weather 2 — Upper Glove Compartment
fogging starts to occur, move
3 — Lower Glove Compartment
the control to (Mix Mode).
Center Storage Compartment —

WARNING!
If Equipped
 In a collision, the latch may open if the total
The center storage compartment is located
weight of the items stored exceeds about
between the driver and passenger seats. The
10 lb (4.5 kg). These items could be thrown
storage compartment provides an armrest and
about endangering occupants of the vehicle.
contains both an upper and lower storage area.
Items stored should not exceed a total of
10 lb (4.5 kg).
Pull on the upper handle on the front of the

armrest to raise the cover. The upper storage area Upper Storage USB Outlet
contains a USB power outlet that can be used to
With the upper lid closed, pull on the lower handle
power small electrical devices.
to open the lower storage bin. The lower bin
contains a power inverter. There is also a “fill line”
located along the rear inside wall of the lower bin.
Contents above the “fill line” may interfere with
cupholder placement if equipped with a premium
Center Storage Compartment center console.
WARNING!
 This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated on
the armrest could be seriously injured during
vehicle operation, or a collision.
(Continued) Center Storage Compartment
1 — Upper Console Handle
2 — Lower Console Handle
Premium Center Console — If Equipped

The premium center console is equipped with two
front storage bins located in front of the center
storage compartment. These storage bins may be
equipped with tandem doors. Push the front bin to
access the cupholders. Or push the rear bin to 2
access the coin holder/small storage bin.
Forward Portion Of Lower Storage Bin Tandem Doors Open Position

1 — Wireless Charging Pad 1 — Front Bin Open
2 — Power Inverter 2 — Rear Bin Open
3 — Storage Area
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console Center Console Tandem Doors— If Equipped
compartment lid in the open position. Driving 1 — Push Front Bin Access
with the console compartment lid open may
2 — Push Rear Bin Access
result in injury in a collision.
Push the release button at the front of the Overhead Sunglass Storage
cupholder bin to slide tray rearward to access the
At the front of the overhead console, a
front lower storage bin, or forward to access the
compartment is provided for the storage of one
rear lower storage bin.
pair of sunglasses.
From the closed position, push the door latch to
open the compartment.
Front Bench Seat Storage

With the seatback in the upright position, lift the
center seat bottom to access additional storage
underneath the seat.
Push Release Button To Slide Tray
Overhead Sunglass Door
Front Bench Seat Storage — If Equipped

If your vehicle is equipped with a front bench seat,
storage can be found by folding down the center
seatback. A console storage area and cupholders
are available.
Below Seat Bottom Storage

There is a storage drawer located in the lower Second Row In-Floor Storage Bin —
center of the instrument panel (if equipped). It can If Equipped
be released by pushing the access button above it.
Pull drawer outward to the fully open position. In-floor storage bins are located in front of the
second row seats and can be used for extra
storage. The storage bins have removable liners
that can be easily removed for cleaning. 2
To open the in-floor storage bin, lift upward on the
handle of the latch and open the lid.
Rear Console Latch Location
Seatback Storage
Located in the back of both the driver and
passenger front seats are pockets that can be
Storage Drawer Access Button used for storage.
Rear Console Storage — If Equipped
The center portion of the 40/20/40 rear seat will
fold forward for rear seat cupholders and a storage
compartment. Lift up on the console latch to In-Floor Storage Bin Latch
access the storage compartment.
Seatback Storage
NOTE: NOTE: Flip the inside of the base upward into the upright
The front seat may have to be moved forward to The maximum load limit for each hook is 250 lb position, locking into place, creating and extended
fully open the lid. (113 kg). storage area.
Storage Under Rear Seat — If Equipped
To access the storage under the rear seats,
unlatch the lock mechanism in the center of the
seat base by rotating it to either side, and fold the
front of the seat base forward.
Opened Storage Bin Fully Extended Storage Area

Each storage bin also contains two hooks for NOTE:
securing cargo. These hooks should be used to The rear seats do not need to be folded up to
secure loads safely when the vehicle is moving. access this feature.
Folding Down Front Of Seat Base

1 — Lock Mechanism
2 — Front Of Seat Base
In-Floor Storage Bin Hooks

USB/AUX C ONTROL A third and fourth USB ports are located behind the
center console, above the power inverter. Both are
Located on the center stack, just below the charge only.
instrument panel, is the main media hub. There
Applicable to only Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 8.4-inch
are four total USB ports: Two Mini-USBs (Type C)
Display, and Uconnect 5 NAV With 12-inch Display
and two Standard USBs (Type A). There is also an
radios, different scenarios are listed below when a 2
AUX port located in the middle of the USB ports.
non-phone device is plugged into the smaller and
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port may larger USB ports, and when a phone device is
activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay® plugged into the smaller and larger USB ports:
features, if equipped. For further information, refer
 “A new device is now connected. Previous
to “Android Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in the Center Stack USB/AUX Media Hub connection was lost”.
Owner’s Manual Supplement.
1 — Standard USB Type A Port #1  “(Phone Name) now connected. Previous
NOTE:
2 — AUX Port connection was lost”.
Two devices can be plugged in at the same time,
and both ports will provide charging capabilities. 3 — Standard USB Type A Port #2  “Another device is in use through the same USB
Only one port can transfer data to the system at a port. Please disconnect the first device to use
time. A pop-up will appear and allow you to select the second device”.
the device transferring data. NOTE:
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only
USB port and another device is plugged into the USB ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into
Type C USB port, a message will appear and allow a Media USB port, a message will display on the
you to select which device to use. touchscreen that the device is not supported by
the system.
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may
cause the connection to a previous device to be
lost.
Rear USB Ports If equipped, your vehicle may also contain a USB
port located on the top tray of the vehicle’s center
1 — Rear Charge Only USB Ports 1
console.
2 — Rear Charge Only USB Ports 2
If equipped, two Mini-USB ports (Type C), two For further information, refer to the Uconnect
Standard USB ports (Type A), and one AUX port Owner’s Manual Supplement or visit CAUTION!
may be located to the left of the center stack, just UconnectPhone.com.  Power outlets are designed for accessory
below the climate controls. plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
ELECTRICAL P OWER OUTLETS the power outlets as this will damage the
The auxiliary 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet can outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the
provide power for in-cab accessories designed for power outlet can cause damage not covered
use with the standard “cigarette lighter” style plug. by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The 12 Volt power outlets and 5 Volt (2.5 Amp) USB
Port (Charge Only) have a cap attached to the An auxiliary power outlet can be found in the tray
outlet indicating “12V DC”, together with either a on top of the center stack. This power outlet only
key symbol, battery symbol, or USB symbol. works when the ignition is in the ON/RUN or ACC
A key symbol indicates that the ignition must be in position.
the ON/RUN or ACC positions for the outlet to
provide power. The battery symbol indicates that
Center Console USB/AUX Media Hub the outlet is connected to the battery, and can
1 — Standard USB Type A Ports provide power at all times.
2 — Mini-USB Type C Ports
CAUTION!
3 — AUX Port
 Do not exceed the maximum power of
160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the
Some USB ports support media and charging. You
160 Watts (13 Amps) power rating is
can use features, such as Apple CarPlay®, Android
exceeded, the fuse protecting the system will
Auto™, Pandora®, and others while charging your
need to be replaced.
phone. Power Outlet — Top Of Center Stack
(Continued)
NOTE:
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may
cause the connection to a previous device to be
lost.
The auxiliary power outlet can be changed to battery

powered at all times by switching the power outlet WARNING! CAUTION!
fuses in the Internal Power Distribution Center To avoid serious injury or death:  After the use of high power draw accessories,
located under the driver’s side instrument panel. or long periods of the vehicle not being started
 Only devices designed for use in this type of
(with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
must be driven a sufficient length of time to 2
allow the generator to recharge the vehicle's
 Do not touch with wet hands. battery.
 Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle. POWER I NVERTER — IF E QUIPPED
 If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an A 115 Volt (400 Watts Maximum) inverter may be
electric shock and failure. located inside the center console towards the right
hand side. This inverter can power cellular phones,
electronics and other low power devices requiring
Power Outlet Fuse Locations CAUTION! power up to 400 Watts. Certain video game
 Many accessories that can be plugged in draw consoles exceed this power limit, as will most
1 — F54 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Battery
power from the vehicle's battery, even when power tools.
Fed Position
2 — F54 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Ignition not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventu-
ally, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's
Fed Position
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
3 — F48 Fuse 10 A Red Port Power or Rear USB battery life and/or prevent the engine from
(Charge Only) starting.
 Accessories that draw higher power
When the vehicle is turned off, be sure to unplug (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.),
any equipment as to not drain the battery of the will discharge the battery even more quickly.
vehicle. All accessories connected to the outlet(s) Only use these intermittently and with greater
should be removed or turned off when the vehicle caution.
is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge. (Continued) Center Console Power Inverter Outlet
There is also a second 115 Volt (400 Watts If equipped with a front bench seat, there may be NOTE:
Maximum) power inverter located on the rear of a 115 Volt (400 Watts Maximum) inverter located  The Center Stack Power Inverter is only avail-
the center console. This inverter can power cellular to the right of the center stack, just below the able on vehicles equipped with a front bench
phones, electronics and other low power devices climate controls. This inverter can power cellular seat.
requiring power up to 400 Watts. Certain video phones, electronics and other low power devices
 The power inverter only turns on if the ignition is
game consoles exceed this power limit, as will requiring power up to 400 Watts. Certain video
most power tools. game consoles exceed this power limit, as will in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
most power tools.  Due to built-in overload protection, the power
All power inverters are designed with built-in
overload protection. If the power rating of inverter shuts down if the power rating is
400 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter shuts exceeded.
down. Once the electrical device has been
WARNING!
removed from the outlet the inverter should reset.
To avoid serious injury or death:
 Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
 Do not touch with wet hands.

 Close the lid when not in use.
 If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
Center Stack Power Inverter electric shock and failure.
To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in the
device. The outlet turns off when the device is
unplugged.
Rear Center Console Power Inverter Outlet
NOTE:
400 Watts is the maximum for the inverter, not
each outlet. If three outlets are in use, 400 Watts
is shared amongst the devices plugged in.
WIRELESS C HARGING PAD — The wireless charging pad is equipped with an

anti-slip mat, a cradle to hold your mobile phone in
WINDOWS
I F EQUIPPED place, and an LED indicator light. POWER W INDOWS
LED Indicator Status:
The window controls on the driver's door control all
NOTE: the door windows.
Using a phone case may interfere with wireless
2
charging.
 No Light: Charging pad is idle or searching for a
device.
 Blue Light: Device is detected, and is charging.
 Red Light/Flashing: Internal error, or foreign
object is detected.
Wireless Charging Pad NOTE:
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN or START
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15W 3A Qi
position and all vehicle doors must be closed for
wireless charging pad located inside of the center
the wireless charging pad to operate. Power Window Switches
console. This charging pad is designed to
wirelessly charge your Qi enabled mobile phone. CAUTION! The passenger door windows can also be operated
Qi is a standard that allows wireless charging of by using the single window controls on the
your mobile phone. The key fob should not be placed on the passenger door trim panel. The window controls
charging pad or within 6 inches (15 cm) of it. will operate only when the ignition is in the ACC or
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi
Doing so can cause excessive heat buildup and ON/RUN position.
wireless charging. If the phone is not equipped
damage to the fob. Placing the fob in close
with Qi wireless charging functionality, an To open the window part way (manually), push the
proximity of the charging pad blocks the fob from
aftermarket sleeve or a specialized back plate can window switch down briefly and release.
being detected by the vehicle and prevents the
be purchased from your mobile phone provider or
vehicle from starting.
a local electronics retailer. Please see your
phone’s owner’s manual for further information.
NOTE: To stop the window from going all the way down
The power window switches will remain active for during the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push WARNING!
up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the down on the switch briefly. There is no anti-pinch protection when the
OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection window is almost closed. To avoid personal
this feature. The time is programmable within injury be sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers
Lift the window switch up for a short period of time
Uconnect Settings Ú page 234. and all objects from the window path before
and release; the window will go up automatically.
closing.
WARNING! To stop the window from going all the way up
during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle. Do RESET AUTO-U P
switch briefly.
not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in
a location accessible to children, and do not To close the window part way, lift the window Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the switch briefly and release it when you want the window probably needs to be reset. To reset
ACC or ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly window to stop. Auto-Up:
unattended children, can become entrapped by If the window runs into any obstacle during 1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
the windows while operating the power window auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then go completely and continue to hold the switch up
switches. Such entrapment may result in serious back down. Remove the obstacle and use the for an additional two seconds after the
injury or death. window switch again to close the window. window is closed.
NOTE: 2. Push the window switch down firmly to open
AUTOMATIC WINDOW FEATURES Any impact due to rough road conditions may the window completely and continue to hold
trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly the switch down for an additional two seconds
Auto-Down Feature during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the switch after the window is fully open.
The driver and front passenger door power window lightly and hold to close the window manually.
switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the
window switch down for a short period of time,
then release, and the window will go down
automatically.
WINDOW L OCKOUT SWITCH POWER S LIDING REAR WINDOW — MANUAL S LIDING REAR WINDOW —
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim IF E QUIPPED I F E QUIPPED
panel allows you to disable the window controls on The switch for the power sliding rear window is A locking device in the center of the window helps
the rear passenger doors. To disable the window located on the overhead console. Push the switch to prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle.
controls, push and release the window lockout rearward to open the glass. Pull the switch forward Squeeze the lock to release the window. 2
button (the indicator light on the button will turn to close the glass.
on). To enable the window controls, push and
release the window lockout button again
(the indicator light on the button will turn off).
Manual Rear Window Lock

Rear Window Switch
WIND B UFFETING
Window Lockout Switch Wind buffeting can be described as the perception
of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in
the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting
with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped)
in certain open or partially open positions. This is a
normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the
buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open
the front and rear windows together to minimize the
buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof
open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED WARNING!

Opening And Closing The Sunroof
Express Open/Close
SINGLE P ANE POWER S UNROOF —  Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
Push the switch rearward and release it within
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never
I F EQUIPPED leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a one-half second and the sunroof will open
location accessible to children. Do not leave automatically from any position. The sunroof will
The power sunroof switches are located on the
the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ACC or open fully and stop automatically.
overhead console between the courtesy/reading
lights. ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly Push the switch forward and release it within
unattended children, can become entrapped one-half second and the sunroof will close
by the power sunroof while operating the automatically from any position. The sunroof will
power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may close fully and stop automatically.
result in serious injury or death. During Express Open or Express Close operation,
 In a collision, there is a greater risk of being any other movement of the sunroof switch will stop
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. the sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed. Manual Open/Close
Always fasten your seat belt properly and To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch
make sure all passengers are also properly rearward to full open.
secured.
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in
Power Sunroof Switches  Do not allow small children to operate the the forward position.
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body
1 — Opening/Closing Sunroof parts, or any object, to project through the
2 — Venting Sunroof sunroof opening. Injury may result.
Any release of the switch during open or close Venting Sunroof Sunroof Maintenance
operation will stop the sunroof movement. The
Push and release the Vent button within one half Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
sunroof will remain in a partially opened position
second and the sunroof will open to the vent clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and
until the switch is operated and held again.
position. This is called “Express Vent”, and it will clear out any debris that may have collected in the
NOTE: occur regardless of sunroof position. During tracks.
If the sunshade is in the closed position when Express Vent operation, any other actuation of the 2
Express or Manual Open operation is initiated the switch will stop the sunroof. DUAL P ANE POWER S UNROOF —
sunshade will automatically open to the half open
Sunshade Operation I F E QUIPPED
position prior to the sunroof opening.
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, The power sunroof switches are located on the
Pinch Protect Feature the sunshade will open automatically as the overhead console between the courtesy/reading
This feature will detect an obstruction in the sunroof opens. lights.
opening of the sunroof during Express Close
NOTE:
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically
open.
retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.
Ignition Off Operation
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in The power sunroof switch will remain active for up
Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable to approximately 10 minutes after the ignition
and the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode. switch is placed in the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature.
NOTE:
Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect system Ú page 234. Power Sunroof Switches
1 — Opening/Closing Sunroof
2 — Venting Sunroof
3 — Opening/Closing Sunshade
Express Open/Close Opening And Closing The Power Sunshade

WARNING!
Push the switch rearward and release it within The sunshade has two programmed positions: half
 Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, one-half second and the sunroof will open open and full open positions. When operating the
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never automatically from any position. The sunroof will sunshade from the closed position, the sunshade
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a open fully and stop automatically. will always stop at the half open position
location accessible to children. Do not leave regardless of express or manual open operation.
Push the switch forward and release it within
the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ACC or The switch must be actuated again to continue on
one-half second and the sunroof will close
ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly to full open position.
automatically from any position. The sunroof will
unattended children, can become entrapped
close fully and stop automatically. If the sunroof is open or vented, the sunshade
by the power sunroof while operating the
power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may During Express Open or Express Close operation, cannot be closed beyond the half open position.
result in serious injury or death. any other movement of the sunroof switch will stop Pushing the sunshade close switch when the
the sunroof. sunroof is open/vented and the sunshade is at half
 In a collision, there is a greater risk of being open position will first automatically close the
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. Manual Open/Close
sunroof prior to the sunshade closing.
You could also be seriously injured or killed. To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch
Express Open/Close
Always fasten your seat belt properly and rearward to full open.
make sure all passengers are also properly Push the sunshade switch rearward and release it
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in
secured. within one-half second, the sunshade will open to
the forward position.
the half open position and stop automatically.
 Do not allow small children to operate the Any release of the switch during open or close Push and release the switch again from the half
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body operation will stop the sunroof movement. The open position and the sunshade will open to the
parts, or any object, to project through the sunroof will remain in a partially opened position full open position and stop automatically.
sunroof opening. Injury may result. until the switch is operated and held again.
Push the sunshade switch forward and release it
NOTE: within one-half second and the sunshade will close
Opening And Closing The Sunroof If the sunshade is in the closed position when automatically.
The sunroof has two programmed automatic stops Express or Manual Open operation is initiated the During Express Open or Express Close operation,
for the sunroof open position; a comfort stop sunshade will automatically open to the half open any other actuation of the sunroof switches will
position and a full open position. The comfort stop position prior to the sunroof opening. stop the sunshade in a partially open position.
position has been optimized to minimize wind
buffeting.
Manual Open/Close Venting Sunroof HOOD

Push and hold the sunshade switch rearward, the Push and release the Vent button within one half
sunshade will open to the half open position and second and the sunroof will open to the vent TO OPEN THE H OOD
stop automatically. Push and hold the sunshade position. This is called “Express Vent” and it will
switch again and the sunshade will open to the full To open the hood, two latches must be released.
occur regardless of sunroof position. During
open position. Express Vent operation, any movement of the 1. Pull the hood release lever located below the 2
Push and hold the switch forward and the switch will stop the sunroof. steering wheel at the base of the instrument
sunshade will close and stop at full closed position. panel.
NOTE:
Releasing the switch while the sunshade is in If the sunshade was not already open, it will auto-
motion will stop the sunshade in a partially open matically open prior to the roof opening to the vent
position. position.
Pinch Protect Feature Ignition Off Operation
This feature will detect an obstruction in the The power sunroof switch will remain active for up
opening of the sunroof during Express Close to approximately 10 minutes after the ignition
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the switch is placed in the OFF position. Opening either
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically front door will cancel this feature.
retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. NOTE:
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Hood Release Lever Location
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result Uconnect system Ú page 234.
in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will Sunroof Maintenance
disable and the sunroof must be closed in Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
Manual Mode. clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and
clear out any debris that may have collected in the
tracks.
2. Reach into the opening beneath the center of If equipped, a button on the center overhead
the hood and push the safety latch lever to the CAUTION! console inside the vehicle can be used to release
left to release it, before raising the hood. To prevent possible damage, do not slam the the tailgate. An indicator light may also signal when
hood to close it. Use a firm downward push at the tailgate is open.
the front center of the hood to ensure that both For the tailgate to lower, the vehicle must be
latches engage. stationary and in PARK or NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
TAILGATE The optional Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Ú page 98
may prevent electronic tailgate release. The
OPENING Tonneau Cover must be removed or folded up
before releasing the tailgate.
The tailgate may be opened by pushing the tailgate
release pad located on the tailgate door. CLOSING
Safety Latch Location The tailgate damper strut will lower the tailgate to To close the tailgate, push it upward until both
the open position (if equipped). sides are securely latched.
TO CLOSE THE H OOD Electronic Tailgate Release — If Equipped LOCKING TAILGATE
Hoods equipped with gas props are closed from The key fob may be equipped with an
electronic release feature for the The tailgate can be locked using the key fob lock
the point where the props no longer hold the hood button.
open. tailgate, allowing hands-free tailgate
opening. To activate, push and release
WARNING! the Tailgate Release button on the key fob twice
within five seconds. The tailgate door will unlatch,
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving and slowly lower into the open position.
your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it
could open when the vehicle is in motion and
block your vision. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious injury or death.
MULTIFUNCTION T AILGATE — WARNING!

I F EQUIPPED To prevent serious injury or death:
The 60/40 multifunction tailgate has two swing  Always keep hands away from the hinge sides
doors to allow for closer access to the pickup box of the swing doors and where the doors meet
with the doors open. when opening and closing the doors. Your 2
Opening hand or someone else’s hand could be
The tailgate must be latched closed to open the pinched.
swing doors. Push the paddle down, then pull the  Never operate the vehicle with the swing
release handle beneath the tailgate lowering doors open.
40 Split Door Release Handle
handle. This opens the 60 split door.
 Never hang from or sit on the swing doors.
Closing
Always close the 40 split door first, then close the
60 split door. The swing doors must be securely CAUTION!
latched before the tailgate can be lowered.
 Always check both swing doors are latched
NOTE: before starting vehicle.
 When the swing doors are open, the maximum
load placed on a door cannot exceed 180 lb  Vehicle damage may occur if doors are not
(82 kg). securely latched.
 Pull back on the swing doors firmly after closing
to ensure they are securely latched. Similar to
60 Split Door Release Handle the side door ajar light inside the cab, the bed
Once the 60 split swing door is opened, pull the light above the rear window will remain on if the
release handle on the inboard side of the 40 split tailgate doors are not fully closed.
door to open.
TAILGATE REMOVAL NOTE:

Rest the tailgate on the bumper so that the entire
NOTE: tailgate is secure and supported.
Removing the tailgate will disable the rearview
camera function. WARNING!
To remove the tailgate, follow the instructions For vehicles equipped with a multifunction
below: tailgate, the tailgate weighs 115 lb (52 kg) and
1. Open the tailgate to a 45° angle. should be removed by at least two people. Injury
2. Lift up on the right side of the tailgate, lifting it to the customer or damage to the tailgate may
off of the pivot. occur if one person tries to remove the
multifunction tailgate. Tailgate Only Supported By Cables
5. Remove the connector bracket from the sill by
pushing inward in the locking tab.
Lift Right Side Off Of Pivot

3. Without latching, rotate the tailgate to nearly Slide Tailgate To The Right
closed. Then, while providing support to the 4. Let the tailgate rest on the support cables
tailgate, slide it slowly to the right, removing Connector Bracket Location
while having the tailgate naturally slide
the tailgate from the left pivot. forward on the bumper.
8. Connect the tailgate plugs (provided in the

glove compartment) to the tailgate wiring
harness to ensure that the terminals do not
corrode.
Locking Tab Disconnected Body Side Harness

6. Disconnect the wiring harness by pushing on 7. Connect the body side plug (provided in the
the two release tabs, ensuring the connector glove compartment) to the body side wiring
bracket does not fall into the sill. harness and insert the bracket back into
the sill. Tailgate Plugs (Two Pieces)
1 — Large Plug
2 — Small Plug
9. Tape the tailgate harness and bracket against

the forward-facing surface of the tailgate. This
will prevent damaging the connector and
bracket when storing or reinstalling the
tailgate.
Connected Wiring Harness

Body Side Plug (One Piece)
1 — First Release Tab
2 — Second Release Tab
10. Raise the tailgate slightly, and remove the NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a standard tailgate,
support cables by releasing the lock tang from  Do not carry the tailgate loose in the truck the step will be located on the driver’s side of the
the pivot. pickup box. tailgate. If equipped with a multifunction tailgate,
NOTE: the step will be located below the center of the
 If the tailgate is closed with the wire harness
Make sure tailgate is supported by you and/or a tailgate.
disconnected, the tailgate can only be opened
second person when removing support cables. by removing the inside panel and unlatching the Bed Step For Standard Tailgate
locking mechanism manually.
WARNING!
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is
deadly, the exhaust system on vehicles
equipped with “Cap or Slide-In Campers” should
extend beyond the overhanging camper
compartment and be free of leaks.
BED STEP — I F E QUIPPED

Locking Tang Bed Step Location
Your vehicle may be equipped with an extendable
11. Remove the tailgate from the vehicle. bed step to provide easier entry and exit into the To extend the bed step, place your foot on the
truck bed. protruding foot tab located on the left edge of the
bed step, and push rearward. A small amount of
force will release the spring load and extend the
bed step out and away from the tailgate.
that will avoid coming into contact with the step as release the spring load and extend the bed step
it extends. out and away from the tailgate.
To stow the bed step back under the tailgate, push
the bed step forward with your foot until the bed
step is retracted by the spring load.
2
WARNING!
Do not attempt to stow the bed step with your
hands. The low clearance space between the
bed step and the rear bumper as the bed step
Bed Step Components (Standard Tailgate) returns to the stowed position could result in
1 — Bed Step injury to your hands or fingers.
2 — Foot Tab Bed Step Extended
Bed Step For Multifunction Tailgate
NOTE:
Once the spring load is overcome, the bed step will
extend out quickly. Be sure to stand in a position
that will avoid coming into contact with the step as
it extends.
To stow the bed step back under the tailgate, push
the bed step forward with your foot until the bed
step is retracted by the spring load.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to stow the bed step with your
Bed Step Extended Bed Step Location hands. The low clearance space between the
NOTE: To extend the bed step, place your foot on the top bed step and the rear bumper as the bed step
Once the spring load is overcome, the bed step will center of the bed step, and push down while returns to the stowed position could result in
extend out quickly, so be sure to stand in a position pulling rearward. A small amount of force will injury to your hands or fingers.
PICKUP BOX You can carry wide building materials (sheets of

plywood, etc.) by building a raised load floor. Place WARNING!
The pickup box has many features designed for lumber across the box in the indentations provided  If you wish to carry more than 600 lb (272 kg)
utility and convenience. above the wheel housings and in the bulkhead of material suspended above the wheelhouse,
dividers to form the floor. supports must be installed to transfer the
weight of the load to the pickup box floor or
WARNING! vehicle damage may result. The use of proper
 The pickup box is intended for load carrying supports will permit loading up to the rated
purposes only, not for passengers, who should payload.
sit in seats and use seat belts.  Unrestrained cargo may be thrown forward in
 Care should always be exercised when oper- an accident causing serious or fatal injury.
ating a vehicle with unrestrained cargo.
Vehicle speeds may need to be reduced. There are stampings in the sheet metal on the
Severe turns or rough roads may cause inner side bulkheads of the box in front of and
Pickup Box Features shifting or bouncing of the cargo that may behind both wheel housings. Place wooden boards
result in vehicle damage. If wide building across the box from side to side to create separate
1 — Upper Load Floor Indents materials are to be frequently carried, the load compartments in the pickup box.
2 — Bulk Head Dividers installation of a support is recommended. This There are four tie-down cleats bolted to the lower
3 — Cleats will restrain the cargo and transfer the load to sides of the pickup box that can sustain loads up
the pickup box floor. to 1,000 lb (450 kg) total.
NOTE: (Continued)
If you are installing a Toolbox, Ladder Rack or
Headache Rack at the front of the Pickup Box, you
must use Mopar® Box Reinforcement Brackets
that are available from an authorized dealer.
BED RAIL T IE-D OWN SYSTEM — To move the cleat to any position on the rail, turn
the nut counterclockwise, approximately three
I F EQUIPPED turns. Then pull out on the cleat and slide it to the
detent nearest the desired location. Make sure the
CAUTION! cleat is seated in the detent and tighten the nut.
The maximum load per cleat should not exceed 2
250 lb (113 kg), or 500 lb (227 kg) total per rail,
and the angle of the load on each cleat should
not exceed 45 degrees above horizontal, or
damage to the cleat or cleat rail may occur.
Slide Cleat Forward To Remove
There are two adjustable cleats on each side of the Cleat Removal (With Tonneau Cover)
bed that can be used to assist in securing cargo.
To remove the cleats from the utility rail, remove
the end cap screw located in the center of the end
cap, using a #T30 Torx head driver. Remove the
Adjustable Cleat Assembly end cap and slide the cleat off the end of the rail.
1 — Utility Rail Detent
2 — Cleat Retainer Nut
3 — Utility Rail Cleat
Cleat Removal (Standard Box Rail)

To remove the cleats from the utility rail, slide the
Adjustable Cleats cleat forward to access the cut out at the end of the
box rail, then remove the cleat.
Each cleat must be located and tightened down in
one of the detents, along either rail, in order to
keep cargo properly secure. End Cap Screw Location With Tonneau Cover
Cleat Removal (Without Tonneau Cover) RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED CAUTION!

Remove the end cap by pushing upward on the
release button located beneath the end cap while The RamBox system is an integrated pickup box  Damage to the RamBox bin may occur due to
pulling the cap away from the rail. The cleat can storage and cargo management system consisting heavy/sharp objects placed in bin that shift
now be removed by sliding it off the end of the rail. of three features: due to vehicle motion. In order to minimize
 Cargo storage bins potential for damage, secure all cargo to
 Cargo divider
prevent movement and protect inside
surfaces of bin from heavy/sharp objects with
 Bed rail tie-down system Ú page 93 appropriate padding.
NOTE:
Bed rail tie-down system is also available for
vehicles not equipped with a RamBox.
RAMBOX CARGO STORAGE BINS
Cargo storage bins are located on both sides of the
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING RAMBOX pickup box. The cargo storage bins provide
Push and release the lock or unlock button on the watertight, lockable, illuminated storage for up to
key fob to lock and unlock all doors, the tailgate 150 lb (68 kg) of evenly distributed cargo.
End Cap Release Button Without Tonneau Cover and the RamBox Ú page 19. To unlatch the
storage bin manually, insert the emergency key
into the keyhole and turn clockwise. Always return
the key to the upright (vertical) position before
removing it from the keyhole.
CAUTION!
 Ensure cargo bin lids are closed and latched
before moving or driving vehicle.
 Loads applied to the top of the bin lid should
be minimized to prevent damage to the lid and RamBox Cargo Storage Bins
Pull End Cap Away From Rail latching/hinging mechanisms.
(Continued)
The interior of the RamBox will automatically

CAUTION! illuminate when the lid is opened. The timing can
Failure to follow the following items could cause be adjusted within Uconnect Settings Ú page 234.
damage to the vehicle: Cargo bins feature two removable drain plugs (to
 Assure that all cargo inside the storage bins is allow water to drain from bins). To remove plug,
properly secured. pull up on the edge. To install, push plug downward 2
into drain hole.
 Do not exceed cargo weight rating of 150 lb
(68 kg) per bin.
To open a storage bin with the RamBox unlocked, RamBox Button And Keyhole Lock
push and release the button located on the lid. The
1 — Keyhole Lock
RamBox lid will open upward to allow hand access.
Lift the lid to fully open. 2 — Button
NOTE:
RamBox will not open when the button is pushed if CAUTION!
the RamBox is locked.
Leaving the lid open for extended periods of time
could cause the vehicle battery to discharge. If RamBox Drain Plug Removal
the lid is required to stay open for extended
NOTE:
periods of time, it is recommended that the bin
Provisions are provided in the bins for cargo
lights be turned off manually using the on/off
dividers. These accessories (in addition to other
switch.
RamBox accessories) are available from Mopar®.
If equipped, a 115 Volt (400 Watts Maximum)

inverter may be located inside the RamBox of your WARNING!
vehicle. The inverter can be turned on by the  Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
Instrument Panel Power Inverter switch located to covers open.
the left of the steering wheel. The RamBox inverter
can power cellular phones, electronics and  Keep the storage bin covers closed and
other low power devices requiring power up to latched while the vehicle is in motion.
400 Watts. Certain video game consoles exceed  Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie-down.
this power limit, as will most power tools.
RamBox Emergency Release Lever
Instrument Panel Power Inverter Switch
As a security measure, an Emergency Release
RAMBOX SAFETY WARNING Lever is built into the storage bin cover latching
mechanism.
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent
In the event of an individual being locked inside
personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be
opened from inside of the bin by pulling on the
WARNING!
glow-in-the-dark lever attached to the storage bin
 Always close the storage bin covers when your cover latching mechanism.
vehicle is unattended.
RamBox Power Inverter
 Do not allow children to have access to the
The Instrument Panel Power Inverter switch is only storage bins. Once in the storage bin, young
found on vehicles equipped with a RamBox. The children may not be able to escape. If trapped
switch only controls on/off operation of the power in the storage bin, children can die from suffo-
outlet in the RamBox; it does not control on/off cation or heat stroke.
operation of the power outlets located inside the  In an accident, serious injury could result if the
cabin of the vehicle. storage bin covers are not properly latched.
(Continued)
Emergency Release Lever

BED DIVIDER — IF EQUIPPED

The bed divider has two functional positions:
 Divider Position
 Storage Position
2
Divider Position
The divider position is intended for managing your
cargo and assisting in keeping cargo from moving
around the bed. There are 11 divider slots along
the bed inner panels which allow for various Center Handle And Lock Aligning Gate To Slots
positions to assist in managing your cargo.
1 — Center Handle Lock 3. Rotate the side gates closed so that the
To install the bed divider into a divider position,
2 — Handle outboard ends are secured into the intended
perform the following:
3 — Unlocked Position slots of the bed.
1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked
4 — Locked Position 4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure
using the vehicle key and rotate the center
the side gates in the closed position.
handle vertically to release the divider side
gates. 2. With the side gates open, position the divider
so the outboard ends align with the intended
slots in the sides of the bed.
Side Gates Closed

5. Lock the center handle to secure the panel TONNEAU C OVER COMPONENTS
into place.
Storage Position
The storage position for the bed divider is at the
front of the truck bed which maximizes the bed
cargo area when not in use.
To install the bed divider into the storage position,
perform the same steps as you would for the
divider position, except position the divider fully
forward in the bed against the front panel. Cargo Tie-Down Loop
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED Folded Tonneau Components

The Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover can be installed on the 1 – Stowage Strap
truck bed to protect your gear and cargo. 2 – Tonneau Bumper Folded
Storage Position
The outboard ends should be positioned in front of
the cargo tie-down loops.
TRI-F OLD TONNEAU C OVER F OLDING

FOR DRIVING O R R EMOVAL
To remove the Tonneau Cover use the following
steps:
1. Open the tailgate to access the rear pair of 2
Tonneau Cover latches located on the
underside of the Cover.
Tonneau Cover Latch Components Position One

(Front Latches Latched And Stowage Straps Secured)
1 — Handle
2 — Slide Locking Lever
3 — Locating Bumper
4 — Truck Flange Bead
5 — Latch Bumper
6 — J Hook
Location Of Rear Latches
Position Two (Front And Rear Latches Latched)

1 — Panel 1
2 — Panel 2
3 — Panel 3
3. Holding the bumper, push the fully released

latch to the center and push up. Push the
handle firmly, locking it into the stowed
position. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the
opposite side latch.
Slide Locking Lever Inward Released Position

2. Slide the locking lever toward the inside of the
truck bed to release the J Hook and pull the
handle downward into the released position.
Stowed Position
Hold The Bumper And Push The Handle Up
Unlatching Latch
Lift Panel 3 And Fold Onto Panel 2

4. Lift up on Panel 3 and fold it onto Panel 2. 5. Lift up on the second and third panel and fold NOTE:
them onto the first panel. Be sure the Tonneau Cover has been folded
completely, and the stowage straps are engaged,
before removing.
CAUTION! 2
The folded Tonneau Cover must be latched by
both front latches and both front stowage straps
or damage to the Tonneau Cover or vehicle may
occur while driving.
Correct Folding — Hold Panels Together

Stowage Strap Clipped
NOTE:
When folding the second and third panels, the 6. Unsnap the stowage strap and clip. Repeat for
sections MUST be held together to avoid damage both straps to prevent the tonneau cover
to the cover material. Fold the panel gently. Do not panels from unfolding.
allow the panels to drop under their own weight.
Fully Folded Tonneau Cover
Position One
Incorrect Folding — Will Cause Damage (Front Latches Latched And Stowage Straps Secured)
NOTE: TRI-F OLD TONNEAU C OVER

The vehicle can be driven with the Tonneau in the
folded position or can be completely removed.
I NSTALLATION
To install the Tonneau Cover follow these steps:
1. Position the Tonneau Cover on the truck bed
and center using the locating bumpers.
2. Locate the front pair of Tonneau Cover latches
on the underside of the Cover. Slide the
locking lever toward the inside of the truck bed
and release the latch from the stowed
Released Position position, and pull the handle downward into
the released position. Do this for both the
left and right side.
Slide Locking Lever Inward
7. Slide the locking lever toward the inside of the
truck bed to release the J Hook and pull the
handle downward into the released position.
Hold The Bumper And Push The Handle Up

8. Holding the bumper, push the fully released
latch to the center and push up. Push the Location of Front Latches
handle firmly, locking it into the stowed
position. Repeat Steps 2 & 3 for the opposite
side latch.
9. With two people, remove the cover.
Unlatching Latch
Slide Locking Lever Towards Inside Of Truck Released Position J Hook Under Truck Flange
3. Swing the J Hook from the handle and push 1 — Front Of Truck
the handle to the center and up, ensuring that 2 — J Hook
the J Hook is under the truck flange. Push up
on the handle firmly, locking it into the latched
position. NOTE:
Make sure the bumper is in front of the truck
flange bead.
Unlatching Latch
6. Unfold the Tonneau Cover to the second panel NOTE:

position. When folding the second and third panels, the
sections MUST be held together to avoid damage
to the cover material. Fold the panel gently. Do not
allow the panels to drop under their own weight.
Pull Handle Downward

4. Pull down on the handle to ensure the Slide
Locking Lever is fully engaged. Do this for both Incorrect Folding — Will Cause Damage
the left and right side.
5. Unclip the stowage straps, and re-snap them
to the bow. Second Panel Position
NOTE:
Unfold the panel gently, and do not allow the
panels to drop under their own weight.
7. Completely unfold the Tonneau Cover. 9. Pull down on the handle to ensure the Slide 10. Gently pull up on all four corners of the
Locking Lever is fully engaged. Do this for both Tonneau Cover to ensure that it is properly
CAUTION! the left and right side. latched.
The vehicle cannot be driven when the Tonneau NOTE:
Cover is in the second panel position. Also check to ensure the bumper is forward of the CAUTION!
bead on the underside of the truck flange. Make 2
sure that the Tonneau Cover is positioned fully It is the driver’s responsibility to ensure the
forward, so that the bumper clears the bead. Tonneau Cover is properly installed on the
vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure can
result in detachment of the Tonneau Cover from
the vehicle and/or damage to the vehicle/
Tonneau Cover.
TRI-F OLD TONNEAU C OVER C LEANING

For proper cleaning of the Tonneau Cover, use
Mopar® Whitewall & Vinyl Top Cleaner and
Position Two (Fully Unfolded) Mopar® Leather & Vinyl Conditioner/Protectant.
8. Repeat steps 2 through 3 for the rear pair of
latches. Pull Up On Tonneau Cover Corners
106
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GASOLINE
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 107
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT C LUSTER 4. Oil Pressure Gauge

WARNING!
DESCRIPTIONS — GASOLINE  The pointer should always indicate the oil
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
pressure when the engine is running. A
1. Tachometer continuous high or low reading under others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
 Indicates the engine speed in revolutions normal driving conditions may indicate a coolant. You may want to call an authorized
per minute (RPM x 1000). lubrication system malfunction. Immediate dealer for service if your vehicle overheats
service should be obtained from an autho- Ú page 423.
2. Voltmeter
rized dealer.
 When the vehicle is in the RUN state, the 3
NOTE:
gauge indicates the electrical system CAUTION!
voltage. The pointer should stay within the In vehicles equipped with Stop/Start, an oil
pressure indication of zero is normal during an Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
normal range if the battery is charged. If the
Autostop. damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
pointer moves to either extreme left or right
5. Speedometer reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
and remains there during normal driving,
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the electrical system should be serviced.  Indicates vehicle speed.
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
NOTE: 6. Temperature Gauge the pointer remains on the “H,” turn the engine
In vehicles equipped with Stop/Start, a reduced  The pointer shows engine coolant tempera- off immediately and call an authorized dealer for
voltage may be present during an Autostop. ture. The pointer positioned within the service.
3. Instrument Cluster Display normal range indicates that the engine
 When the appropriate conditions exist, this cooling system is operating satisfactorily. 7. Fuel Gauge
display shows the instrument cluster  The pointer will likely indicate a higher  The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
display messages Ú page 114. temperature when driving in hot weather, fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
 The display always shows one of the main up mountain grades, or when towing a position.
menu items after ignition on. trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed
 The fuel pump symbol points to
the upper limits of the normal operating
the side of the vehicle where the
range.
fuel door is located.
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GASOLINE

PREMIUM I NSTRUMENT C LUSTER 4. Temperature Gauge

CAUTION!
DESCRIPTIONS — GASOLINE  The pointer shows engine coolant tempera-
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
ture. The pointer positioned within the
1. Tachometer normal range indicates that the engine damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
 Indicates the engine speed in revolutions cooling system is operating satisfactorily. reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
per minute (RPM x 1000). vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
 The pointer will likely indicate a higher
2. Instrument Cluster Display temperature when driving in hot weather,
the pointer remains on the “H,” turn the engine
 When the appropriate conditions exist, this
up mountain grades, or when towing a
off immediately and call an authorized dealer for 3
trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed
display shows the instrument cluster service.
the upper limits of the normal operating
display messages Ú page 114.
range.
 The display always shows one of the main 5. Fuel Gauge
menu items after ignition on. WARNING!  The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
3. Speedometer A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
 Indicates vehicle speed. others could be badly burned by steam or boiling position.
coolant. You may want to call an authorized  The fuel pump symbol points to
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats the side of the vehicle where the
Ú page 423. fuel door is located.
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL

BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT C LUSTER WARNING!

3. Instrument Cluster Display
DESCRIPTIONS — DIESEL A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
 When the appropriate conditions exist, this
display shows the instrument cluster
1. Tachometer others could be badly burned by steam or boiling display messages Ú page 114.
 Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
coolant. You may want to call an authorized
 The display always shows one of the main
per minute (RPM x 1000). dealer for service if your vehicle overheats
menu items after ignition on.
Ú page 423.
2. Engine Coolant Temperature 4. Oil Pressure Gauge
 This gauge shows the engine coolant  The pointer should always indicate some oil
3
temperature. The gauge pointer will likely WARNING! pressure when the engine is running. A
show higher temperatures when driving in continuous high or low reading under
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
hot weather, up mountain grades, or in normal driving conditions may indicate a
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
heavy stop and go traffic. If the red Warning lubrication system malfunction. Immediate
reads “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
Light turns on while driving, safely bring the service should be obtained from an autho-
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
vehicle to a stop, and turn off the engine. rized dealer.
DO NOT operate the vehicle until the cause
the pointer remains on the “H”, turn the engine 5. Speedometer
is corrected.
off immediately and call an authorized dealer  Indicates vehicle speed.
for service.
6. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge • The DEF gauge may also not immediately 7. Fuel Gauge
 The DEF Gauge displays the actual level of update after a refill if the temperature of  The gauge shows the level of fuel in the fuel
Diesel Exhaust Fluid in the DEF tank. DEF is the DEF fluid is below 12°F (-11°C). The tank when the ignition switch is in the ON/
required to maintain normal vehicle opera- DEF line heater will possibly warm up the RUN position.
tion and emissions compliance. If some- DEF fluid and allow the gauge to update The fuel pump symbol points to the
thing is wrong with the gauge, a DEF after a period of run time. Under very cold side of the vehicle where the fuel door
Warning Message or Malfunction Indicator conditions, it is possible that the gauge is located.
Light (MIL) will be displayed Ú page 125.
may not reflect the new fill level for
NOTE: several drives.
• The gauge may take up to five seconds to • Outside temperature can affect DEF
update after adding a gallon or more of consumption. In cold conditions, 12°F
Diesel Exhaust Fluid to the DEF tank. (-11°C) and below, the DEF gauge needle
If you have a fault related to the DEF can stay on a fixed position and may not
system, the gauge may not update to the move for extended periods of time. This is
new level. See an authorized dealer for a normal function of the system.
service.
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL
3
PREMIUM I NSTRUMENT C LUSTER completely full. To put it another way, 5. Fuel Gauge
DESCRIPTIONS — DIESEL there’s additional storage capacity in the  The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
tank above the Full mark that’s not repre- fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the
1. Tachometer sented in the gauge. You may not see any ON/RUN position.
 Indicates the engine speed in revolutions movement in the reading – even after  The fuel pump symbol points to
per minute (RPM x 1000). driving up to 2,000 miles (3,219 km) in the side of the vehicle where the
2. Instrument Cluster Display some cases. fuel filler door is located.
 When the appropriate conditions exist, this • The gauge may take up to five seconds to
display shows the instrument cluster update after adding a gallon or more of INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
display messages Ú page 114. DEF to the DEF tank. If you have a fault Your vehicle will be equipped with an instrument
 The display always shows one of the main related to the DEF system, the gauge may cluster display, which offers useful information to
menu items after ignition on. not update to the new level. See an the driver. With the ignition in the OFF mode,
3. Speedometer authorized dealer for service. opening/closing of a door will activate the display
• The DEF gauge may also not immediately for viewing, and display the total miles, or
 Indicates vehicle speed. kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument
update after a refill if the temperature of
4. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge cluster display is designed to display important
the DEF fluid is below 12°F (-11°C). The
 The DEF Gauge displays the actual level of information about your vehicle’s systems and
DEF line heater will possibly warm up the features. Using a driver interactive display located
Diesel Exhaust Fluid in the DEF tank. DEF is DEF fluid and allow the gauge to update
required to maintain normal vehicle opera- on the instrument panel, your instrument cluster
after a period of run time. Under very cold display can show you how systems are working and
tion and emissions compliance. If some-
thing is wrong with the gauge, a DEF
conditions, it is possible that the gauge give you warnings when they are not. The steering
Warning Message or Malfunction Indicator may not reflect the new fill level for wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll through
Light (MIL) will be displayed Ú page 125. several drives. the main menus and submenus. You can access
• Outside temperature can affect DEF the specific information you want and make
NOTE: selections and adjustments.
consumption. In cold conditions, 12°F
• The DEF tank on these vehicles is
(-11°C) and below, the DEF gauge needle
designed with a large amount of full
can stay on a fixed position and may not
reserve. So the level sensor will indicate
move for extended periods of time. This is
a full reading even before the tank is
a normal function of the system.
I NSTRUMENT CLUSTER D ISPLAY NOTE:

L OCATION AND C ONTROLS  Holding the up / down or left / right
arrow buttons will loop the user through the
The instrument cluster display features a driver currently selected menu or options presented
interactive display that is located in the instrument on the screen.
cluster.
 Main menu and submenus wrap for continuous
scrolling.
 Upon returning to a main menu, the last 3
submenu screen viewed within that main menu
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons will be displayed.
OK Button:
1 — Left Arrow Button
2 — Up Arrow Button For Digital Speedometer:
3 — Right Arrow Button  Pushing the OK button changes units (mph or
4 — Down Arrow Button km/h).
5 — OK Button For Screen Setup:
Premium Instrument Cluster Display/Controls Location  OK button allows user to enter menu and
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls submenus.
Up And Down Arrow Buttons:
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen  Within each submenu layer, the up and
Using the up or down arrow button allows you
to cycle through the Main Menu Items. down arrow buttons will allow the user to
The system allows the driver to select information select the item of interest.
by pushing the following instrument cluster display Left And Right Arrow Buttons:
 Pushing the OK button makes the selection and
control buttons located on the left side of the Using the left or right arrow button allows you a confirmation screen will appear (returning the
steering wheel. to cycle through the submenu items of the Main user to the first page of the submenu).
menu item.
 Pushing the left arrow button will exit each
submenu layer and return to the main menu.
OIL L IFE R ESET 4. Push and hold the OK button to reset oil life. If Vehicle Info
conditions are met, the gauge and numeric
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change display will update to show 100%. If conditions Push and release the up or down arrow
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” are not met a pop-up message of “To reset oil button until the Vehicle Info menu icon is displayed
message will display in the instrument cluster life engine must be off with ignition in run” will in the instrument cluster display. Push and release
display for five seconds after a single chime has be displayed (for five seconds), and the user the left or right arrow button to scroll through
sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change will remain at the Oil Life screen. the information submenus and push and release
interval. The engine oil change indicator system is the OK button to select or reset the resettable
duty cycle based, which means the engine oil 5. Push and release the up or down arrow submenus.
change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon button to exit the submenu screen.
 Tire Pressure Monitor System
your personal driving style.
NOTE:  Air Suspension — If Equipped
Unless reset, this message will continue to display If the indicator message illuminates when you start
each time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN  Coolant Temperature — If Equipped
the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
position. To turn off the message temporarily, push reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.  Trans Temperature (Automatic only)
and release the OK or arrow buttons. To reset the  Oil Temperature
oil change indicator system (after performing the DISPLAY MENU ITEMS
scheduled maintenance), refer to the following  Oil Pressure — If Equipped
procedure: Push and release the up or down arrow  Oil Life
button until the desired selectable menu icon is
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the  Battery Voltage — If Equipped
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the  Gauge Summary — If Equipped
ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not start Speedometer
the engine).  Coolant Temp
Push and release the up or down arrow
 Trans Temp
2. Push and release the down arrow button to button until the speedometer menu item is
scroll downward through the main menu to highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push  Oil Temp
“Vehicle Info.” and release the OK button to cycle the display  Oil Pressure
between mph and km/h.
3. Push and release the right arrow button to  Engine Hours
access the ”Oil Life” screen.
Off Road – If Equipped NOTE: Adaptive Cruise Control Ready

When vehicle speed becomes too high to display When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
Push and release the up or down arrow the pitch and roll, “- -” will display in place of the
button until the Off Road menu icon is displayed in setting has not been selected, the display will read
numbers, and the graphic will be grayed out. A “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
the instrument cluster display. Push and release message indicating the necessary speed for the
the left or right arrow button to scroll through Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the
feature to become available will also display.
the information submenus. steering wheel) and the following will display in the
Driver Assist — If Equipped instrument cluster display:
 Drivetrain
The Driver Assist menu displays the status of the ACC SET 3
 Front Wheel Angle: displays the graphical ACC and LaneSense systems.
and numerical value of calculated average When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
front wheel angle from the steering wheel Push and release the up or down arrow instrument cluster Ú page 178.
orientation. button until the Driver Assist menu is displayed in The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
the instrument cluster display. activity occurs, which may include any of the
 Transfer Case Lock Status: displays “Lock”
graphic only during 4WD High, 4WD High Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Feature following:
Part Time, 4WD Low status. The instrument cluster display displays the current  Distance Setting Change
 Axle Lock And Sway Bar Status (If ACC system settings. The information displayed  System Cancel
Equipped): displays front and rear or rear depends on ACC system status.
 Driver Override
only axle locker graphic, and sway bar Push the ACC on/off button (located on the
connection graphic with text message steering wheel) until one of the following displays  System Off
(connected or disconnected). in the instrument cluster display:  ACC Proximity Warning
 Pitch And Roll Adaptive Cruise Control Off  ACC Unavailable Warning
 Displays the pitch and roll of the vehicle in When ACC is deactivated, the display will read LaneSense — If Equipped
the graphic with the angle number on the “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.” The instrument cluster display displays the current
screen. LaneSense system settings. The information
displayed depends on LaneSense system status
and the conditions that need to be met
Ú page 137.
Performance Features — If Equipped

Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Performance icon/title is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the left
or right arrow button to scroll through the performance feature submenus.
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Performance Features is intended for off-highway or track use only and should not be done on any public roadways.
It is recommended that these features be used in a controlled environment and within the limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as measured by the
performance pages must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The Performance Features include the following:

0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h) Timer
 Best
 Last
 Current
Speed Timers
0-100 MPH (0-160 km/h) Timer
 Best
 Last
 Current
0-60 feet (0-20 meters)/Reaction Timer

 Best
 Last
 Current
NOTE:
Reaction Time result is shown only on the 60 ft timer tab.
0-330 feet (0-100 meters) Timer 3
 Best
 Last
 Current
1/8 Mile (200 meters) Timer
Drag Timers  Best
 Last
 Current
0-1000 feet (0-300 meters) Timer
 Best
 Last
 Current
1/4 Mile (400 meters) Timer
 Best
 Last
 Current
 Distance
Braking Distance
 From Speed
 Current
G-Forces
 Peak
Lap Timer Shows times for Last, Best, and Current laps ran.
Lap History  Will list the last four laps with the best lap highlighted in green.
Top Speed Shows the top speed of the vehicle.
Fuel Economy Trip Info Stop/Start — If Equipped

Push and release the up or down arrow Push and release the up or down arrow Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Fuel Economy menu item is button until the Trip menu item is highlighted in the button until the Stop/Start icon/title is highlighted
highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push instrument cluster display. Push and release the in the instrument cluster display. The screen will
and hold the OK button to reset Average Fuel right or left arrow button to enter the display the Stop/Start status.
Economy. submenus of Trip A and Trip B. The Trip A or Trip B
 Current Fuel Economy information will display the following:
 Average Fuel Economy  Distance
 Range To Empty  Average Fuel Economy
 Elapsed Time
Push and hold OK button to reset all information.
Trailer Tow — If Equipped Audio Settings

Push and release the up or down arrow Push and release the up or down arrow Head-Up Display (HUD) – If Equipped
button until the Trailer Tow menu item is button until the Audio Menu icon/title is NOTE:
highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push highlighted in the instrument cluster display. This The HUD feature Settings are available at any
and release the right or left arrow button to menu will display the audio source information, vehicle speed Ú page 122.
cycle through the following trailer tow information: including the Song name, Artist name, and audio Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
source with an accompanying graphic.
 Trip (trailer specific) Distance: Push and hold
the OK button to reset the distance. Phone Call Status Push and release the up or down arrow 3
button until the Settings Menu Icon/Title is
 Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM): When a call is incoming, a Phone Call Status highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push
pop-up will display on the screen. The pop-up will and release the OK button to enter the submenus
 Braking Output
remain until the phone is answered or ignored. and follow the prompts on the screen as needed.
 Trailer Type
NOTE: The Settings feature allows you to change what
 ITBM Gain The call status will temporarily replace the information is displayed in the instrument cluster
 Trailer Light Check: Push and hold the OK previous media source information displayed on as well as the location that information is
button to begin the Trailer Light Test sequence the screen. When the pop-up is no longer displayed.
Ú page 223. displayed, the display will return to the last used NOTE:
screen. The Settings feature is only available when the
 Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring: The Instrument
Cluster Display will display the Trailer Tire Pres- Stored Messages vehicle speed is less than 5 mph.
sure for a connected trailer with sensors that
Push and release the up or down arrow
match the active trailer profile. When a low tire
button until the Messages Menu item is
is present, the low tire value will be displayed in
highlighted. This feature shows the number of
red, and the affected low tire will have a red
stored warning messages. Push and release the
glow. “Trailer Tire Low“ will be displayed on the
center bottom of the Instrument Cluster Display right or left arrow button to cycle through
screen. stored messages.
Odometer
Upper Left or Right Left Side and Right Side – If Equipped
 No Decimal Point
None Time Current Econ Range To
None Average Econ  Decimal Point
Compass Range Trip A Distance Empty
Transmission Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings)
Outside Temp Average Econ Trip B Distance Oil Temp Coolant Temp
Temp  Cancel
Oil
Trailer Trip – Oil Pressure – Oil Life Menu Icon  Restore
Temperature –
If Equipped If Equipped
If Equipped HEAD-U P D ISPLAY (HUD) —
Trailer Brake – Coolant Temp
Battery Lower Left and Lower Right – If Equipped I F E QUIPPED
Voltage –
If Equipped – If Equipped None Time Current Econ NOTE:
If Equipped
Range To The HUD feature Settings are available at any
Transmission Compass Trip A Distance
Oil Life – Empty vehicle speed.
Temperature –
If Equipped Push and release the up or down arrow
If Equipped Outside Temp Average Econ Trip B Distance
Trailer Trip – If Trailer Brake – button until the Settings Menu icon/title is
Oil Pressure highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push
Equipped If Equipped
Favorite Menus and release the left or right arrow button
Coolant Oil Battery
Speedometer Vehicle Info Performance until the HUD Menu icon/title is highlighted in the
Temperature Temperature Voltage
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
Driver Assist Transmission
Fuel Economy Oil Life OK button to enter HUD. Use the up or down
Off Road (show/hide) – Temperature
(show/hide) arrow button to select a setting, then push and
If Equipped
release the OK button to adjust the setting.
Trailer Tow –
Trip Info Audio (show/ Current Gear
If Equipped
(show/hide) hide)  Off (D)
(show/hide)
Messages  On (D1, D2, D3,...)
Settings Diagnostics
(Stored)
 Content and Layout When “Standard” mode is selected, the HUD When “Advanced” mode is selected, the HUD
When “Display On” is selected, the HUD will image is split into thirds with the speed limit displays the vehicle speed, turn-by-turn naviga-
display on the windshield. When it is not indicator shown to the left, vehicle speed in the tion, speed limit, driver assist function(s), and
selected, no display on the windshield. center, and turn-by-turn navigation to the right. current gear.
 Advanced: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation,  Custom
Driver Assist (ACC/Cruise, LaneSense,
Highway Assist/Highway Assist+), Gear
3
HUD ON/OFF
Custom HUD Layout
 Simple: Speed, Speed Limit
 Custom 1: Speed, Speed Limit
 Standard: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation Advanced Mode
 Custom 2: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation
 Custom 3: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation,
Highway Assist/Highway Assist+)
 Custom 4: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation,
Highway Assist/Highway Assist+), Gear
 Display Height tion in the particulate filter system and allow

WARNING! your diesel engine and exhaust after-treatment
 Brightness
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park system to cleanse the filter to remove the
NOTE: over materials that can burn, such as grass or trapped PM and restore the system to normal
 The HUD basic settings (Brightness, Display leaves, and those items that come into contact operating condition.
Height and Non Custom layouts), are controlled with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate  Exhaust System — Regeneration In Process
through the Settings Screen in the Instrument your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system Exhaust Filter XX% Full — This message indi-
Cluster Ú page 114. can contact anything that can burn. cates that the DPF is self-cleaning. Maintain
 HUD custom content layout preferences can be your current driving condition until regeneration
selected through your touchscreen. For more Your vehicle has the ability to alert you to is completed.
information, please refer to your Uconnect additional maintenance required on your vehicle or  Exhaust System — Regeneration Completed —
Owner’s Manual Supplement. engine. Refer to the following messages that may This message indicates that the DPF
DIESEL P ARTICULATE F ILTER (DPF) be displayed on your instrument cluster: self-cleaning is completed. If this message is
 Exhaust Filter XX% Full Safely Drive at Highway displayed, you will hear one chime to assist in
MESSAGES alerting you of this condition.
Speeds to Remedy — This message will be
This engine meets all required diesel engine displayed in the instrument cluster if the  Exhaust Service Required — See Dealer Now —
emissions standards. To achieve these emissions exhaust particulate filter reaches 80% of its This messages indicates regeneration has been
standards, your vehicle is equipped with a maximum storage capacity. Under conditions of disabled due to a system malfunction. At this
state-of-the-art engine and exhaust system. These exclusive short duration and low speed driving point the engine Powertrain Control Module
systems are seamlessly integrated into your cycles, your diesel engine and exhaust (PCM) will register a fault code, the instrument
vehicle and managed by the Powertrain Control after-treatment system may never reach the panel will display a MIL light.
Module (PCM). The PCM manages engine conditions required to cleanse the filter to
combustion to allow the exhaust system’s catalyst remove the trapped PM. If this occurs, the CAUTION!
to trap and burn Particulate Matter (PM) “Exhaust Filter XX% Full Safely Drive at Highway
pollutants, with no input or interaction on your part. See an authorized dealer, as damage to the
Speeds to Remedy” message will be displayed
exhaust system could occur soon with continued
in the instrument cluster display. If this
operation.
message is displayed, you will hear one chime
to assist in alerting you of this condition. By
simply driving your vehicle at highway speeds
for up to 20 minutes, you can remedy the condi-
 Exhaust Filter Full — Power Reduced See DISPLAYS DIESEL E XHAUST F LUID (DEF)
Dealer — This message indicates the PCM has
derated the engine to limit the likelihood of When the appropriate conditions exist, the WARNING M ESSAGES
permanent damage to the after-treatment instrument cluster display displays the following Your vehicle will begin displaying warning
system. If this condition is not corrected and a messages: messages when the DEF level reaches a driving
dealer service is not performed, extensive  System Setup Unavailable – Vehicle Not in Park range of approximately 500 miles (800 km). If the
exhaust after-treatment damage can occur. To following warning message sequence is ignored,
 System Setup Unavailable – Vehicle in Motion
correct this condition it will be necessary to have your vehicle may not restart unless DEF is added
your vehicle serviced by an authorized dealer.  Exhaust Filter Full Safely Drive at Highway
with in the displayed mileage shown in the cluster 3
Speeds To Remedy message.
NOTE:
Failing to follow the oil change indicator, changing  Exhaust Filter XX% Full – Power Reduced See
 Engine Will Not Restart in XXXX mi DEF Low
your oil and resetting the oil change indicator by Dealer Refill Soon — This message will display when
0 miles remaining will prevent the diesel exhaust  Exhaust Service Required – See Dealer Now DEF driving range is less than 500 miles, DEF
filter from performing it's cleaning routine. This will  Exhaust System – Filter XX% Full Service fluid top off is required within the displayed
shortly result in a Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) Required See Dealer mileage. The message will be displayed in the
and reduced engine power. Only an authorized cluster during vehicle start up with the current
dealer will be able to correct this condition.  Exhaust System – Regeneration In Process
allowed mileage and accompanied by a single
Exhaust Filter XX% Full
chime. The remaining mileage can be pulled up
CAUTION!  Exhaust System – Regeneration Completed anytime in the “Messages” list within the instru-
See an authorized dealer, as damage to the  Engine Will Not Restart in XXXX mi DEF Low ment cluster display.
exhaust system could occur soon with continued Refill Soon  Engine Will Not Restart in XXXX mi Refill DEF —
operation.  Engine Will Not Restart in XXXX mi Refill DEF This message will display when DEF driving
range is less than 200 miles. It is also displayed
 Engine Will Not Restart Refill DEF
at 150 miles and 100 miles. DEF fluid top off is
 Service DEF System See Dealer required within the displayed mileage. The
 Incorrect DEF Detected See Dealer message will be displayed in the instrument
cluster display during vehicle start up with an
 Engine Will Not Restart in XXX mi Service DEF
updated distance mileage, and it will be accom-
See Dealer
panied by a single chime. Starting at 100 miles,
 Engine Will Not Restart Service DEF System See remaining range will be continuously displayed
Dealer
while operating the vehicle. Chimes will also and have your vehicle serviced immediately. If  Engine Will Not Restart Service DEF System See
accompany the 75, 50 and 25 mile remaining not corrected in 50 miles, vehicle will enter the Dealer — This message will display if DEF
distances. The DEF Low telltale will be on contin- “Engine Will not restart in XXX mi Service DEF system issue detected is not serviced during the
uously until DEF fluid is topped off. See dealer” warning stage and message. allowed period. Your engine will not restart
 Engine Will Not Restart Refill DEF — This  Incorrect DEF Detected See Dealer — This unless your vehicle is serviced by an authorized
message will display when the DEF driving range message will display if the DEF system has dealer. This message will be displayed when
is less than one mile, DEF fluid top off is detected the incorrect fluid has been introduced under 1 mile until engine will not start and each
required or the engine will not restart. The to the DEF tank. The message will be accompa- time the vehicle is started, and will be continu-
message will be displayed in the instrument nied by a single chime. We recommend you ously displayed. The message will be accompa-
cluster display during vehicle start up, and it will drive to your nearest authorized dealer and nied by a single chime. Your Malfunction
be accompanied by a single chime. The DEF Low have your vehicle serviced immediately. If not Indicator Light will be continuously illumined.
telltale will be illuminated continuously until corrected in 30 miles, vehicle will enter the We highly recommend you drive to the nearest
DEF fluid tank is filled with a minimum of “Engine Will not restart in XXX mi Service DEF authorized dealer if the message appears while
two gallons of DEF. See dealer” warning stage and message. engine is running.
 Engine Will Not Restart in XXX mi Service DEF  Engine Will Not Start Service DEF System See
DIESEL E XHAUST F LUID (DEF) FAULT Dealer — This message will display when the
See Dealer — This message is first displayed if
WARNING MESSAGES the fault detected is not serviced after 50 miles fault detected is not serviced after the Engine
of operation. It is also displayed at 150 miles, will not restart Service DEF System See Dealer
There are different messages which are displayed message is displayed on the next subsequent
if the vehicle detects that the DEF system has been 125 miles and 100 miles. System service is
required within the displayed mileage. The restart. Your engine will not start unless your
filled with a fluid other than DEF, has experienced vehicle is serviced by an authorized dealer.
component failures, or when tampering has been message will be displayed during vehicle start
up with an updated distance mileage, and it will The message will be accompanied by a single
detected. chime. Your Malfunction Indicator Light will be
be accompanied by a single chime. Starting at
When the DEF system needs to be serviced the 100 miles, remaining range will be continuously continuously illuminated. If the message
following warnings will display: displayed while operating the vehicle. Chimes appears and you can not start the engine, we
 Service DEF System See Dealer — This message will also accompany the 75, 50 and 25 mile recommend having your vehicle towed to the
will display when the fault is initially detected remaining distances. We recommend you drive nearest authorized dealer immediately.
and each time the vehicle is started. The to the nearest authorized dealer and have your
message will be accompanied by a single chime vehicle serviced immediately.
and the Malfunction Indicator Light. We recom-
mend you drive to the nearest authorized dealer
BATTERY SAVER O N/BATTERY S AVER These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a  Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads
low state of charge and continues to lose electrical (e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior
MODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL L OAD charge at a rate that the charging system cannot lights, overloaded power outlets +12 Volts,
REDUCTION ACTIONS — I F EQUIPPED sustain. 115 Volts AC, USB ports) during certain driving
NOTE: conditions (city driving, towing, frequent stop-
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery
ping).
Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of  The charging system is independent from load
the electrical system and status of the vehicle reduction. The charging system performs a diag-  Installing options like additional lights, upfitter
electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms
battery. nostic on the charging system continuously.
and similar devices.
3
In cases when the IBS detects charging system  If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may
failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are indicate a problem with the charging system  Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by
deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions will Ú page 129. long parking periods).
take place to extend the driving time and distance The electrical loads that may be switched off  The vehicle was parked for an extended period
of the vehicle. This is done by reducing power to or (if equipped), and vehicle functions which can be of time (weeks, months).
turning off non-essential electrical loads. affected by load reduction:  The battery was recently replaced and was not
Load reduction is only active when the engine is  Heated Seats / Vented Seats / Heated Wheel charged completely.
running. It will display a message if there is a risk
 Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors  The battery was discharged by an electrical load
of battery depletion to the point where the vehicle
left on when the vehicle was parked.
may stall due to lack of electrical supply, or will not  HVAC System
restart after the current drive cycle.  The battery was used for an extended period
 115 Volts AC Power Inverter System
with the engine not running to supply radio,
When load reduction is activated, the message  Audio and Telematics System lights, chargers, +12 Volt portable appliances
“Battery Saver On Some Systems May Have
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or like vacuum cleaners, game consoles and
Reduced Power” will appear in the instrument
more of the following conditions: similar devices.
cluster.
 The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system because
the electrical loads are larger than the capability
of charging system. The charging system is still
functioning properly.
What to do when an electrical load reduction

action message is present (“Battery Saver On” or
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
“Battery Saver Mode”) The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
functions, including brake fluid level and
During a trip: instrument panel together with a dedicated
parking brake application. If the brake
message and/or acoustic signal when applicable.
 Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible: light turns on it may indicate that the
These indications are indicative and precautionary
parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level
 Turn off redundant lights (interior or exte- and as such must not be considered as exhaustive
is low, or that there is a problem with the Anti-Lock
rior). and/or alternative to the information contained in
Brake System reservoir.
 Check what may be plugged in to power
the Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to read
carefully in all cases. Always refer to the If the light remains on when the parking brake has
outlets +12 Volts, 115 Volts AC, USB ports.
information in this chapter in the event of a failure been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full
 Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature). indication. All active telltales will display first if mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates
 Check the audio settings (volume). applicable. The system check menu may appear a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or
different based upon equipment options and that a problem with the Brake Booster has been
After a trip:
current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) /
 Check if any aftermarket equipment was and may not appear. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical case, the light will remain on until the condition has
accessories, audio systems, alarms) and review RED WARNING LIGHTS been corrected. If the problem is related to the
specifications if any (load and Ignition Off Draw brake booster, the ABS pump will run when
currents). Air Bag Warning Light
applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation
 Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, This warning light will illuminate to may be felt during each stop.
driving time and parking time). indicate a fault with the air bag, and will
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb
 The vehicle should have service performed if capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
check when the ignition is placed in the
the message is still present during consecutive hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will
trips and the evaluation of the vehicle and brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the
driving pattern did not help to identify the cause. Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level
air bag has been detected, it will stay on until the
in the master cylinder has dropped below a
fault is cleared. If the light is either not on during
specified level.
startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have
the system inspected at an authorized dealer as The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
soon as possible.
NOTE: The light also will turn on when the parking brake Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
The light may flash momentarily during sharp is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN Light
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level position.
conditions. The vehicle should have service This warning light will illuminate to
NOTE: indicate a problem with the ETC system.
performed, and the brake fluid level checked. This light shows only that the parking brake is If a problem is detected while the vehicle
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is applied. It does not show the degree of brake appli- is running, the light will either stay on or
necessary. cation. flash depending on the nature of the problem.
WARNING!
Battery Charge Warning Light Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and 3
This warning light will illuminate when the completely stopped and the transmission is placed
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is battery is not charging properly. If it stays in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have on while the engine is running, there may the light remains on with the vehicle running, your
failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You be a malfunction with the charging vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
immediately. possible. NOTE:
This indicates a possible problem with the This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System electrical system or a related component. pedals are pressed at the same time.
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD Door Open Warning Light running, immediate service is required and you
failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along This indicator will illuminate when a may experience reduced performance, an
with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS door is ajar/open and not fully closed. elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
system is required. vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be NOTE: when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
position to the ON/RUN position. The light should chime. check. If the light does not come on during starting,
illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
should then turn off unless the parking brake is
applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does
not illuminate, have the light inspected by an
authorized dealer.
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Hood Open Warning Light Oil Temperature Warning Light
Warning Light This warning light will illuminate when the This warning light will illuminate to
This warning light will turn on when hood is ajar/open and not fully closed. indicate the engine oil temperature is
there's a fault with the EPS system high. If the light turns on while driving,
Ú page 173. stop the vehicle and shut off the engine
NOTE:
as soon as possible. Wait for oil temperature to
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
return to normal levels.
chime.
WARNING! Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Continued operation with reduced assist could This warning light indicates when the
This warning light will illuminate, and a
pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service driver or passenger seat belt is
chime will sound, to indicate low engine
should be obtained as soon as possible. unbuckled. When the ignition is first
oil pressure. If the light and chime turn on
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
while driving, safely stop the vehicle and
position and if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled,
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning turn off the engine as soon as possible. After the
a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When
Light vehicle is safely stopped, restart the engine and
driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
monitor the Oil Pressure Warning Light. If the Oil
This warning light warns of an remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
Pressure Warning Light is still illuminated, turn the
overheated engine condition. If the will flash or remain on continuously and a chime
engine OFF and contact an authorized dealer for
engine coolant temperature is too high, will sound Ú page 334.
further assistance. Do not operate the vehicle until
this indicator will illuminate and a single
the cause is corrected. If the lamp is no longer Tailgate Open Warning Light
chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the
illuminated, the engine can be operated but it is This warning light will illuminate when the
upper limit, a continuous chime will sound for four
recommended to take the vehicle to an authorized tailgate is open.
minutes or until the engine is able to cool,
dealer as soon as possible.
whichever comes first.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over NOTE:
corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
is in the engine. The engine oil level must be
system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission chime.
checked under the hood.
into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal,
turn the engine off immediately and call for service
Ú page 387.
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light Vehicle Security Warning Light — If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
If Equipped driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
This warning light will illuminate when the
system is not functioning and service is required as
Trailer Brake has been disconnected. This light will flash at a fast rate for soon as possible. However, the conventional brake
approximately 15 seconds when the system will continue to operate normally,
Transmission Temperature Warning Light — vehicle security system is arming, and assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
then will flash slowly until the vehicle
If Equipped is disarmed. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position,
This warning light will illuminate to warn
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS have the brake system inspected by an authorized
3
of a high transmission fluid temperature.
This may occur with strenuous usage dealer.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault
such as trailer towing. If this light turns Electronic Park Brake Warning Light
on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
slightly faster, with the transmission in PARK or This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the Electronic Park Brake is not
NEUTRAL, until the light turns off. Once the light indicate a fault in the ACC system.
functioning properly and service is
turns off, you may continue to drive normally. Contact an authorized dealer for service
required. Contact an authorized dealer.
Ú page 178.
WARNING! Air Suspension Fault Warning Light — Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
If you continue operating the vehicle when the If Equipped Warning Light — If Equipped
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is This warning light will indicate when the
This light will illuminate when a fault is
illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, ESC system is Active. The ESC Indicator
detected with the air suspension system.
come in contact with hot engine or exhaust Light in the instrument cluster will come
components and cause a fire. on when the ignition is placed in the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC
Light is activated. It should go out with the engine
CAUTION! running. If the ESC Indicator Light comes on
This warning light monitors the ABS.
continuously with the engine running, a
Continuous driving with the Transmission The light will turn on when the ignition is
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system.
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
If this warning light remains on after several
eventually cause severe transmission damage position and may stay on for as long as
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
or transmission failure. four seconds.
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — the light stays on through several typical driving
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as If Equipped styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive
soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed normally and will not require towing.
and corrected. This warning light will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low. When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to
 The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi- alert serious conditions that could lead to
cator Light come on momentarily each time the immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/ Low Fuel Warning Light converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced
RUN position. When the fuel level is less than a ¼ tank, by an authorized dealer as soon as possible if this
 The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking and the Distance to Empty is less than occurs.
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the 50 miles, this light will turn on and
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive. remain on until fuel is added. WARNING!
 This light will come on when the vehicle is in an A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
ESC event. Warning. referenced above, can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
Warning Light — If Equipped Warning Light (MIL) slowly or park over flammable substances such
This warning light indicates The MIL is a part of an Onboard as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could
the ESC is off. Diagnostic System called OBD II that result in death or serious injury to the driver,
monitors engine and automatic occupants or others.
transmission control systems. This
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ warning light will illuminate when the ignition is in
ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the CAUTION!
turned off previously. bulb does not come on when turning the ignition
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Service LaneSense Warning Light — switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the
If Equipped checked promptly.
vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel
This warning light will illuminate when the Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing,
LaneSense system is not operating and cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light severe catalytic converter damage and power
requires service. Please contact an after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
authorized dealer. required.
Rear Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light — Cruise Control Fault Warning Light Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should
If Equipped be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
This warning light will illuminate to
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the Cruise Control System is not
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
indicate when a rear axle locker fault has functioning properly and service is
inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of
been detected. required. Contact an authorized dealer.
a different size than the size indicated on the
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
Light — If Equipped Warning Light should determine the proper tire inflation pressure
for those tires. 3
This warning light will illuminate to The warning light switches on and a
indicate a fault in the FCW System. message is displayed to indicate that the As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
Contact an authorized dealer for service tire pressure is lower than the equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Ú page 325. recommended value and/or that slow (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal when one or more of your tires is significantly
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light — tire duration and fuel consumption may not be underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
If Equipped guaranteed. pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and
This warning light will illuminate when the Should one or more tires be in the condition check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
Stop/Start system is not functioning mentioned above, the display will show the them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
properly and service is required. Contact indications corresponding to each tire. significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
an authorized dealer for service. overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation
CAUTION! also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
This warning light will illuminate to signal Do not continue driving with one or more flat ability.
a fault with the 4WD system. If the light tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
stays on or comes on during driving, it vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
means that the 4WD system is not tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
functioning properly and that service is required. the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an
even if underinflation has not reached the level to
We recommend you drive to the nearest service authorized dealer as soon as possible.
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
center and have the vehicle serviced immediately. telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator Light —
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system CAUTION!
If Equipped
is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction The TPMS has been optimized for the original
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure This light will illuminate when the air
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, suspension system is set to the Off-Road
and warning have been established for the tire
the telltale will flash for approximately one minute 1 setting Ú page 165.
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
and then remain continuously illuminated. This system operation or sensor damage may result Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator Light —
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle when using replacement equipment that is not If Equipped
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket
the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the This light will illuminate when the air
wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire suspension system is set to the Off-Road
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may 2 setting Ú page 165.
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
occur for a variety of reasons, including the become inoperable. After using an aftermarket Air Suspension Normal Height Indicator
installation of replacement or alternate tires or tire sealant it is recommended that you take Light— If Equipped
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
This light will illuminate when the air
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS sensor function checked.
suspension system is set to the Normal
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
setting Ú page 165.
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height
the TPMS to continue to function properly. Indicator Light— If Equipped
Air Suspension Payload Protection
Indicator Light — If Equipped This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is set to the
This indicator light will illuminate to
Aerodynamic setting.
indicate that the maximum payload may
have been exceeded or load leveling Air Suspension Ride Height Raising
cannot be achieved at its current ride Indicator Light— If Equipped
height. Protection Mode will automatically be
This light will blink and alert the driver
selected to “protect” the air suspension system, air
that the vehicle is changing to a higher
suspension adjustment is limited due to payload.
ride height.
Air Suspension Ride Height Lowering Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light 4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
Indicator Light— If Equipped This light indicates when the rear axle This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
This light will blink and alert the driver lock has been activated. is in the 4WD Low mode. The front and
that the vehicle is changing to a lower rear driveshafts are mechanically locked
ride height. together forcing the front and rear
Entry/Exit Indicator Light— wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range
Cargo Light — If Equipped If Equipped provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide
This indicator light will illuminate when increased torque at the wheels Ú page 160.
This light will illuminate when the vehicle 3
the cargo light is activated by pushing the is automatically lowered from ride height 4WD High Indicator Light — If Equipped
cargo light button on the headlight position downward for easy entry and exit
switch. of the vehicle Ú page 165. This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
is in the 4WD High mode. The front and
Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator TOW/HAUL Indicator Light rear driveshafts are mechanically locked
Light — If Equipped This indicator light will illuminate when together forcing the front and rear
This indicator light illuminates to indicate TOW/HAUL mode is selected. wheels to rotate at the same speed.
that Forward Collision Warning is off. Wait To Start Indicator Light — If Equipped
Trailer Merge Assist Indicator Light — This indicator light will illuminate for
Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Indicator If Equipped approximately two seconds when the
Light — If Equipped ignition is turned to the RUN position. Its
This indicator light will illuminate to
duration may be longer based on colder
The Low DEF Indicator will illuminate if indicate when Trailer Merge Assist has
operating conditions. Vehicle will not initiate start
the vehicle is low on Diesel Exhaust Fluid been activated Ú page 319.
until telltale is no longer displayed Ú page 146.
(DEF) Ú page 209. 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped NOTE:
NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped This light alerts the driver that the vehicle The Wait To Start Indicator Light may not illuminate
This light alerts the driver that the 4WD is in the four-wheel drive mode, and the if the intake manifold temperature is warm
power transfer case is in the NEUTRAL front and rear driveshafts are enough.
mode and the front and rear driveshafts mechanically locked together forcing the
are disengaged from the powertrain. front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
Water In Fuel Indicator Light — If Equipped GREEN INDICATOR L IGHTS LaneSense Indicator Light —
The Water In Fuel Indicator Light will If Equipped
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
illuminate when there is water detected The LaneSense indicator light illuminates
in the fuel filter. If this light remains on, Target Light — If Equipped
solid green when both lane markings
DO NOT start the vehicle before you drain This will display when the ACC is set and have been detected and the system is
the water from the fuel filter to prevent engine a vehicle in front is detected “armed” and ready to provide visual and
damage, and please see an authorized dealer. Ú page 178. torque warnings if an unintentional lane departure
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No occurs Ú page 196.
CAUTION!
Target Detected Indicator Light — Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
The presence of water in the fuel system circuit
If Equipped This indicator light will illuminate when
may cause severe damage to the injection
This light will turn on when the ACC is SET the parking lights or headlights are
system and irregular engine operation. If the
and there is no vehicle in front detected turned on.
indicator light is illuminated, contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to bleed Ú page 178. Cruise Control SET Indicator Light —
the system. If the above indications come on ECO Mode Indicator Light If Equipped With Premium Instrument
immediately after refuelling, water, or AdBlue Cluster Display
This light will turn on when ECO mode is
(UREA) has probably been poured into the tank:
active. This light will turn on when the cruise
switch the engine off immediately and contact
an authorized dealer. control is set Ú page 176.
Front Fog Indicator Light —
If Equipped Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —
This indicator light will illuminate when If Equipped
the front fog lights are on. This indicator light will illuminate when
the Stop/Start function is in “Autostop”
mode Ú page 174.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights WHITE INDICATOR L IGHTS LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the left or right turn signal is When the LaneSense system is ON, but
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light —
activated, the turn signal indicator will not armed, the LaneSense indicator light
flash independently and the If Equipped illuminates solid white. This occurs when
corresponding exterior turn signal lamps This light will illuminate when the vehicle only left, right, or neither lane line has
will flash. Turn signals can be activated when the equipped with ACC has been turned on been detected. If a single lane line is detected, the
multifunction lever is moved down (left) or but not set Ú page 178. system is ready to provide only visual warnings if
up (right). an unintentional lane departure occurs on the 3
Cruise Control Ready Indicator
NOTE: detected lane line Ú page 196.
This indicator light will illuminate when
 A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is the cruise control is ready, but not set Cruise Control SET Indicator Light —
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either Ú page 176. If Equipped With Base/Midline Instrument
turn signal on. Cluster Display
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light —
 Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if This light will turn on when the cruise
If Equipped
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate. control is set Ú page 176.
This indicator shows when the HDC
 If equipped with fog lamps, the fog lamp on the
feature is turned on. The lamp will be on
side of the activated turn signal will also illumi-
nate to provide additional light when turning.
solid when HDC is armed. HDC can only BLUE INDICATOR L IGHTS
be armed when the transfer case is in the
4WD AUTO Indicator Light — If Equipped 4WD Low position and the vehicle speed is less High Beam Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle then 20 mph (32 km/h). If these conditions are not This indicator light will illuminate to
is in the four-wheel drive auto mode, and met while attempting to use the HDC feature, the indicate that the high beam headlights
the front axle is engaged, but the HDC indicator light will flash on/off. are on. With the low beams activated,
vehicle's power is sent to the rear wheels. push the multifunction lever forward
Four-wheel drive will be automatically engaged (toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high
when the vehicle senses a loss of traction beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward
Ú page 160. (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high
beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever
toward you for a temporary high beam on, “flash to
pass” scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II CAUTION! WARNING!

Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated  Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause  ONLY an authorized service technician should
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This further damage to the emission control connect equipment to the OBD II connection
system monitors the performance of the system. It could also affect fuel economy and port in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or
emissions, engine, and transmission control driveability. The vehicle must be serviced service your vehicle.
systems. When these systems are operating before any emissions tests can be performed.
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent  If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine  If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is OBD II connection port, such as a
emissions well within current government running, severe catalytic converter damage driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
regulations. and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
 Be possible that vehicle systems,
service is required.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II including safety related systems, could be
system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light impaired or a loss of vehicle control could
(MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other O NBOARD D IAGNOSTIC S YSTEM occur that may result in an accident
information to assist your service technician in involving serious injury or death.
(OBD II) C YBERSECURITY
making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually  Access, or allow others to access, infor-
be drivable and not need towing, see an authorized Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a mation stored in your vehicle systems,
dealer for service as soon as possible. connection port to allow access to information including personal information.
related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need
to access this information to assist with the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system Ú page 233.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station.
 The MIL will not flash at all and will remain
fully illuminated until you place the ignition
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, in the off position or start the engine. This
you must do the following: means that your vehicle's OBD II system is
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to ready and you can proceed to the I/M
pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine. station.
control system. Failure to pass could prevent
vehicle registration. NOTE: If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see
For states that require an Inspection and If you crank or start the engine, you will have to an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your 3
Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies start this test over. vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing
functioning and is not on when the ON position, you will see the Malfunction more than drive your vehicle as you normally would
engine is running, and that the OBD II system is Indicator Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of in order for your OBD II system to update. A
ready for testing. a normal bulb check. recheck with the above test routine may then
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two indicate that the system is now ready.
OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was things will happen: Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system
recently serviced, recently had a depleted battery  The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during
or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system then return to being fully illuminated until normal vehicle operation you should have your
should be determined not ready for the I/M test, you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station.
your vehicle may fail the test. This means that your vehicle's OBD II The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the
system is not ready and you should not MIL is on with the engine running.
proceed to the I/M station.
140
STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING THE ENGINE WARNING! WARNING!
GASOLINE ENGINE  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,  Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, or in a location accessible to children, and do complete stop, then shift the automatic trans-
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped mission into PARK and apply the parking brake.
your seat belt. with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or
 Always make sure the ENGINE START/STOP
The starter should not be operated for more than ON/RUN position. A child could operate power
button is in the OFF position, key fob is removed
10-second intervals. Waiting at least 10 to 15 windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
from the vehicle and vehicle is locked.
seconds between such intervals will protect the  Do not leave children or animals inside parked
starter from overheating. vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving chil-
may cause serious injury or death.
WARNING! dren in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could
 When leaving the vehicle, always make sure DIESEL ENGINE be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
the keyless ignition node is in the OFF posi- Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, both be warned not to touch the parking brake,
tion, remove the key fob from the vehicle and inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat brake pedal or the gear selector.
lock the vehicle. belts.  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with The starter is allowed to crank for up to 25-second or in a location accessible to children, and do
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil- intervals. Waiting at least two minutes between not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is such intervals will protect the starter from with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or overheating. RUN position. A child could operate power
others could be seriously or fatally injured. windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector. vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 141
NOTE: TIP START F EATURE To Turn Off The Engine Using The ENGINE START/
Engine start-up in very low ambient temperature STOP Button
could result in evident white smoke. This condition Do not press the accelerator. Cycle the ignition
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
will disappear as the engine warms up. switch briefly to the START position and release it.
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
The starter motor will continue to run and will
The ignition will return to the OFF position.
CAUTION! automatically disengage when the engine is
running. 2. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
 The engine is allowed to crank as long as START/STOP button must be held for two
25 seconds. If the engine fails to start during KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — IGNITION seconds or three short pushes in a row with
this period, please wait at least two minutes the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h)
for the starter to cool before repeating start This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as before the engine will shut off. The ignition will
procedure. remain in the ACC position until the gear 4
the Remote Start/Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ key fob is
 If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on, in the passenger compartment. selector is in PARK and the button is pushed
DO NOT START engine before you drain the twice to the OFF position.
water from the fuel filter to avoid engine NORMAL STARTING USING ENGINE 3. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the
damage Ú page 412. START/STOP B UTTON — GASOLINE ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once
with the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h),
ENGINE the instrument cluster will display a “Vehicle
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/ Not In Park” message and the engine will
Start the engine with the transmission in PARK STOP Button remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of
position. Apply the brake before shifting into any 1. The transmission must be in PARK. the PARK position, or it could roll.
driving range.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing NOTE:
NOTE: the ENGINE START/STOP button once. If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the ENGINE
 This vehicle is equipped with a transmission 3. The system starts the vehicle. If the vehicle START/STOP button is pushed once with the
shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must fails to start, the starter will disengage vehicle speed below 5 mph (8 km/h), the engine
be pressed to shift out of PARK. automatically after 10 seconds. will shut off and the ignition will remain in the ACC
 If equipped with an 8-speed transmission, 4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine position. If vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph
starting the vehicle in NEUTRAL is not possible prior to the engine starting, push the button (1.9 km/h), the vehicle may AutoPark
unless the Manual Park Release has been acti- again. Ú page 142.
vated Ú page 388.
142 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With NOTE:

Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or WARNING! For Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ equipped vehicles, the
NEUTRAL Position)  Driver inattention could lead to failure to place engine will turn off and the ignition switch will
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL change to ACC position. After 30 minutes the
to an ignition switch. It has three modes: OFF, ACC, CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK by verifying ignition switches to OFF automatically, unless the
and ON/RUN. To change the ignition modes that a solid (not blinking) “P” is indicated in driver turns the ignition switch OFF.
without starting the vehicle and use the the instrument cluster display and near the If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the
accessories, follow these directions: gear selector. If the “P” indicator is blinking, vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle may
your vehicle is not in PARK. As an added AutoPark.
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
precaution, always apply the parking brake
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions
when exiting the vehicle.
place the ignition to the ACC position. are met:
 AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not  Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and an
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a designed to replace the need to shift your
second time to place the ignition to the 8-speed transmission
vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system and
ON/RUN position. should not be relied upon as the primary  Vehicle is not in PARK
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third method by which the driver shifts the vehicle  Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
time to return the ignition to the OFF position. into PARK.  Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
 Driver’s door is ajar
AUTOPARK If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off
 Brake pedal is not pressed
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
placing the vehicle in PARK should the situations The message “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions
on the following pages occur. It is a back-up system Shift to Gear” will display in the instrument cluster.
are met:
and should not be relied upon as the primary NOTE:
 Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and an
method by which the driver shifts the vehicle In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be
8-speed transmission
into PARK. displayed in the instrument cluster, causing the
 Vehicle is not in PARK “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then Shift to Gear”
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage
are outlined on the following pages.  Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less message to not be seen. In these cases, the gear
selector must be returned to “P” to select desired
 Ignition is switched from ON/RUN to ACC
gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the The message “AutoPark Not Engaged” will be
vehicle may AutoPark. displayed in the instrument cluster. A warning WARNING!
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is chime will continue until you shift the vehicle into  Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to
1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less. PARK or the driver’s door is closed. get it started. Vehicles equipped with an auto-
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in matic transmission cannot be started this
The message “Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to
PARK by looking for the "P" in the instrument way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
P” will be displayed in the instrument cluster if
cluster display and near the gear selector. As an converter and once the engine has started,
vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h).
added precaution, always apply the parking brake ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
WARNING! when exiting the vehicle.  If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
I F E NGINE F AILS T O S TART booster cables may be used to obtain a start
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the 4
from a booster battery or the battery in
transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the
If the engine fails to start after you have followed another vehicle. This type of start can be
vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h).
the “Normal Starting” procedure, it may be dangerous if done improperly Ú page 384.
A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL position can roll. As
flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to
an added precaution, always apply the parking
the floor and hold it there while the engine is
brake when exiting the vehicle.
cranking. This should clear any excess fuel in case CAUTION!
the engine is flooded.
4WD LOW — If Equipped To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time.
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the 10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
vehicle in 4WD LOW. release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal,
The message “AutoPark Disabled” will be wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure. If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run,
displayed in the instrument cluster. but not have enough power to continue running
Additional customer warnings will be given when WARNING! when the ignition button/key is released. If this
all of these conditions are met: occurs, continue cranking with the accelerator
 Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
 Vehicle is not in PARK
the throttle body air inlet opening in an accelerator pedal and the ignition button/key once
 Driver’s door is ajar attempt to start the vehicle. This could result the engine is running smoothly.
 Vehicle is in 4WD LOW in flash fire causing serious personal injury.
(Continued)
If the engine shows no sign of starting after a 2. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
10 second period of engine cranking with the CAUTION! START/STOP button must be held for two
accelerator pedal held to the floor, wait 10 to If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on, seconds or three short pushes in a row with
15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” DO NOT START the engine before you drain the the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h)
procedure. water from the fuel filter to avoid engine damage before the engine will shut off. The ignition will
Ú page 412. remain in the ACC position until the gear
NORMAL STARTING USING ENGINE selector is in PARK and the button is pushed
START/STOP B UTTON — DIESEL 3. The system starts the vehicle. If the vehicle
twice to the OFF position.
E NGINE fails to start, the starter will disengage 3. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the
automatically after 25 seconds. ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once
Observe the instrument panel telltales when with the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h),
starting the engine. 4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
the instrument cluster will display a “Vehicle
prior to the engine starting, push the button
NOTE: Not In Park” message and the engine will
again.
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of
obtained without pumping or pressing the accel- NOTE: the PARK position, or it could roll.
erator pedal.
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/ NOTE:
obtained without pumping or pressing the accel-
STOP Button If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the ENGINE
erator pedal.
START/STOP button is pushed once with the
1. The transmission must be in PARK (P). To Turn Off The Engine Using The ENGINE START/ vehicle speed below 5 mph (8 km/h), the engine
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing STOP Button will shut off and the ignition will remain in the ACC
the ENGINE START/STOP button once. 1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push position. If vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph
NOTE: and release the ENGINE START/STOP button. (1.9 km/h), the vehicle may AutoPark
A delay of the start, up to five seconds is possible The ignition will return to the OFF position. Ú page 142.
under very cold conditions. The Wait to Start
telltale will be illuminated during the pre-heat
process. When the engine Wait To Start light goes
off the engine will automatically crank.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With AFTER S TARTING WARNING!

Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position) The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
will decrease as the engine warms up. access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar
to an ignition switch. It has three positions: OFF, STARTING FLUIDS — DIESEL E NGINE children to be in a vehicle unattended is
ACC, and ON/RUN. To change the ignition modes dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
without starting the vehicle and use the
ONLY others could be seriously or fatally injured.
accessories, follow these directions: The engine is equipped with a glow plug preheating Children should be warned not to touch the
system. If the instructions in this manual are parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
followed, the engine should start in all conditions selector.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
and no type of starting fluid should be used.  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, 4
place the ignition to the ACC position.
or in a location accessible to children, and do
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a WARNING! not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
second time to place the ignition to the ON/ with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/
RUN position. RUN position. A child could operate power
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third may cause serious injury or death. windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
time to return the ignition to the OFF position.
 When leaving the vehicle, always make sure
COLD WEATHER OPERATION (B ELOW the wireless ignition node is in the OFF posi-
tion, remove the key fob from the vehicle and
–22°F O R −30°C) lock the vehicle.
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, (Continued)
use of an externally powered electric engine block
heater (available from an authorized dealer) is
recommended.
NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE COLD WEATHER PRECAUTIONS NOTE:

 Use of Climatized ULSD Fuel or Number 1 ULSD
Observe the following when the diesel engine is Operation in ambient temperature below 32°F
Fuel results in a noticeable decrease in fuel
operating. (0°C) may require special considerations. The
economy.
following charts suggest these options:
 All message center lights are off.  Climatized ULSD Fuel is a blend of Number 2
 Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is off. Fuel Operating Range ULSD and Number 1 ULSD Fuels which reduces
 Engine Oil Pressure telltale is not illuminated. NOTE: the temperature at which wax crystals form in
Use Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD) Fuels ONLY. fuel.
 Voltmeter operation:
 The fuel grade should be clearly marked on the
The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at pump at the fuel station.
various engine temperatures. This is caused by the
glow plug heating system. The number of cycles  The engine requires the use of ULSD Fuel. Use
and the length of the cycling operation is controlled of incorrect fuel could result in engine and
by the engine control module. Glow plug heater exhaust system damage Ú page 469.
operation can run for several minutes, once the  If Climatized or diesel Number 1 ULSD Fuel is
heater operation is complete the voltmeter needle not available, and you are operating below
will stabilize. (20°F/-6°C), in sustained arctic conditions,
Mopar® Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment (or
equivalent) is recommended to avoid gelling
(see Fuel Operating Range Chart).
Engine Oil Usage
For the correct engine oil viscosity Ú page 473.
Fuel Operating Range Chart
*Number 1 ULSD Fuel should only be used where
extended arctic conditions below (0°F/-18°C)
exist.
Winter Front Cover Engine Warm-Up ENGINE IDLING

Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is Avoid prolonged idling. Long periods of idling may
cold. When starting a cold engine, bring the engine be harmful to your engine because combustion
up to operating speed slowly to allow the oil chamber temperatures can drop so low that the
pressure to stabilize as the engine warms up. fuel may not burn completely. Incomplete
If temperatures are below 32°F (0°C), operate the combustion allows carbon and varnish to form on
engine at moderate speeds for five minutes before piston rings, cylinder head valves, turbochargers,
full loads are applied. and injector nozzles. Also, the unburned fuel can
enter the crankcase, diluting the oil and causing
rapid wear to the engine.
4
Winter Front Cover
A Winter front or cold weather cover can be used in
ambient temperatures below 32°F (0°C),
especially during extended idle conditions. This
cover is equipped with four flaps for managing
total grille opening in varying ambient
temperatures. If a Winter front or cold weather
cover is to be used the flaps should be in the full
open position to allow air flow to the cooling
module and automatic transmission oil cooler.
When ambient temperatures drop below 0°F
(-17°C) the four flaps need to be closed. A suitable
cold weather cover is available from a Mopar®
dealer.
STOPPING THE ENGINE

After full load operation, idle the engine for a few minutes before shutting it down. This idle period will allow the lubricating oil and coolant to carry excess heat
away from the turbocharger. Refer to the following chart for proper engine shutdown.
Idle Time (min.)

Driving Condition Load Turbocharger Temperature
Before Engine Shutdown
Stop and Go Empty Cool None
Stop and Go Medium 0.5
Highway Speeds Medium Warm 1.0
City Traffic Maximum GCWR 1.5
Highway Speeds Maximum GCWR 2.0
Uphill Grade Maximum GCWR Hot 2.5
NOTE:
Under certain conditions the engine Stop/Start functionality may be temporarily disabled and the engine fan will run after the engine is turned off to protect the
engine. These conditions are under high load and high temperature conditions.
Do Not Operate The Engine With Low Oil Do Not Operate The Engine With Failed The engine block heater warms engine coolant and
Pressure Parts permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the
heater cord to a ground-fault interrupter protected
If the Low Oil Pressure Warning Light turns on while All engine failures give some warning before the 110–115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded,
driving, stop the vehicle and shut down the engine parts fail. Some important observations are: three-wire extension cord.
as soon as possible. After the vehicle is safely  Engine misfiring or vibrating severely
stopped, restart the engine and monitor the lamp. For diesel engines, its use is recommended for
If the lamp is still illuminated, shut the engine off,  Sudden loss of power environments that routinely fall below -10°F
contact an authorized dealer, and do not operate  Unusual engine noises (-23°C). It should be used when the vehicle has not
the vehicle until the cause is corrected. If the lamp been running for long periods of time and should
 Fuel, oil or coolant leaks
is no longer illuminated, the engine can be be plugged in two hours prior to start. Its use is
operated, but should be taken to an authorized  Sudden change, outside the normal operating required for cold starts with temperatures under 4
dealer as soon as possible for further inspection. range, in the engine operating temperature -20°F (-28°C).
 Excessive smoke To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures,
NOTE:
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is  Oil pressure drop use of an externally powered electric engine block
corrected. This light does not show how much oil is heater (available from an authorized dealer) is
in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED recommended.
under the hood. The engine block heater cord is routed under the
hood on the passenger side of the vehicle next to
CAUTION! the engine coolant reservoir.
If oil pressure falls to less than normal readings,
shut the engine off immediately. Failure to do so
WARNING!
could result in immediate and severe engine Remember to disconnect the engine block
damage. heater cord before driving. Damage to the
110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
Engine Block Heater Cord Location

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS — NOTE:

A new engine may consume some oil during its first
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory
is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant.
GASOLINE ENGINE few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated
should be considered a normal part of the break-in climate conditions under which vehicle operations
A long break-in period is not required for the engine will occur. For the recommended viscosity and
and not interpreted as a problem. Please check
and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your quality grades Ú page 473.
your oil level with the engine oil indicator often
vehicle.
during the break-in period. Add oil as required. NOTE:
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS — MUST NEVER BE USED.
desirable. DIESEL ENGINE PARKING BRAKE
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within The diesel engine does not require a break-in
the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good period due to its construction. Normal operation is ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low allowed, providing the following recommendations
gear can be detrimental and should be avoided. are followed: Your vehicle is equipped with an EPB that offers
simple operation, and some additional features
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory  Warm up the engine before placing it under that make the parking brake more convenient and
is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. load. useful.
Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated
 Do not operate the engine at idle for prolonged The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent
climate conditions under which vehicle operations
periods. the vehicle from rolling while parked. Before
will occur. For the recommended viscosity and
quality grades Ú page 473.  Observe vehicle oil pressure and temperature leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
indicators. brake is applied. Also, be certain to leave the
CAUTION!  Check the coolant and oil levels frequently. transmission in PARK.
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral  Vary throttle position at highway speeds when You can engage the parking brake in two ways:
Oil in the engine or damage may result. carrying or towing significant weight.  Manually, by applying the parking brake switch.
NOTE:  Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake
Light duty operation such as light trailer towing or feature in the Customer Programmable
no load operation will extend the time before the Features section of the Uconnect settings.
engine is at full efficiency. Reduced fuel economy
and power may be seen at this time.
The parking brake switch is located on the NOTE: NOTE:

instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel The EPB fault light will illuminate if the EPB switch When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
(below the headlamp switch). is held for longer than 20 seconds in either the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
released or applied position. The light will extin- and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply
guish upon releasing the switch. the parking brake before placing the gear selector
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission
parking brake will automatically engage whenever locking mechanism may make it difficult to move
the transmission is placed into PARK. If your foot is the gear selector out of PARK.
on the brake pedal, you may notice a small amount
of brake pedal movement while the parking brake WARNING!
is engaging.  Never use the PARK position as a substitute 4
The parking brake will release automatically when for the parking brake. Always apply the
the ignition is ON, the transmission is in DRIVE or parking brake fully when parked to guard
REVERSE, the driver seat belt is buckled, and an against vehicle movement and possible injury
Electric Park Brake Switch attempt is made to drive away. or damage.
To apply the parking brake manually, pull up on the To release the parking brake manually, the ignition  When exiting the vehicle, always remove the
switch momentarily. You may hear a slight sound switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Put your key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
from the back of the vehicle while the parking foot on the brake pedal, then push the parking
brake engages. Once the park brake is fully brake switch down momentarily. You may hear a
engaged, the BRAKE telltale light in the instrument access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
slight whirring sound from the back of the vehicle
cluster and an indicator on the switch will dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
while the parking brake disengages. You may also
illuminate. If your foot is on the brake pedal while dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
notice a small amount of movement in the brake
you apply the parking brake, you may notice a others could be seriously or fatally injured.
pedal. Once the parking brake is fully disengaged,
small amount of brake pedal movement. The Children should be warned not to touch the
the BRAKE telltale light in the instrument cluster
parking brake can be applied even when the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
and the LED indicator on the switch will extinguish.
ignition switch is OFF but the BRAKE telltale light selector.
will not illuminate, however, it can only be released (Continued)
when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
If exceptional circumstances should make it Auto Park Brake

WARNING! necessary to engage the parking brake while the
The Electric Park Brake (EPB) can be programmed
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, vehicle is in motion, maintain upward pressure on
to be applied automatically whenever the vehicle is
or in a location accessible to children, and do the EPB switch for as long as engagement is
at a standstill and the automatic transmission is
not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless desired. The BRAKE telltale light will illuminate,
placed in PARK. Auto Park Brake is enabled and
Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position. and a continuous chime will sound. The rear stop
disabled by customer selection through the
A child could operate power windows, other lamps will also be illuminated automatically while
Customer Programmable Features section of the
controls, or move the vehicle. the vehicle remains in motion.
Uconnect Settings Ú page 249.
 Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged To disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is
Any single Auto Park Brake application can be
before driving; failure to do so can lead to in motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is
bypassed by pushing the EPB switch to the release
brake failure and a collision. brought to a complete stop using the parking
position while the transmission is placed in PARK.
brake, when the vehicle reaches approximately
 Always fully apply the parking brake when 3 mph, (5 km/h) the parking brake will remain SafeHold
leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause engaged. SafeHold is a safety feature of the Electric Park
damage or injury. Also be certain to leave the Brake (EPB) system that will engage the parking
transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may WARNING! brake automatically if the vehicle is left unsecured
allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or while the ignition is in ON/RUN.
injury. Driving the vehicle with the parking brake
engaged, or repeated use of the parking brake The parking brake will automatically engage if all of
to slow the vehicle, may cause serious damage the following conditions are met:
CAUTION! to the brake system. Be sure the parking brake  The vehicle is at a standstill.
is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on so can lead to brake failure and a collision.  There is no attempt to press the brake pedal
with the parking brake released, a brake system and accelerator pedal.
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system  The seat belt is unbuckled.
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB
system, a yellow EPB fault light will illuminate. This  The driver door is open.
may be accompanied by the BRAKE telltale light
flashing. In this event, urgent service of the EPB
system is required. Do not rely on the parking
brake to hold the vehicle stationary.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing While in Service Mode, the EPB fault lamp will flash
the EPB switch while the driver door is open. Once continuously while the ignition is in ON/RUN. WARNING!
manually bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled When brake service work is complete, the following  Your vehicle could move and injure you and
again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) steps must be followed to reset the park brake others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
or the ignition is turned to the OFF position and system to normal operation: move the transmission gear selector out of
back to ON again. PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
 Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
Brake Service Mode sure the transmission is in PARK before
 Press the brake pedal with moderate force. exiting the vehicle.
We recommend having your brakes serviced by an
 Apply the EPB Switch.
authorized dealer. You should only make repairs  The transmission may not engage PARK if the
for which you have the knowledge and the right vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
equipment. You should only enter Brake Service
WARNING! complete stop before shifting to PARK, and 4
Mode during brake service. You can be badly injured working on or around a verify that the transmission gear position indi-
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be motor vehicle. Do only that service work for cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without
necessary for you or your technician to push the which you have the knowledge and the right blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
rear piston into the rear caliper bore. With the equipment. If you have any doubt about your stopped, and the PARK position is properly
Electric Park Brake (EPB) system, this can only be ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
done after retracting the EPB actuator. to a competent mechanic.
 It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
Fortunately, actuator retraction can be done easily NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
by entering the Brake Service Mode through the
Uconnect Settings in your vehicle. This
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
menu-based system will guide you through the You must press and hold the brake pedal while quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
steps necessary to retract the EPB actuator in shifting out of PARK. control of the vehicle and hit someone or
order to perform rear brake service. something. Only shift into gear when the
Service Mode has requirements that must be met
WARNING! engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
in order to be activated:  Never use the PARK position as a substitute pressing the brake pedal.
 The vehicle must be at a standstill. for the parking brake. Always apply the (Continued)
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
 The parking brake must be unapplied.
guard against vehicle movement and possible
 The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL. injury or damage.
(Continued)
WARNING! CAUTION! BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT

 Unintended movement of a vehicle could  Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
I NTERLOCK (BTSI) S YSTEM
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all the vehicle has come to a complete stop. This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while holds the transmission gear selector in PARK
 Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above
always come to a complete stop, then apply transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
idle speed.
the parking brake, shift the transmission into running and the brake pedal must be pressed.
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the  Before shifting into any gear, make sure your
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
ignition is in the OFF position, the transmis- foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle
sion is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
against unwanted movement.
I GNITION PARK INTERLOCK 8-SPEED A UTOMATIC T RANSMISSION
 When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Rotary Shifter — If Equipped
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. Interlock which requires the transmission to be in
PARK before the ignition can be turned to the OFF The transmission is controlled using a rotary
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with position. This helps the driver avoid inadvertently electronic gear selector located on the instrument
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil- leaving the vehicle without placing the panel. The transmission gear range (PRND) is
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is transmission in PARK. This system also locks the displayed both above the gear selector and in the
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in instrument cluster. To select a gear range, simply
others could be seriously or fatally injured. the OFF position. rotate the gear selector. You must press the brake
Children should be warned not to touch the pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK (or
NOTE: NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is stopped or moving at
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the low speeds). To shift past multiple gear ranges at
sion gear selector.
ignition is in the ACC position (even though the once (such as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission is gear selector to the appropriate detent. Select the
(or in a location accessible to children), and do in PARK, and the ignition is OFF (not in ACC DRIVE range for normal driving.
not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position) before exiting the vehicle.
position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
NOTE:  In the event of a mismatch between the gear

In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector position and the actual transmission
selector position and the actual transmission gear gear (for example, driver selects PARK while
(for example, driver selects PARK while driving), driving), the position indicator will blink continu-
the position indicator will blink continuously until ously until the selector is returned to the proper
the selector is returned to the proper position, or position, or the requested shift can be
the requested shift can be completed. completed.
The electronically controlled transmission adapts The electronically controlled transmission adapts
its shift schedule based on driver inputs, along its shift schedule based on driver inputs, along
with environmental and road conditions. The with environmental and road conditions.
transmission electronics are self-calibrating; Electronic Transmission Gear Selector Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when 4
therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, Console Shifter — If Equipped
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
and precision shifts will develop within a few The transmission gear range is displayed both pedal when shifting between these gears.
hundred miles (kilometers). beside the gear selector and in the instrument
cluster. To select a gear range, push the lock The transmission gear selector provides PARK,
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and SPORT (S) (AutoStick)
the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is button on the gear selector and move the selector
rearward or forward. To shift the transmission out shift positions. Manual shifts can be made using
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake the AutoStick shift control. Toggling the gear
pedal when shifting between these gears. of PARK (P), the engine must be running and the
brake pedal must be pressed. You must also press selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while in the
The transmission gear selector has only PARK, the brake pedal to shift from NEUTRAL (N) into SPORT (AutoStick) position (beside the DRIVE
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE positions. Manual DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R) when the vehicle is position), or tapping the paddle shifters (+/-)
downshifts can be made using the Electronic stopped or moving at low speeds. Select the DRIVE (if equipped), will manually select the transmission
Range Select (ERS) shift control. Pushing the range for normal driving. gear, and will display the current gear in the
GEAR “-”/GEAR “+” switches (on the steering instrument cluster Ú page 159.
wheel) while in the DRIVE position will select the NOTE:
highest available transmission gear, and will  The transmission electronics are self-calibrating;
display that gear limit in the instrument cluster as therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
1, 2, 3, etc. Ú page 158. Some models will display may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condi-
both the selected gear limit, and the actual current tion, and precision shifts will develop within a
gear, while in ERS mode. few hundred miles (kilometers).
PARK (P)
WARNING!
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be  Your vehicle could move and injure you and
started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking move the transmission gear selector out of
brake when exiting the vehicle in this range. PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
exiting the vehicle.
before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the  The transmission may not engage PARK if the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
Gear Selector on an uphill grade. complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
NOTE: NOTE: verify that the transmission gear position indi-
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK, On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed transfer case is in a drive position. blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
forward), it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) stopped, and the PARK position is properly
When exiting the vehicle, always: indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
position (beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick
 Apply the parking brake.
mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is  It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the gear  Shift the transmission into PARK. NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
selector to the right (into the DRIVE position) for  Turn the engine off. idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL. the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
 Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
Gear Ranges quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
WARNING! control of the vehicle and hit someone or
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting
something. Only shift into gear when the
from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.  Never use the PARK position as a substitute engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
NOTE: for the parking brake. Always apply the pressing the brake pedal.
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
(Continued)
allow the selected gear to engage before acceler- guard against vehicle movement and possible
ating. This is especially important when the engine injury or damage.
is cold. (Continued)
REVERSE (R)
WARNING! WARNING!
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
 Unintended movement of a vehicle could  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all (or in a location accessible to children), and do to a complete stop.
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
NEUTRAL (N)
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, position. A child could operate power
always come to a complete stop, then apply windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
the parking brake, shift the transmission into prolonged periods with the engine running. Apply
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the the parking brake and shift the transmission into
ignition is in the OFF position, the transmis- CAUTION! PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
sion is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
 DO NOT race the engine when shifting from WARNING!
4
against unwanted movement.
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
 When exiting the vehicle, always make sure this can damage the drivetrain. Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
 Before moving the transmission gear selector practices that limit your response to changing
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
out of PARK, you must start the engine, and traffic or road conditions. You might lose control
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, of the vehicle and have a collision.
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil- damage to the gear selector could result.
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or The following indicators should be used to ensure CAUTION!
others could be seriously or fatally injured. that you have properly engaged the transmission
Children should be warned not to touch the Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
into the PARK position:
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis- other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL
sion gear selector.  Look at the transmission gear position display can cause severe transmission damage.
and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P),
(Continued) and is not blinking. For Recreational Towing Ú page 228.
 With the brake pedal released, verify that the For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 390.
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
DRIVE (D) Vehicle performance may be severely degraded NOTE:

This range should be used for most city and and the engine may stall. In some situations, the Even if the transmission can be reset, we
highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts transmission may not re-engage if the engine is recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at
and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The turned off and restarted. The Malfunction Indicator your earliest possible convenience. An authorized
transmission automatically upshifts through all Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message in the dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the
forward gears. instrument cluster will inform the driver of the condition of your transmission. If the transmission
more serious conditions, and indicate what actions cannot be reset, an authorized dealer service is
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such may be necessary. required.
as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong In the event of a momentary problem, the Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation —
head winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), select transmission can be reset to regain all forward If Equipped
TOW/HAUL mode or use the Electronic Range gears by performing the following steps:
The ERS shift control allows the driver to limit the
Select (ERS) shift control to select a lower gear NOTE: highest available gear when the transmission is in
range Ú page 158. Under these conditions, using In cases where the instrument cluster message DRIVE and ERS mode is not active. For example, if
a lower gear range will improve performance and indicates the transmission may not re-engage after you set the transmission gear limit to FOURTH
extend transmission life by reducing excessive engine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a gear, the transmission will hold that gear and not
shifting and heat buildup. desired location (preferably, at an authorized shift above FOURTH gear, but will shift through the
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F dealer). lower gears normally.
[-30°C] or below), transmission operation may be 1. Stop the vehicle. NOTE:
modified depending on engine and transmission 2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. ERS will only upshift during a FIRST to SECOND
temperature as well as vehicle speed. Normal If not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. gear shift when in 4WD LOW. All other ranges will
operation will resume once the transmission hold the gear.
temperature has risen to a suitable level. 3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the
engine turns off. You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at
Transmission Limp Home Mode 4. Wait approximately 30 seconds. any vehicle speed. When the transmission gear
Transmission function is monitored electronically selector is in DRIVE, the transmission will operate
5. Restart the engine. automatically, shifting between all available gears.
for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected
that could result in transmission damage, 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the Tapping the “-” button (on the steering wheel) will
Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this problem is no longer detected, the activate ERS mode, display the current gear in the
mode, the transmission may operate only in transmission will return to normal operation. instrument cluster, and set that gear as the top
certain gears, or may not shift at all. available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping the “-”
or “+” button will change the top available gear.
maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable AutoStick mode will downshift the transmission to
upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall the next lower gear, while tapping “+” to enter
vehicle performance. This feature can also provide AutoStick mode will retain the current gear. The
you with more control during passing, city driving, current transmission gear will be displayed in the
cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer instrument cluster.
towing, and many other situations. AutoStick mode has the following operational
benefits:
 The transmission will automatically downshift
as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging)
and will display the current gear.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) 4
 The transmission will automatically downshift to
1 — Shift Up “+” FIRST gear when coming to a stop. After a stop,
2 — Shift Down “–” the driver should manually upshift “+” the trans-
mission as the vehicle is accelerated.
To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the “+”  You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or
button until the gear limit display disappears from SECOND gear (or THIRD gear, in 4WD LOW).
the instrument cluster. Paddle Shifters Tapping “+” (at a stop) will allow starting in
SECOND gear. Starting out in SECOND or THIRD
1 — “-” Paddle
WARNING! gear can be helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
2 — “+” Paddle
Do not downshift for additional engine braking  If a requested downshift would cause the
on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur.
Operation
lose their grip and the vehicle could skid,  The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too
causing a collision or personal injury. In AutoStick mode, you can use the gear selector low of a vehicle speed.
(in the SPORT position), or the paddle shifters, to
 Holding the “-” paddle pressed, or holding the
manually shift the transmission. To activate
AutoStick — If Equipped AutoStick mode, move the gear selector into the gear selector in the “-” position, will downshift
SPORT (S) position (beside the DRIVE position), or the transmission to the lowest gear possible at
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
tap one of the paddle shifters on the steering the current speed.
feature providing manual shift control, giving you
more control of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to wheel. Tapping the “-” shift paddle to enter
 Transmission shifting will be more noticeable

when AutoStick is enabled.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION —
 The system may revert to automatic shift mode IF EQUIPPED
if a fault or overheat condition is detected.
FOUR-P OSITION E LECTRONICALLY
NOTE:
When Selec-Speed or Hill Descent Control is S HIFTED TRANSFER CASE —
enabled, AutoStick is not active. I F E QUIPPED
To disengage AutoStick, return the gear selector to
This is an electronic shift transfer case and is
the DRIVE position, or press and hold the “+”
operated by the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer
paddle shifter (and the gear selector is already in
TOW/HAUL Switch Case Switch), located on the instrument panel.
DRIVE) until "D" is once again indicated in the
instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of The TOW/HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the
AutoStick at any time without taking your foot off instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL
the accelerator pedal. mode has been activated. Pushing the switch a
second time restores normal operation. Normal
WARNING! operation is always the default at engine start-up.
Do not downshift for additional engine braking If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the switch must be
on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could pushed each time the engine is started.
lose their grip and the vehicle could skid,
causing a collision or personal injury.
WARNING!
Do not use the TOW/HAUL feature when driving
in icy or slippery conditions. The increased Four-Position/On-Demand Transfer Case
When to Use TOW/HAUL Mode
engine braking can cause the rear wheels to
Select TOW/HAUL mode when driving in conditions slide, and the vehicle to swing around with the
such as: driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, possible loss of vehicle control, which may
carrying a heavy load, etc. This mode will improve cause an accident possibly resulting in personal
performance and reduce the potential for injury or death.
transmission overheating or failure due to
excessive shifting.
This electronically shifted transfer case provides  The transfer case N (Neutral) button is located
four positions: WARNING! in the center of the 4WD Control Switch and is
 Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD) — This  You or others could be injured or killed if you pushed by using a ballpoint pen or similar
range is for normal street and highway driving leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer object. The transfer case N (Neutral) position is
on dry hard surfaced roads. Driving the vehicle case in the N (Neutral) position without first to be used for recreational towing only
in 2WD will have greater fuel economy benefits fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer Ú page 228.
as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD. case N (Neutral) position disengages both the Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
front and rear drive shaft from the powertrain,
 Four-Wheel Drive High Range (4WD HIGH) — The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD
and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
This range provides torque to the front drive- HIGH and 4WD LOW) are located in the instrument
transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
shaft (engages four-wheel drive) which allows cluster and indicate the current and desired
front and rear wheels to spin at the same speed.
should always be applied when the driver is
transfer case selection. When you select a 4
not in the vehicle.
This provides additional traction for loose or different transfer case position, the indicator lights
slippery road surfaces only.  The transmission may not engage PARK if the will do the following:
 Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW) — This
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a 1. The current position indicator light will turn
range provides low speed four-wheel drive. It complete stop before shifting to PARK, and off.
maximizes torque (increased torque over 4WD verify that the transmission gear position indi-
cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without 2. The selected position indicator light will flash
HIGH) to the front driveshaft; allowing front and until the transfer case completes the shift.
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
range provides additional traction and stopped, and the PARK position is properly 3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light
maximum pulling power for loose or slippery indicated, before exiting the vehicle. for the selected position will stop flashing and
road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph remain on.
(40 km/h) in this range. NOTE: If the transfer case does not shift into the desired
 N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the  The 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions are position, one or more of the following events may
front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only. occur:
To be used for flat towing behind another Driving in the 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW posi-
1. The indicator light for the current position will
vehicle Ú page 228. tions on dry, hard surfaced roads may cause
remain on.
increased tire wear and damage to the driveline
components. 2. The newly selected position indicator light will
continue to flash.
3. If the transfer case will not shift, a message the 2WD or 4WD HIGH positions at a given road FIVE-P OSITION E LECTRONICALLY
will appear on the cluster stating the 4WD shift speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine and
has canceled. do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). S HIFTED TRANSFER CASE —
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles I F E QUIPPED
NOTE: depends on tires of equal size, type and
Before retrying a selection, make certain that all the This is an electronic shift transfer case and is
circumference on each wheel. Any difference in operated by the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer
necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain.
case position have been met. To retry the selection, Case Switch), which is located on the instrument
push the current position, wait five seconds, and Because four-wheel drive provides improved panel.
retry selection. traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning
and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road
The SERV 4WD Warning Light monitors the
conditions permit.
electronic shift four-wheel drive system. If this light
remains on after engine start-up or illuminates Shifting Procedure
during driving, it means that the four-wheel drive  If any of the requirements to select a new
system is not functioning properly and that service transfer case position have not been met, then
is required. the transfer case will not shift. The position indi-
cator light for the previous position will remain
WARNING! on and the newly selected position indicator
Always engage the parking brake when powering light will continue to flash until all the require-
down the vehicle if the SERV 4WD Warning Light ments for the selected position have been met. Five-Position/On-Demand Transfer Case
is illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake  If all the requirements to select a new transfer
may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause case position have been met, then the current
personal injury or death. position indicator light will turn off and the
selected position indicator light will flash until
NOTE: the transfer case completes the shift. When the
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front shift is complete, the position indicator light for
or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause the selected position will stop flashing and
damage to driveline components. remain on.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the
engine speed is approximately three times that of
 Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW) — This

range provides low speed four-wheel drive. It WARNING!
maximizes torque (increased torque over 4WD  The transmission may not engage PARK if the
HIGH) to the front driveshaft; allowing front and vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
range provides additional traction and verify that the transmission gear position indi-
maximum pulling power for loose or slippery cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without
road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
(40 km/h) in this range. stopped, and the PARK position is properly
 N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
Five-Position/On-Demand Transfer Case — GT Models front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. 4
To be used for flat towing behind another NOTE:
This electronically shifted transfer case provides vehicle Ú page 228.
five positions:  The 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions are
designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
 Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD) — This WARNING!
Driving in the 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW posi-
range is for normal street and highway driving
 You or others could be injured or killed if you tions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause
on dry hard surfaced roads. Driving the vehicle
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer increased tire wear and damage to the driveline
in 2WD will have greater fuel economy benefits
case in the N (Neutral) position without first components.
as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD.
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer  The transfer case N (Neutral) button is located
 Four-Wheel Drive Automatic High Range (4WD case N (Neutral) position disengages both the in the center of the 4WD Control Switch and is
AUTO) — This range sends power to the front front and rear drive shaft from the powertrain, pushed by using a ballpoint pen or similar
wheels automatically when the vehicle senses a and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the object. The transfer case N (Neutral) position is
loss of traction. This range may be used during transmission is in PARK. The parking brake to be used for recreational towing only
varying road conditions. should always be applied when the driver is Ú page 228.
 Four-Wheel Drive High Range (4WD HIGH) — not in the vehicle.
This range provides torque to the front drive- (Continued)
shaft (engages four-wheel drive) which allows
front and rear wheels to spin at the same speed.
This provides additional traction for loose or
slippery road surfaces only.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights NOTE: Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD Before retrying a selection, make certain that all depends on tires of equal size, type and
HIGH, 4WD LOW, and 4WD AUTO) are located in the necessary requirements for selecting a new circumference on each wheel. Any difference in
the instrument cluster and indicate the current transfer case position have been met. To retry the tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain.
and desired transfer case selection. When you selection, push the current position, wait five Because four-wheel drive provides improved
select a different transfer case position, the seconds, and retry selection. traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning
indicator lights will do the following: The SERV 4WD Warning Light monitors the and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road
1. The current position indicator light will electronic shift four-wheel drive system. If this light conditions permit.
remains on after engine start-up or illuminates
turn off. Shifting Procedure
during driving, it means that the four-wheel drive
2. The selected position indicator light will flash system is not functioning properly and that service  If any of the requirements to select a new
until the transfer case completes the shift. is required. transfer case position have not been met, then
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light the transfer case will not shift. The position indi-
for the selected position will stop flashing and WARNING! cator light for the previous position will remain
remain on. on and the newly selected position indicator
Always engage the parking brake when powering light will continue to flash until all the require-
If the transfer case does not shift into the desired down the vehicle if the SERV 4WD Warning Light ments for the selected position have been met.
position, one or more of the following events may is illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake
may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause  If all the requirements to select a new transfer
occur: case position have been met, then the current
personal injury or death.
1. The indicator light for the current position will position indicator light will turn off and the
remain on. selected position indicator light will flash until
NOTE: the transfer case completes the shift. When the
2. The newly selected position indicator light will
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front shift is complete, the position indicator light for
continue to flash.
or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause the selected position will stop flashing and
3. If the transfer case will not shift, there will be a damage to driveline components. remain on.
cluster message stating the 4WD shift has When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the
canceled. engine speed is approximately three times that of
the 2WD, 4WD AUTO or 4WD HIGH positions at a
given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the
engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
ACTIVE-LEVEL FOUR CORNER AIR not be available due to vehicle payload, an

instrument cluster message will be displayed
SUSPENSION SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED when this occurs Ú page 114.
DESCRIPTION CAUTION!
The air suspension system provides full-time If the vehicle is in Off-Road 1 or Off-Road 2
load-leveling capability along with the benefit of setting, be aware of your surroundings, you may
being able to adjust vehicle height by using the not have the clearance required for certain
toggle switch. areas and vehicle damage may occur.
Air Suspension Switch

 Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle approxi-
4
1 — Off-Road 2 Indicator (Customer Selectable) mately 1 inch [26 mm]) – This position should
2 — Off-Road 1 Indicator (Customer Selectable) be the primary position for all off-road driving
3 — Normal Ride Height Indicator until Off-Road 2 (OR2) is needed. A smoother
and more comfortable ride will result. To enter
(Customer Selectable)
OR1, push the height selector switch up once
4 — Aero Height Indicator (Customer Selectable) from the NRH position while the vehicle speed is
5 — Entry/Exit Height Indicator below 35 mph (56 km/h). When in the OR1
(Customer Selectable) position, if the vehicle speed remains between
40 mph (64 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h) for
 Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Raises the vehicle approxi- greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed
mately 2 inches [51 mm]) – This position is exceeds 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle will be
intended for off-road use only where maximum automatically lowered to NRH. Off-Road 1 may
ground clearance is required. To enter OR2, not be available due to vehicle payload, an
push the height selector switch up twice from instrument cluster message will be displayed
the NRH position or once from the OR1 position when this occurs Ú page 114.
while vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).  Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard
While in OR2, if the vehicle speed exceeds position of the suspension and is meant for
25 mph (40 km/h) the vehicle height will be normal driving.
automatically lowered to OR1. Off-Road 2 may
 Aero Height (Lowers the vehicle approximately NOTE:

0.6 inch [15 mm]) – This position provides Automatic Aero Mode may be disabled through
CAUTION!
improved aerodynamics by lowering the vehicle. vehicle settings in the instrument cluster display When in ENTRY/EXIT Height, be aware of your
The vehicle will automatically enter Automatic Ú page 114 or through your Uconnect Radio (if surroundings, you may not have the clearance
Aero Mode when the vehicle speed remains equipped) Ú page 234. required for certain areas and vehicle damage
between 62 mph (100 km/h) and 66 mph  Entry/Exit Height (Lowers the vehicle approxi- may occur.
(106 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the mately 2 inches [51 mm]) – This position lowers
vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h). The the vehicle for easier passenger entry and exit The system requires that the ignition be in the ON/
vehicle will return to NRH from Aero Mode if the as well as lowering the vehicle for easier loading RUN position or the engine running for all user
vehicle speed remains between 30 mph and unloading of cargo. To enter Entry/Exit requested changes. When lowering the vehicle, all
(48 km/h) and 35 mph (56 km/h) for greater Mode, push the height selector switch down of the doors must be closed. If a door is opened at
than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed falls once from the NRH while the vehicle speed is any time while the vehicle is lowering, the change
below 30 mph (48 km/h). below 33 mph (53 km/h). Once the vehicle will not be completed until the open door(s) is
NOTE: speed goes below 15 mph (24 km/h) the closed.
 Automatic Aero mode will be disabled if a vehicle height will begin to lower. If the vehicle
speed remains between 15 mph (24 km/h) and This system uses a lifting and lowering pattern
trailer is detected to prevent shifting loads. which keeps the headlights from incorrectly
25 mph (40 km/h) for greater than 60 seconds,
 Speed thresholds for raising/lowering the or the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) shining into oncoming traffic. When raising the
vehicle automatically at higher speeds only the Entry/Exit change will be canceled. To return vehicle, the rear of the vehicle will move up first
apply if Automatic Aero Mode is enabled in to Normal Height Mode, push the height and then the front. When lowering the vehicle, the
your Uconnect Radio settings. selector switch up once while in Entry/Exit or front will move down first and then the rear.
To enter Aero Height manually push the height drive the vehicle over 15 mph (24 km/h). After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that
selector switch down once from NRH at any the air suspension system operates briefly; this is
NOTE:
vehicle speed. To return to NRH push the height normal. The system is correcting the position of the
Entry/Exit Height may be achieved using the
selector switch up once while vehicle speed is vehicle to ensure a proper appearance.
Remote Lowering feature on your key fob for easier
less than 56 mph (90 km/h). To assist with changing a spare tire, the air
entry/loading Ú page 19.
suspension system has a feature which allows the
automatic leveling to be disabled Ú page 114.
NOTE: AIR SUSPENSION MODES Wheel Alignment Mode

Default Ride Height: Before performing a wheel alignment, this mode
The air suspension system has multiple modes to
 Select Aero Height or Normal Ride Height as the must be enabled which will put the vehicle into
protect the system in unique situations. The engine
default for all vehicle speeds and operation. NRH and disable automatic leveling Ú page 234.
should be running to change between Air
This is the selected height that the suspension Protection Strategy
Suspension Modes.
will level for speed changes (e.g. raising from
Entry/Exit Height at speed, lowering from Off Automatic Areo Mode In order to protect the air suspension system, the
Road Height at speed, etc.). vehicle will disable load leveling as required
To improve aerodynamics, the air suspension
(suspension overloaded, battery charge low, etc.).
 Default ride height can be changed by manually system has a feature which will put the vehicle into
Load leveling will automatically resume as soon as
adjusting the Air Suspension switch to Normal Aeroheight automatically at higher speeds
system operation requirements are met. See an
Ride Height or Aero Ride Height and staying in Ú page 114. 4
authorized dealer if system does not resume.
the selected height for 2.5 seconds. It will be Automatic Aero Mode may be disabled through
stored as the default ride height and the height vehicle settings in the Uconnect Radio (if
NOTE:
will be maintained until a new default ride equipped) Ú page 234. For towing with air suspension Ú page 212.
height is selected. I NSTRUMENT C LUSTER D ISPLAY
Tire Jack Mode
If equipped with a touchscreen radio, all enabling/
disabling of air suspension features must be done
To assist with changing a tire, the air suspension MESSAGES
system has a feature which allows the automatic
through the radio Ú page 234. When the appropriate conditions exist, a message
leveling to be disabled Ú page 234.
will appear in the instrument cluster display
WARNING! Transport Mode Ú page 114.
The air suspension system uses a high pressure For towing your vehicle with four wheels off the An audible chime will be heard whenever a system
volume of air to operate the system. To avoid road, the air suspension system has a feature error has been detected.
personal injury or damage to the system, see an which will put the vehicle into Entry/Exit height and
See an authorized dealer for system service if
authorized dealer for service. disable the automatic load leveling system
normal operation does not resume.
Ú page 234.
OPERATION Pushing the height selector up once will move the  Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator lamps 5,
suspension one position higher from the current 4 and 3 will be illuminated.
position, assuming all conditions are met (i.e.,  Aero Height– Indicator lamps 5 and 4 will be illu-
ignition in ON/RUN position, engine running, speed minated.
below threshold, etc.). The height selector switch
can be pushed up multiple times, each push will  Entry/Exit – Indicator lamp 5 will be illuminated.
raise the requested level by one position up to a Entry/Exit can be requested up to 33 mph
maximum position of OR2 or the highest position (53 km/h). If vehicle speed is reduced to, and
allowed based on current conditions (i.e., vehicle kept below, 15 mph (24 km/h) indicator lamp 4
speed, etc.). will flash and indicator lamp 5 will remain solid
until Entry/Exit is achieved at which point indi-
Pushing the height selector down once will move cator lamp 4 will turn off.
the suspension one position lower from the current
level, assuming all conditions are met (i.e., ignition  Automatic Aero Mode – Indicator lamps 5 and 4
Air Suspension Switch
in ON/RUN position, engine running, doors closed, will be illuminated.
The indicator lamps 1 through 5 will illuminate to speed below threshold, etc.). The height selector  Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be illu-
show the current position of the vehicle. Flashing switch can be pushed down multiple times, each minated. Transport Mode is disabled by driving
indicator lamps will show a position which the push will lower the requested level by one position the vehicle or disabling in the Uconnect settings.
system is working to achieve. When raising, if down to a minimum of Entry/Exit Mode or the  Tire/Jack Mode – Indicator lamps 5 and 1 will
multiple indicator lamps are flashing, the highest lowest position allowed based on current be illuminated. Tire/Jack Mode is disabled by
flashing indicator lamp is the position the system is conditions (i.e., vehicle speed, etc.). driving the vehicle or disabling in the Uconnect
working to achieve. When lowering, if multiple
Automatic height changes will occur based on settings.
indicators are flashing, the lowest solid indicator
vehicle speed and the current vehicle height. The  Wheel Alignment Mode – Indicator lamps 3, 4,
lamp is the position the system is working to
indicator lamps and instrument cluster display and 5 will be illuminated. Wheel Alignment
achieve.
messages will operate the same for automatic Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle or
changes and user requested changes. disabling in the Uconnect settings.
 Off-Road 2 (OR2) – Indicator lamps 5, 4, 3, 2
and 1 will be illuminated.
 Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 5, 4, 3 and
2 will be illuminated.
ACTIVE-LEVEL FOUR CORNER AIR will be automatically lowered to NRH. Off-Road

may not be available due to vehicle payload, an
SUSPENSION SYSTEM (OFF-ROAD GROUP) — instrument cluster display message will be
shown when this occurs Ú page 114.
IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
DESCRIPTION
If the vehicle is in Off-Road setting, be aware of
The air suspension system provides full-time your surroundings, you may not have the
load-leveling capability along with the benefit of clearance required for certain areas and vehicle
being able to adjust vehicle height by using the damage may occur.
toggle switch. Rebel Air Suspension Controls 4
1 — Off-Road Indicator (Customer Selectable)  Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard
2 — Normal Ride Height Indicator position of the suspension and is meant for
(Customer Selectable) normal driving.
3 — Aero Height Indicator (Customer Selectable)  Aero Height (Lowers the vehicle approximately
4 — Entry/Exit Height Indicator 0.6 inches [15 mm]) – This position provides
(Customer Selectable) improved aerodynamics by lowering the vehicle.
The vehicle will automatically enter Automatic
Aero Mode when the vehicle speed remains
 Off-Road (OR) (Raises the vehicle approximately between 62 mph (100 km/h) and 66 mph
1 inch [26 mm]) – This position is intended for (106 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the
off-roading use only where maximum ground vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h). The
clearance is required. To enter OR, push the vehicle will return to NRH from Aero Mode if the
height selector switch up once from the NRH vehicle speed remains between 30 mph
position while vehicle speed is below 20 mph (48 km/h) and 35 mph (56 km/h) for greater
(32 km/h). While in OR, if the vehicle speed than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed falls
exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the vehicle height below 30 mph (48 km/h).
NOTE: to Normal Height Mode, push the height To assist with changing a spare tire, the air
 Automatic Aero mode will be disabled if a selector switch up twice while in Entry/Exit or suspension system has a feature which allows the
trailer is detected to prevent shifting loads. drive the vehicle over 15 mph (24 km/h). Entry/ automatic leveling to be disabled Ú page 234.
Exit Height may not be available due to vehicle NOTE:
 Speed thresholds for raising or lowering the
payload, an instrument cluster display message Default Ride Height:
vehicle only apply if Automatic Aero Mode is will be shown when this occurs Ú page 114.
enabled through vehicle settings on your  Select Aero Height or Normal Ride Height as the
Uconnect Radio. CAUTION! default for all vehicle speeds and operation.
 To enter Aero Height manually push the This is the selected height that the suspension
When in ENTRY/EXIT Height, be aware of your will level for speed changes (e.g. raising from
height selector switch down once from NRH
surroundings, you may not have the clearance Entry/Exit Height at speed, lowering from Off
at any vehicle speed. To return to NRH push
required for certain areas and vehicle damage Road Height at speed, etc.).
the height selector switch up once while
may occur.
vehicle speed is less than 56 mph (90 km/  Default ride height can be changed by manually
h). adjusting the Air Suspension switch to Normal
 Automatic Aero Mode may be disabled
The system requires that the ignition be in the ON/ Ride Height or Aero Ride Height and staying in
through vehicle settings on your Uconnect RUN position or the engine running for all user the selected height for 2.5 seconds. It will be
Radio. requested changes. When lowering the vehicle, all stored as the default ride height and the height
of the doors must be closed. If a door is opened at will be maintained until a new default ride
 Entry/Exit Height (Lowers the vehicle approxi- any time while the vehicle is lowering, the change height is selected.
mately 3 inches [73 mm]) – This position lowers will not be completed until the open door(s) is
the vehicle for easier passenger entry and exit If equipped with a touchscreen radio, all enabling/
closed. disabling of air suspension features must be done
as well as lowering the vehicle for easier loading
and unloading of cargo. To enter Entry/Exit This system uses a lifting and lowering pattern through the radio Ú page 234.
Mode, push the height selector switch down which keeps the headlights from incorrectly
shining into oncoming traffic. When raising the WARNING!
twice from the NRH while the vehicle speed is
below 33 mph (53 km/h). Once the vehicle vehicle, the rear of the vehicle will move up first The air suspension system uses a high pressure
speed goes below 15 mph (24 km/h) the and then the front. When lowering the vehicle, the volume of air to operate the system. To avoid
vehicle height will begin to lower. If the vehicle front will move down first and then the rear. personal injury or damage to the system, see an
speed remains between 15 mph (24 km/h) and After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that authorized dealer for service.
25 mph (40 km/h) for greater than 60 seconds, the air suspension system operates briefly; this is
or the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) normal. The system is correcting the position of the
the Entry/Exit change will be canceled. To return vehicle to ensure a proper appearance.
AIR SUSPENSION MODES Load leveling will automatically resume as soon as The indicator lamps 1 through 4 will illuminate to
system operation requirements are met. See an show the current position of the vehicle. Flashing
The air suspension system has multiple modes to authorized dealer if system does not resume. indicator lamps will show a position which the
protect the system in unique situations: system is working to achieve. When raising or
NOTE:
Automatic Aero Mode For towing with air suspension Ú page 212. lowering, the flashing indicator lamp is the position
the system is working to achieve.
To improve aerodynamics, the air suspension
system has a feature which will put the vehicle into I NSTRUMENT C LUSTER D ISPLAY Pushing the height selector switch up once will
Aero height automatically at higher speeds MESSAGES move the suspension one position higher from the
Ú page 114. current position, assuming all conditions are met
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message (i.e., key in ON/RUN position, engine running,
Tire Jack Mode will appear in the instrument cluster display speed below threshold, etc.). The height selector 4
To assist with changing a tire, the air suspension Ú page 114. switch can be pushed up multiple times, each push
system has a feature which allows the automatic An audible chime will be heard whenever a system will raise the requested level by one position up to
leveling to be disabled Ú page 234. error has been detected. a maximum position of OR or the highest position
Transport Mode See an authorized dealer for system service if allowed based on current conditions (i.e., vehicle
For towing your vehicle with four wheels off the normal operation does not resume. speed, etc.).
road, the air suspension system has a feature Pushing the height selector switch down once will
which will put the vehicle into Entry/Exit height and
OPERATION move the suspension one position lower from the
disable the automatic load leveling system current level, assuming all conditions are met (i.e.,
Ú page 234. key in ON/RUN position, engine running, doors
Wheel Alignment Mode closed, speed below threshold, etc.). The height
selector switch can be pushed down multiple
Before performing a wheel alignment, this mode times, each push will lower the requested level by
must be enabled which moves the vehicle to one position down to a minimum of Entry/Exit
normal ride height and disables the automatic Mode or the lowest position allowed based on
leveling Ú page 234. current conditions (i.e., vehicle speed, etc.).
Protection Strategy
In order to protect the air suspension system, the
vehicle will disable load leveling as required
(suspension overloaded, battery charge low, etc.). Air Suspension Switch
Automatic height changes will occur based on  Wheel Alignment Mode – Indicator lamps 2, 3,
vehicle speed and the current vehicle height. The and 4 will be illuminated. Wheel Alignment CAUTION!
indicator lamps and instrument cluster display Mode is disabled by driving the vehicle or  Do not lock the rear axle on hard surfaced
messages will operate the same for automatic disabling through the Uconnect settings. roads. The ability to steer the vehicle is
changes and user requested changes. reduced and damage to the drivetrain may
 Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 4, 3, 2, and AXLE LOCK SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED occur when the axle is locked on hard
1 will be illuminated. surfaced roads.
This vehicle is equipped with an electronically
 Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator lamps 4, locking rear differential. When engaged, this  Do not try to lock the rear axle if the vehicle is
3, and 2 will be illuminated. differential locks the axle shafts forcing the wheels stuck and the tires are spinning. You can
 Aero Height– Indicator lamps 4 and 3 will be illu- to spin at an equal rate. The locking of the rear damage drivetrain components. Lock the rear
minated. differential should only be engaged during axle before attempting situations or navi-
low-speed, extreme off-road situations where one gating terrain, which could possibly cause the
 Entry/Exit – Indicator lamp 4 will be illuminated. wheel is likely to not be in contact with the ground. vehicle to become stuck.
Entry/Exit can be requested up to 33 mph It is not recommended to drive the vehicle with the
(53 km/h). If vehicle speed is reduced to, and differentials locked on pavement due to the
kept below, 15 mph (24 km/h) indicator lamp 3 The locking rear axle is controlled by the AXLE
reduced ability to turn and speed limitations. LOCK button.
will flash and indicator lamp 4 will remain solid
until Entry/Exit is achieved at which point indi- Under normal driving conditions, the rear axle
cator lamp 3 will turn off. should be unlocked.
 Automatic Aero Mode – Indicator lamps 5 and 4 During the command to lock the rear axle, the
will be illuminated. indicator light will flash until the axle is locked.
 Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be illu- After the lock command has been successfully
minated. Transport Mode is disabled by driving executed, the light will remain on solid.
the vehicle or disabling through the Uconnect Operating in 4WD LOW the locker can be engaged
settings. up to 40 mph (64 km/h) and will remain engaged
 Tire/Jack Mode – Indicator lamps 4 and 1 will throughout the 4WD LOW speed range.
be illuminated. Tire/Jack Mode is disabled by
AXLE LOCK Button
driving the vehicle or disabling through the
Uconnect settings.
Operating the locker in 2WD, 4WD AUTO, and

4WD LOCK/HIGH, the locker can be engaged up to
and cornering, the limited-slip unit performs
similarly to a conventional differential. On slippery
POWER STEERING
20 mph (32 km/h). While driving with the locker surfaces, however, the differential delivers more of ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
engaged, if speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h), the the driving effort to the rear wheel having the
locker will automatically disengage, but will better traction. The electric power steering system will provide
automatically re-engage at 20 mph (32 km/h). The limited-slip differential is especially helpful increased vehicle response and ease of
maneuverability. The power steering system
NOTE: during slippery driving conditions. With both rear
wheels on a slippery surface, a slight application of adapts to different driving conditions.
Left to right wheel speed difference may be
necessary to allow the rear axle to fully lock. If the the accelerator will supply maximum traction. If the steering icon is flashing, it indicates that the
indicator light is flashing after selecting the rear When starting with only one rear wheel on an vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service.
axle lock mode, drive the vehicle in a turn or on excessively slippery surface, slight momentary It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering 4
loose gravel to expedite the locking action. application of the parking brake may be necessary assistance.
The axle locker could become torque locked due to to gain maximum traction. If the steering icon is displayed and the “POWER
side to side loads on the rear axle. Driving slowly STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message is
while turning the steering wheel from a left hand
WARNING! displayed on the instrument cluster screen, this
turn to a right hand turn or driving in REVERSE for When servicing vehicles equipped with a indicates an over temperature condition in the
a short distance may be required to release the limited-slip or locking differential, never run the power steering system. Once driving conditions are
torque lock and unlock the axles. engine with one rear wheel off the ground as the safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for a few
vehicle may drive through the rear wheel moments until the icon and message turn off
To unlock the rear axle, push the AXLE LOCK
remaining on the ground and result in Ú page 114.
button. The AXLE LOCK indicator light will go out
when the rear axle is unlocked. unintended movement. If the steering icon is displayed and the “SERVICE
POWER STEERING – ASSIST OFF” message is
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL — Care should be taken to avoid sudden displayed on the instrument cluster screen, this
indicates the vehicle needs to be taken to the
accelerations when both rear wheels are on a
IF EQUIPPED slippery surface. This could cause both rear wheels dealer for service Ú page 114.
The limited-slip differential provides additional to spin, and allow the vehicle to slide sideways on
traction on snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel, the crowned surface of a road or in a turn.
particularly when there is a difference between the
traction characteristics of the surface under the
right and left rear wheels. During normal driving
NOTE: Releasing the brake pedal or shifting out of DRIVE The engine will shut down, the tachometer will
 Even if the power steering assistance is no will automatically restart the engine. move to the zero position and the stop/start
longer operational, it is still possible to steer the Vehicles equipped with eTorque contain a telltale will illuminate indicating you are in an
vehicle. Under these conditions there will be a heavy-duty motor generator and an additional Autostop. While in an Autostop, the Climate
substantial increase in steering effort, espe- hybrid electric battery to store energy from vehicle Controls system may automatically adjust airflow
cially at low speeds and during parking maneu- deceleration used to expand engine off energy to maintain cabin comfort. Customer settings will
vers. storage and for engine startup after a stop, as well be maintained upon return to an engine running
as providing engine torque assist when conditions condition.
 If the condition persists, see an authorized
dealer for service. are met to enable this. POSSIBLE R EASONS T HE E NGINE D OES
AUTOSTOP MODE N OT AUTOSTOP
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINES
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every Prior to engine shut down, the system will check
ONLY — IF EQUIPPED normal customer engine start. It will remain in many safety and comfort conditions to see if they
This feature offers improved fuel economy by STOP/START NOT READY until you drive forward are fulfilled. In following situations, the engine will
shutting off four of the engine's eight cylinders with a vehicle speed greater than 2 mph (3 km/h). not Autostop:
during light load and cruise conditions. The system At that time, the system will go into STOP/START  Driver’s seat belt is not buckled
is automatic with no driver inputs or additional READY and if all other conditions are met, the
system may go into STOP/START AUTOSTOP  Driver’s door is not closed
driving skills required.
ACTIVE Autostop mode.  The vehicle is on a steep grade
NOTE:
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following  Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an
This system may take some time to return to full
Must Occur: acceptable cabin temperature has not been
functionality after a battery disconnect.
1. The system must be in STOP/START READY achieved
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED state. A STOP/START READY message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster within the
 HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower
speed
The Stop/Start function, included with eTorque Stop/Start section Ú page 114.  Engine has not reached normal operating
equipped vehicles, is developed to save fuel and
2. The vehicle must be decelerating and likely temperature
reduce emissions. The system will stop the engine
coming to a complete stop.  Engine or exhaust temperature is too high
automatically as the vehicle decelerates at low
speeds if the required conditions are met. 3. The transmission gear selector must be in  The battery is charging
DRIVE and the brake pedal pressed.
 The transmission is not in DRIVE  12 Volt demand requires engine restart TO MANUALLY TURN OFF T HE S TOP/
 Hood is open  Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed S TART S YSTEM
 Transfer case is in 4WD LOW  Transfer case is in 4WD LOW
 TOW/HAUL mode is selected  The emissions system override is present
 Accelerator pedal input  A Stop/Start system error is present
 Excessive 12 Volt loads Conditions That Force An Automatic Shift To Park
 Brake application is adequate to obtain and While In Autostop Mode
maintain a stop The engine will not start automatically and the
transmission will be placed in PARK if:
It may be possible to operate the vehicle several 4
consecutive times in extreme conditions and not  The driver door is open and brake pedal
meet all criteria to enable an Autostop state. released
TO START T HE E NGINE WHILE IN  The driver door is open and the driver seat belt Stop/Start OFF Switch
is unbuckled
AUTOSTOP MODE Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
 The engine hood has been opened
While in DRIVE, the engine will start when the switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.
 A Stop/Start system error is present The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in the
brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is
pressed and the transmission will automatically The engine may then be restarted by moving the instrument cluster display and the Autostop mode
reengage upon engine restart. transmission shift selector out of PARK (e.g., to will be disabled Ú page 114.
DRIVE) or, in some cases, only by a key start. The NOTE:
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start instrument cluster will display a “SHIFT OUT OF
Automatically While In Autostop Mode The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to the
PARK” message, or a “STOP/START KEY START ON position every time the ignition is turned OFF
The engine will start automatically when: REQUIRED” message, to indicate which action is and back ON.
 The transmission selector is moved from DRIVE required Ú page 114.
to REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or PARK TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE S TOP/
 To maintain cabin temperature near the HVAC S TART S YSTEM
settings Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
 HVAC is set to full defrost mode switch bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM M ALFUNCTION CRUISE C ONTROL WARNING!

If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
the system will not shut down the engine. A accelerator operations at speeds greater than system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your
“SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message will 20 mph (32 km/h). vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and
appear in the instrument cluster display The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right you could lose control and have an accident. Do
Ú page 128. side of the steering wheel. not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on
The system will need to be checked by an roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
authorized dealer. slippery.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED To Activate

Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise
Control system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control Control. The cruise indicator light in the instrument
(ACC) system: cluster display will illuminate. To turn the system
 Cruise Control will keep your vehicle at a off, push the on/off button a second time. The
constant preset speed. cruise indicator light will turn off. The system
should be turned off when not in use.
 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will adjust the
vehicle speed up to the preset speed to main- Cruise Control Buttons
WARNING!
tain a distance with the vehicle ahead.
1 — SET (+)/Accel
NOTE: Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not
2 — CANC/Cancel in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set
 In vehicles equipped with ACC, if ACC is not 3 — SET (-)/Decel the system or cause it to go faster than you
enabled, Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not 4 — On/Off want. You could lose control and have an
detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be accident. Always ensure the system is off when
5 — RES/Resume
aware of the feature selected. you are not using it.
 Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a
time. For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control
is enabled, Adaptive Cruise Control will be
unavailable, and vice versa.
To Set A Desired Speed Metric Speed (km/h)

WARNING!
Turn the Cruise Control on.  Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your
subsequent tap of the button results in an
push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and
adjustment of 1 km/h.
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will you could lose control and have an accident. Do
operate at the selected speed.  If the button is continually pushed, the set
not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on
speed will continue to adjust in 10 km/h incre-
NOTE: roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
ments until the button is released. The new set
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed slippery.
speed is reflected in the instrument cluster
and on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or
display.
SET (-) button.
To Resume Speed 4
To Vary The Speed Setting NOTE:
When you override and push the SET (+) or SET (-) To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed button, the new set speed will be the current speed button and release. Resume can be used at any
After setting a speed, you can increase the set of the vehicle. speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease To Accelerate For Passing To Deactivate
speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
While the Cruise Control is set, press the A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC
U.S. Speed (mph) accelerator to pass as you would normally. When (cancel) button, or normal brake pressure while
 Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Cruise
result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each set speed. Control system without erasing the set speed from
subsequent tap of the button results in an memory.
adjustment of 1 mph. USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS
The following conditions will also deactivate the
 If the button is continually pushed, the set The transmission may downshift on hills to Cruise Control system without erasing the set
speed will continue to adjust in 5 mph incre- maintain the vehicle set speed. speed from memory:
ments until the button is released. The new set The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and  Vehicle parking brake is applied
speed is reflected in the instrument cluster down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
display.  Stability event occurs
is normal. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or
gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive  Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
without Cruise Control.  Engine overspeed occurs
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in  Fixed Speed Cruise Control (ACC not enabled)
the OFF position, erases the set speed from will not detect vehicles directly ahead of you. WARNING!
memory. Always be aware of the feature selected  Does not always fully recognize complex
Ú page 480. driving conditions, which can result in
ADAPTIVE CRUISE C ONTROL (ACC) wrong or missing distance warnings.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving WARNING!
 Will bring your vehicle to a complete stop
convenience provided by Cruise Control while  Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve- while following a vehicle ahead and hold
traveling on highways and major roadways. nience system. It is not a substitute for active your vehicle for approximately three
However, it is not a safety system and not designed driver involvement. It is always the driver’s minutes in the stop position. If the vehicle
to prevent collisions. The Cruise Control function responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, ahead does not start moving within three
performs differently Ú page 176. and weather conditions, vehicle speed, minutes the parking brake will be acti-
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most vated, and the ACC system will be
in light to moderate traffic conditions without the importantly, brake operation to ensure safe cancelled.
constant need to reset your speed. ACC utilizes a operation of the vehicle under all road condi-
radar sensor and a forward facing camera tions. Your complete attention is always You should switch off the ACC system:
designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you required while driving to maintain safe control  When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,
to maintain a set speed. of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warn- sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situa-
ings can result in a collision and death or tions (i.e., in highway construction zones).
NOTE:
serious personal injury.
 If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC  When entering a turn lane or highway off
will apply limited braking or acceleration (not to  The ACC system: ramp; when driving on roads that are winding,
exceed the original set speed) automatically to  Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have steep
maintain a preset following distance, while vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a uphill or downhill slopes.
matching the speed of the vehicle ahead. stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a  When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
 Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica- disabled vehicle).
 When circumstances do not allow safe driving
tions to the vehicle will affect the performance
 Cannot take street, traffic, and weather at a constant speed.
of the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward Colli-
conditions into account, and may be
sion Warning system.
limited upon adverse sight distance condi-
tions.
(Continued)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation Adaptive Cruise Control Off Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The buttons on the right side of the steering wheel When ACC is deactivated, the display will read The minimum set speed for the ACC system is
operate the Adaptive Cruise Control system. “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.” 20 mph (32 km/h).
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready When the system is turned on and in the ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed state, the instrument cluster display will read
setting has not been selected, the display will read “ACC Ready.”
“Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.” When the system is off, the instrument cluster
Adaptive Cruise Control Set display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Off.”
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed,
the display will read “ACC SET.” NOTE: 4
You cannot engage ACC under the following condi-
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the
tions:
instrument cluster display.
 When in 4WD Low
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons The ACC screen may display once again if any of
the following ACC activity occurs:  When the brakes are applied
1 — Distance Setting Increase  System Cancel  When the parking brake is applied
2 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off  When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
 Driver Override
3 — Distance Setting Decrease REVERSE or NEUTRAL
 System Off
 When the vehicle speed is below the minimum
 ACC Proximity Warning
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu speed range
 ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will show the  When the brakes are overheated
current ACC system settings. The information it The instrument cluster display will return to the last
 When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
displays depends on ACC system status. display selected after five seconds of no ACC
display activity.  When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off speeds
button until one of the following appears in the
 When there is a stationary vehicle in front of
instrument cluster display:
your vehicle in close proximity
 When Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Full Off
mode is active
To Activate/Deactivate Pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off NOTE:

button will result in turning on (changing to) Fixed  Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
Speed Cruise Control mode. cause the vehicle to continue to accelerate
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.” beyond the set speed. If this occurs, the
WARNING! message “ACC DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display
To turn the system off, push and release the
In the Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the in the instrument cluster display.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again.
At this time, the system will turn off and the system will not react to vehicles ahead. In  If you continue to accelerate beyond the set
instrument cluster display will show “Adaptive addition, the proximity warning does not activate speed while ACC is enabled, the system will not
Cruise Control (ACC) Off.” and no alarm will sound even if you are too close control the distance between your vehicle and
to the vehicle ahead since neither the presence the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will only be
WARNING! of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle determined by the position of the accelerator
distance is detected. Be sure to maintain a safe pedal.
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
system on when not in use is dangerous. You ahead. Always be aware which mode is selected. To Cancel
could accidentally set the system or cause it to The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed
go faster than you want. You could lose control Speed Cruise Control systems:
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below
and have a collision. Always leave the system off
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed will default to  The brake pedal is applied
when you are not using it.
20 mph (32 km/h).  The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
NOTE:  The Anti-Lock Brake system (ABS) activates
To Set A Desired ACC Speed Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below
 The trailer brake is applied manually (if
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push 20 mph (32 km/h).
equipped)
the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button and If either system is set when the vehicle speed is
release. The instrument cluster display will show  The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be
the set speed. the current speed of the vehicle. position
NOTE:  The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without System (ESC/TCS) activates
ACC enabled. To change between the different  The vehicle parking brake is applied
modes, push the ACC on/off button which turns
 The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) activates
the ACC and the Fixed Speed Cruise Control off.
 The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph U.S. Speed (mph)
 The braking temperature exceeds normal range (0 km/h) when ACC is active.  Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
(overheated) NOTE: result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC  If your vehicle is at a standstill for longer than subsequent tap of the button results in an
system: two seconds, then the driver will either have to adjustment of 1 mph.
 Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
push the RES (resume) button, or apply the  If the button is continually pushed, the set
accelerator pedal to reengage the Adaptive speed will continue to adjust in 5 mph incre-
 Driver door is opened at low speeds Cruise Control (ACC) to the existing set speed. ments until the button is released. The new set
To Turn Off  ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary speed is reflected in the instrument cluster
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity. display.
4
memory if: Metric Speed (km/h)
WARNING!  Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
 The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
is pushed The Resume function should only be used if result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each
 The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a subsequent tap of the button results in an
pushed set speed that is too high or too low for adjustment of 1 km/h.
prevailing traffic and road conditions could  If the button is continually pushed, the set
 The ignition is placed in the OFF position cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too speed will continue to adjust in 10 km/h incre-
 4WD Low is engaged sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these ments until the button is released. The new set
To Resume warnings can result in a collision and death or speed is reflected in the instrument cluster
serious personal injury. display.
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES
(resume) button and then remove your foot from NOTE:
the accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster To Vary The Speed Setting When you override and push the SET (+) button or
display will show the last set speed. To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed SET (-) buttons, the new set speed will be the
Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph current speed of the vehicle.
After setting a speed, you can increase the set
(32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease
being used. speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
When ACC Is Active ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will
 When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if ahead. This distance setting displays in the maintain the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle
the engine’s braking power does not slow the instrument cluster display. is detected in the same lane, the instrument
vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the cluster displays the ACC Set With Target Detected
brake system will automatically slow the Indicator Light, and the system adjusts vehicle
vehicle. speed automatically to maintain the distance
setting, regardless of the set speed.
 The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full
stop when following the vehicle in front. If your The vehicle will then maintain the set distance
vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a standstill, until:
after two seconds the driver will either have to  The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above
push the RES (resume) button, or apply the the set speed.
accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the  The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
existing set speed. view of the sensor.
 The ACC system maintains set speed when Distance Settings  The distance setting is changed.
driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight
speed change on moderate hills is normal. In 1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)  The system disengages.
addition, downshifting may occur while climbing 2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars) The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
uphill or descending downhill. This is normal 3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars) however, the driver can always apply the brakes
operation and necessary to maintain set speed. 4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar) manually, if necessary.
When driving uphill and downhill, the ACC NOTE:
system will cancel if the braking temperature The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC
exceeds normal range (overheated). To increase the distance setting, push the
Distance Increase button and release. Each time system applies the brakes.
Setting The Following Distance In ACC the button is pushed, the distance setting A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC
The specified following distance for Adaptive increases by one bar (longer). predicts that its maximum braking level is not
Cruise Control (ACC) can be set by varying the sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this
To decrease the distance setting, push the
distance setting between four bars (longest), three occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will flash in the
Distance Decrease button and release. Each time
bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short). instrument cluster display and a chime will sound
the button is pushed, the distance setting
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
decreases by one bar (shorter).
capacity.
NOTE: the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster system will be canceled. Sensor” message can sometimes be displayed
display is a warning for the driver to take action and While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and
does not mean that the Forward Collision Warning the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the driver door snow, or tunnels with reflective tiles). The ACC
system is applying the brakes autonomously. is opened, the parking brake will be activated, and system will recover after the vehicle has left these
Overtake Aid the ACC system will be canceled. areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is not
tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
When driving with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) warning may temporarily occur.
WARNING!
engaged, and following a vehicle, the system will
provide an additional acceleration up to the ACC When the ACC system is resumed, the driver NOTE:
set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This must ensure that there are no pedestrians, If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
additional acceleration is triggered when the driver vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle. Sensor” warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise 4
utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active Failure to follow these warnings can result in a Control is still available.
when passing on the left hand side. collision and death or serious personal injury. If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning
ACC Operation At Stop or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located
In the event that the ACC system brings your Display Warnings And Maintenance in the camera in the center of the windshield, on
vehicle to a standstill while following the vehicle in the forward side of the rearview mirror.
front, if the vehicle in front starts moving within two “WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR IN FRONT OF
VEHICLE” WARNING To keep the ACC system operating properly, it is
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, your
important to note the following maintenance
vehicle will resume motion without the need for The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar items:
any driver action. Sensor” warning will display and a chime will
sound when conditions temporarily limit system  Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully clear
If the vehicle in front does not start moving within
performance. the windshield.
two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill,
the driver will either have to push the RES (resume) This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,  Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunc-
the ACC to the existing set speed. also become temporarily blinded due to tion or failure and require a sensor realignment.
NOTE: obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these  Do not attach or install any accessories near the
After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a stand- cases, the instrument cluster display will display sensor, including transparent material. Doing so
still for approximately three consecutive minutes, “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” could cause an ACC system failure or malfunc-
and the system will deactivate. tion.
When the condition that deactivated the system is This message can sometimes be displayed while under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily
no longer present, the system will return to the driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/ unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will resume FCW system will recover after the vehicle has left later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem
function by simply reactivating it. these areas. Under rare conditions, when the persists, see an authorized dealer.
camera is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its
NOTE: Precautions While Driving With ACC
path this warning may temporarily occur.
 If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar NOTE:
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the windshield and the camera  Aftermarket add-ons such as snow plows, lift
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain,
located on the back side of the inside rear view kits, and brush/grille bars can hinder module
mud, or other obstruction, have the radar
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of an performance. Ensure the radar/camera has no
sensor realigned at an authorized dealer.
obstruction. obstructions in the field of view.
 Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an
When the condition that created limited  Height modifications can limit module perfor-
aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not
functionality is no longer present, the system will mance and functionality.
recommended. Doing so may block the sensor
and inhibit ACC/FCW operation. return to full functionality.  Do not put stickers or easy passes over the
NOTE: camera/radar field of view.
“CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front  Any modifications to the vehicle that may
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more obstruct the field of view of the radar/camera
Windshield” warning will display and a chime will than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, are not recommended.
sound when conditions temporarily limit system mud, or other obstruction, have the windshield and In certain driving situations, ACC may have
performance. This most often occurs at times of forward facing camera inspected at an authorized detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake
poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and dealer. late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert
fog. The ACC system may also become temporarily and may need to intervene. The following are
blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or SERVICE ACC/FCW WARNING
examples of these types of situations:
ice on windshield, driving directly into the sun and If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the displays “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required”
instrument cluster display will show “ACC/FCW or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”,
Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” and there may be an internal system fault or a
the system will have degraded performance. temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable
TOWING A TRAILER TURNS AND BENDS LANE CHANGING

ACC while towing a trailer is recommended only When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely
with an Integrated Trailer Brake Controller. system may increase or decrease the vehicle in the lane in which you are traveling. In the lane
Aftermarket trailer brake controllers will not speed for stability, with no vehicle ahead detected. changing example below, ACC has not yet detected
activate the trailer brakes when ACC is braking. Once the vehicle is out of the curve, the system will the vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect
resume your original set speed. This is a part of the vehicle until it's too late for the ACC system to
OFFSET DRIVING normal ACC system functionality. take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that NOTE: completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle On tight turns ACC performance may be limited. distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be
merging in from a side lane. There may not be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset USING ACC ON HILLS necessary. 4
vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel, ACC performance may be limited when driving on
which can cause your vehicle to brake or hills. ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane
accelerate unexpectedly. depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hill.
Lane Changing Example
Offset Driving Condition Example

ACC Hill Example
NARROW VEHICLES stationary object as it did not previously detect NOTE:

movement from it. Always be attentive and ready  The driver can disable the automatic braking
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer
to apply the brakes if necessary. function by turning ParkSense off via the Park-
edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not
detected until they have moved fully into the lane. Sense switch. The driver can also override auto-
There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle matic braking by changing the gear or by
ahead. pressing the gas pedal over 90% of its capacity
during the braking event.
 Automatic brakes will not be available if the
vehicle is in 4WD Low.
 Automatic brakes will not be available if there is
a fault in the brake module.
 Automatic brakes will not be available if there is
a faulted condition detected with the ParkSense
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example Park Assist system or the Braking System.
 The automatic braking function may only be
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST applied if the vehicle deceleration is not enough
Narrow Vehicle Example
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED to avoid colliding with a detected obstacle.
 The automatic braking function may not be
STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual applied fast enough for obstacles that move
ACC does not react to stationary objects or and audible indications of the distance between toward the rear of the vehicle from the left and/
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in the rear and/or front fascia/bumper and a or right sides.
situations where the vehicle you are following exits detected obstacle when backing up or moving
forward (e.g. during a parking maneuver). If your  The automatic braking function can be
your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your enabled/disabled from the Customer Program-
lane. It will consider this stopped vehicle a vehicle is equipped with the automatic braking
function, the vehicle brakes may be automatically mable Features section of the Uconnect system.
applied and released when the vehicle is in
REVERSE if the system detects a possible collision
with an obstacle.
 ParkSense will retain its last known configura- ParkSense operating speed while in REVERSE. The PARKSENSE DISPLAY
tion state for the automatic braking function system will become active again if the vehicle
through ignition cycles. speed is decreased to speeds less than The warning display will turn on indicating the
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h). system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or
 Trailer hitch ball assembly may cause false
when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has
braking events if left attached after towing. PARKSENSE SENSORS been detected.
The automatic braking function is intended to
The four ParkSense sensors (six if equipped with The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
assist the driver in avoiding possible collisions with
Active Parksense), located in the front fascia/ showing a single arc in the left, right, or center
detected obstacles when backing up in REVERSE
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle regions based on the obstacle’s distance and
gear.
that is within the sensors’ field of view, and the four location relative to the vehicle.
NOTE: ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/ If an obstacle is detected in the center front region, 4
 The system is provided to assist the driver and bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that the display will show a single solid arc in the center
not to substitute the driver. is within the sensors’ field of view. The front front region with no chime. As the vehicle moves
 The driver must stay in full control of the sensors can detect obstacles from approximately closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
vehicle's acceleration and braking and is 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120 cm) from single arc moving closer to the vehicle and a fast
responsible for the vehicle's movements. the front fascia/bumper. The rear sensors can chime will be heard and will change from fast to
detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches continuous.
For limitations of this system and usage (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm). These distances
precautions, see Ú page 191. If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right
depend on the location, type and orientation of the
front region, the display will show a single flashing
ParkSense will retain the last system state obstacle in the horizontal direction.
arc in the left and/or right front region and will
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY produce a fast chime. As the vehicle moves closer
to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc
ParkSense can be active only when the gear The ParkSense Warning screen is located within moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will
selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is the instrument cluster display Ú page 114. It change from fast to continuous.
enabled while in one of these gears, the system will provides visual warnings to indicate the distance
remain active until the vehicle speed is increased between the rear fascia/bumper and/or front
to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. A fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
warning will appear in the instrument cluster
display indicating the vehicle speed is above
Front/Rear ParkSense Arcs

1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Solid Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Solid Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR

Greater than
Rear Distance 79-59 inches 59-47 inches 47-39 inches 39-25 inches 25-12 inches Less than
79 inches
(inches/cm) (200-150 cm) (150-120 cm) (120-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) 12 inches (30cm)
(200 cm)
Audible Alert Single 1/2
None Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
(Chime) Second Tone
Arcs-Left None None None None None 6thFlashing 5th Solid 4
Arcs-Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Solid
Arcs-Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Solid
Radio Volume
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Reduced
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT

Front Distance Greater than 47 inches 47-39 inches 39-25 inches 25-12 inches Less than 12 inches
(inches/cm) (120 cm) (120-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) (30 cm)
Audible Alert (Chime) None None None Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Solid
Arcs-Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Solid
Arcs-Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Solid
Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes Yes
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts NOTE: condition, the instrument cluster display will
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist Arc alerts from the enabled ParkSense system, will display a "WIPE OFF" message on the
audible alert (chime) after approximately three interrupt the five second messages, and the corresponding blocked system while the vehicle is
seconds when an obstacle has been detected, the instrument cluster display will show the vehicle in REVERSE. The system will continue to provide
vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is applied. graphic with the corresponding arcs and “OFF” arc alerts for the side that is functioning properly.
message. If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
The Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be on SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
The Front and Rear chime volume settings are when Front or Rear ParkSense is disabled or FRONT SENSORS" appears in the instrument
programmable through the Uconnect system requires service. The Front or Rear ParkSense cluster display make sure the outer surface and
Ú page 234. switch LED will be off when the Front or Rear the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or
ENABLING A ND D ISABLING F RONT system is enabled. If the Front or Rear ParkSense front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow,
switch is pushed, and the system requires service, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle
A ND/OR R EAR P ARKSENSE the Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will blink the ignition. If the message continues to appear
Front ParkSense can be enabled and momentarily, and then the LED will be on. see an authorized dealer.
disabled with the Front ParkSense SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST NOTE:
switch. Water from a car wash or road slush in freezing
Rear ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
SYSTEM weather may also cause sensors to become
the Rear ParkSense switch. During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense blocked.
When the Front or Rear ParkSense switch is System has detected a faulted condition, the If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
pushed to disable the system, the instrument instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, REQUIRED" message appears in the instrument
cluster display Ú page 114 will show a vehicle once per ignition cycle, and it will display the cluster display, see your authorized dealer.
graphic of the Front or Rear ParkSense on/off "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
state for two seconds.
FRONT SENSORS", or the "PARKSENSE Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message for
the Front or Rear system is disabled, the soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard
five seconds. When the gear selector is moved to cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
instrument cluster display will show a vehicle REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted
graphic with “OFF” on the corresponding side. This
vehicle graphic will be displayed for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM U SAGE  ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of  The Front ParkSense system will automatically
the radio when it is sounding a tone. disable if a snow plow has been connected to
PRECAUTIONS the vehicle.
 Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking
NOTE: care not to scratch or damage them. The
sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, WARNING!
 Ensure that the front and rear fascias/bumpers
are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can  Drivers must be careful when backing up even
keep the ParkSense system operating properly. result in the system not working properly. The when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be
 Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
tions could affect the performance of Park-
could provide a false indication that an obstacle vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
Sense.
is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper. backing up. You are responsible for safety and 4
 When you turn Front or Rear ParkSense off, the must continue to pay attention to your
 Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
instrument cluster display will show a vehicle surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
graphic of the Front or Rear ParkSense on/off system off if obstacles such as bicycle carriers,
trailer hitches, etc. are placed near the rear serious injury or death.
state for two seconds. Furthermore, once you
turn Front or Rear ParkSense off, it remains off fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the  Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the system misinterpreting a close obstacle as a mended that the ball mount and hitch ball
ignition. sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE assembly be disconnected from the vehicle
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message to when the vehicle is not used for towing.
 When you move the gear selector to the be appear in the instrument cluster display. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage
REVERSE position and Front or Rear ParkSense
 ParkSense should be disabled when the tailgate to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball
is turned off, the instrument cluster display will
is in the lowered or open position. A lowered tail- will be much closer to the obstacle than the
show a vehicle graphic with "OFF" in the corre-
gate could provide a false indication that an rear fascia/bumper when the vehicle sounds
sponding side. This vehicle graphic will be
obstacle is behind the vehicle and could also the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could
displayed for as long as the vehicle is in
cause a false braking event. detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly,
REVERSE.
 The Rear ParkSense system will automatically
depending on its size and shape, and give a
disable when the system detects that a trailer false indication that an obstacle is behind the
with trailer brakes has been connected to the vehicle, and could cause false braking.
Integrated Trailer Brake Module.
brakes. Depending on the driver's parking  The driver must control the vehicle’s brakes.
CAUTION! maneuver selection, the ParkSense Active Park The automatic emergency braking feature is
 ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is Assist system is capable of maneuvering a vehicle NOT intended to substitute for the driver during
unable to recognize every obstacle, including into a parallel or a perpendicular parking space on REVERSE maneuvers.
small obstacles. Parking curbs might be either side (i.e., driver side or passenger side).
temporarily detected or not detected at all.
ENABLING A ND DISABLING T HE
NOTE:
Obstacles located above or below the sensors
 The driver is always responsible for controlling
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
will not be detected when they are in close
the vehicle, responsible for any surrounding SYSTEM
proximity.
objects, and must intervene as required. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system
 The vehicle must be driven slowly when using  The system is provided to assist the driver and can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time not to substitute the driver. ParkSense Active Park Assist switch,
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom- located on the switch panel below the
mended that the driver looks over his/her  During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver
touches the steering wheel after being Uconnect display.
shoulder when using ParkSense.
instructed to remove their hands from the NOTE:
steering wheel, the system will cancel, and the If your vehicle is equipped with a 12-inch Uconnect
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — driver will be required to manually complete the display, the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is
parking maneuver. located above the display.
IF EQUIPPED  The system may not work in all conditions (e.g. To enable or disable the ParkSense Active Park
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is environmental conditions such as heavy rain, Assist system, push the ParkSense Active Park
intended to assist the driver during parallel and snow, etc., or if searching for a parking space Assist switch once (LED turns on). Pushing the
perpendicular parking maneuvers by identifying a that has surfaces that will absorb the ultrasonic switch a second time will disable the system
proper parking space, providing audible/visual sensor waves). (LED turns off).
instructions through the instrument cluster  New vehicles from the dealership must have at
display, and controlling the steering wheel. The least 30 miles (48 km) accumulated before the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system is defined as ParkSense Active Park Assist system is fully cali-
“semi-automatic” since the driver maintains brated and performs accurately. This is due to
control of the accelerator, gear selector and the system’s dynamic vehicle calibration to
improve the performance of the feature.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn within eight shifts, the system will cancel and the PARALLEL/PERPENDICULAR PARKING
off automatically for any of the following instrument cluster display will instruct the driver to
conditions: complete the maneuver manually. S PACE ASSISTANCE OPERATION
 Parking maneuver is completed. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
operate and search for a parking space when the enabled, the messages “Active ParkSense
 Vehicle speed is greater than 18 mph (30 km/h)
following conditions are present: Searching - Press OK To Switch To Perpendicular
when searching for a parking space.
 Gear selector is in DRIVE.
Park” or “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK to
 Vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) Switch to Parallel Park” will appear in the
during active steering guidance into the parking  The ignition is in the ON/RUN position. instrument cluster display. Push the OK button on
space.  The ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is acti- the left side of the steering wheel to change your
 Steering wheel is touched during active steering vated. parking space setting. You can switch between 4
guidance into the parking space.  Driver's door is closed. perpendicular and parallel parking maneuvers.
 ParkSense Front/Rear Park Assist switch is  Tailgate is closed.
pushed.
 Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
 Driver's door is opened.
 The outer surface and the underside of the front
 Tailgate is opened. and rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear
 Electronic Stability Control/Anti-Lock Braking of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction.
System intervention. NOTE:
 Vehicle is in 4WD Low. If the vehicle is driven above approximately
 Axle Locker is active.
15 mph (25 km/h), the instrument cluster display
will instruct the driver to slow down. If the vehicle
 Trailer is connected. is driven above approximately 18 mph (30 km/h),
Press OK to Switch to Perpendicular Park
 Trailer Reverse Steering Control (TRSC) is the system will cancel. The driver must then reac-
active. tivate the system by pushing the ParkSense Active
 Snow plow is connected. Park Assist switch.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active
NOTE:
Park Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow
the LED will turn off if any of the above conditions
a maximum of eight shifts between DRIVE and
are not present.
REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed
 The driver is responsible to ensure that the When an available parking space has been found,
selected parking space is suitable for the and the vehicle is not in position, you will be
maneuver and free/clear of anything that may instructed to move forward to position the vehicle
be overhanging or protruding into the parking for a perpendicular or parallel parking sequence
space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc. from (depending on the type of maneuver being
surrounding objects/vehicles). performed).
 When searching for a parking space, the driver
should drive as parallel or perpendicular
(depending on the type of maneuver) to other
vehicles as possible.
Press OK to Switch to Parallel Park  The feature will only indicate the last detected
NOTE: parking space (example: if passing multiple
available parking spaces, the system will only
 When searching for a parking space, use the
indicate the last detected parking space for the
turn signal indicator to select which side of the
maneuver). A parking space is considered
vehicle you want to perform the parking
invalid after the vehicle is 32 ft (10 m) or more
maneuver. The ParkSense Active Park Assist
away from it.
system will automatically search for a parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
space on the passenger's side of the vehicle if
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be
the turn signal is not activated.
instructed to stop the vehicle’s movement and
 The driver needs to make sure that the selected remove your hands from the steering wheel. When
parking space for the maneuver remains free the vehicle comes to a standstill (your hands still
and clear of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, removed from the steering wheel), you will be
bicycles, etc.). instructed to place the gear selector into the
REVERSE position.
The system may then instruct the driver to wait for The system may instruct several more gear shifts  The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
steering to complete before then instructing to (DRIVE and REVERSE), with hands off of the allow a maximum of eight shifts between DRIVE
check surroundings and move backward. steering wheel, before instructing the driver to and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be
check surroundings and complete the parking completed within eight shifts, the system will
maneuver. cancel and the instrument cluster display will
When the vehicle is in the parking position, the instruct the driver to complete the maneuver
maneuver is complete and the driver will be manually.
instructed to check the vehicle's parking position,  The system will cancel the maneuver if the
then shift the vehicle into PARK. The message vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during
"Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking active steering guidance into the parking space.
Position" will be displayed momentarily. The system will provide a warning to the driver 4
NOTE: at 3 mph (5 km/h) that tells them to slow down.
The driver is then responsible for completing the
 It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake
maneuver if the system is canceled.
Move Backward Into Parallel Parking Space and accelerator during the semi-automatic
parking maneuver.  If the system is canceled during the maneuver
for any reason, the driver must take control of
 It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake
the vehicle.
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check
their surroundings and be prepared to stop the
vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver
intervention is required.
 When the system instructs the driver to remove
their hands from the steering wheel, the driver
should check their surroundings and begin to
back up slowly.
Move Backward Into Perpendicular Parking Space

WARNING! LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED NOTE:

 When operating conditions have been met, the
Drivers must be careful when performing LANESENSE OPERATION LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s
parallel or perpendicular parking maneuvers hands are on the steering wheel and provide an
even when using the ParkSense Active Park The LaneSense system is operational at speeds audible and visual warning to the driver if
Assist system. Always check carefully behind above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph removed. The system will cancel if the driver
and in front of your vehicle, look behind and in (180 km/h). The LaneSense system uses a does not return their hands to the wheel.
front of you, and be sure to check for forward looking camera to detect lane markings
and measure vehicle position within the lane  LaneSense will disable when a snow plow is
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
boundaries. connected to the vehicle.
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up
and moving forward. You are responsible for When both lane markings are detected and the TURNING LANESENSE ON O R O FF
safety and must continue to pay attention to driver drifts out of the lane (no turn signal applied),
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning The LaneSense button is located on the
serious injury or death. in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel, switch panel below the Uconnect display.
as well as a visual warning in the instrument
cluster display, to prompt the driver to remain NOTE:
CAUTION! within the lane boundaries. If your vehicle is equipped with a 12-inch Uconnect
 The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is The driver may manually override the haptic Display screen, the LaneSense button is located
only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize warning by applying force into the steering wheel at above the display.
every obstacle, including small obstacles. any time. To turn the LaneSense system on, push the
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected When only a single lane marking is detected and LaneSense button (LED turns off). A “LaneSense
or not detected at all. Obstacles located above the driver drifts across the lane marking (no turn On” message is shown in the instrument cluster
or below the sensors’ field of view will not be signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a display.
detected when they are in close proximity. visual warning through the instrument cluster To turn the LaneSense system off, push the
 The vehicle must be driven slowly when using display to prompt the driver to remain within the LaneSense button again (LED turns on).
the ParkSense Active Park Assist system in lane. NOTE:
order to be able to stop in time when an When only a single lane marking is detected, a The LaneSense system will retain the last system
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that haptic or a torque warning will not be provided. state on or off from the last ignition cycle when the
the driver looks over his/her shoulders when ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
using the ParkSense Active Park Assist system.
LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE instrument cluster display if an unintentional Left Lane Departure — Both Lane Lines Detected
lane departure occurs on the left side.  When the LaneSense system is on and both the
The LaneSense system will indicate the current
 When the LaneSense system senses the lane lane markings have been detected, the system
lane drift condition through the instrument cluster
has been approached and is in a lane departure is "armed" to provide visual warnings in the
display.
situation, the visual warning in the instrument instrument cluster display and a torque warning
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines cluster display will show the left lane line in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane
are gray when both of the lane boundaries have flashing yellow (on/off). The LaneSense telltale departure occurs. The lane lines turn from gray
not been detected and the LaneSense telltale changes from solid white to flashing yellow. to white and the LaneSense telltale is solid
is solid white. green.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Lane Line)

System ON (Gray Lines) With White Telltale With Yellow Telltale Lanes Sensed (White Lines) With Green Telltale
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected NOTE:
 When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane- The LaneSense system operates with similar
Sense Telltale is solid white when only the behavior for a right lane departure when only the
left lane marking has been detected and the right lane marking has been detected.
system is ready to provide visual warnings in the
 When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift  When the LaneSense system senses the lane CHANGING LANESENSE S TATUS
situation, the left lane line turns solid yellow. has been approached and is in a lane departure
situation, the left lane line flashes yellow The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the
The LaneSense telltale changes from solid
intensity of the torque warning and the warning
green to solid yellow. At this time torque is (on/off). The LaneSense telltale changes
zone sensitivity (Early/Medium/Late) that you can
applied to the steering wheel in the opposite from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time
configure through the Uconnect system
direction of the lane boundary. torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
Ú page 234.
For example: If approaching the left side of the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right. For example: If approaching the left side of the NOTE:
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.  When enabled the system operates above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h).
 The warnings are disabled with use of the
turn signal.
 The system will not apply torque to the steering
wheel whenever a safety system engages
(Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control System,
Electronic Stability Control, Forward Collision
Warning, etc.).
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Lane Line)

With Solid Yellow Telltale Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Lane Line)
With Flashing Yellow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned off, the rear camera mode is
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to exited and the previous screen appears. When the its projected back up path based on the steering
see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera wheel position. A dashed centerline overlay
your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into delay turned on, the camera image will continue to indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with
REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver. Different
Navigation/Multimedia radio display screen along of REVERSE unless the following conditions occur: colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
with a caution note to “Check Entire Surroundings” The vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the the vehicle. The following table shows the
across the top of the screen. After five seconds this vehicle is shifted into PARK, the vehicle’s ignition is approximate distances for each zone:
note will disappear. The ParkView Camera is placed in the OFF position, or the user presses
located in the center of the tailgate handle. image defeat X to exit out of the camera video Distance To The Rear
Zones
Of The Vehicle 4
NOTE: display.
Removing the tailgate will disable the rearview Whenever the Rear View Camera image is Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
camera function. activated through the Back Up Camera button in 1 ft - 6.5 ft
Yellow
Manual Activation Of The Rear View the Controls menu, and the vehicle speed is (30 cm - 2 m)
Camera: greater than, or equal to, 8 mph (13 km/h), a 6.5 ft or greater
display timer for the image is initiated. The image Green
(2 m or greater)
will continue to be displayed until the display timer
1. Press the Controls button located on the exceeds 10 seconds.
bottom of the Uconnect display.
NOTE: WARNING!
2. Press the Back Up Camera icon to turn the
Rear View Camera system on.  If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph Drivers must be careful when backing up even
(13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will be when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera.
NOTE: displayed continuously until deactivated via the Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has program- touchscreen button X, the transmission is be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
mable modes of operation that may be selected shifted into PARK, or the ignition is placed in the vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
through the Uconnect system Ú page 234. OFF position. backing up. You are responsible for the safety of
 The touchscreen button X to disable display of your surroundings and must continue to pay
the camera image is made available ONLY when attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
the vehicle is not in REVERSE. result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM —
 To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should view will display the standard Back Up Camera IF EQUIPPED
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView view. If the vehicle is then returned to REVERSE
gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View selection will The Surround View Camera system allows you to
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
automatically resume. see an on-screen image of the surroundings and
object in your drive path.
the Top View of your vehicle. This occurs whenever
 To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be NOTE: the gear selector is in REVERSE or when enabled
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able The Zoom View button and AUX button (if through the Uconnect system. The Top View of the
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is equipped) will not be available when the vehicle is vehicle will also show if any doors are open. The
recommended that the driver look frequently shifted into REVERSE and the Trailer Reverse image will be displayed on the touchscreen along
over his/her shoulder when using ParkView. Steering Control (TRSC) feature (if equipped) is with a caution note “Check Entire Surroundings”.
activated. After five seconds, this note will disappear. The
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain Surround View Camera system is comprised of four
NOTE:
the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as cameras located in the front grille, rear tailgate
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h). and side mirrors.
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available NOTE:
lens. until the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or  Removing the tailgate will disable the rearview
Zoom View REVERSE and speeds are at or above 8 mph camera function.
(13 km/h).
When the Rear View Camera image is being  The Surround View Camera system has
displayed, and the vehicle speed is below 8 mph NOTE: programmable settings that may be selected
(13 km/h) while in any gear, Zoom View is  If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE, through the Uconnect system Ú page 234.
available. By pressing the “magnifying glass” icon and speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph Press this button on the touchscreen to
in the upper left of the display screen, the image (13 km/h), Zoom View is unavailable and the enter the Surround View Camera menu in
will zoom in to four times the standard view. icon will appear grey. the Uconnect system.
Pressing the icon a second time will return the view  While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be
to the standard Back Up Camera display. visible. When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the Rear
For information on Auxiliary Cameras (if equipped), View and Top View is the default view of the
see Ú page 206. system.
If the camera delay is turned on, the camera image Modes Of Operation  The Top View will show which doors are open.
will display for up to 10 seconds after shifting out Standard Rear View can be manually activated by  Open front doors will block the outside image.
of REVERSE. The camera image will stop selecting “Back Up Camera” through the Controls
displaying, close, and display the previous screen Top View Plus Rear View
menu within the Uconnect system.
if the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the This is the default view of the system in
vehicle is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is Top View REVERSE and is always paired with the
placed in the OFF position. The X button on the The Top View will show in the Uconnect system with Top View of the vehicle with optional
touchscreen disables the display of the camera Rear View or Front View in a split screen display. active guidelines for the projected path
image. There are integrated ParkSense arcs in the image when enabled.
If the camera delay is turned off, the camera image at the front and rear of the vehicle. The arcs will Rear Cross Path View
change color from yellow to red corresponding the
will close and display the previous screen after Pressing the Rear Cross Path soft key will 4
shifting out of REVERSE. distance zones to the oncoming object.
give the driver a wider angle view of the
If active guidelines are enabled, the lines are rear camera system. The Top View will be
overlaid on the image in the Rear View and Top disabled when this is selected.
View to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its Top View Plus Front View
projected path based on steering wheel position.
The Front View will show you what is
The guidelines have different colored zones to immediately in front of the vehicle and is
indicate the distance an object in the view is from always paired with the Top View of the
the rear of the vehicle. Refer to the chart below: vehicle.
Distance To The Rear Of Front Cross Path View
Zone
The Vehicle Pressing the Front Cross Path soft key
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm) Surround View Camera View will give the driver a wider angle view of
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m) the front camera system. The Top View
NOTE: will be disabled when this is selected.
6.5 ft or greater  Front tires will be seen in the image when the
Green Backup Camera View
(2 m or greater) tires are turned.
Pressing the Back Up Camera soft key
 Due to wide angle cameras in the mirrors, the will provide a full screen rear view with
image will appear distorted. the ability to access a Zoom View.
NOTE: view. If the vehicle is then returned to REVERSE  When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
 If the Backup Camera was selected through the gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View selection will camera delay turned off, the Surround View
Surround View Camera menu, exiting out of automatically resume. Camera mode is exited and the last known
screen display will return to the Surround View Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain screen appears again.
menu. If the Backup Camera was manually acti- the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as The system is deactivated in the following
vated through the Controls menu of the Ucon- the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h). conditions if it was activated manually from the
nect system, exiting out of the display screen If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available Uconnect controls menu via Surround View button
will return to the Controls menu. until the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or or Back Up Camera button:
 When the Trailer Reverse Steering Control REVERSE and speeds are at or above 8 mph  The X button on the display is pressed
(TRSC) feature (if equipped) is activated, the (13 km/h).  Vehicle is shifted into PARK
following buttons on the touchscreen will be NOTE:
unavailable:  Ignition is placed in the OFF position
 If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE,  Vehicle speed is over 8 mph (13 km/h) for
 Backup Camera and speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph
 Front Facing Camera with Tire Lines (13 km/h), Zoom View is unavailable and the 10 seconds
 All Surround View Camera Views icon will appear grey. NOTE:
 While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be If the Surround View Camera is activated manually,
Zoom View
visible. and the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, deacti-
When the Rear View Camera image is being vation methods for automatic activation are
displayed, and the vehicle speed is below 8 mph Deactivation assumed.
(13 km/h), Zoom View is available. By pressing the The system is deactivated in the following The camera delay system is turned off manually
“magnifying glass” icon in the upper left of the conditions if it was activated automatically: through the Uconnect settings menu Ú page 234.
display screen, the image will zoom in two times  When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
the standard view. Pressing the icon a second time NOTE:
camera delay turned on, the camera image will
will return the view to the standard Back Up  If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds
Camera display. after shifting out of REVERSE unless the vehicle builds up on the camera lenses, clean the
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is lenses, rinse with water, and dry with a soft
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay shifted into PARK or the ignition is placed in the cloth. Do not cover the lenses.
view will display the standard Back Up Camera OFF position. There is a touchscreen button X to  If a malfunction with the system has occurred,
disable the display of the camera image. see an authorized dealer.
WARNING! FORWARD F ACING C AMERA W ITH TIRE NOTE:

If the vehicle is in 4WD Low, the Forward Facing
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
L INES — I F EQUIPPED Camera image will be displayed until the X button
when using the Surround View Camera. Always The Forward Facing Camera displays a front view is pressed or the ignition is placed in the OFF
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure image of the road ahead, along with tire lines to position.
to check for pedestrians, animals, other guide the driver when driving on narrow roads. Tire
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before lines can be activated/deactivated through the TRAILER CAMERAS — IF EQUIPPED
backing up. You are responsible for the safety of Uconnect Settings.
your surroundings and must continue to pay Activation TRAILER SURROUND VIEW C AMERA
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can SYSTEM — I F EQUIPPED
The Forward Facing Camera can be activated in
result in serious injury or death.
the following ways: 4
The Trailer Surround View Camera system allows
 Pressing the Forward Facing Camera button in you to see an on-screen image of the surroundings
CAUTION! the Controls screen or Apps menu and the Top View of a trailer using four mountable
 Pressing the Forward Facing Camera button
cameras. This occurs whenever the More Cams
 To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View
located in the upper left corner of the Back Up soft button is selected, or when enabled through
should only be used as a parking aid. The the Uconnect system. The image will be displayed
Surround View camera is unable to view every camera display
on the Uconnect display along with a caution note
obstacle or object in your drive path. Once activated, the camera image will remain on “Check Entire Surroundings”. After five seconds,
 To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
as long as the vehicle speed is below 8 mph this note will disappear.
driven slowly when using Surround View to be (13 km/h).
NOTE:
able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. Deactivation
 Trailer Surround View Camera kit is only avail-
It is recommended that the driver look The Forward Facing Camera is deactivated in the able for vehicles equipped with the Surround
frequently over his/her shoulder when using following conditions: View Camera system.
Surround View.
 The vehicle exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), except  The Trailer Surround View Camera system has
when vehicle is in 4WD Low. programmable settings that may be selected
For information on Auxiliary Cameras (if equipped), through the Uconnect system Ú page 234.
 The X button on the display is pressed.
see Ú page 206.
 The vehicle is shifted into PARK.
 The ignition is placed in the OFF position.
Set Up Inputting Trailer Values Press Trailer Surround Camera soft button to
The Trailer Surround View Camera system includes For the Trailer Surround View Camera system to access Top View and Rear View of the trailer.
an installation kit with a Trailer Surround View function, all fields must be entered. When a value If the camera delay is turned on, the camera image
Module and four Trailer Surround View Cameras is needed the screen will display “Required”. will display for up to 10 seconds after shifting out
that must be installed on your trailer prior to of REVERSE. The camera image will not display for
Setting Description 10 seconds if the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
connecting to your vehicle. See the installation
instructions included with the Trailer Surround Input the total length of (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK, or the
Trailer Length
View installation kit for more information. Once the the trailer ignition is placed in the OFF position. The X button
Trailer Surround View Module and cameras are Input the total width of on the touchscreen disables the display of the
installed and the trailer is connected to the vehicle Trailer Width camera image.
the trailer
via the 12-way connector, the settings Trailer If the camera delay is turned off, the camera image
Surround Camera settings can be accessed. The Input the height of the
Camera Height will close and display the previous screen after
Trailer Surround Camera settings can be accessed mounted camera
shifting out of REVERSE.
through Uconnect Settings by pressing the Trailer Choose the trailer type
Trailer Type Modes Of Operation
soft button in the Trailer Settings or the Camera from menu
Settings. The system requires input of the trailer The Trailer Surround View Camera system offers
dimensions prior to use of the system. two different camera displays:
When the Trailer Type soft button is selected two
NOTE: options are available: Conventional or Gooseneck/  Top View split screen with one selected
 If a trailer is connected but the trailer dimen- 5th Wheel. mounted camera
sions have not been entered in the Trailer Activation  Full screen view of a selected mounted camera
Surround settings page, the system will default Press the More Cams soft button on the Surround
The Trailer Surround Camera can be activated
to the settings page. View screen and select the Trailer tab to access the
through the Uconnect system when the vehicle is
 If a trailer is not connected and any soft button in PARK, NEUTRAL, OR DRIVE. Trailer Cameras. Press Trailer Surround Camera
is selected, a message will appear: “Connect soft button to access the default Top View and
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE,
Trailer Equipped With Trailer Surround View Rear View of the trailer.
Surround View Camera showing the Top View and
System”.
Backup Camera is the default view of the system.
Press the More Cams soft button and click the
Trailer tab to access the Trailer Cameras.
Top View Left View Deactivation

The Trailer Top View will show in the Uconnect Pressing the Left View soft button will The system is deactivated in the following
system with Top View and Rear View in a split give the driver a wider angle view of the conditions if it was activated automatically:
screen display. left side trailer camera and is paired with  When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
the Top View of the trailer. camera delay turned on, the camera image will
Right View continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds,
Pressing the Right View soft button will unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
give the driver a wider angle view of the (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or
right side trailer camera and is paired the ignition is placed in the OFF position. There
with the Top View of the trailer. is a touchscreen button X to disable the display
of the camera image. 4
Full Screen Camera View
 When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
To display a full screen image of the Trailer camera delay turned off, the Trailer Surround
Surround View mounted cameras, select one of View Camera mode is exited and the last known
the following options from the Trailer Cameras screen appears again.
Trailer Top and Rear Camera View screen: Trailer Left, Trailer Right, Trailer Front,
Trailer Rear. Exiting out of the full screen view will The system is deactivated in the following
NOTE: conditions if it was activated manually from the
return the system to the previous screen.
Due to wide angle cameras, the image will appear Uconnect controls menu via the Trailer Surround
distorted. NOTE: Camera soft button:
Rear View If the Trailer Surround Camera was selected
through the More Cameras menu, an option to  The X button on the display is pressed
Pressing the Rear View soft button will return to the More Cameras menu will display. If  Vehicle is shifted into PARK
show the Top View and Rear View in a the Trailer Surround Camera was manually acti-  Ignition is placed in the OFF position
split screen display. vated through the Controls menu of the Uconnect
 Vehicle speed is over 8 mph (13 km/h) for
Front View system, exiting out of the display screen will return
to the Controls menu. 10 seconds
Pressing the Front View soft button will
show you what is immediately in front of
the trailer and is paired with the Top View
of the trailer.
NOTE: Activation
If the Trailer Surround Camera is activated
CAUTION!
The AUX Camera is activated by first pressing the
manually, and the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE,  To avoid vehicle damage, Trailer Surround Backup Camera or Cargo Camera (if equipped)
deactivation methods for automatic activation are View should only be used as a parking aid. button on the touchscreen, followed by the AUX
assumed. The Trailer Surround View Camera is unable to button located in the upper left corner of the
The camera delay system is turned off manually view every obstacle or object in your drive rearview display. On vehicles with Surround View
through the Uconnect system Ú page 234. path. Camera (if equipped), the AUX Camera can be
NOTE:  To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be activated when the vehicle is in REVERSE by first
driven slowly when using Trailer Surround pressing the More Cams button in the Surround
 If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
View to be able to stop in time when an view screen, followed by the AUX tab. The AUX
builds up on the camera lenses, clean the
obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the camera can also be activated when the vehicle is
lenses, rinse with water, and dry with a soft
driver look frequently over his/her shoulder in REVERSE by pressing the AUX button.
cloth. Do not cover the lenses.
when using Trailer Surround View. If equipped with two AUX Cameras, you can switch
 If a malfunction with the system has occurred,
between each camera by pressing the AUX 1 or
see an authorized dealer.
AUX 2 buttons on the Trailer Camera display.
AUX CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING! AUX 1 Camera Button
Your vehicle may be equipped with one or two AUX
Drivers must be careful when backing up even Cameras, which display rearview and side view
when using the Trailer Surround View Camera. images from the trailer on the touchscreen.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and AUX 2 Camera Button
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
NOTE:
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before Two Aux Cameras are only available on vehicles
backing up. You are responsible for the safety of with NAV equipped radios if the vehicle is not Deactivation
your surroundings and must continue to pay equipped with a Center High Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL) and Surround View Camera system. The AUX Camera is deactivated by pressing the X in
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can the upper right corner of the touchscreen. This will
result in serious injury or death. return the display back to the previously displayed
screen.
NOTE: 3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe,
WARNING! the nozzle opens and holds both flapper doors
 If the AUX button is pressed and no AUX Camera
is connected, the touchscreen will display a blue  A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a while refueling.
screen along with the message “Camera portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
System Unavailable.” The screen can be exited You could be burned. Always place gas
out by pressing the X in the upper right hand containers on the ground while filling.
corner. This will return the display back to the
previously displayed screen.
CAUTION!
 Zoom View is not available with the AUX Camera
feature. To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
 The display will always default to the Trailer “top off” the fuel tank after filling. 4
Camera display AUX 1.
1. Put the vehicle in PARK and switch the
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GASOLINE ignition off. Fuel Filler
ENGINE 2. Push the center-rear edge of the fuel filler door
(3 o'clock position) and release to open.
4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
The capless fuel filler is located on the left side of
the vehicle. 5. Keep the nozzle in the filler for five seconds
after nozzle clicks to allow fuel to drain from
The capless system is sealed by two flapper doors.
the nozzle.
WARNING! 6. Remove the fuel filler nozzle.
 Never have any smoking materials lit in or 7. To close the fuel filler door, push the
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or center-rear edge (3 o’clock position) of the fuel
the tank is being filled. filler door and then release. The fuel filler door
will latch closed.
 Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the MIL to Fuel Filler Door
turn on.
(Continued)
NOTE: 2. Open the fuel filler door.

In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
WARNING!
filler door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push  Never have any smoking materials lit in or
on the fuel filler door around the perimeter to near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or
break the ice build up. the tank is being filled.
WARNING!  Never add fuel when the engine is running.

 Always place container on the ground before fire regulations and may cause the Malfunc-
filling. tion Indicator Light (MIL) to turn on.
 Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the  A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
container when you are filling it. portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
 Use only approved containers for flammable Diesel Fuel And Diesel Exhaust Fluid Fill Location You could be burned. Always place fuel
liquid. containers on the ground while filling.
1 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Location
 Do not leave container unattended while 2 — Diesel Fuel Fill Location
filling. CAUTION!
 A static electric charge could cause a spark 3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
and fire hazard. the nozzle opens and holds the flapper door off” the fuel tank after filling.
while refueling.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL ENGINE 4. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full. AVOID USING CONTAMINATED FUEL
The capless fuel filler is located on the left side of 5. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel Fuel that is contaminated by water or dirt can
the vehicle. door. cause severe damage to the engine fuel system.
The capless system is sealed by two flapper doors. Proper maintenance of the engine fuel filter and
fuel tank is essential Ú page 408.
1. Put the vehicle in PARK and switch the
ignition off.
BULK FUEL S TORAGE — D IESEL FUEL The purpose of the SCR system is to reduce levels ADDING D IESEL EXHAUST FLUID
of oxides of nitrogen (NOx) emitted from engines
If you store quantities of fuel, good maintenance of that are harmful to our health and the environment The Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) gauge (located on
the stored fuel is also essential. Fuel contaminated to a near-zero level. A small quantity of Diesel the instrument cluster) will display the level of DEF
with water will promote the growth of “microbes.” Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is injected into the exhaust remaining in the tank Ú page 110.
These microbes form “slime” that will clog the fuel upstream of a catalyst where, when vaporized, NOTE:
filtration system and lines. Drain condensation converts smog-forming NOx into harmless  Driving conditions (altitude, vehicle speed, load,
from the supply tank and change the line filter on
nitrogen (N2) and water vapor (H2O), two natural etc.) will effect the amount of DEF that is used in
a regular basis.
components of the air we breathe. your vehicle.
NOTE:
 Outside temperature can affect DEF consump-
When a diesel engine is allowed to run out of fuel, DIESEL E XHAUST F LUID STORAGE 4
tion. In cold conditions, 12°F (-11°C) and
air is pulled into the fuel system.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is considered a very below, the DEF gauge may take longer to
If the vehicle will not start Ú page 414. stable product with a long shelf life. If DEF is kept operate as intended. This is a normal function of
in temperatures between 10° and 90°F (-12° and the system.
WARNING! 32°C), it will last a minimum of one year.  There is an electric heater inside the DEF tank
Do not open the high pressure fuel system with DEF may freeze at temperatures at or below 12°F that automatically works when necessary. If the
the engine running. Engine operation causes (-11°C). The system has been designed to operate DEF supply does freeze, the truck will operate
high fuel pressure. High pressure fuel spray can in this environment. normally until it thaws.
cause serious injury or death.
NOTE:
When working with DEF, it is important to know
DIESEL E XHAUST F LUID that:
 Any containers or parts that come into contact
Your vehicle is equipped with a Selective Catalytic
with DEF must be DEF compatible (plastic or
Reduction (SCR) system to meet diesel emissions
stainless steel). Copper, brass, aluminum, iron
standards required by the Environmental
or non-stainless steel should be avoided as they
Protection Agency.
are subject to corrosion by DEF.
 If DEF is spilled, it should be wiped up
completely.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Procedure 2. Insert DEF fill adapter/nozzle into DEF tank Refilling With Containers
filler neck.
NOTE: Proceed as follows:
For the correct fluid type Ú page 473. NOTE:
1. Remove cap from Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)  The DEF gauge may take up to five seconds  Check the expiration date.
tank which is located next to the diesel fuel to update after adding a gallon or more of  Read the advice for use on the label before
filler. (DEF) to the DEF tank. If you have a fault pouring the content of the bottle into the
related to the DEF system, the gauge may DEF tank.
not update to the new level. See an autho-
 If systems which cannot be screwed in
rized dealer for service.
(e.g. tanks) are used for refilling, after the
 The DEF gauge may also not immediately indication appears on the instrument panel
update after a refill if the temperature of the display Ú page 114 fill the DEF tank with no
DEF fluid is below 12°F (-11°C). The DEF more than 2 gallons (8 liters).
line heater will possibly warm up the DEF
 If containers which can be screwed to the
fluid and allow the gauge to update after a
filler are used, the reservoir is full when the
period of run time. Under very cold condi-
DEF level in the container stops pouring out.
tions, it is possible that the gauge may not
Do not proceed further.
reflect the new fill level for several drives.
DEF Filler Cap And Fuel Fill Refilling With Nozzles CAUTION!
1 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Location  To avoid DEF spillage, and possible damage to
You can fill up at any DEF distributor.
2 — Diesel Fuel Fill Location the DEF tank from overfilling, do not “top off”
Proceed as follows: the DEF tank after filling.
 Insert the DEF nozzle in the filler, start  DO NOT OVERFILL. DEF will freeze below 12ºF
refilling and stop refilling at the first shut-off (-11ºC). The DEF system is designed to work in
(the shut-off indicates that the DEF tank is temperatures below the DEF freezing point,
full). Do not proceed with the refilling, to however, if the tank is overfilled and freezes,
prevent spillage of DEF. the system could be damaged.
 Extract the nozzle. (Continued)
CAUTION!
3. Stop filling the DEF tank immediately when any
of the following happen: DEF stops flowing
VEHICLE LOADING
 When DEF is spilled, clean the area immedi- from the fill bottle into the DEF tank, DEF GROSS V EHICLE WEIGHT RATING
ately with water and use an absorbent mate- splashes out the filler neck, or a DEF pump
rial to soak up the spills on the ground. nozzle automatically shuts off. (GVWR)
 Do not attempt to start your engine if DEF is 4. Reinstall cap onto DEF tank. The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your
accidentally added to the diesel fuel tank as it vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle,
Filling The Def Tank In Cold Climates options and cargo. The label also specifies
can result in severe damage to your engine,
including but not limited to failure of the fuel Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic DEF maximum capacities of front and rear Gross Axle
pump and injectors. heating system. This allows the DEF injection Weight Rating (GAWR). Total load must be limited
system to operate properly at temperatures below so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not 4
 Never add anything other than DEF to the tank 12°F (-11°C). If your vehicle is not in operation for exceeded.
– especially any form of hydrocarbon such as an extended period of time with temperatures
diesel fuel, fuel system additives, gasoline, or below 12°F (-11°C), the DEF in the tank may
PAYLOAD
any other petroleum-based product. Even a freeze. Do not overfill the DEF tank. If the tank is The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable
very small amount of these, less than overfilled and freezes, it could be damaged. load weight a truck can carry, including the weight
100 parts per million or less than 1 oz. per of the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
78 gallons (295 liters) will contaminate the Extra care should be taken when filling with
entire DEF system and will require replace- portable containers to avoid overfilling. Keep an GROSS AXLE WEIGHT RATING (GAWR)
ment. If owners use a container, funnel or eye on the DEF gauge in your instrument cluster.
nozzle when refilling the tank, it should either You may safely add a maximum of 2 gallons The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the
be new or one that has only been used for (7.6 Liters) when your DEF gauge is reading at front and rear axles. The load must be distributed
adding DEF. Mopar® provides an attachable the half mark. in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is
nozzle with its DEF for this purpose. not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components
in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity
(axle, springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or
suspension components sometimes specified by
purchasers for increased durability does not
necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.
TIRE SIZE LOADING CAUTION!

The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label The actual total weight and the weight of the front Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle. and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If
Replacement tires must be equal to the load determined by weighing it when it is loaded and you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can
capacity of this tire size. ready for operation. change the way your vehicle handles. This could
RIM S IZE The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a cause you to lose control. Also, overloading can
commercial scale to insure that the Gross Vehicle shorten the life of your vehicle.
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire Weight Rating (GVWR) has not been exceeded. The
size listed. weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
I NFLATION P RESSURE then be determined separately to be sure that the TRAILER TOWING
load is properly distributed over the front and rear In this section you will find safety tips and
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the Gross information on limits to the type of towing you can
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of either the front or reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is trailer, carefully review this information to tow your
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be load as efficiently and safely as possible.
CURB W EIGHT shifted from front to rear or rear to front as
appropriate until the specified weight limitations To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total coverage, follow the requirements and
weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including are met. Store the heavier items down low and be
sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no vehicles used for trailer towing.
occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The loose items securely before driving.
front and rear curb weight values are determined Improper weight distributions can have an adverse
by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles
before any occupants or cargo are added. and the way the brakes operate.
COMMON T OWING D EFINITIONS Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) Trailer Frontal Area
The following trailer towing related definitions will The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied
assist you in understanding the following vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination. by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
information: Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front can be installed between the hitch receiver and the
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable
and tongue weight. The total load must be limited exceed either front or rear GAWR Ú page 211. friction associated with the telescoping motion to
so that you do not exceed the GVWR Ú page 211. dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions
WARNING! while traveling. 4
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
It is important that you do not exceed the The electronic TSC (If equipped) recognizes a
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous swaying trailer and automatically applies individual
of all cargo, consumables and equipment driving condition can result if either rating is wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
trailer in its “loaded and ready for operation” and have a collision.
condition. Weight-Carrying Hitch
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The
Tongue Weight (TW) weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch
entire weight of the trailer must be supported by The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle.
the scale. ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of These kinds of hitches are commonly used to tow
the load on your vehicle. small and medium sized trailers.
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lb (2,267 kg)
or more, it is recommended to use a
weight-distributing hitch to ensure stable
handling of your vehicle. If you use a standard
weight-carrying hitch, you could lose control of
your vehicle and cause a collision.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
WARNING!
A weight-distributing system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are  An improperly adjusted weight-distributing
typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer hitch system may reduce handling, stability
tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and and braking performance and could result in a
the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with collision.
the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a  Weight-distributing systems may not be
more level ride, offering more consistent steering compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult
and brake control, thereby enhancing towing with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for
control also dampens sway caused by traffic and additional information. With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)
crosswinds and contributes positively to tow
vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer Sway Control
and a weight-distributing (load equalizing) hitch
are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights
(TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with
GAWR requirements.
Improper Adjustment Of Weight-Distributing Hitch

Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect) (Incorrect)
RECOMMENDED DISTRIBUTION HITCH 8. Use the instrument cluster or touchscreen

ADJUSTMENT radio settings and switch off tire jack mode.
Make sure the truck returns to normal ride
Towing With Air Suspension — If Equipped
height. Perform a visual inspection of the
1. Verify that the vehicle is at the normal ride trailer and weight-distributing hitch to confirm
height. the manufacturer’s recommendations have
NOTE: been met.
The vehicle must remain in the engine run position 9. The truck can now be driven.
with all doors closed while attaching a trailer for
proper leveling of the air suspension system.
Measurement
2. Position the truck to be ready to connect to the Measuring Height (H) Example
Example Height (mm) 4
trailer (do not connect the trailer).
5. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the H1 925
3. Enable tire jack mode through the instrument weight-distributing bars connected.
cluster or touchscreen radio settings. Tire jack H2 946
6. Measure the height from the top of the front
mode will be canceled and the procedure must H2-H1 21
wheel opening on the fender to the ground;
be restarted if the vehicle is driven at speeds
this is height H2. (H2-H1)/3 7
above 5 mph (8 km/h).
7. Install and adjust the tension in the (H2-H1)/3 + H1 932
4. Measure the height from the top of the front
weight-distributing bars per the
wheel opening on the fender to ground; this is
manufacturer’s recommendations so that the
height H1. NOTE:
height of the front fender is approximately
For all towing conditions, we recommend towing
(H2-H1)/3+H1 (about 1/3 the difference
with Tow/Haul mode engaged.
between H2 and H1 above normal ride height
[H1]).
TRAILER HITCH TYPE AND M AXIMUM T RAILER W EIGHT

The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight a given factory equipped trailer hitch type can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight

Hitch Type Max. Trailer Weight / Max. Tongue Weight
Class III Bumper Hitch - 1500 Model 5,000 lb (2,267 kg) / 500 lb (226 kg)
Class IV - 1500 Model 12,750 lb (5,783 kg) / 1,275 lb (578 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed Class III Bumper Hitch Access
on your vehicle. Remove the cap with a trim stick or screwdriver to
access the Class III hitch attachment.
NOTE:
Be careful not to scratch the bumper step pad.
Class III Bumper Hitch Access

TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (M AXIMUM Consider the following items when computing the This feature will also allow the driver to back up a
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle: vehicle and trailer in a straight line when the knob
TRAILER WEIGHT R ATINGS) is rested in its center position.
 The tongue weight of the trailer.
NOTE:  The weight of any other type of cargo or equip- Minimal setup is required to use this feature.
For trailer towing information (maximum trailer ment put in or on your vehicle. Set Up:
weight ratings) refer to the following website
addresses:  The weight of the driver and all passengers. To use the system, hitch your trailer to the truck
NOTE: and ensure all electrical wiring is connected
 ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer Ú page 223.
 ramtruck.ca (Canada) The system will automatically calibrate an
adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
 rambodybuilder.com factory-installed options or dealer-installed options attached trailer during normal forward driving with 4
must be considered as part of the total load on no additional action needed from the driver. If the
TRAILER AND TONGUE W EIGHT your vehicle. Refer to the Tire And Loading Infor- vehicle has not had enough time to automatically
mation placard for the maximum combined weight calibrate after connecting a trailer, you will see a
of occupants and cargo for your vehicle. “Calibrate Trailer” message in the instrument
cluster when pressing the TRSC button to activate
TRAILER REVERSE S TEERING CONTROL the system. If this is the case, perform the following
Feature Overview maneuver to calibrate the trailer:
Trailer Reverse Steering Control (TRSC) is a feature Drive forward at least 100 ft (30 m), perform a
that will assist the driver when backing up a trailer. 90 degree turn and return to a straight position for
By turning the knob located on the center stack, at least another 100 ft (30 m). Perform another
you can more accurately control the direction the 90 degree turn, followed by another straight drive
trailer will go. of at least 100 ft (30 m). Check that the system
has calibrated by pushing the TRSC button.
Weight Distribution The driver controls the accelerator and the brake
while steering with the use of the Trailer Reverse
Steering Control knob. The trailer is steered
according to the direction the knob is turned.
NOTE: Using TRSC direction you want the trailer to go. Turning the
The 90 degree turns could be in either the left or knob clockwise will cause the trailer to turn right.
right direction. CAUTION! Turning the knob counterclockwise will cause the
trailer to turn left. If you release the knob, it will
Always observe the position of the trailer and
return to its center position, and the trailer will
surroundings using the camera and mirrors to
back up in a straight line.
avoid damage to the truck or trailer.
Continue to control the accelerator and brake
while backing the trailer up.
NOTE:
While active, TRSC will automatically disable the
Rear Park Assist system if it was previously
enabled.
The system will limit the top speed your vehicle can
Trailer Reverse Steering Control Calibration travel in REVERSE while using the feature. If
needed, you can shift to DRIVE or NEUTRAL to pull
1 — Straight 100 ft (30 m) forward to get more room or straighten out the
2 — Intersection turn with radius 50-65 ft trailer, and shift back to REVERSE without the need
(15-20 m) in either direction Trailer Reverse Steering Control Knob to reactivate the feature.
3 — Straight 100 ft (30 m) The feature will cancel after 30 seconds in
To use the system, place the gear selector in PARK DRIVE or when the vehicle speed reaches 8 mph
4 — Intersection turn with radius 50-65 ft
and put your foot on the brake. Push the activation (12 km/h).
(15-20 m) in either direction
button located above the TRSC knob in the center
5 — Straight 100 ft (30 m) stack. The LED on the button will glow solid and the To cancel out of the feature, come to a stop and
6 — Straight 100 ft (30 m), making sure to align instrument cluster display will direct you to shift to shift to PARK, or push the TRSC activation button.
vehicle/trailer to path center line REVERSE. Once in REVERSE the system is active.
7 — Feature is active, turn knob left or right to Remove hands from the steering wheel and slowly
back the trailer up back up while turning the TRSC knob in the
Instrument Cluster Messages: Other reasons the feature may cancel: Some trailers (such as boat trailers) will need to
 The driver overrides steering by placing hands recalibrate while loaded and unloaded.
 “Calibrate Trailer ” will display when a trailer
is not calibrated and the vehicle is at a standstill on the steering wheel. NOTE:
while the button is pushed.  Trailer tracking is lost.  The system may not detect a trailer in low light
 “Calibrating Trailer” will display when the trailer  If the trailer angle becomes excessive, the
conditions. In sunny conditions, the perfor-
is not calibrated and the vehicle is moving while brakes apply bringing the vehicle to a stop and mance may be degraded as shadows pass over
the button is pushed. then applying the parking brake. the trailer.
 “To Activate Trailer Steering Shift To P” will  The driver is always responsible for safe opera-
 Trailer steering button is pushed while active.
display when the trailer is calibrated success- tion of truck and trailer.
 Vehicle speed goes over 8 mph (12 km/h).
fully, the TRSC activation button is pushed and
 Driver door is open and seat belt is unbuckled.
 The driver is always in control of the truck as 4
the vehicle is not in PARK. well as the trailer and is responsible for
 “Trailer Steering Ready, Shift To Reverse” will  Transmission shifted to PARK. controlling the throttle and brakes.
display when the button is pushed, trailer is cali- Trailer Memory  The system may not function when the camera
brated and the vehicle is in PARK. The trailer steering system will automatically retain lens is blocked, blurred (covered with water,
 “Trailer Steering Active” will display after the the calibration of the previous five trailers snow, ice, dirt, etc) and will not work unless the
driver shifts to REVERSE and indicates the connected, so recalibration will not be necessary tailgate is upright and fully latched.
feature is active. when hooking up. The next time the vehicle is TOWING REQUIREMENTS
 “Trailer Steering Unavailable” will display if started, place the vehicle in DRIVE and drive a
there is a fault in the system preventing activa- short distance. The TRSC system can then be To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
tion, the driver’s door is open, the driver’s seat activated. drivetrain components, the following guidelines
belt is unbuckled, or the tailgate is open. are recommended.
NOTE:
Trailers may look different during day and night
CAUTION!
conditions. In such cases, the trailer may need to
recalibrate.  Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven.
The engine, axle or other parts could be
damaged.
(Continued)
Towing Requirements — Tires

CAUTION! WARNING!
 Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
 Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that  Safety chains must always be used between compact spare tire.
a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the
 Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle
throttle. This helps the engine and other parts hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer towing while using a full size spare tire.
of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads. tongue and allow enough slack for turning  Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to
corners. the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle.
Perform the maintenance listed in the Scheduled  Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on
Servicing section for the proper maintenance a grade. When parking, apply the parking  Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
intervals Ú page 393. When towing a trailer, never brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle pressures before trailer usage.
exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings. transmission in PARK. For four-wheel drive  Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
vehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in damage before towing a trailer.
WARNING! NEUTRAL. Always, block or "chock" the trailer  Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
 Make certain that the load is secured in the wheels. capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR
trailer and will not shift during travel. When  GCWR must not be exceeded. and GAWR limits.
trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
 Total weight must be distributed between the  For further information Ú page 444.
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be
difficult for the driver to control. You could lose tow vehicle and the trailer such that the Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
control of your vehicle and have a collision. following four ratings are not exceeded:
 Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system
 When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not  GVWR or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading the trailer.
 GTW
can cause a loss of control, poor performance  An electronically actuated trailer brake
or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmis-  GAWR controller is required when towing a trailer with
sion, steering, suspension, chassis structure  Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch electronically actuated brakes. When towing a
or tires. utilized. trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated
(Continued) brake system, an electronic brake controller is
not required.
 Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM) — The user interface consists of the following:
over 1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers If Equipped GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-)
in excess of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
Your vehicle may have an ITBM for electric and Pushing these buttons will adjust the brake control
WARNING! Electric Over Hydraulic (EOH) trailer brakes. power output to the trailer brakes in
NOTE: 0.5 increments. The GAIN setting can be increased
 Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's to a maximum of 10 or decreased to a minimum of
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your This module has been designed and verified with
electric trailer brakes and new EOH systems. 0 (no trailer braking).
brake system and cause it to fail. You might
Some previous EOH systems may not be GAIN
not have brakes when you need them and
could have an accident. compatible with ITBM. The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake
 Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
control for the specific towing condition and should 4
be changed as towing conditions change. Changes
distance. When towing, you should allow for to towing conditions include trailer load, vehicle
additional space between your vehicle and the load, road conditions and weather.
vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could
result in an accident. Manual Brake Control Lever
Slide the manual brake control lever to the left to
activate power to the trailer's electric brakes
CAUTION! independent of the tow vehicle's brakes. If the
manual brake control lever is activated while the
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
brake is also applied, the greater of the two inputs
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM) determines the power sent to the trailer brakes.
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do
this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, The trailer and the vehicle’s stop lamps will come
1 — GAIN (-) Adjustment Button
higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping on when braking normally with the vehicle brake
2 — GAIN (+) Adjustment Button pedal. Only the trailer stop lamps will come on
distances.
3 — Manual Brake Control Lever when the manual brake control lever is applied.
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light 1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good 6. Push the UP or DOWN buttons until the Trailer
This light indicates the trailer electrical connection working condition, functioning normally and Brake Type appears on the screen.
status. properly adjusted. See your trailer dealer if 7. Push the RIGHT arrow and then push the UP or
necessary. DOWN buttons until the proper Trailer Brake
If no electrical connection is detected after the
ignition is turned on, pushing the GAIN adjustment 2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical Type appears on the screen.
button or sliding the manual brake control lever connections according to the trailer 8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on
will display the GAIN setting for 10 seconds and the manufacturer's instructions. a dry, level surface at a speed of 20–25 mph
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light will not be 3. When a trailer is plugged in with electric or (30–40 km/h) and squeeze the manual brake
displayed. EOH brakes, the trailer connected message control lever completely.
If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the should appear in the instrument cluster 9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM), the Trailer display (if the connection is not recognized by squealing tires), reduce the GAIN setting;
Brake Status Indicator Light will flash. the ITBM, braking functions will not be if the trailer wheels turn freely, increase the
available), the GAIN setting will illuminate and GAIN setting.
Adjusting GAIN the correct type of trailer must be selected
NOTE: from the instrument cluster display options. Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at a
This should only be performed in a traffic free envi- 4. Push the UP or DOWN button on the steering point just below trailer wheel lockup. If towing a
ronment at speeds of approximately 20–25 mph wheel until “TRAILER TOW” appears on the heavier trailer, trailer wheel lockup may not be
(30–40 km/h). screen. attainable even with the maximum GAIN setting
of 10.
5. Push the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel to
enter “TRAILER TOW”.
Light Electric Heavy Electric Light EOH Heavy EOH

Electric Over Hydraulic Trailer Electric Over Hydraulic Trailer
Type of Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes
Brakes Brakes
Load *Under 10,000 lb *Above 10,000 lb *Under 10,000 lb *Above 10,000 lb
*The suggested selection may change depending on the customer preferences for braking performance. Condition of the trailer brakes, driving and road state
may also affect the selection.
Display Messages NOTE: NOTE:

The trailer brake control interacts with the  An aftermarket controller may be available for  Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
instrument cluster display. Display messages, use with trailers with air or EOH trailer brake vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
along with a single chime, will be displayed systems. To determine the type of brakes on device plugged into vehicle’s electrical connect)
when a malfunction is determined in the trailer your trailer and the availability of controllers, into water.
connection, trailer brake control, or on the trailer check with your trailer manufacturer or dealer.  Be sure to reconnect once clear from water
Ú page 114.  Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it area.
may cause damage to the electrical system and
WARNING! electronic modules of the vehicle. See an autho-
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with rized dealer if an aftermarket module is to be
the ITBM system may result in reduced or installed. 4
complete loss of trailer braking. There may be a Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
increase in stopping distance or trailer instability
Wiring
which could result in personal injury.
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer
size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are
CAUTION! required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four-pin
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with
and seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory Four-Pin Connector
the ITBM system may result in reduced or
approved trailer harness and connector.
complete loss of trailer braking. There may be a 1 — Ground
increase in stopping distance or trailer instability NOTE: 2 — Park
which could result in damage to your vehicle, Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring 3 — Left Stop/Turn
trailer, or other property. harness.
4 — Right Stop/Turn
The electrical connections are all complete to the
vehicle but you must connect the harness to a
trailer connector. Refer to the following
illustrations.
When activated the feature will enable all of the The sequence will only activate if the following
exterior lights sequentially for up to five minutes conditions are met:
for time to walk around and verify functionality. The  Vehicle is equipped with the Trailer Tow
following exterior lights will remain on for the Package
entirety of the sequence:
 Vehicle is in PARK
 Park/Running Lamps
 Vehicle is not in motion
 Side Marker Lamps (if equipped)
 Ignition is in ACC or ON/RUN
 License Lamp
 Remote start is inactive
 Signature Lamp (if equipped)
 Brakes are not applied
Seven-Pin Connector  Low Beams
 Left turn signal is not applied
1 — Backup Lamps  Fog Lamps (if equipped)
 Right turn signal is not applied
2 — Running Lamps  Daytime Running Lamps
 Hazard switch is not applied
3 — Left Stop/Turn During this time the following lights will sequence,
4 — Ground each activating for three seconds: The sequence will cancel if any of the following
5 — Battery conditions occur:
1. Brake and CHMSL (third brake light)
6 — Right Stop/Turn  Brakes are applied
2. Left turn signal
7 — Electric Brakes  Vehicle is shifted from PARK
3. Right turn signal
 Vehicle is no longer stationary
4. Reverse Lamps
Trailer Light Check  Left turn signal activated from stalk
5. High Beam
This feature will run the trailer lights through a  Right turn signal is activated from stalk
sequence to check the trailer light function. It is This light check sequence will continue for a total  Hazard switch is activated
available in the Instrument Cluster under the of five minutes.
Trailer Tow menu Ú page 121.  Any button on the key fob is pushed
 Ignition button is pushed
 High Beam stalk position is changed
 Sequence is canceled in the instrument cluster
TOWING TIPS Cruise Control — If Equipped NOTE:

 Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads. Before installation of a snowplow it is highly recom-
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and mended that the owner/installer obtain and follow
backing up the trailer in an area located away from  When using the Cruise Control, if you experience the recommendations contained within the current
heavy traffic. speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), Body Builder’s Guide. See an authorized dealer,
disengage until you can get back to cruising installer or snowplow manufacturer for this infor-
Automatic Transmission
speed. mation. There are unique electrical systems that
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
 Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light must be connected to properly ensure operator
transmission controls include a drive strategy to
loads to maximize fuel efficiency. safety and prevent overloading vehicle systems.
avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, select Air Suspension System WARNING!
TOW/HAUL mode or select a lower gear range To aid in attaching/detaching the trailer from the 4
(using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift vehicle, the air suspension system can be used Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could
control). Ú page 165. Selecting Tow/Haul or connecting a adversely affect performance of the airbag
trailer with an Integrated Trailer Brake Module system in a collision. Do not expect that the
NOTE:
(ITBM) will disable Automatic Aero mode to avoid airbag will perform as described earlier in this
Using TOW/HAUL mode or selecting a lower gear
height changes while towing and shifting loads or manual.
range (using the ERS shift control) while operating
the vehicle under heavy loading conditions will tongue weights.
improve performance and extend transmission life NOTE: CAUTION!
by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. The vehicle must remain in the engine running
This action will also provide better engine braking. position while attaching a trailer for proper leveling The “Lamp Out” indicator could illuminate if
Tow/Haul Mode of the air suspension system. exterior lamps are not properly installed.
To reduce potential for automatic transmission
overheating, activate TOW/HAUL mode when SNOWPLOW
driving in hilly areas, or select a lower gear range Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a factory
(using the (ERS) shift control) on more severe installed option. These packages include
grades. components necessary to equip your vehicle with a
snowplow.
BEFORE PLOWING Gross Axle Weight (GAWR) ratings. These weights OPERATING T IPS
are specified on the Safety Compliance
 Check the hydraulic system for leaks and proper Certification Label on the driver's side door Under ideal snow plowing conditions, 20 mph
fluid level. opening. (32 km/h) should be maximum operating speed.
 Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper The operator should be familiar with the area and
NOTE: surface to be cleaned. Reduce speed and use
tightness. Detach the snowplow when transporting extreme caution when plowing unfamiliar areas or
 Check the runners and cutting edge for exces- passengers. under poor visibility.
sive wear. The cutting edge should be ¼ to Vehicle front end wheel alignment was set to
½ inches (6 cm to 1.2 cm) above ground in specifications at the factory without consideration GENERAL MAINTENANCE
snow plowing position. for the weight of the plow. Front end toe-in should
Snowplows should be maintained in accordance
 Check that snowplow lighting is connected and be checked and reset if necessary at the beginning
with the plow manufacturer's instructions.
functioning properly. and end of the snowplow season. This will help
prevent uneven tire wear. Keep all snowplow electrical connections and
SNOWPLOW PREP PACKAGE MODEL The blade should be lowered whenever the vehicle
battery terminals clean and free of corrosion.
AVAILABILITY is parked. When plowing snow, to avoid transmission and
drivetrain damage, the following precautions
For Information about snowplow applications visit Maintain and operate your vehicle and snowplow
should be observed:
www.ramtrucks.com or refer to the current Body equipment following the recommendations
Builder’s Guide. provided by the specific snowplow manufacturer.  Operate with transfer case in 4WD LOW when
plowing small or congested areas where speeds
1. The maximum number of occupants in the OVER THE ROAD OPERATION W ITH are not likely to exceed 15 mph (24 km/h).
truck should not exceed two.
S NOWPLOW ATTACHED At higher speeds operate in 4WD HIGH.
2. The total GVWR, Front GAWR or the Rear  Vehicles with automatic transmissions should
GAWR should never be exceeded. The blade restricts air flow to the radiator and
use 4WD LOW when plowing deep or heavy
causes the engine to operate at higher than
3. Cargo capacity will be reduced by the addition snow for extended periods of time to avoid
normal temperatures. Therefore, when
of options or passengers, etc. transmission overheating.
transporting the plow, angle the blade completely
and position it as low as road or surface conditions  Do not shift the transmission unless the engine
The loaded vehicle weight, including the snowplow
permit. Do not exceed 40 mph (64 km/h). The has returned to idle and wheels have stopped.
system, all aftermarket accessories, driver,
operator should always maintain a safe stopping Make a practice of stepping on the brake pedal
passengers, options, and cargo, must not exceed
distance and allow adequate passing clearance. while shifting the transmission.
either the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVWR) or
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)

TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND A NOTHER V EHICLE
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Two-Wheel Drive Models Four-Wheel Drive Models
See Instructions
Transmission in PARK
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Transfer case in N (Neutral)
Tow in forward direction
4
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
NOTE:
 When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
 Vehicles equipped with Active-Level Four Corner Air Suspension must be placed in Transport mode before tying them down (from the body) on a trailer or
flatbed truck Ú page 165. If the vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode (for example, engine will not run), tie-downs must be fastened to the axles
(not to the body). Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.
RECREATIONAL TOWING — T WO-W HEEL CAUTION! CAUTION!

DRIVE MODELS Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will  Before recreational towing, the transfer case
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the cause severe transmission damage. Damage must be in N (Neutral). To be certain the
drivetrain will result. from improper towing is not covered under the transfer case is fully in N (Neutral), perform
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is New Vehicle Limited Warranty. the procedure outlined under “Shifting Into
allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the N (Neutral)”. Internal transmission damage
will result, if the transfer case is not in N
ground. This may be accomplished using a tow RECREATIONAL TOWING — (Neutral) during towing.
dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow
this procedure: F OUR-W HEEL DRIVE MODELS  The transmission must be in PARK for recre-
NOTE: NOTE: ational towing.
If vehicle is equipped with air suspension, ensure The transfer case must be shifted into N (Neutral)  Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is
the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height. for recreational towing. The transmission must be released, and remains released, while being
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, shifted into PARK for recreational towing. Refer to towed.
following the dolly manufacturer's the following for the proper transfer case N
(Neutral) shifting procedure for your vehicle.  Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
instructions.
requirements can cause severe transmission
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly. CAUTION! and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
3. Apply the parking brake. Place the improper towing is not covered under the New
 DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing
transmission in PARK. Vehicle Limited Warranty.
with only one set of wheels on the ground
4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, (front or rear) will cause severe transmission  Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because
following the dolly manufacturer's instructions. and/or transfer case damage. Tow with all fluid will leak from the transfer case, causing
5. Turn the ignition OFF. four wheels either ON the ground, or OFF the damage to internal parts.
ground (using a vehicle trailer).
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for  Do not use a fascia/bumper-mounted
towing, to secure the front wheels in the  Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this clamp-on tow bar on your vehicle. The fascia/
straight position. vehicle backwards can cause severe damage bumper face bar will be damaged.
to the transfer case.
(Continued)
Shifting Into N (Neutral) 3. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. The 10. Turn the ignition off.
driver's door must be closed (or the driver's 11. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a
Use the following procedure to prepare your
seat belt buckled) so that the transmission will suitable tow bar.
vehicle for recreational towing.
remain in NEUTRAL when the brake pedal is
released. 12. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, but do
WARNING! not start the engine.
NOTE:
You or others could be injured or killed if you 13. Release the parking brake.
If vehicle is equipped with air suspension, ensure
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer 14. Turn the ignition OFF.
the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.
case in the N (Neutral) position without first fully
engaging the parking brake. The transfer case N 4. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push
and hold the recessed transfer case N
NOTE:
(Neutral) position disengages both the front and
rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will (Neutral) button (at the center of the transfer  Steps 2 and 3 are requirements that must be 4
case switches). The N (Neutral) indicator light met before pushing the N (Neutral) button, and
allow the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission
will illuminate, and remain lit, when the shift to must continue to be met until the shift has been
is in PARK. The parking brake should always be
N (Neutral) is complete. After the shift is completed. If any of these requirements are not
applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
completed and the N (Neutral) light stays on, met before pushing the N (Neutral) button or are
release the N (Neutral) button. no longer met during the shift, the N (Neutral)
indicator light will flash continuously until all
CAUTION! 5. Release the parking brake.
requirements are met or until the N (Neutral)
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain 6. Shift the transmission into REVERSE. button is released.
that the transfer case is fully in N (Neutral) 7. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and  The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a
before recreational towing to prevent damage to ensure that there is no vehicle movement. shift to take place and for the position indicator
internal parts. lights to be operable. If the ignition is not in the
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 with the transmission in
DRIVE. ON/RUN mode, the shift will not take place and
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
9. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. Apply the
ground, with the engine running. Apply the parking brake. Turn off the engine. For vehicles  A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light
parking brake. with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™, push and hold the indicates that shift requirements have not been
2. Press and hold the brake pedal. ENGINE START/STOP button until the engine met.
shuts off. The transmission will automatically
select PARK when the engine is turned off.
 If the vehicle is equipped with air suspension,

the engine should be started and left running for
8. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
DRIVING TIPS
9. Press and hold the brake pedal.
a minimum of 60 seconds (with all the doors DRIVING ON S LIPPERY S URFACES
closed) at least once every 24 hours. This 10. Start the engine.
process allows the air suspension to adjust the 11. Release the parking brake. Acceleration
vehicle’s ride height to compensate for 12. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release the Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other
temperature effects. brake pedal, and check that the vehicle slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to
Shifting Out Of N (Neutral) operates normally. pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon
occurs when there is a difference in the surface
Use the following procedure to prepare your NOTE: traction under the rear (driving) wheels.
vehicle for normal usage:
 Steps 3 and 4 are requirements that must be
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving met before pushing the button to shift out of WARNING!
it connected to the tow vehicle. N (Neutral), and must continue to be met until Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is
2. Press and hold the brake pedal. the shift has been completed. If any of these dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden
3. Start the engine. Apply the parking brake. Shift requirements are not met before pushing the pulling of the rear wheels. You could lose control
the transmission into NEUTRAL. button or are no longer met during the shift, the of the vehicle and possibly have a collision.
N (Neutral) indicator light will flash continuously Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there
4. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push until all requirements are met or until the button
and hold the recessed transfer case N is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet, mud,
is released. loose sand, etc.).
(Neutral) button (at the center of the transfer
case switches).  The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator
5. When the N (Neutral) indicator light turns off, lights to be operable. If the ignition is not in the
release the N (Neutral) button. ON/RUN mode, the shift will not take place and
6. Turn the engine off. The transmission will no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
automatically select PARK when the engine is  A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light
turned off. indicates that shift requirements have not been
7. Release the brake pedal. met.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER WARNING! CAUTION!

Driving through water more than a few inches/  Driving through standing water limits your  Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
centimeters deep will require extra caution to vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed through standing water. This will minimize
ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through wave effects.
Flowing/Rising Water standing water.
 Driving through standing water may cause
 Driving through standing water limits your damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain compo-
WARNING! vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases nents. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids
Do not drive on or across a road or path where stopping distances. Therefore, after driving (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm through standing water, drive slowly and signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky
run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road lightly press on the brake pedal several times or foamy in appearance) after driving through 4
or path's surface and cause your vehicle to sink to dry the brakes. standing water. Do not continue to operate
into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated,
 Failure to follow these warnings may result in
rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. as this may result in further damage. Such
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
Failure to follow this warning may result in damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
passengers, and others around you.
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your Limited Warranty.
passengers, and others around you.
 Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
CAUTION! cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause
Shallow Standing Water  Always check the depth of the standing water
serious internal damage to the engine. Such
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
before driving through it. Never drive through
shallow standing water, consider the following Limited Warranty.
standing water that is deeper than the bottom
Cautions and Warnings before doing so. of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
 Determine the condition of the road or the
path that is under water and if there are any
obstacles in the way before driving through
the standing water.
(Continued)
OFF-R OAD D RIVING TIPS After Driving Off-Road  After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan,
Care should be taken when attempting to climb Off-road operation puts more stress on your
brake rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle
steep hills or driving diagonally across a hill or vehicle than does most on-road driving. After going
yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as
slope. If natural obstacles force you to travel off-road, it is always a good idea to check for
possible.
diagonally up or down a hill, choose a mild angle damage. That way you can get any problems taken
and keep as little side tilt as possible. Keep the care of right away and have your vehicle ready
WARNING!
vehicle moving and make turns slowly and when you need it.
cautiously.  Completely inspect the underbody of your Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may
vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering, cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking.
If you must back down a hill, back straight down You might not have full braking power when you
using REVERSE gear. Never back down in suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
need it to prevent a collision. If you have been
NEUTRAL or diagonally across the hill.  Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and operating your vehicle in dirty conditions, get
When driving over sand, mud, and other soft clean as required. your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary.
terrain, shift to low gear and drive steadily. Apply  Check threaded fasteners for looseness, partic-
the accelerator slowly to avoid spinning the ularly on the chassis, drivetrain components,
 If you experience unusual vibration after driving
wheels. steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if
in mud, slush or similar conditions, check the
Do not reduce the tire pressures for this type of required, and torque to the values specified in
wheels for impacted material. Impacted mate-
driving. the Service Manual.
rial can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing
 Check for accumulations of plants or brush. the wheels of it will correct the situation.
These things could be a fire hazard. They might
hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle
pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
233
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS CYBERSECURITY WARNING!
For detailed information about your Uconnect Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may  It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
3 With 5-inch Display Ú page 259. be equipped with both wired and wireless possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems
For detailed information about your Uconnect networks. These networks allow your vehicle to are breached. It may be possible that vehicle
5/5 NAV With 8.4-inch Display system or your send and receive information. This information systems, including safety related systems,
Uconnect 5 NAV With 12-inch Display system, refer allows systems and features in your vehicle to could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement. function properly. could occur that may result in an accident
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security involving serious injury or death.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and  ONLY insert trusted devices/components into 5
purposes only and may not reflect exact software unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless your vehicle. Media of unknown origin could
for your vehicle. communications. Vehicle software technology possibly contain malicious software, and if
continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC, installed in your vehicle, it may increase the
working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes possibility for vehicle systems to be breached.
appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a
computer or other devices, your vehicle may  As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
require software updates to improve the usability behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest
and performance of your systems or to reduce the authorized dealer immediately.
potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access
to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
234 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: UCONNECT SETTINGS Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off
and Mute buttons on the faceplate.
 FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates. The Uconnect system uses a combination of Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the off the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or
 To help further improve vehicle security and faceplate located on the center of the instrument
minimize the potential risk of a security breach, tap the screen to turn the screen on.
panel. These buttons allow you to access and
vehicle owners should: change the Customer Programmable Features. Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu
 Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com Many features can vary by vehicle. or certain option on the Uconnect system.
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or For the Uconnect 5 systems, push and hold the
(Canadian Residents) to learn about avail- beside the Uconnect system in the center of the Power button on the radio’s faceplate for a
able Uconnect software updates. instrument panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/ minimum of 15 seconds to reset the radio.
 Only connect and use trusted media Enter control knob located on the right side. Turn
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones, the control knob to scroll through menus and
USBs, CDs). change settings. Push the center of the control
knob one or more times to select or change a
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications
setting.
cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully
intercept information and private communications
without your consent Ú page 138.
MULTIMEDIA 235
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE F EATURES 1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen NOTE:

2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate  Only one touchscreen may be selected at a
time.
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, the  Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 8.4-inch Display, and settings may vary.
Uconnect 5 NAV With 12-inch Display When making a selection, only press one button at
For the Uconnect 3 system, push the Settings a time to enter the desired menu. Once in the
button on the top of the faceplate. In this menu, desired menu, press and release the preferred
the Uconnect system allows you to access all of the setting option until a check mark appears next to
available programmable features. the setting, showing that setting has been
For the Uconnect 5 systems, press the Vehicle selected. Once the setting is complete, press the X
button, then press the Settings tab at the top of the button on the touchscreen to close out of the
touchscreen. In this menu, the Uconnect system settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow 5
allows you to access all of the available button on the right side of the screen will allow you
programmable features. to toggle up or down through the available settings.
Uconnect 5 NAV With 12-inch Display Touchscreen And

Faceplate Buttons
236 MULTIMEDIA
My Profile
When the My Profile button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s profiles.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description

This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument
Language
Cluster Display. The available languages are English, Français, and Español.
This setting will adjust the display for the radio to “Auto” or “Manual”.
Display Mode
“Manual” allows for more customization with the radio display.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To
Display Brightness Headlights On access this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will
increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To
Display Brightness Headlights Off access this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
This setting will allow you to change the units to “US”, “Metric”, or “Custom”.
The available options within Custom are “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance”
(mi or km), “Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L),
Units
“Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), Power” (HP [US], Gal
HP [UK], or kW), and “Torque” (lb-ft or Nm) units of measurement
independently.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 237

Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
Instrument Cluster Display.
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS
must be “Off” for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the
Time Format
time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour
format.
This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to “Male”
Voice Options
or “Female”.
This setting will allow you to set the system “Wake Up” word. The available
Wake Up Word
options are “Off”, “Hey, Uconnect”, and “Hey, Ram”.
5
Voice Barge-in This setting will allow Voice Barge-in to be turned on or off.
This setting will allow the Command List to be shown. The options are “On”
Show Command List
and “Off”.
This setting will redirect to the list of Navigation settings. Refer to the Owner’s
Navigation Settings
Manual Supplement for further information.
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats or
heated steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is
started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel
Start” setting will only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start.
The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle
is started.
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is
Radio Power Off turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The
available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
238 MULTIMEDIA

This setting will allow you to determine if the radio shuts off when any of the
Radio Off With Door
doors are opened.
This setting will open the submenu, containing the audio settings
Audio Settings
Ú page 255.
This setting will allow you to favorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off”
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-ups
options.
This setting will allow you to unfavorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and
App Drawer Unfavoritings Pop-ups
“Off” options.
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for new text messages.
New Text Message Pop-ups
Setting options are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for missed calls. Setting
Missed Calls Message
options are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for Navigation. Setting
Navigation Pop-ups
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory
Restore Settings to Default
default.
Trip B This setting will turn the Trip B feature in the cluster on or off.
Audio Info On Cluster This setting will turn the audio info on the cluster on or off.
Digital Speed On All Cluster Screens This setting will show the digital speedometer on all cluster screens.
Consumption Bar On Cluster Screen This setting will show the digital fuel consumption bar on all cluster screens.
This setting will allow you to customize the information displayed on the
Custom Areas On Cluster
cluster.
Head Up Display This setting will turn the Head Up Display (HUD) on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 239

HUD Brightness This setting will adjust the brightness of the Head Up Display.
HUD Height This setting will adjust the Head Up Display height.
This setting will adjust the amount of content displayed on the Head Up
HUD Content
Display. The available options are “Simple”, “Standard”, and “Advanced”.
Audio Repetition This setting will turn the system audio repetition on or off.
More Profile Options This setting will give access to more profile options.
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the
5
touchscreen. The available settings are:
NOTE:

This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument
Language
Cluster Display. The available languages are English, Français, and Español.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system
set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust
Display Mode
the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the
brightness of the display.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To
Display Brightness With Headlights ON/Brightness access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will
240 MULTIMEDIA

This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF/Brightness access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
This setting will allow you to change the units. The available options are
“Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel Consumption” (MPG
Units [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar),
“Temperature” (°C or °F), Power” (HP [US], Gal HP [UK], or kW), and “Torque”
(lb-ft or Nm) units of measurement independently.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically after
Control Screen Timeout
five seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
Instrument Cluster Display.
Fuel Saver Display This setting will enable fuel saver mode in the Instrument Cluster Display.
This setting will enable the Ready To Drive Pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster
Ready To Drive Pop-ups
Display.
MULTIMEDIA 241
Safety/Driving Assistance
When the Safety/Driving Assistance button is selected on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These
options will differ depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a
subfolder, select the desired folder; the available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:

This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal
when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is detected. The 5
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity
“Near” setting will have the FCW system signal when the object is closer to the
vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is at
a far distance from the vehicle.
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The “Off”
setting will deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide
Forward Collision Warning only an audible chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active
Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and apply some brake pressure
when a collision is detected.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking This setting will turn the Pedestrian Emergency Braking system on or off.
This setting will change the distance at which the steering wheel will provide
LaneSense Warning lane departure feedback. The available settings are “Early”, “Medium”, and
“Late”.
This setting will change the strength of the steering wheel feedback during a
LaneSense Strength
lane departure. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
242 MULTIMEDIA

This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is
ParkSense
detected and provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available
Front ParkSense Volume
settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available
Rear ParkSense Volume
settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist This setting will turn the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist on or off.
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected
in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The
Blind Spot Alert “Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors.
The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate both the lights on the outside
mirrors and an audible chime.
This setting will auto detect the length of an attached trailer. The “Auto”
Trailer Length For Blind Spot Alert setting will have the system automatically set the trailer length. The “Max”
setting will always set the length to the maximum 39.5 ft (12 m).
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
shifting out of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines on or off.
Tire Fill Assist This setting will turn Tire Fill Assist on or off.
This setting will raise and lower or stow the power side steps. The available
Power Side Steps options are “Automatic” to raise and lower the power side steps and “Stow” to
deactivate the power side steps.
MULTIMEDIA 243
Clock
When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:

This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system
Sync Time With GPS
will control the time via the GPS location.
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS
must be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the
Set Time And Format/Time Format
time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour 5
format.
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off for
Set Time Hours this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours. The “-”
setting will decrease the hours.
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off
Set Time Minutes for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the minutes. The
“-” setting will decrease the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
244 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio
device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Setting Name
Description
Device Manager This setting will open the Device Manager main screen.
This setting will open the Do Not Disturb settings menu. The available options
Do Not Disturb All
are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will enable or disable two active phones within the vehicle. The
Enable Two Active Phones
setting options are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster
Display.
MULTIMEDIA 245
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:

This setting will allow you to change the system’s voice to either “Male” or
Voice Options
“Female”.
This setting will allow you to set the system’s “Wake Up” word. The available
Wake Up Word
options are “Off”, “Hey, Uconnect”, and “Hey, Ram”.
This setting allows you to respond to a Voice Response before the statement 5
Voice Barge-In
is completed by the system. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always”
setting will always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show
Show Command List
the Command List and provide a brief description of what the command does.
The “Never” setting will turn the Command List off.
246 MULTIMEDIA
Navigation
When the Navigation button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s built-in Navigation system. These settings can
change which icons display on the map, how “time to arrival is calculated”, and route types.
For more information on Navigation and settings, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE:
Trailer Brake/Trailer
When the Trailer Brake/Trailer button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to trailer towing.
NOTE:

Select from “Trailer 1”, “Trailer 2”, “Trailer 3”, and “Trailer 4”. These trailer
Trailer Select
designations can be used to save different trailer settings.
This setting will set the system to a specific trailer type. The available options
Trailer Brake Type are “Light Electric”, “Heavy Electric”, “Light Electric-Over-Hydraulic”, and
“Heavy Electric-Over-Hydraulic”.
This setting will personalize the trailer name depending on the type of trailer
you are hauling. Select the trailer name from the following list: trailer, boat,
Trailer Name
car, cargo, dump, equipment, flatbed, gooseneck, horse, livestock,
motorcycle, snowmobile, travel, utility, and 5th wheel.
MULTIMEDIA 247
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:

This setting will add a timed delay to the Surround View Camera when shifting
Surround View Camera Delay
out of REVERSE.
Surround View Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Surround View Camera Guidelines on or off.
This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
shifting out of REVERSE. 5
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines on or off.
248 MULTIMEDIA
Mirrors & Wipers

When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:

This setting will tilt the outside side-view mirrors when the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the
transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. The available settings are “On” and
“Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
 When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country
of the vehicle purchased.
 Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
MULTIMEDIA 249

This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights
Headlight Off Delay to shut off after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”,
“30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights
Headlight Illumination On Approach to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are “0 sec”,
“30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
Flash Lights With Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
5
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
This setting will turn the headlights with the steering wheel. The available
Steering Directed Lights
Brakes
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:

Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
Brake Service This setting will allow you to retract the brakes for servicing.
250 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks

When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:

This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when the
Auto Door Locks
vehicle reaches 12 mph (19 km/h).
This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the
Auto Unlock On Exit
inside.
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
Flash Lights With Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key
fob. The “Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed.
Sound Horn With Lock The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed
once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is
pushed twice.
This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the
Sound Horn With Remote Start
key fob.
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob
are needed to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting
will unlock all doors with only one push of the Unlock button.
MULTIMEDIA 251

This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n
Passive Entry
Go™) on or off.
This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob
been linked to the key fob.
Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort

Systems
When Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort Systems button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s comfort
systems when remote start has been activated or the vehicle has been started.
NOTE: 5

This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or
heated steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel With Vehicle started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote
Start Start” setting will only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start.
The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle
is started.
This setting will automatically move the driver seat rearward when the engine
Easy Exit Seats
is shut off. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
252 MULTIMEDIA
Key Off Options/Engine Off Options

When the Key Off Options/Engine Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings
will only activate when the ignition is set to OFF.
NOTE:

Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is
Key Off Power Delay/Engine Off Power Delay turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The
available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on
Headlight Off Delay after the vehicle has been turned off. The “+” will increase the amount of
time. The “-” will decrease the amount of time.
MULTIMEDIA 253
Suspension/Air Suspension
When the Suspension/Air Suspension button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to the vehicle’s air suspension.
NOTE:

This setting will sound the horn when the Lower button is pressed on the key
Sound Horn With Lower
fob.
This setting will flash the lights when the Lower button is pressed on the key
Flash Lights With Lower
fob.
This setting will display suspension messages in the Instrument Cluster 5
Display Suspension Messages Display. The “All” setting will display all available messages. The “Warnings
Only” setting will only display warning messages.
This setting will automatically adjust the vehicle ride height depending on the
Aero Mode
vehicle speed.
This setting will disable the air suspension system to assist in changing a
Tire Jack Mode
spare tire.
This setting will lower the vehicle to Entry/Exit height and then disable the air
Transport Mode
suspension system for flat towing.
254 MULTIMEDIA
This setting must be activated before performing a wheel alignment, which

Wheel Alignment Mode
will move the vehicle to normal ride height and then disable the air
suspension system. Refer to an authorized dealer for further information.
There are three air suspension modes designed to protect the system in
unique situations. Tire Jack Mode is selected to assist in changing a spare
Four Corner Air Suspension Modes tire. Transport Mode is selected to assist when the vehicle is being flat bed
towed. Wheel Alignment Mode is selected before performing a wheel
alignment. Refer to an authorized dealer for further information.
AUX Switches
When the AUX Switches button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the four vehicle AUX switches.
NOTE:

This setting will adjust the type and power source for the four vehicle AUX
switches. There are two types: “Latching” and “Momentary”. The power
source for the AUX switches can either be set to run off the “Battery” or from
the “Ignition”. In addition to setting the type and power source, you can set if
AUX 1-4
the vehicle will recall the previous state at which the AUX switches were set.
The Recalled Last State setting can be set to “On” or “Off”. Last state
conditions are met only if the type is set to Latching and the power source is
set to Ignition.
MULTIMEDIA 255
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio
location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:

This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back
Balance/Fade and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio
location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio. 5
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting,
Speed Adjusted Volume the volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings
are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the
AUX Volume Offset
AUX port. The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Loudness This setting will improve audio quality at lower volumes.
256 MULTIMEDIA
Notifications
When the Notifications button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Notifications for the system.
NOTE:

This setting will turn off the Notification chime that plays when a new
Notification Sounds
notification is sent. The options are “On” and “Off”.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the App Favorited pop-up on or off.
App Drawer Unfavoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the App Unfavorited pop-up on or off.
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for new text messages of any
New Text Message Pop-Ups
connected phone on or off.
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for missed calls of any connected
Missed Calls Message
phone on or off.
Navigation Pop-Ups This setting turns receiving/storing predictive Navigation Pop-Ups on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 257
SiriusXM® Setup
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be used
to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
 A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
 Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.

This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune to a
Tune Start
music channel using one of the 12 presets.
5
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel list will
Channel Skip
display of the skipped channels.
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM® Travel
Subscription Information
Link is a separate subscription.
Software Updates
When the Software Updates button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the setting related to updating the Uconnect software.
NOTE:

This setting will allow software updates to happen over Wi-Fi. Selectable
Software Downloads over Wi-Fi
options for the setting are “On” and “Off”.
258 MULTIMEDIA
Reset/Restore Settings To Default

When the Reset/Restore Settings To Default button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system
back to its default settings. These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:

Restart Radio This setting will reboot the radio.
Reset Performance Values This setting will reset your vehicle’s performance values.
This setting will return the apps drawer to the default order. The available
Reset Apps Drawer To Default Order options are “Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can also be pressed to cancel
the screen.
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory
Restore Settings to Default
default.
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal
Clear Personal Data
data from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
This setting will allow you to reset the vehicle’s Wi-Fi password for smartphone
Reset Wi-Fi Password For Projection projection. The available options are “Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can
also be pressed to cancel the screen.
Factory Reset This setting will restore the radio to its factory default settings.
MULTIMEDIA 259
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION
SYSTEM O VERVIEW

1 — RADIO Button 6 — COMPASS Button
2 — MEDIA Button 7 — SETTINGS Button
3 — PHONE Button 8 — MORE Button
4 — VOLUME & On/Off Button 9 — ENTER/BROWSE & TUNE/SCROLL Knob
5 — MUTE Button 10 — SCREEN OFF Button
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
260 MULTIMEDIA
Feature Description
Press the Radio button or Media button to enter Radio Mode/Media Mode
Radio/Media
and access the radio functions and external audio sources Ú page 262.
Press the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the hands-free
Phone
phone system Ú page 272.
Settings Press the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings Ú page 234.
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button on the faceplate to accept a highlighted
selection on the screen. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL rotary knob to scroll
through a list or tune a radio station.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn the screen on or off.
Push the MUTE button on the faceplate to turn the audio of the radio system
off. Push it again to turn the audio back on.
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the VOLUME & On/Off
button on the faceplate to turn the system on or off.
NOTE:
Push and hold the Volume & On/Off button for approximately 10 seconds to
reset the radio manually. Doing this can also recover the radio screen from
freezing or being stuck.
Feature Description
Compass Push the Compass button to access the vehicle’s compass.
More Push the More button to access additional options.
MULTIMEDIA 261
SAFETY AND GENERAL I NFORMATION Please read and follow these safety precautions.  Keep drinks, rain and other sources of moisture
Failure to do so may result in injury or property away from the system. Besides damage to the
Safety Guidelines damage. system, moisture can cause electric shocks as
 Glance at the screen only when safe to do so. If with any electronic device.
WARNING!
prolonged viewing of the screen is required, NOTE:
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the park in a safe location and set the parking Many features of this system are speed
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and brake. dependent. For your own safety, it is not possible to
assume all risks related to the use of the  Stop use immediately if a problem occurs. use some of the touchscreen features while the
Uconnect features and applications in this Failure to do so may cause injury or damage to vehicle is in motion.
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do the product. See an authorized dealer for repair. Care And Maintenance
so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.  Ensure the volume level of the system is set to a  Do not press the touchscreen with any hard or
level that still allows you to hear outside traffic sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.),
and emergency vehicles. which could scratch the surface. 5
Please read this manual carefully before using the
system. It contains instructions on how to use the Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System  Do not spray any liquid or chemicals directly on
system in a safe and effective manner.  The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec-
the screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber lens
tronic device. Do not let young children use the cleaning cloth in order to clean the touchscreen.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen.
system.  If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened
Doing so can result in damage to the touchscreen.
 Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play
with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl
your music or sound system at loud volumes. alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water solu-
Exercise caution when setting the volume on the tion ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the solvent
system. manufacturer's precautions and directions
Ú page 480.
262 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT MODES Pushing the center button will make the radio
switch between the various modes available
RADIO MODE
STEERING W HEEL AUDIO CONTROLS (AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.). Radio Controls
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
The remote sound system controls are located on push button in the center. The function of the
the rear surface of the steering wheel at the three left-hand control is different depending on which
and nine o’clock positions. mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control
operation in each mode:
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will Seek Up for the
next available station and pushing the bottom of
the switch will Seek Down for the next available
station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
control will tune to the next preset station that you
have programmed in the radio presets. 1 — Preset Radio Stations
Remote Sound System Controls
Media Mode 2 — All Preset Radio Stations
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with 3 — Seek Down
a push button in the center and controls the Pushing the top of the switch skips to the next
track on the selected media (AUX/USB/ 4 — Radio Band (AM/FM)
volume and mode of the sound system. Pushing
the top of the rocker switch will increase the Bluetooth®). Pushing the switch up twice will go 5 — Tune
volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker forward two tracks. Pushing the bottom switch 6 — Station Info
switch will decrease the volume. goes to the beginning of the current track, or the 7 — Audio Settings
beginning of the previous track if it is within eight 8 — Seek Up
seconds after the current track begins to play.
Double pressing the bottom button switch will skip
to the previous track if it is after eight seconds into
the current track.
MULTIMEDIA 263
The radio is equipped with the following modes: Seek Info — If Equipped
 AM The Seek Up and Down functions are activated by Press the Info button to display information related
 FM pressing the double arrow buttons on the to the currently playing song and radio station.
touchscreen to the right and left of the radio Direct Tune
 SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (if equipped) station display or by pushing the left steering wheel
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen to enter audio control button up or down. Press the Tune button located at the bottom of the
the Radio Mode. The different tuner modes, AM, radio screen to directly tune to a desired radio
FM, and SXM, can then be selected by pressing the Seek Up and Seek Down station or channel.
corresponding button in Radio Mode. Press and release the Seek Up or Seek Press the available number button on the
Volume & On/Off Control Down button to tune the radio to the next touchscreen to begin selecting a desired station.
available station or channel. During a Seek Up/ Once a number has been entered, any numbers
Push the VOLUME & On/Off control knob to turn on that are no longer possible (stations that cannot be
and off the Uconnect system. Down function, if the radio reaches the starting
reached) will become deactivated/grayed out.
The electronic volume control turns continuously
station after passing through the entire band two 5
times, the radio will stop at the station where it Undo
(360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping.
began. You can backspace an entry by pressing the
Turning the VOUME & On/Off control knob
clockwise increases the volume, and Fast Seek Up and Fast Seek Down Back button on the touchscreen.
counterclockwise decreases it. Press and hold, and then release the Seek GO
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will Up or Seek Down button to advance the Once the last digit of a station has been entered,
be set at the same volume level as last played. radio through the available stations or channels at press “Ok”. The Direct Tune screen will close, and
Mute Button a faster rate. The radio stops at the next available the system will automatically tune to that station.
Push the MUTE button to mute or unmute the station or channel when the button on the
system. touchscreen is released.
Tune/Scroll Control NOTE:

Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob
clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to Seek Down button will scan the different
decrease the radio station frequency. Push the frequency bands at a slower rate.
ENTER/BROWSE button to choose a selection.
264 MULTIMEDIA
RADIO VOICE COMMANDS SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold
If Equipped separately after the trial included with the new
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or
vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would like
service at the end of your trial subscription, the
to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM®
plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at
Satellite Radio trial required.)
then-current rates until you call SiriusXM® at
Push the VR button on the steering wheel and 866-635-2349 to cancel. See SiriusXM®
wait for the beep to say a command. See an Customer Agreement for complete terms at
example below: www.siriusxm.com (US) or www.siriusxm.ca
 “Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM” (Canada).
 “Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1” All fees and programming subject to change.
SiriusXM® satellite service is available only to
Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of
those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous
what to say or want to learn a Voice Command,
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Changing To SiriusXM® US and D.C. Our SiriusXM® satellite service is also
push the VR button and say “Help”. The system available in Canada and Puerto Rico (with
provides you with a list of commands. SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct coverage limitations). SiriusXM® Internet radio
satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to service is available throughout their satellite
provide clear, coast-to-coast radio content. service area and in AK. © 2021 SiriusXM® Radio
SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service. Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
Visit siriusxm.com/getallaccess or review your trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s This functionality is only available for radios
Manual kit for more information. equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to
receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be
outside with a clear view to the sky.
MULTIMEDIA 265
If the screen shows “Acquiring Signal”, you might When in Satellite Mode:
have to change the vehicle’s position in order to  The SXM button on the touchscreen is high-
receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite radio lighted.
does not receive a signal in underground parking
garages or tunnels.  The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the top
of the screen.
No Subscription
 The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed in
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver require a the center.
subscription to the SiriusXM® Service. When the
radio does not have the necessary subscription,  The Program Information is displayed at the
the radio is able to receive the Preview channel bottom of the Channel Number.
only.  The SiriusXM® function buttons are displayed
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription below the Program Information.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by 5
Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands. 1 — Browse
subscription, US residents visit http://
www.siriusxm.com/getallaccess or call: In addition to the tuning operation functions 2 — Radio Bands
1-800-643-2112 common to all radio modes, the Replay, Traffic/ 3 — Direct Tune
Weather button, and Favorite button functions are 4 — Info Button
Canadian residents visit https://
available in SiriusXM® Mode. 5 — Next Button
www.siriusxm.ca/ or call: 1-888-539-7474.
NOTE:
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID)
located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the
SXM button on the touchscreen.
266 MULTIMEDIA
REPLAY
Replay provides a means to store and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and 48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is switched, content in replay
memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The Play/Pause, Rewind/Forward and Live buttons will display at the top of the screen, along with the replay time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the touchscreen any time during the Replay Mode.
Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to
pause the playing of live or rewound content at any
Play/Pause
time. Play can be resumed by pressing the Pause/
Play button again on the touchscreen.
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to
rewind the content in steps of five seconds.
Pressing the Rewind button on the touchscreen for
Rewind
more than two seconds rewinds the content. The
radio begins playing the content at the point at
which the press is released.
Each press of the Forward button on the
touchscreen forwards the content in steps of five
seconds. Forwarding of the content can only be
done when the content is previously rewound, and
Forward therefore, cannot be done for live content. A
continuous press of the Forward button on the
touchscreen also forwards the content. The radio
begins playing the content at the point at which the
press is release.
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to

Live
resume the playing of live content.
MULTIMEDIA 267
FAVORITES This Screen contains many submenus. You can Remove Favorites
exit submenus to return to a parent menu by Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the
Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen to
pressing the Back arrow. screen. Press the Delete All button on the
activate the favorites menu, which will time out
within 20 seconds in absence of user interaction. All touchscreen to delete all of the Favorites or press
Press the All button on the Browse Screen. When the Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to be
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of the X
pressing the All button, the following categories deleted.
button.
become available: Alert Settings
The Favorites feature enables you to set a favorite
artist or song that is currently playing. The radio  Channel List: Press the Channel List to display Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the
then uses this information to alert you when either all the SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can Favorites screen. The Alert Settings menu allows
the favorite artist or song is being played at any scroll the Channel List by pressing the Up and you to choose from a visual alert or audible and
time by any of the SiriusXM® Channels. Down arrows, located on the right side of the visual alert when one of your favorites is airing on
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating any of the SiriusXM® channels.
The maximum number of favorites that can be
stored in the Radio is 50. the Tune/Scroll knob. Game Zone 5
 Genre List: Press the Genre button on the touch- Press the Game Zone button, located at the left of
Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set a
favorite artist, press the Favorites button on the screen to display a list of Genres. You can select the Browse screen. This feature provides you with
touchscreen and then the Favorite Artist button on any desired Genre by pressing the Genre List. the ability to select teams, edit the selection, and
the touchscreen. The radio tunes to a channel with the content in set alerts.
the selected Genre.
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set a On-Air
favorite song, press the Favorites button on the Favorites
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The
touchscreen and then the Favorite Song button on Press the Favorites button on the Browse screen. On-Air list provides a list of Channels currently
the touchscreen. The Favorites menu provides a means to edit the airing any of the items in the Selections list, and
Favorites list and to configure the Alert Settings, pressing any of the items in the list tunes the radio
BROWSE IN SXM along with providing a list of Channels currently to that channel.
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to airing any of the items in the Favorites list.
edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the Up
settings, along with providing the SiriusXM® and Down arrows located at the right side of the
Channel List. screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating the
Tune/Scroll knob as well.
268 MULTIMEDIA
Add/Delete — If Equipped Setting Presets Audio Settings

Press the Add/Delete button on the touchscreen to Press the Audio button within the settings main
activate the League Scroll list. Press the chosen menu to activate the Audio Settings screen.
league and a scroll list of all teams within the
league will appear, then you can select a team by
pressing the corresponding box. A check mark
appears for all teams that are chosen.
Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the selections or press
the Trash Can icon next to the selection to be
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Radio Presets
deleted.
Alert Settings The Presets are available for all Radio Modes, and
are activated by pressing any of the Preset Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the screen. buttons, located at the top of the screen.
The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from
“Alert me to on-air games upon start” or “Alert When you are on a station that you wish to save as
upon score update” or both when one or more of a preset, press and hold the numbered button on
your selections is airing on any of the SiriusXM® the touchscreen for more than two seconds.
channels. The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
Tune Start Radio Modes.
Tune Start begins playing the current song from For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
the beginning when you tune to a music channel A set of four presets will appear on the screen.
using one of the 12 presets. This feature occurs Press the All button to view all saved presets. To
the first time the preset is selected during that remove a saved preset, a new preset must be
current song. saved over the old one.
MULTIMEDIA 269
Audio Setting Description

Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio between
the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers.
Balance/Fade
Press the Front, Rear, Left or Right button or press and drag the red Speaker
icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Press the + or – button or press and drag the level bar to increase or decrease
Equalizer each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between plus or
minus nine, is displayed at the top of each of the bands.
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from “Off”, “1”, “2”, and
“3”. This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with variation
Speed Adjusted Volume
to vehicle speed. Volume increases automatically as speed increases to
compensate for normal road noise. 5
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every direction
Surround Sound
as in a movie theatre or home theatre system.
Loudness When Loudness is on, the sound quality at lower volumes improves.
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and – buttons. This alters the
AUX Volume Offset AUX input audio volume. The level value, which spans between plus or minus
three, is displayed above the adjustment bar.
The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media device is
Auto Play connected to one of the vehicle’s Media USB ports, when it is turned on. Press
“Off” to turn the setting off.
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until the
Radio Off With Door driver or passenger door is opened or until the Radio Off Delay selected time
has expired.
270 MULTIMEDIA
MEDIA M ODE Audio Source Selection On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, if you insert
a USB device with the ignition in ON/RUN, the unit
Once in Media Mode, press the Source or Source
Operating Media Mode will switch to USB Mode and begin to play. The
Select button on the touchscreen and the desired
display will show the track number and index time
mode button on the touchscreen. USB, AUX, and
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start
Bluetooth® are the Media sources available.
of track 1.
When available, you can select the Browse button
on the touchscreen to be given these options: BLUETOOTH® MODE
 Now Playing
Overview
 Artists
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio or Bluetooth® Mode
 Albums is entered by pairing a Bluetooth® device,
 Genres containing music, to the Uconnect system.
 Songs Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must be
paired to the Uconnect Phone to communicate
 Playlists
with the Uconnect system.
 Folders
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Operating Media Mode On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, push the
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, Media MEDIA button located on the faceplate. Once in
1 — Seek Down Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA button Media Mode, press the Source button on the
2 — Browse located on the faceplate. touchscreen and select the Bluetooth® button
3 — Source Ú page 272.
Types of Media Modes
4 — Pause/Play To access Bluetooth® Mode, press the Bluetooth®
5 — Info USB MODE button on the left side of the touchscreen or under
6 — More Options Overview the Source Select/Select Source button (if
7 — Seek Up equipped).
USB Mode is entered by inserting a USB device into
the USB port, or by pushing the MEDIA button on
Media Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA the faceplate and then selecting the USB button.
button located on the faceplate.
MULTIMEDIA 271
AUX MODE Seek Up /Seek Down On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, select the
Browse button on the touchscreen to scroll
Overview In USB Mode, press the Seek Up button on the
through and select a desired track on the device.
Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an AUX touchscreen for the next selection on the USB
Press the Exit button on the touchscreen if you
device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into device. Press and release the Seek Down button
wish to cancel the Browse function.
the AUX port, or by pushing the MEDIA button on on the touchscreen to return to the beginning of
the current selection, or to return to the beginning Media Mode
the faceplate, selecting the Source button and
then the AUX button. of the previous selection if the USB device is within In USB Mode, press the Media button on the
the first three seconds of the current selection. touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
To insert an Auxiliary device, gently insert the
In Bluetooth® Mode, press and release the Seek USB.
Auxiliary device cable into the AUX port. If you
insert an Auxiliary device with the ignition and the Up button on the touchscreen for the next In Bluetooth® Mode, press the Media button on
radio on, the unit will switch to AUX Mode and selection on the Bluetooth® device. Press and the touchscreen to select the desired audio
begin to play. release the Seek Down button on the touchscreen source: Bluetooth®.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
to return to the beginning of the current selection, In AUX Mode, press the Media button on the 5
or return to the beginning of the previous selection touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g., selecting if the Bluetooth® device is within the first second AUX.
playlists, play, fast forward, etc.) cannot be of the current selection.
provided by the radio; use the device controls Repeat
Browse
instead. Adjust the volume with the Volume button, In USB Mode, press the Repeat button on the
Volume/Mute rotary knob, or the On/Off rotary In USB Mode, press the Browse button on the touchscreen to toggle the repeat functionality. The
knob, or with the volume of the attached device. touchscreen to display the browse window. In USB Repeat button on the touchscreen is highlighted
Mode, the left side of the browse window displays when active. The Radio will continue to play the
NOTE:
a list of ways you can browse through the contents current track, repeatedly, as long as the repeat is
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio
of the USB device. If supported by the device, you active. Press the Repeat button again to enter
output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if the
can browse by Folder, Artist, Playlist, Album, Song, Repeat All. The radio will continue to play all the
volume control on the Auxiliary device is set too
etc. Press the desired button on the touchscreen current tracks, repeatedly, as long as the repeat
low, there will be insufficient audio signal for the
on the left side of the screen. The center of the function is active. To cancel Repeat, press the
radio unit to play the music on the device.
browse window shows items and their Repeat button a third time.
sub-functions, which can be scrolled through by
pressing the Up and Down buttons to the right. The
TUNE/SCROLL knob can also be used to scroll.
272 MULTIMEDIA
Shuffle Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen PHONE MODE

In USB Mode, press the Shuffle button on the while the pop-up is displayed will close the pop-up.
touchscreen to play the selections on the USB Overview
MEDIA VOICE COMMANDS Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free,
device in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth®, in-vehicle communications system. It allows you to
touchscreen a second time to turn this feature off. and auxiliary (AUX) ports. Voice operation is only dial a phone number with your mobile phone.
available for connected USB and AUX devices. The feature supports the following:
Audio
Audio settings can be accessed by pressing the Push the VR button located on the steering Voice Activated Features
Audio button Ú page 262. wheel. After the beep, say one of the following
 Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith
commands and follow the prompts to switch your
Info Mobile” or “Dial 248-555-1212”).
media source or choose an artist:
In USB Mode, press the Info button on the  Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your
 “Change source to Bluetooth®”
touchscreen to display the current track incoming SMS messages.
information. Press the Info or X button on the  “Change source to AUX”
 Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward
touchscreen a second time to cancel this feature.  “Change source to USB” one of 18 predefined SMS messages to
Tracks  “Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Greatest incoming calls/text messages.
In USB Mode, press the Tracks button on the Hits”; “Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “Play genre  Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
touchscreen to display a pop-up with the Song List. Classical”
 Calling Back the last incoming call number
The song currently playing is indicated by an arrow Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the (“Call Back”).
and lines above and below the song title. When in touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB
 Viewing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming
the Tracks List screen you can rotate the Tune/ device. Your Voice Command must match exactly
Calls,” “Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed
Scroll knob to highlight a track (indicated by the how the artist, album, song, and genre information
Calls,” or “Show Recent Calls”).
line above and below the track name) and then is displayed.
push the Enter/Browse knob to start playing that  Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for
track. John Smith Mobile”).
In Bluetooth® Mode, if the Bluetooth® device
supports this feature, press the Tracks button on
the touchscreen to display a pop-up with the Song
List. The currently playing song is indicated by a red
arrow and lines above and below the song title.
MULTIMEDIA 273
Screen Activated Features Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls Phone Button
 Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen. between the system and your mobile phone as you The Phone button on your steering wheel
enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute is used to get into the Phone Mode and
 Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks the system's microphone for private conversation.
displayed on the touchscreen. make calls, show recent, incoming or
outgoing calls, view phonebook, etc.
 Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so they WARNING! When you push the button you will hear a BEEP.
are easily accessible on the Main Phone screen. The BEEP is your signal to give a command.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
 Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call steering wheel. You have full responsibility and Voice Command Button
logs. assume all risks related to the use of the
The Voice Command button on your
 Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS Uconnect features and applications in this
steering wheel is only used for “barge in”
Messages. vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do
and when you are already in a call or
so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
 Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy want to make another call.
involving serious injury or death.
access to connect to them quickly. The button on your steering wheel is also used to 5
NOTE: access the Voice Commands for the Uconnect
The Phone feature is driven through your Voice Command features if your vehicle is
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. equipped.
Bluetooth® for messaging features to work
Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology — the
properly.
global standard that enables different electronic Phone Operation
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through devices to connect to each other without wires or a
your vehicle’s audio system; the system will docking station. Ensure you phone is turned on OPERATION
automatically mute your radio when using the with Bluetooth® active and has been paired to the Voice commands can be used to operate the
Uconnect Phone. Uconnect system. Up to 10 mobile phones or audio Uconnect Phone and to navigate its menu
For Uconnect customer support: devices are allowed to be linked to the system. structure. Voice commands are required after
 US visit UconnectPhone.com or call Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone and one most Uconnect Phone prompts. There are two
877-855-8400 audio device can be used with the system at a general methods for how Voice Command works:
time.
 Canada visit UconnectPhone.com or call 1. Say compound commands like “Call John
800-465-2001 (English) or (French) call Smith mobile”.
800-387-9983 2. Say the individual commands and allow the
system to guide you to complete the task.
274 MULTIMEDIA
You will be prompted for a specific command and Natural speech allows the user to speak CANCEL COMMAND
then guided through the available options. commands in phrases or complete sentences. The
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel”
 Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait system filters out certain non-word utterances and
and you will be returned to the main menu.
for the beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt sounds such as “ah” and “eh.” The system handles
fill-in words such as “I would like to”. You can also push the VR button or Phone button
or another prompt. on your steering wheel when the system is listening
 For certain operations, compound commands The system handles multiple inputs in the same
for a command and be returned to the main or
can be used. For example, instead of saying phrase or sentence such as “make a phone call”
previous menu.
“Call” and then “John Smith” and then “mobile”, and “to Kelly Smith”. For multiple inputs in the
the following compound command can be said: same phrase or sentence, the system identifies PAIR (LINK) UCONNECT PHONE TO A MOBILE
“Call John Smith mobile.” the topic or context and provides the associated PHONE
follow-up prompt such as “Who do you want to
 For each feature explanation in this section, call?” in the case where a phone call was Use this QR code to access your
only the compound command form of the voice requested but the specific name was not digital experience.
command is given. You can also break the recognized. To begin using your Uconnect
commands into parts and say each part of the Phone, you must pair your
command when you are asked for it. For The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the
system requires more information from the user, it compatible Bluetooth®-enabled
example, you can use the compound command mobile phone. Mobile phone
form voice command “Search for John Smith,” will ask a question to which the user can respond
without pushing the Voice Command button on the pairing is the process of
or you can break the compound command form establishing a wireless connection between a
into two voice commands: “Search Contacts” steering wheel.
cellular phone and the Uconnect system.
and when asked, “John Smith.” Please
HELP COMMAND To complete the pairing process, you will need to
remember, the Uconnect Phone works best
when you talk in a normal conversational tone, If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want reference your mobile phone’s manual. Please
as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/ to know your options at any prompt, say “Help” visit UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile
meters away from you. following the beep. phone compatibility information.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply
NATURAL SPEECH push the Phone button (if active) on your steering
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural wheel and say a command or say “Help”. All Phone
Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine. sessions begin with a push of the VR button or the
Phone button.
MULTIMEDIA 275
 This pop-up only appears when the user  Search for available devices on your Blue-
enters Phone Mode and no other device(s) tooth®-enabled mobile phone (see below).
have previously been paired. If the system When prompted on the phone, select
has a phone previously paired, even if no “Uconnect” and accept the connection
phone is currently connected with the request.
system, this pop-up will not appear. 6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process. screen while the system is connecting.
4. Search for available devices on your 7. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone. system, select “Uconnect.”
 Press the Settings button on your mobile 8. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept
phone. the connection request from Uconnect.
NOTE:  Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is 9. When the pairing process has successfully
 You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your enabled. Once enabled, the mobile phone completed, the system will prompt you to 5
phone to complete this procedure. will begin to search for Bluetooth® connec- choose whether or not this is your favorite
 The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill. tions. phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone
NOTE: the highest priority. This phone will take
Follow the steps below to pair your phone: precedence over other paired phones within
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN range and will connect to the Uconnect system
pop-up on your touchscreen asking you to make
position. automatically when entering the vehicle. Only
sure the PIN on the touchscreen matches the PIN
2. Press the Phone button. from the pop-up on your mobile phone. one mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth®
audio device can be connected to the
NOTE: 5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is selected,
 If there are no phones currently connected pair a mobile phone, press the Phone Pairing simply select “Uconnect” from the mobile
with the system, a pop-up will appear asking or Settings button from the Uconnect Phone phone/audio device Bluetooth® screen, and
if you would like to pair a mobile phone. main screen. the Uconnect system will reconnect to the
 Press the Paired Phones button or the Add Bluetooth® device.
Device button.
276 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: CONNECTING TO A PARTICULAR MOBILE 1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or Settings
For phones which are not made a favorite, the PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE AFTER PAIRING button.
phone priority is determined by the order in which 2. Press the Paired Phones or Audio Sources
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the
it was paired. The most recent phone paired will button.
highest priority paired phone and/or Audio Device
have the higher priority.
within range. If you need to choose a particular 3. Press the Settings button located to the right
NOTE: phone or audio device follow these steps: of the device name for a different phone or
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a 1. Press the Settings button on the touchscreen. audio device than the currently connected
pop-up on your mobile phone for the Uconnect device or press the preferred Connected
2. Press the Paired Phones or Audio Sources
system to access your “messages” and “contacts”. Phone from the list.
button.
Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync your contacts 4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
3. Press to select the particular phone or the
with the Uconnect system. 5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete
particular audio device. A pop-up menu will
You can also use the following VR command to appear; press “Connect Phone”. Device button on the touchscreen.
bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen 6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
on the radio: 4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
 “Show Paired Phones” DISCONNECTING OR DELETING A PHONE OR MAKING A PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE A
NOTE: AUDIO DEVICE FAVORITE
Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect 1. On the Paired Phone/Audio Sources screen,
system may interfere with the Bluetooth® press the Settings button located to the right
connection. If this happens, simply repeat the of the device name for a different phone or
pairing process. However, first make sure to delete audio device than the currently connected
the device from the list of phones on your device or press the preferred “Connected
Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove Phone” from the list.
Uconnect from the list of devices in your phone’s 2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
Bluetooth® settings.
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the
touchscreen; you will see the chosen device
move to the top of the list.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display 4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
MULTIMEDIA 277
PHONEBOOK DOWNLOAD (AUTOMATIC  Depending on the maximum number of entries NOTE:

PHONEBOOK TRANSFER FROM MOBILE downloaded, there may be a short delay before If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
PHONE) — IF EQUIPPED the latest downloaded names can be used. Until remove an existing favorite.
then, if available, the previously downloaded
If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone has phonebook is available for use. TO REMOVE A FAVORITE — IF EQUIPPED
the ability to download contact names and number
entries from the mobile phone’s phonebook.  Only the phonebook of the currently connected 1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites” from
Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phonebook mobile phone is accessible. the Phone main screen.
Access Profile may support this feature. Your  This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited 2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon or the
mobile phone may receive a pop-up asking for or deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can Settings Gear icon next to the contact you want
permission for the Uconnect system to access your only be edited on the mobile phone. The to remove from your favorites. This will bring
messages and contacts. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” changes are transferred and updated to Ucon- up the options for that Favorite contact.
will sync your contacts with the Uconnect system. nect Phone on the next phone connection. 3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the Favorite.
See the Uconnect website, UconnectPhone.com,
MANAGING YOUR FAVORITES — IF EQUIPPED
5
for supported phones. Phone Call Features
There are two ways you can add an entry to your
 To call a name from a downloaded mobile The following features can be accessed through
favorites:
phonebook, Ú page 281. the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press and supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile
 Automatic download and update of a
the Favorites button on the touchscreen, and service plan. For example, if your mobile service
phonebook, if supported, begins as soon as the
then press one of the +Add Favorite Contact plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is made
buttons that appears on the list. accessed through the Uconnect Phone. Check with
to the Uconnect Phone, for example, after you
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select your mobile service provider for the features that
start the vehicle.
“Contacts” from the Phone main screen, and you have.
 A maximum of 5,000 contact names with four
then select the appropriate number. Press the
numbers per contact will be downloaded and
Down Arrow button or the Settings Gear button
updated every time a phone is connected to the
next to the selected number to display the
Uconnect Phone.
option’s pop-up. In the pop-up, select “Add to
Favorites”.
278 MULTIMEDIA
Listed below are the phone options with Uconnect: KEY PAD NUMBER ENTRY
 Redial 1. Press the Phone button.
 Dial by pressing in the number 2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the
 Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call touchscreen.
by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call 3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
Back) 4. Use the numbered buttons on the
 Favorites touchscreens to enter the number and press
 Mobile Phonebook “Dial/Call”.
 Recent Call Log RECENT CALLS — IF EQUIPPED
 SMS Message Viewer
You may browse a list of the most recent of each of
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display the following call types:
CALL CONTROLS
1 — Answer  All Calls
The touchscreen allows you to control the following
call features: 2 — Mute/Unmute  Incoming Calls or Calls Received
3 — Ignore
 Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
4 — Transfer
 Missed Calls
These can be accessed by pressing the Recent
Other phone call features include:
Calls button on the phone main screen.
 End Call
You can also push the VR button on your steering
 Hold/Unhold/Resume wheel and perform the above operation. For
 Swap two active calls example, say “Show my incoming calls”.
MULTIMEDIA 279
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL — NO ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL — Automatic reply messages can be:
CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS  “I am driving right now, I will get back to you
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the If a call is currently in progress and you have shortly”.
Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio another incoming call, you will hear the same  Create a custom auto reply message up to
system. Push the Phone button on the steering network tones for call waiting that you normally 160 characters.
wheel, press the Answer button on the hear when using your mobile phone. Push the
NOTE:
touchscreen. Phone button on the steering wheel, press the
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
Answer button on the touchscreen, or press the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
Caller ID box to place the current call on hold and
answer the incoming call. While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
NOTE: without being interrupted by incoming calls.
Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect
system in the market today do not support NOTE: 5
rejecting an incoming call when another call is in  Reply with text message is not compatible with
progress. Therefore, the user can only answer an iPhone® devices.
incoming call or ignore it.  Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that support Bluetooth® Message
DO NOT DISTURB Access Profile (MAP).
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications
from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep PLACE/RETRIEVE A CALL FROM HOLD
your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For During an active call, press the Hold or Call On Hold
1 — Answer Button your convenience, there is a counter display to button on the Phone main screen.
2 — Caller ID Box keep track of your missed calls and text messages
while Do Not Disturb is active.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text
message, a call, or both when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
280 MULTIMEDIA
MAKING A SECOND CALL WHILE CURRENT JOIN CALLS Advanced Phone Connectivity
CALL IS IN PROGRESS When two calls are in progress (one active and one
on hold), press the Join/Merge Calls button on the
TRANSFER CALL TO AND FROM MOBILE
You can place a call on hold by pressing the Hold
button on the Phone main screen, then dial a Phone main screen to combine all calls into a PHONE
number from the keypad (if supported by your conference call. The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
mobile phone), recent calls, SMS Inbox or from the transferred from your mobile phone without
phonebooks. CALL TERMINATION terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the from your connected mobile phone to the
TOGGLING BETWEEN CALLS End Call button on the touchscreen or the Phone Uconnect Phone or vice versa, press the Transfer
End button on the steering wheel. Only the active button on the Phone main screen.
call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call on Things You Should Know About Uconnect
hold, it will become the new active call.
Phone
REDIAL
VOICE COMMAND
Push the VR button and after the
“Listening” prompt and the following For the best performance:
beep, say “Redial.”  Always wait for the beep before speaking
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that  Speak normally, without pausing, just as you
was dialed from your mobile phone. would speak to a person sitting a few feet/
meters away from you
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display CALL CONTINUATION
 Ensure that no one other than you is speaking
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on Call continuation is the progression of a phone call during a voice command period
hold), press the Swap Calls button on the phone on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition
 Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
main screen. Only one call can be placed on hold has been switched to OFF.
at a time.  Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
NOTE:
You can also push the Phone button to toggle The call will remain within the vehicle audio system  Low Road Noise
between the active and held phone call. until the phone becomes out of range for the Blue-  Smooth Road Surface
tooth® connection. It is recommended to press the  Fully Closed Windows
Transfer button on the touchscreen when leaving
the vehicle.  Dry Weather Conditions
MULTIMEDIA 281
 Smooth Road Surface Did You Know: When providing a Voice Command,
WARNING!
 Fully Closed Windows push the Phone button and say “Call”, then
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your
 Dry Weather Conditions
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume phonebook. When a contact has multiple phone
all risks related to the use of the Uconnect  Operation From The Driver's Seat numbers, you can say “Call John Smith work”.
features and applications in this vehicle. Only Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and Voice Text Reply — If Equipped
use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and
do so may result in an accident involving serious network, and not the Uconnect Phone. Uconnect can announce incoming text messages.
injury or death. Push the VR button or Phone button and
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
say:
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
Even though the system is designed for many 1. “Listen” to have the system read an incoming
Phone Voice Commands
languages and accents, the system may not always text message. (Must have compatible mobile
work for some. Making and answering hands-free phone calls is phone paired to Uconnect system.)
easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button 5
NOTE: 2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has
is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is
It is recommended that you do not store names in been read.
ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile
your Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in phone compatibility and pairing instructions. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
motion. beep, repeat one of the predefined messag-
Number and name recognition rate is optimized Push the Phone button and wait for the beep to
es and follow the system prompts.
when the entries are not similar. You can say “O” say a command. See some examples below:
(letter “O”) for “0” (zero).  “Call John Smith”
Even though international dialing for most number  “Dial 123 456 7890”
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing  “Redial” (call previous outgoing phone number)
number combinations may not be supported.
 “Call back” (call previously answered incoming
Audio Performance phone number)
Audio quality is maximized under:
 Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
 Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
 Low Road Noise
282 MULTIMEDIA
Apple® iPhone® iOS 5 or later supports reading BLUETOOTH® COMMUNICATION LINK

PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY incoming text messages only. For further
RESPONSES Mobile phones may lose connection to the
information on how to enable this feature on your
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the
Stuck in Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone® “User
Yes. See you later. connection can generally be re-established by
traffic. Manual”.
restarting the mobile phone. Your mobile phone is
Start without Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not compatible recommended to remain in Bluetooth® ON mode.
No. I’ll be late. with iPhone®, but if your vehicle is equipped with
me.
Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send a POWER-UP
Where are I will be 5 <or
Okay. text message. After switching the ignition key from OFF to either
you? 10, 15, 20,
25, 30, 45, Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a language
Are you there 60> minutes change, you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to
Call me. When used with your Apple® iPhone® connected
yet? late. using the system Ú page 480.
to your vehicle via Bluetooth®, Siri lets you use
I’ll call you I need See you in 5 your voice to send text messages, select media,
later. directions. <or 10, 15, place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES —
20, 25, 30,
45, 60>
natural language to understand what you mean
and responds back to confirm your requests. The
IF EQUIPPED
I’m on my way. Can’t talk right
minutes. system is designed to keep your eyes on the road I S M Y VEHICLE CONNECTED?
now.
and your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you
I’m lost. Thanks. If equipped, vehicles with an ASSIST and an SOS
perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the button are connected vehicles. These buttons will
NOTE: Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the be located on either the rearview mirror or
Only use the numbering listed in the provided steering wheel. After you hear a double beep, you overhead console, depending on the vehicle. If
table. Otherwise, the system will not transpose the can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get these buttons are present in your vehicle, you have
message. directions, read text messages, and many other a connected radio and can take advantage of the
Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have the useful requests. many connected vehicle features.
full implementation of the Message Access Profile For further information about the ASSIST and SOS
(MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details buttons Ú page 372.
about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
MULTIMEDIA 283
I NTRODUCTION TO C ONNECTED V EHICLE SiriusXM Guardian™ Contact Information NOTE:

SERVICES SiriusXM Guardian™/Care  Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services are dependent upon an operative
 US residents visit: https://www.driveucon-
One of the many benefits of your vehicle’s telematics device, a cellular connection, naviga-
Uconnect system is that you can now take nect.com/sirius-xm-guardian.html or call tion map data, and GPS satellite signal recep-
advantage of SiriusXM Guardian™ connected 1-844-796-4827 tion, which can limit the ability to reach the
services. To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM  Canadian residents visit: https://www.driveu- response center or reach emergency support.
Guardian™ in your vehicle, you first need to connect.ca/en/sirius-xm-guardian or call  Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are
activate SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services. 1-877-324-9091 available everywhere at all times, particularly in
WARNING! What Is SiriusXM Guardian™? remote or enclosed areas.
SiriusXM Guardian™ uses an embedded device in  Other factors outside the control of SiriusXM
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the Uconnect system installed in your vehicle, Guardian™ that may limit or prevent service
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on which receives GPS signals and communicates delivery are hills, structures, buildings, tunnels, 5
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility with the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care weather, damage to the electrical system or
and assume all risks related to the use of the center via wireless and landline communications other important parts of your vehicle, network
features and applications in this vehicle. Only networks. Depending on the type of device in your congestion, civil disturbances, actions of third
use the features and applications when it is safe vehicle, some SiriusXM Guardian™ connected parties or the government, Internet failure, and/
to do so. Failure to comply may result in an services require an operable LTE (voice/data) or or the physical location of your vehicle, such as
accident involving serious injury or death. 3G or 4G (data) network compatible with your in an underground parking structure or under a
device. SiriusXM Guardian™ is available only on bridge.
NOTE: equipped vehicles purchased within the Not all SiriusXM Guardian™ features are available
SiriusXM Guardian™ involves the collection, trans- continental United States, Alaska, Hawaii, Puerto for all models.
mission and use of data from your vehicle Rico and Canada.
Ú page 302.
284 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM Guardian™ provides: Activation — If Equipped Features And Packages

 The ability to remotely lock/unlock and remote To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian™ After the trial period, you must purchase a
start your vehicle from virtually anywhere by in your vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM subscription to continue your services by calling a
using the Mobile App or your computer. Guardian™ connected services. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent.
 If equipped — Send & Go capability with the 1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your
Mobile App. Use the Mobile App to easily search,
GETTING S TARTED WITH CONNECTED
in-vehicle touchscreen.
map and send your locations directly to your V EHICLE SERVICES
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list
Uconnect Navigation. of apps. Download The Mobile App
 The ability to locate your vehicle, when you
3. For customers in the United States, select Once you have activated your services, you’re only
forget where you parked, using the Vehicle “Customer Care” to speak with a SiriusXM a few steps away from using connected services.
Finder function of the Mobile App. Guardian™ Customer Care agent who will  Download the Mobile App to your mobile device.
Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the activate services in your vehicle, or select
easy-to-use Uconnect system and SiriusXM “Enter Email” to activate on the web.  Use your Owner Account login and password to
Guardian™ connected services. open the app and then set up a PIN.
For customers in Canada, enter your email
The ASSIST and SOS Call Buttons On Your address to activate services in your vehicle.
Rearview Mirror Or Overhead Console
If equipped, the ASSIST Button is used for Included Trial Period For New Vehicles
contacting Roadside Assistance, Vehicle Care, Your new vehicle may come with an included trial
Uconnect Care, and SiriusXM Guardian™ period for use of the SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care. The SOS Call button connects you connected services starting on the date of vehicle
directly to SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care for purchase. To get started with your trial, enrollment
assistance in an emergency. in SiriusXM Guardian™ is required. Your Uconnect
system includes a trial* of SiriusXM Guardian™
connected services from your date of purchase.
* Included trial applies to new vehicles only.
MULTIMEDIA 285
 For customers in the United States, visit d. Press “Continue Activation” from the confir- manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account. This
www.mopar.com, and click the Sign In/Register mation email. It may take a short time section will familiarize you with the key elements of
button in the upper right-hand corner to register before remote services will be available, but the website that will help you get the most of your
your account online. you will be able to log into the Mobile App SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services.
a. Click the Register button. and the Owner’s Site. For customers in the United States, press the Sign
In/Register button and enter your email address
b. Select the correct country and email  Once on the Remote screen and you have set up and password.
address then click “Register”. your four-digit PIN, you can begin using Remote
For customers in Canada, press the My Vehicle
Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle Start, and
c. You will then receive an email notification to button. Select from “Dashboard”, “Vehicle Health
activate your horn and lights remotely, if
confirm/verify your newly created account. Report”, and “Recalls”. The website will then
equipped.
prompt you to log in using your email address and
d. After clicking the email link, it will take you  Press the Location button on the bottom menu password.
to a website and prompt you to assign your bar of the app to bring up a map to locate your
vehicle or send a location to your Mobile Naviga-
 Edit/Edit Profile: 5
account with a password.
tion, if equipped. To manage the details of your SiriusXM
e. Once you have added a password, the Guardian™ account, such as your contact infor-
 Press the Settings side menu in the upper left
website will direct you to your homepage mation, password and SiriusXM Guardian™ PIN,
corner of the app to bring up app settings and
where you can add in your vehicle’s VIN. click on the Edit/Edit Profile button to access
access the Assist Call Centers.
the details of your account.
 For customers in Canada, register your account Using Your Owner’s Site  Connected Services Status:
via your vehicle. Your Owner’s Site website https:// This statement will indicate your SiriusXM
a. Press the Apps button in the bottom menu www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US Residents), or Guardian™-equipped vehicle.
bar. www.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) provides  Remote Commands:
you with all the information you need, all in one
b. Press the Activate Services button from the place. You can track your service history, find For vehicles with an active SiriusXM Guardian™
apps list. recommended accessories for your vehicle, watch subscription, press one of these icons and enter
videos about your vehicle's features, and easily your four-digit SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN
c. Enter your email and press “OK”. A confir- to remotely start (if equipped), lock/unlock
mation email will be sent to the provided access your manuals. It is also where you can
doors or sound the horn and flash the lights.
email address.
286 MULTIMEDIA
Editing Your Notifications Access To Emergency Services At The Push Of A NOTE:

Notifications are an important element of your Button Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services
SiriusXM Guardian™ account. For example, any are dependent on an operational Uconnect
Center Light Status Description system, cellular network availability that is
time you use your remote services (such as
Remote Door Unlock), you can elect to receive a Off No call activated compatible with the device in your vehicle, and
text message, push notification, and/or E-mail to GPS network availability. Not all features of
Green Active call in progress
notify you of the event. To set up the notifications, SiriusXM Guardian™ are available everywhere at
please follow these instructions. Red System error all times, particularly in remote or enclosed areas.
1. Log on to your Owner’s Account at https:// How It Works
www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US Residents) SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance 1. Push the SOS Call button; the indicator light
and select “Dashboard”, or www.mopar.ca Features will turn green indicating a call has been
(Canadian Residents), select “My Vehicle” With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has placed.
and then “Dashboard”. onboard assistance features located on the NOTE:
rearview mirror or overhead console designed to
2. Click the Edit/Edit Profile button.  In case the SOS Call button is accidentally
enhance your driving experience if you should ever
3. Once there, select “SiriusXM Guardian™” pushed, there is a 10-second delay before
need assistance or support.
where you can edit Notification Preferences. the SOS call is placed. The system will
Description verbally alert you that a call is about to be
4. You can enter a mobile phone and/or email
SOS Call offers a convenient way to get in contact made. To cancel the SOS Call connection,
address to notify you, and you can customize
with a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent push the SOS Call button on the rearview
the types of messages.
in the event of an emergency. When the mirror or overhead console or press the
connection between the vehicle and the live agent Cancel button on the touchscreen within 10
USING S IRIUSXM GUARDIAN™ is made, your vehicle will automatically transmit seconds.
SOS Call — If Equipped location information. In the event of a minor  During an SOS Call, the Bluetooth®-paired
collision, medical or any other emergency, press phone is disconnected so incoming or
WARNING! the SOS button to be connected to a call center outgoing calls will go through your mobile
agent who can send emergency assistance to your device versus the hands-free system which
Some SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services, vehicle’s location. is not available due to the SOS Call.
including SOS Call and Roadside Assistance
Call, will NOT work without a network connection
compatible with your device.
MULTIMEDIA 287
2. Once a connection between the vehicle and a  An in-vehicle audio message will state “Vehicle Requirements
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent is phone requires service. Please contact your  This feature is available only on vehicles sold in
made, the agent will stay on the line with you. dealer.” the US or Canada.
NOTE: Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,  Vehicle must be properly equipped with the Siri-
Calls between the vehicle occupants and the factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent usXM Guardian™ system. Vehicle must be regis-
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care center may be or stop SOS Call system operation. These include, tered with SiriusXM Guardian™ and have an
recorded or monitored for quality assurance but are not limited to, the following factors: active subscription that includes the applicable
purposes. Through your enrollment in and use of  The ignition key is in OFF position. feature.
the SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services, you
 The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.  Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data)
consent to being recorded.
 The vehicle battery loses power or becomes or 3G or 4G (data) network connection compat-
SOS Call System Limitations disconnected during a vehicle crash. ible with your device.
Vehicles that have been purchased in the US and  The SOS Call system software and/or hardware  Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or ACC
(Accessory) position with a properly functioning 5
that travel into Mexico and Canada may have is damaged during a vehicle crash.
limited services. In particular, responses to SOS electrical system.
 LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) coverage
calls or other emergency services may be and/or GPS signals are unavailable or
unavailable or very limited. Vehicles purchased WARNING!
obstructed.
outside the United States and Canada are unable  Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
to receive SiriusXM Guardian™ connected  Network congestion.
LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) and GPS
services.  Weather conditions. antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/data)
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any  Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception, which
of the following may occur at the time the tunnels. can prevent your vehicle from placing an
malfunction is detected: emergency call.
If your vehicle loses battery power for any reason
 The light will continuously be illuminated red. (including during or after an accident), the SOS Call (Continued)
 The screen will display the following message system, among other vehicle systems, will not
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact operate.
your dealer.”
288 MULTIMEDIA
After a crash where the airbags deploy:

WARNING! WARNING!
1. Automatic SOS will initiate a call with an
 Do not add any aftermarket electrical equip-  Ignoring the Rearview Mirror Light could mean agent.
ment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This you will not have SOS Call services if needed.
2. An agent will receive the call and confirm the
may prevent your vehicle from sending a If the Rearview Mirror Light is illuminated,
location of the emergency.
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid have an authorized dealer service the SOS
interference that can cause the SOS Call Call system immediately. 3. If needed, the agent will request the
system to fail, never add aftermarket equip- assistance of emergency services.
 If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
ment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, 4. First responders will arrive on scene. The
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road
data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical agent will remain on the call until emergency
conditions or location), do not wait for voice
system or modify the antennas on your services arrive.
contact from a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES POWER FOR
Care agent. All occupants should exit the
ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER NOTE:
vehicle immediately and move to a safe loca-
AN ACCIDENT), NEITHER THE MOBILE APPS  Agents are available 24/7 to assist you in the
tion.
NOR THE SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN™ CONNECTED case of an emergency.
SERVICES WILL OPERATE.  Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
 On your behalf, agents are able to notify family
and regular inspection of your vehicle may
 The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) turns members about the collision.
result in vehicle damage, accident or injury.
on the Air Bag Warning Light on the instru-  Agents can brief first responders of the situation
ment panel if a malfunction in any part of the before they arrive on scene.
air bag system is detected. If the Air Bag Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Warning Light is illuminated, the air bag  In the event vehicle occupants are unable to
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that
system may not be working properly and the speak, emergency services will be dispatched
can immediately connect you with help in the event
SOS Call system may not be able to send a based on the last known GPS coordinates.
that your vehicle’s airbags deploy. After an
signal to the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer accident, a live agent will contact you through the
Care center. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illu- Uconnect system and alert emergency services.
minated, have an authorized dealer service
your vehicle immediately.
NOTE:
An active SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription is
(Continued) required for this feature to function.
MULTIMEDIA 289
 SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services are  Terms of service of the Uconnect and the Siri- Remote Commands
dependent upon an operative telematics usXM Guardian™ subscriber agreement apply.
On the Remote Commands screen, you have
device, a cellular connection, navigation map See terms of services for complete service
access to several vehicle features that can be
data, and GPS satellite reception, which can limitation.
controlled remotely from your mobile device. These
limit the ability to reach the response center or
features include locking/unlocking, remote
reach emergency support.
starting, and activating the horn and lights of the
vehicle.
Lock Press this button to lock your vehicle.
Vehicle Start Press this button to start your vehicle.
Horn & Lights Press this button to sound the horn and activate your lights.
Unlock Press this button to unlock your vehicle.
5
Cancel Vehicle Start Press this button to cancel remote start.
Remote Commands lets you send a request to your Using A Remote Command Through Your Mobile Using A Remote Command Through Your Owner’s
vehicle in one of three ways: Device And The Mobile App Site
 Anywhere using your mobile device and Mobile 1. Press the desired Remote Command icon on 1. Log on to your Owner’s Site using the
App your mobile device. username and password you used when
 From your computer on the Owner’s Site (not 2. A pop-up screen will appear asking for your activating your SiriusXM Guardian™
available on all functions) SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the connected services in your vehicle.
 Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care same four-digit code established when you NOTE:
(not available on all functions) activated your SiriusXM Guardian™ system). If you forgot your username or password, links are
Enter the SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN on provided on the website to help you retrieve them.
the keypad. 2. If you have more than one vehicle registered
3. It may take 30 seconds or more for the into your Owner’s Site, select the vehicle you
command to go through to your vehicle. want to send the command to by clicking on its
4. A message will let you know if the command image along the top.
was received by your vehicle.
290 MULTIMEDIA
3. On your dashboard, you will see remote Remote Door Lock/Unlock  Your Remote Door Lock/Unlock request will not
commands. Press the desired icon to activate be processed if the vehicle is in motion, the igni-
Description
that feature. tion key is on or during an emergency call.
The Remote Door Lock/Unlock feature provides
4. You will then be asked to enter your SiriusXM
you the ability to lock or unlock the door on your NOTE:
Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the same All other remote services should be performed via
vehicle without the keys and from virtually any
four-digit code established when you activated your Owner’s Site or through the Mobile App on
distance.
your SiriusXM Guardian™ system). Please your compatible device.
enter your SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN. Working Vehicle Conditions
Remote Vehicle Start
5. A message will appear on the screen to let you  The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill.
Description
know if the command was received by your  The vehicle must be in an open area with cell
vehicle. tower reception. The Remote Vehicle Start feature provides you with
the ability to start the engine on your vehicle
 Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi without the keys and from virtually any distance.
Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
connection. Once started, the preset climate controls in your
(for example, in case of an accidental lock-out):
Requirements vehicle can warm up or cool down the interior.
1. Contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
if you are unable to lock your vehicle through  Vehicle must be properly equipped with Siri- You can also send a command to turn off an
the Mobile App or your key fob. usXM Guardian™. engine that has been started using Remote Vehicle
 Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) Start. After 15 minutes, if you have not entered
2. For security purposes, the SiriusXM
or 3G or 4G (data) network connection. If using your vehicle with the key, the engine will shut off
Guardian™ Customer Care agent will verify
the Mobile App to command your vehicle, your automatically.
your identity by asking for your four-digit
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN. device must be compatible and be connected to This remote function requires your vehicle to be
an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) equipped with a factory-installed Remote Start
3. After providing your SiriusXM Guardian™
network connection. system.
Security PIN, you can ask them to perform a
remote command.  Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM You can set up push notifications every time a
Guardian™ and have an active subscription that command is sent to activate or cancel Remote
NOTE:
includes the applicable feature. Start.
Anyone with access to your PIN may request
Remote Door Lock/Unlock. It is your responsibility  An ignition cycle is required for some remote
to protect your PIN appropriately. commands, such as Remote Vehicle Start and
Remote Door Lock/Unlock if following a Remote
Horn & Lights activation.
MULTIMEDIA 291
Working Vehicle Conditions Remote Horn & Lights Assist — If Equipped

 The vehicle must be off or in ACC mode. Description Description
 The vehicle has been started with the key fob It is easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded or Vehicles equipped with the SiriusXM Guardian™
within the last 14 days. noisy parking area by activating the horn and connected services feature may contain an ASSIST
 The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill. lights. It may also help if you need to draw attention button in the vehicle. Once your SiriusXM
to your vehicle for any reason. Guardian™ connected services have been
 The vehicle’s security system has been armed
If you want, you can set up push notifications every activated, the ASSIST button can connect you
and not triggered since the last vehicle start.
time a command is sent to turn on the horn and directly to a Customer Care call center (if
 The doors, hood, and trunk/liftgate are closed. equipped). You will be directed to one of the four
lights.
 The vehicle’s check engine light must be off. services below:
Working Vehicle Conditions
 The vehicle must have at least a quarter tank of  Roadside Assistance — If you get a flat tire or
 The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill. need a tow, you’ll be connected to someone
fuel, along with oil and battery power.
 The vehicle must be in an open area with cell who can help anytime. 5
 The vehicle’s hazard lights must be off.
tower reception.  Connected Services — Contact the SiriusXM
 If equipped, the vehicle must have an automatic
 Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi Guardian™ Customer Care call center to acti-
transmission.
connection. vate your services, renew after your trial has
 The vehicle must be in an open area with cell expired, for in-vehicle support for your SiriusXM
NOTE:
tower reception. Guardian™ connected services, or help
The Remote Horn & Lights feature is designed to
 Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi be loud and get noticed. Please keep in mind the answering any general questions surrounding
connection. surroundings when using this feature. You are your connected services.
 If the Panic button has been pressed, the responsible for compliance with local laws, rules  Uconnect Care — In-vehicle support for all
vehicle must be started at least once after and ordinances in the location of your vehicle non-connected Uconnect system features, such
alarming the system. when using Remote Horn & Lights. as radio and Bluetooth® connections.
NOTE:  Vehicle Care — Total support for your vehicle.
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agents
are not authorized for Remote Vehicle Start
services. Contact the Uconnect Care Team for
assistance.
292 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance Disclaimers How It Works

Features — If Equipped If Roadside Assistance Call is provided to your 1. There are multiple ways to find a destination.
With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has vehicle, you agree to be responsible for any After selecting the Location tab at the bottom
onboard assistance features located on the additional roadside assistance service costs that of the App, browse through one of the
rearview mirror or overhead console designed to you may incur. In order to provide SiriusXM categories provided, or type the name or
enhance your driving experience if you should ever Guardian™ connected services to you, we may keyword in the search box. You can also
need assistance or support. record and monitor your conversations with select categories such as “Favorites” or
How It Works Roadside Assistance Call, Vehicle Care, Uconnect “Contact List”.
Care, or SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care, 2. Select your destination from the list that
Simply push the ASSIST button in the vehicle and whether such conversations are initiated through
you will be presented with your ASSIST options on appears. Location information will then be
the SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services in displayed on the map.
the touchscreen. Make your selection by pressing your vehicle, or via a landline or mobile device, and
the touchscreen. may share information obtained through such From this screen, you will be able to:
Requirements recording and monitoring in accordance with  View the location on a map.
 This feature is available only on vehicles sold in regulatory requirements. You acknowledge, agree
and consent to any recording, monitoring or  See the distance from your current location.
the US and Canada.
sharing of information obtained through any such  Send the destination to the vehicle
 Vehicle must be properly equipped with the Siri-
call recordings. (Send & Go).
usXM Guardian™ system.
 Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data)
Send & Go — If Equipped 3. Send the destination to the Uconnect
Navigation in your vehicle. You can also call
or 3G or 4G (data) network connection. Description
the destination by pressing the Call button.
 Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM The Send & Go feature allows you to search for a
4. Confirm your destination in the vehicle through
Guardian™ and have an active subscription that destination on your mobile device, and then send
a notification or in the Navigation system.
includes the applicable feature. the route to your vehicle’s Navigation system.
 Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or ACC Requirements
(Accessory) position with a properly functioning  Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data)
electrical system. or 3G or 4G (data) network connection compat-
ible with your device.
 Vehicle must have an active subscription that
includes the applicable feature.
MULTIMEDIA 293
Vehicle Finder After you've made your purchase, turn on your portable-enabled media device) to wirelessly
device’s Wi-Fi and connect your devices. connect to the internet. Uconnect offers a
Description
 Enables all your passengers to be simultane- complimentary 3-month trial period that includes
The Vehicle Finder feature allows you to find the 1GB of total data. The trial can be activated any
location of your vehicle. ously connected to the web.
time within the first year of new vehicle ownership.
 Connect several devices at one time.
You can also sound the horn and flash the lights to Use one of these three ways to purchase a
make finding your vehicle even easier.  Any Wi-Fi-enabled device — such as a laptop or subscription to the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot:
How It Works any other portable-enabled media — can
connect over your private in-vehicle network. 1. From your vehicle’s touchscreen, select the
Select the Vehicle Finder function within the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot App, and press the How To
 A high-speed, secured connection lets anyone Purchase button and follow the instructions.
Mobile App and select the Location tab at the
bottom of the App. Then, press the Vehicle icon to on your private network access the Web — great
for working and relaxing. 2. Log onto your Owner’s Site and click the link to
find your vehicle. the AT&T portal to get set up.
Requirements WARNING! 3. For existing Connected Car customers: Push 5
 Vehicle must be properly equipped with the the ASSIST button to be routed to an AT&T
The driver should NEVER use the 4G Wi-Fi
Uconnect system. Customer Care agent who will assist you.
Hotspot while driving the vehicle as doing so
 Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) may result in an accident involving serious injury Once the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is purchased, you can
or 3G or 4G (data) network connection compat- or death. change its name and the password by selecting the
ible with your device.
Wi-Fi Hotspot App and pressing the Setup Wi-Fi
 Vehicle must have an active subscription that Create A 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot For Use In Your Vehicle Hotspot button. You can also view the connected
includes the applicable feature. devices from the app screen by pressing the View
How It Works
 Vehicle ignition must have been turned on Connected Devices button.
The 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot feature provides
within 14 days. NOTE:
the vehicle passengers with an internet
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot — If Equipped access hotspot in the vehicle, using the radio as an A SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription is not required
access point. The hotspot will allow Wi-Fi-enabled in order to purchase and use the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot.
Description
in-vehicle devices (such as a laptop or any other
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is an in-vehicle service that
connects your device to an LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network that is ready to go wherever you are.
294 MULTIMEDIA
select “Help”, and then select “SiriusXM Monthly Vehicle Health Report —
WARNING! Guardian™ Customer Care” to make the call. If Equipped
Always drive safely with your hands on the
3. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will Description
steering wheel and obey all applicable laws. You
authenticate that you are the owner of the Monthly Vehicle Health Report is a Uconnect
have full responsibility and assume all risks
vehicle and contact the law enforcement with service through which a summary of the
related to the use of the features and
whom you filed the stolen vehicle report. performance of your vehicle’s key systems will be
applications in this vehicle. Only use the
features and applications in this vehicle when it 4. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will work sent to you every month so you can stay on top of
is safe to do so. Failure to comply may result in with your local law enforcement to locate the your vehicle’s maintenance needs. This is provided
an accident involving in serious injury or death. vehicle. You will be contacted by law as a convenience to you and does not substitute
enforcement if your vehicle is recovered. While for regular maintenance to your vehicle.
the investigation is ongoing, you should also In order to provide the Monthly Vehicle Health
Stolen Vehicle Assistance — If Equipped contact your insurance company to inform it of Report, the Uconnect system in your vehicle may
Description the situation. collect and transmit vehicle data to SiriusXM
If your vehicle is stolen, the SiriusXM Guardian™ Guardian™ and to FCA, such as your vehicle’s
Requirements
Customer Care agent may be able to locate the health and performance, your vehicle’s location,
stolen vehicle and work with law enforcement to  Vehicle must be properly equipped with the your utilization of the features in your vehicle, and
help recover it. Uconnect system. other data.
How It Works  Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) This data collection and transmission begins when
or 3G or 4G (data) network connection compat- you enroll in SiriusXM Guardian™ and will continue
1. If your vehicle is stolen, contact local law
ible with your device. even if you cancel your SiriusXM Guardian™
enforcement as soon as possible. They will
work with you to file a stolen vehicle report.  Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM subscription unless you call SiriusXM Guardian™
Guardian™ and have an active subscription that Customer Care and tell them to deactivate your
2. Next, inform SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Uconnect Services.
includes the applicable feature.
Care that your vehicle has been stolen.
NOTE: Please see the Uconnect Privacy Policy for more
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care Agent information, located at www.driveuconnect.com/
Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are
will ask for the stolen vehicle report number connectedservices/privacy.html (US Residents)
available everywhere at all times, particularly in
(as issued by your local law enforcement). If or www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
remote or enclosed areas.
you have downloaded the Mobile App, you can
push the Settings menu button on your device,
MULTIMEDIA 295
For more information on SiriusXM Guardian™ Amazon Alexa Skill — If Equipped Next, link the Uconnect system on your vehicle to
private policy, see https://siriusxmcvs.com/ Enjoy the convenience of using your voice to
Amazon Alexa:
privacy-policy. command your vehicle with Amazon Alexa! 1. Download the Amazon Alexa app on your
Vehicle Health Alert —If Equipped mobile device (Apple® or Android™).
With Amazon Alexa, you can connect to your
Description vehicle and remotely access key services and 2. Once in the app, tap MENU and go to SKILLS.
features. 3. Search for <vehicle brand> skill, then tap
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses
a problem with one of your vehicle’s key systems. If your vehicle is equipped with Uconnect Enable.
For further information, go to your Owner’s Navigation, you can send a destination directly to 4. Tap SAVE SETTINGS when prompted.
website. your vehicle using Alexa.
5. Link the vehicle brand name to the <vehicle
NOTE: If you need assistance, you can always ask Alexa brand> Skill by tapping LINK ACCOUNT.
Vehicle Health Alert emails require you to register for help, or complete a list of commands by saying:
6. Log in using your Owner Account credentials.
and activate services. During this process you will “Alexa, ask <brand name> for help with my car.”
This will be the same user name and password 5
be asked to provide an email address to which the Here are a few of the many questions you can ask you used when registering for SiriusXM
reports will be sent. Alexa: Guardian™ connected services. There will be
In-Vehicle Notifications — If Equipped  “Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to start my <vehicle additional settings to confirm on the following
Description name> with your Voice Code .” screen.
Your vehicle will send you notifications to remind  “Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my <vehicle 7. AUTHORIZE the account to return to the
you when services are needed, or to alert you of name> with your Voice Code.” <vehicle brand> Skill.
other important information, such as recall  “Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to send 1000
You can now begin using the <vehicle brand> Skill
notices. When you receive a notification through Chrysler Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan to my on Alexa!
your touchscreen, press OK to dismiss the <vehicle name>.”
message, or press Call Care to speak with a
 “Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> what is the fuel
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent.
level of my <vehicle name>.”
NOTE: An active subscription to SiriusXM Guardian™ is
Pressing “OK” or the X button on the pop-up screen required. To use Amazon Alexa, first, register for
will dismiss or close the pop-up, and the In-Vehicle SiriusXM Guardian™ Ú page 284.
Messages mailbox will display. In the Mailbox, you
can reopen messages or delete messages.
296 MULTIMEDIA
Google Assistant — If Equipped 3. Press the Discover button in the bottom left  Boundary Alert
corner of the screen. Enter the vehicle brand Receive a notification the moment your vehicle
With the Google Assistant, you can get help and
name. is driven either out of or into a geographic
keep tabs on your car. Google Assistant is available
across your devices, including Android™ phones, 4. A prompt will appear to link your Uconnect boundary that you set.
iPhone® devices, or voice-activated speakers, like account. Press “Link Uconnect to Google”.  Curfew Alert
Google Home. If you need assistance, ask Google 5. Press “Sign In” and enter the email address Receive a notification when your car is being
for help, or for a complete list of commands by and password you created when you activated driven outside of the curfew time.
saying: “Hey Google, ask <brand name> for help SiriusXM Guardian™. There will be additional
with my car.”  Speed Alert
settings to confirm on the following screen.
Here are a few examples of commands: Receive a notification whenever your car
6. Lastly, press “Authorize” to complete the
exceeds a speed limit you set.
 “Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to start my linking process.
 Valet Alert
<vehicle name> with your Voice Code.”
Now, you can ask Google Assistant to help you: Receive a notification if and when your vehicle is
 “Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my
 Remotely start the engine, or cancel a remote driven outside a quarter-mile radius of a valet
<vehicle name> with your Voice Code.”
start drop-off zone.
 “Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to send 1000
Chrysler Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan to my  Send a destination to your vehicle’s built-in SmartWatch Integration — If Equipped
<vehicle name>.” Uconnect Navigation system Description
 “Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> what is the  Monitor vehicle vitals, such as tire pressure, fuel SmartWatch Integration puts the Mobile App right
fuel level of my <vehicle name>.” level and oil life on your Apple® Watch or Android™ Wear. To get
 And more! started, follow these steps:
To link your Uconnect account with Google
Assistant, follow these steps: Family Drive Alerts — If Equipped 1. Download the Mobile App from the App
Store® or Google Play.
1. Download and install the Google Assistant Description
app on your smart phone from the App 2. Log onto the app from your smartphone using
Family Drive Alerts help promote safer driving and the username and password you created when
Store® or Google Play.
give you peace of mind when your loved ones are you first set up your account.
2. After installation, log in to the Google Assistant out on the road. You can set boundary limits,
app with your Gmail ID. Verify your account by monitor driving speed, and pinpoint your vehicle’s 3. Make sure your watch and smartphone are
pressing the icon in the upper right-hand location any time, any place. Use the Mobile App to connected through Bluetooth®.
corner. set alerts:
MULTIMEDIA 297
4. The Mobile App should appear on your NOTE: MANAGE M Y SIRIUSXM G UARDIAN™
SmartWatch. If the text message does not come through, press
the Resend Text button. It might take a minute to
ACCOUNT
Once the app is downloaded on your SmartWatch, receive the text message. To manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account,
you can enjoy these features: 4. Once you receive the text message, press the press the ASSIST button in your vehicle, or call
 Lock or unlock your vehicle by tapping the link provided. You will be directed to a sign-in SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
remote lock button in the app and entering your screen. Enter your email and password. You NOTE:
security PIN. will then be able to use Market. It is recommended, when selling your vehicle, or
 Remote start or stop your vehicle. 5. If you do not have an account, press “Register turning in your lease, to call SiriusXM Guardian™
 View important vehicle stats, such as fuel level, Now” to create one. Care to remove your personal data.
vehicle location, tire pressure warning, and 6. Accept the Market Terms of Service.
more. 7. Enter your credit card information, and press
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS
For help, refer to the Uconnect YouTube channel “Next”. For additional information about SiriusXM 5
for SmartWatch Integration. 8. Enter your phone number, and press “Next”. Guardian™, active subscribers can push the
Market — If Equipped ASSIST button (if equipped) and then select
9. The system will verify the phone number. Once SiriusXM Guardian™ Call on your in-vehicle
With Market, you can enjoy seamless and secure verified, Market will be available to use. Press touchscreen to contact SiriusXM Guardian™. Your
transactions from the comfort of your vehicle. the OK button. call will be directed to a SiriusXM Guardian™ agent
Make restaurant reservations, place food orders, or held in a queue until an agent is available. If you
or pay for other goods and services right from the From the online portal, https://
do not have an active subscription, push the
vehicle’s touchscreen. market.mopar.com/home, you can link loyalty ASSIST button and press the Activate button on the
To get started with Market on the touchscreen: accounts and start receiving benefits from them touchscreen to activate services.
while still using Market and view your purchase
1. Press the Market button in the Mobile App history.
drawer.
2. Press “Get Started”.
3. Press “Text Me A Link” and enter your phone
number to receive a text message with
instructions on how to set up Market.
298 MULTIMEDIA
CONNECTED SERVICES SOS FAQS — IF 2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Mobile App? CONNECTED SERVICES ROADSIDE
Your key fob will lock/unlock the door more
EQUIPPED quickly, however its range is limited and your ASSISTANCE FAQ S
1. What happens if I accidentally push the SOS Mobile App comes in handy for these and 1. What is the phone number for roadside
Call button on the mirror or overhead console? other situations. assistance call? The phone number is:
You have 10 seconds after pushing the SOS 3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my device?  US: 1-800-521-2779
Call button to cancel the call. To cancel the People sometimes lose their mobile devices,
call, either push the SOS Call button again, or  Canada: 1-800-363-4869
which is why security measures have been
press the Cancel button on the in-vehicle engineered into the Mobile App. Asking for 2. If I am subscribed to SiriusXM Guardian™,
touchscreen. your username, password and SiriusXM does it cover towing or other expenses
2. What type of information is sent when I use the Guardian™ Security PIN are required for the incurred by using roadside assistance? No,
SOS Call button from my vehicle? Certain activation of Remote services through your however your new vehicle may include
vehicle information, such as make and model, mobile device. It is your responsibility to Roadside Assistance Call services.
is transmitted along with the last known GPS protect your passwords and PINs.
location. 4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the Mobile
CONNECTED SERVICES SEND & G O
3. When could I use the SOS Call button? You can App? The Mobile App is compatible with most FAQ S — IF E QUIPPED
use the SOS Call button to make a call if you or devices with the Apple® and Android™
1. How long does it take to send the route and
someone else needs emergency assistance. operating systems. The capabilities of these
destination to my vehicle? Depending on
devices allow us to remotely command your
various conditions, it can take up to three
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE D OOR vehicle. Other operating systems may be
minutes for the request to get through to your
supported in the future.
LOCK/UNLOCK FAQ S vehicle.
5. Why is the Mobile App running slow? The
1. How long does it take to unlock or lock the 2. Can I cancel a route I sent to my vehicle? Yes,
Mobile App relies on a mobile network
door? Depending on various conditions, it can once you enter your vehicle, and start the
connection from your device to send
take up to three minutes or more for the engine, the pop-up message stating that you
commands to your vehicle which must have an
request to get to your vehicle. have a new route will appear. There is an exit
operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G, 4G (data), or
button on the pop-up that will cancel the route
5G (data) network connection. If either your
if selected.
device or your vehicle is in an area with below
average coverage, it may take longer to log in
and send commands.
MULTIMEDIA 299
3. Can I select a different route than the most CONNECTED S ERVICES S TOLEN VEHICLE provider of your SiriusXM Guardian™
recent one I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once you connected services subscription to find out if
enter the vehicle, and start the engine, the ASSISTANCE FAQ S — I F EQUIPPED the insurance provider can offer you a lower
pop-up message offers a “Locations” option. 1. Can someone locate my vehicle? To enhance rate.
Once “Locations” is selected, you can choose your privacy, and the privacy of others using NOTE:
from a list of recently sent destinations. your vehicle, a stolen vehicle police report is Neither FCA nor SiriusXM® are insurance
required for you to activate this service. You companies, and SiriusXM Guardian™ is not an
CONNECTED S ERVICES V EHICLE F INDER must involve local law enforcement to have insurance product. You are responsible for
FAQ S SiriusXM Guardian™ locate your vehicle. We obtaining insurance coverage for your vehicle and
may also locate the vehicle for other law yourself.
1. Can someone else locate my vehicle? Your enforcement or government agencies,
vehicle may be located by anyone who has
your PIN and access to your account. It is your
subject to a valid court order telling SiriusXM CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE V EHICLE
Guardian™ to do so. We will also provide the
responsibility to guard your PIN accordingly. service for FCA entities to locate a vehicle that S TART FAQ S 5
See the Uconnect and SiriusXM Guardian™ you have purchased through them. 1. How long does it take to remotely start my
terms of service for more information. vehicle? Depending on various conditions, it
2. How will I know if my vehicle is recovered?
2. How long does it take to sound my horn and After you provide the SiriusXM Guardian™ can take three minutes or more for the
flash the lights? Depending on various Customer Care agent with the stolen vehicle request to get through to your vehicle.
conditions, it can take three minutes or more report, the agent will work together with law 2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Mobile App?
for the request to get through to your vehicle. enforcement to try to locate your vehicle. If Your key fob will remote start your vehicle
3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I turn your vehicle is recovered, you will be contacted more quickly. However its range is limited. For
them on? If you are close enough to the by law enforcement. example, when you are leaving the stadium
vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off the 3. Can SiriusXM Guardian™ lower my insurance after the game, you can use the Mobile App to
horn and lights by pushing the red Panic rates? Some insurance providers offer lower remote start your vehicle and have the inside
button. rates on vehicles equipped with systems that of your vehicle comfortable by the time you get
can deter auto theft. When shopping for to it.
insurance, be sure to inform the insurance
300 MULTIMEDIA
3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my wireless CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE H ORN CONNECTED SERVICES ACCOUNT
device? People sometimes lose their wireless
devices, which is why security measures have & L IGHTS FAQ S FAQ S — IF E QUIPPED
been engineered into the Mobile App. Asking 1. How long does it take to sound my horn and 1. How do I register for my SiriusXM Guardian™
for your username, password and SiriusXM flash the lights? Depending on various account? There are three ways that you can
Guardian™ Security PIN help to ensure that conditions, it can take three minutes or more register your SiriusXM Guardian™ Account:
nobody can start your vehicle if they happen to for the request to get through to your vehicle.  Push the ASSIST button. A call will be placed
find your device.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Mobile App? to an agent who can assist in registering
4. Can someone drive off with my vehicle using Your key fob will sound the horn and flash the your new account.
the App? No. Driving your vehicle still requires lights quicker; however, its range is limited.  Press the Activate Services icon in the Apps
the keys to be in the vehicle. The Remote Start
3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I turn menu. Select the button to speak with an
feature simply starts the engine to warm up or
them on? If you are close enough to the agent, who can assist in registering your
cool down the interior before you arrive.
vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off the new account.
5. Can I stop a vehicle that is being driven with horn and lights by pressing the red Panic  Press the Activate Services icon in the Apps
the cancel Remote Vehicle Start command? button. Otherwise, Remote Horn & Lights will menu. Enter your email on the touchscreen
No. If the vehicle is in motion, the cancel continue for a maximum of three minutes. and then follow the prompts from the
Remote Vehicle Start button will not stop the
4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the Mobile provided email. You will receive an email
vehicle.
App? The Mobile App has been designed to with an activation link that will be good for
6. Why can’t all mobile devices use the Mobile work on most devices with the Apple® and 72 hours. Once you click the activation link,
App? The Mobile App has been designed to Android™ operating systems. The capabilities you will be prompted to fill out your informa-
work on most devices with the Apple® and of these devices allow us to remotely tion and accept Terms and Conditions.
Android™ operating systems. The capabilities command your vehicle. Other operating Then, you will be directed to the SiriusXM
of these devices allow us to remotely systems may be supported in the future. Guardian™ home page to complete your
command your vehicle. Other operating profile and demo the remote services.
systems may be supported in the future.
MULTIMEDIA 301
2. Why do I need an email address? Without an 6. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™ added a credit card to your account, SiriusXM
email address, customers cannot register for profile? Your name, home address, phone Guardian™ will send you an email or letter in
SiriusXM Guardian™. Customers need to number, email address and SiriusXM advance of your expiration date to remind you
register so they can subscribe to receive Guardian™ Security PIN can be updated online that your subscription is ending soon.
additional services and create a SiriusXM on your Owner’s Site. Log in to your Owner’s 10. How do I manage my SiriusXM Guardian™
Guardian™ Security PIN for remote command Site then select Edit Profile to edit your notification preferences? Contact SiriusXM
requests. personal information. Make your edits and Guardian™ Customer Care, or go to your
3. How do I create a SiriusXM Guardian™ security click Save. Owner’s Site and then update your
PIN? Set up your SiriusXM Guardian™ Security 7. Can I try features or packages before I buy preferences on the SiriusXM Guardian™
PIN during the registration process. The them? Your new vehicle purchase may have customer web portal.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN will be come with an included trial period for certain 11. How do I purchase a subscription? Contact
required to authenticate you when accessing Apps and services. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care by
your account via SiriusXM Guardian™ Call or 8. Can I access every App and service while pushing the ASSIST button on your rearview
performing any remote services, such as 5
driving? No, some applications and services mirror or overhead console.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Horn & are not available while driving. For your own
Lights, or Remote Vehicle Start. 12. How do I update my credit card information?
safety, it is not possible to use some of the Login to your Owner’s Site, and select Edit
4. What if I forgot my SiriusXM Guardian™ touchscreen features while the vehicle is in Profile, then select SiriusXM Guardian™
security PIN? If you’ve already activated motion (e.g. key pad). Payment Account.
services and forgot your SiriusXM Guardian™ 9. What happens when my subscription comes
Security PIN, you can reset the PIN by selecting 13. How do I find out how much longer I have on
up for renewal? If you have added a credit card my subscription? Contact SiriusXM Guardian™
Edit Profile on your Owner’s Site. to your account information, your subscription Customer Care.
5. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™ will be automatically renewed for a term length
payment account address? Your SiriusXM in accordance with the service plan that you You also can visit your Owner’s Site and
Guardian™ Payment Account address can be have selected at the then current subscription choose a subscription to view its expiration
updated online, or by calling SiriusXM rate and on every renewal date thereafter, date. When your subscription is about to ex-
Guardian™ Customer Care from ASSIST in your unless you cancel your subscription by calling pire, you will receive an email or letter of no-
vehicle. To update online: login to your Owner’s SiriusXM Guardian™ Care. If you have not tification.
Site, and select Edit Profile > SiriusXM
Guardian™ Payment Account.
302 MULTIMEDIA
14. Can I get a refund if I have not used the entire 18. What will happen if an operable LTE (voice/ FCA US LLC for the purposes stated in the
subscription? Prorated refunds are provided data), 4G (data), or 5G (data) network Uconnect Privacy Policy. Vehicle health and
from the date of cancellation for annual plans connection compatible with my device is diagnostic information including location data may
or longer. Please see the Uconnect and temporarily unavailable? The SOS Call and be used by Uconnect to provide a Vehicle Health
SiriusXM Guardian™ Terms & Conditions for ASSIST buttons will NOT function if you are not Report to you.
refunds related to billing plans of other lengths connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or Even if you cancel your SiriusXM Guardian™
and other circumstances. 3G, 4G (data), 5G (data) network. Services that subscription, this vehicle diagnostic health
15. Can I cancel a subscription before it expires? required your smartphone only direct calls to information, including location data, may still be
Yes. If you have an annual subscription, your Roadside Assistance Call may be functioning if transmitted from your vehicle and you may still
subscription will be canceled the day you you have an operable network. have a Vehicle Health Report sent to you.
cancel. If you have a monthly subscription, Use of any of the Connected Services including
your subscription will be canceled on the last DATA C OLLECTION & PRIVACY SiriusXM Guardian™ is deemed to be your consent
day of the month in which you choose to The Uconnect system collects and transmits data to the collection, use and disclosure of this
cancel. which may include information about your vehicle, information in accordance with the Uconnect
16. What should I do if I want to sell my vehicle? your vehicle’s health and performance, your Privacy Policy. If you do not want this information to
Before your vehicle is sold to a new owner, vehicle’s location, your utilization of the features in be collected, used, or shared, you must cancel your
you’ll want to remove your account your vehicle, and other data. The collection, use Uconnect services in their entirety by contacting us
information. This process removes all personal and sharing of this information is required to as referenced in the Uconnect Privacy Policy.
information, returns the Uconnect system to provide the SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
its original factory settings, removes all services and is further described by the Uconnect RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services and Privacy Policy, which can be found at
account information. To remove your account www.driveuconnect.com/connectedservices/ Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being
information from the Uconnect system, on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy
privacy.html (US Residents) or
contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care. performance from your radio. This condition may
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
be lessened or eliminated by repositioning the
17. What if I forgot to remove my account This information may be collected by SiriusXM®
mobile phone within the vehicle. This condition is
information before I returned my lease vehicle Connected Vehicle Services Inc. and shared with
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
or sold it? Contact SiriusXM Guardian™ does not satisfactorily improve from repositioning
Customer Care. the mobile phone, it is recommended that the
volume be turned down or off during mobile phone
operation when not using the Uconnect system.
MULTIMEDIA 303
REGULATORY AND SAFETY PERFORMANCE PAGES — IF EQUIPPED The Performance Pages include the following:
I NFORMATION Performance Pages is an application that provides
 Timers
a display for performance indicators that will help  Gauges

US/CANADA
you gain familiarity with the capabilities of your  G-Force
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation vehicle in real time.  Dyno/Engine
The radiated output power of the internal wireless To access the Performance Pages, press the
radio is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency  Vehicle Dynamics
Vehicle button on the touchscreen. Then, press the
exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio Performance tab. Press the desired button on the Snapshot
will be used in such a manner that the radio is 8 in touchscreen to access that specific Performance The Snapshot feature allows you to take a
(20 cm) or further from the human body. Page. screenshot of any page. The information can be
The internal wireless radio operates within saved onto a USB device.
guidelines found in radio frequency safety WARNING! To take a snapshot, make sure a USB device is
standards and recommendations, which reflect 5
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the plugged into the vehicle. Next, press the Snapshot
the consensus of the scientific community.
Performance Pages is intended for off-highway icon located in the lower left corner of the
The radio manufacturer believes the internal or off-road use only and should not be done on touchscreen.
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The any public roadways. It is recommended that The file will be saved to the USB drive. At the time
level of energy emitted is far less than the these features be used in a controlled a snapshot is taken, the bottom bar of the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless environment and within the limits of the law. The touchscreen will be replaced with the historical
devices such as mobile phones. However, the use capabilities of the vehicle as measured by the data from the vehicle present at the time the
of wireless radios may be restricted in some Performance Pages must never be exploited in a snapshot icon was pressed. The following
situations or environments, such as aboard reckless or dangerous manner, which can information will display:
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
encouraged to ask for authorization before turning  Date
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
on the wireless radio Ú page 480. can prevent accidents.  Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
 Longitude And Latitude Coordinates
 Outside Temperature
 Odometer
304 MULTIMEDIA
The following describes each feature and its NOTE: NOTE:

operation: Drag timers (RT, 60 ft [20 m], 330 ft [100 m], The distance measurement will be aborted if the
1/8 mile [200 m], 1000 ft [300 m], and 1/4 mile brake pedal is released or the parking brake is
TIMERS [400 m]) and Acceleration Timers (0-60 mph engaged, before the vehicle comes to a complete
When the Timers page is selected, you will be able [0-96 km/h] and 0-100 mph [0-160 km/h]) will be stop.
to view the Drag and Accel & Braking timers. ready to acquire new recent data measurements  Brake from mph (km/h)
when the vehicle is at 0 mph (0 km/h) and vehicle
 Recent NOTE:
is in drive.
A real-time summary of performance timers for Brake Distance and Speed timers only display
The timer listed below shows the measured time “ready” when vehicle is traveling at a speed
the most recent valid run, or the status of a test required to travel at the cited distance is met.
in progress. greater than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Some timers will also display speeds present at the
 Last time the distance was met. GAUGES
The last recorded run of performance timers.  0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) When selected, this screen displays the following
 Best  0-100 mph (0-160 km/h) values:
The best recorded run of performance timers,  60 ft (20 m) ET  Coolant Temperature
except for braking data.
 330 ft (100 m) ET Shows the actual coolant temperature.
Save
 ⅛ Mile (200 m) + ET  Oil Temperature
Pressing the SAVE button will let you save the timer
data for Recent, Last, and Best recorded times to  ⅛ Mile (200) + mph Shows the actual oil temperature.
an inserted USB flash drive.  1000 ft (300 m) ET  Oil Pressure
The Timers pages contain the timers listed below:  ¼ Mile (400 m) + ET Shows the actual oil pressure.
 Reaction Time: Measures the driver's reaction  Trans Temp
 ¼ Mile (400 m) + mph
time for launching the vehicle against a simu-  Brake Distance ft (meters)
Shows actual transmission oil temperature.
lated drag strip timing light (behavior modeled
after 500 Sportsman Tree) displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
MULTIMEDIA 305
 Battery Voltage  Right G-Force DYNAMOMETER (D YNO)/E NGINE

Shows actual battery voltage. Measures the peak force on the right side of the
vehicle. Dynamometer (Dyno)
 Intake Air Temp
 Left G-Force The system will start drawing graphs for Power and
Shows actual intake air temperature. Torque (top chart) and Engine Speed (bottom
If a gauge is selected, the Gauge Detail View Page Measures the peak force on the left side of the chart). The graph will fill from the left side of the
will appear on the screen. This page shows gauge vehicle. x-axis and fill to the right side of the x-axis (based
values for the previous two minutes on the  Rear G-Force on History time selected). Once the right side of the
selected gauge. Measures the peak acceleration force on the page is reached, the graph will scroll with the right
Pressing the Left or Right Arrow will cycle through rear of the vehicle. side always being the most recent recorded
the details for each of the gauges. Pressing the sample.
NOTE:
minimize button beside the graph will return to the Front, Right, Left, and Rear G-Forces are all peak The following options can be selected:
Gauge menu. values. These readings can be reset by clearing  Pressing the STOP button will freeze the graph. 5
G-F ORCE peak G-Force on the instrument cluster. Selecting “Play” will clear the graph and restart
The friction circle display shows instantaneous the process.
When G-Force is selected, the following features G-Force as a highlight and previous G-Force as  Press the + or – button to change the history of
will be available: dots within the circle. The system records previous the graph. The selectable options are “30”,
 Vehicle Speed G-Force for three minutes. If there are multiple “60”, “90”, “120” seconds. The graph will
Measures the current speed of the vehicle in samples at a given point, the color of the dot will expand or constrict depending on the setting
either mph or km/h, starting at zero with no darken from blue to red. Vectors more frequent will selected.
maximum value. show in red; infrequent vectors will show in blue.
 Select the “Gear” display setting to turn the
 Front G-Force Pitch & Roll graph gear markers on or off.
Measures the peak braking force on the front of The G-Force page displays the vehicle’s current NOTE:
the vehicle. pitch (angle up and down) and roll (angle side to The Gear On/Off feature will only display if your
side) in degrees. The pitch and roll gauges provide vehicle is equipped with an Automatic Trans-
a visualization of the current vehicle angle. mission.
306 MULTIMEDIA
Engine Transfer Case

Press the Left and Right Arrow buttons on the This feature will be active when the vehicle is in
bottom of the touchscreen to cycle between the 4WD HIGH, 4WD AUTO, Neutral, or 4WD LOW.
Dyno and Engine pages. NOTE:
When selected, this screen displays the following A lock symbol will only be present on the Transfer
values: Case button when the vehicle is in 4WD LOW.
 Vehicle Speed: Shows the actual vehicle speed. Rear Axle Locker
 Engine Power: Shows the instantaneous power. This feature will allow you to lock and unlock the
rear axle. To change the status, push the AXLE
 Engine Torque: Shows the instantaneous
LOCK button.
torque.
 Boost Pressure: Shows the actual engine boost
pressure.
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with Off-Road Pages
 Gear: Shows the current (or pending) operating
which display vehicle information related to the
gear of the vehicle.
drivetrain, transfer case, and coolant/oil gauges.
VEHICLE DYNAMICS To access Off-Road Pages, press the Vehicle
The Vehicle Dynamics page displays information button on the touchscreen, select the Off-Road
concerning the vehicle’s drivetrain. Pages tab, and then select the Off-Road button on
the main screen. Off-Road Pages can also be
Steering Angle — If Equipped accessed through the app drawer.
Steering Angle utilizes the steering angle sensor to
calculate the degree of the steering relative to zero
(straight ahead) reference angle. The zero degree
reference angle measurement indicates the actual
front tire steering angle.
Off-Road Button
MULTIMEDIA 307
OFF-R OAD P AGES S TATUS BAR 1 — Transfer Case Status

The Off-Road Pages Status Bar is located along the 2 — Latitude/Longitude
bottom of Off-Road Pages and is present in each of 3 — Altitude
the four selectable page options. It provides 4 — Hill Descent Control Status
information for the following items: 5 — Speed
1. Transfer Case Status
2. Latitude/Longitude
3. Altitude of the vehicle
4. Status of Hill Descent Control
5. Speed in MPH (km/h)
5
Status Bar 2WD/4WD

308 MULTIMEDIA
VEHICLE DYNAMICS 1 — Steering Angle

The Vehicle Dynamics page displays information 2 — Transfer Case Status
concerning the vehicle’s transfer case and 3 — Rear Axle Locker Status
steering angle. 4 — Rear Axle
The following information is displayed:
1. Status of Transfer Case
2. Status of Front Axles — If Equipped
3. Status of the Rear Axles
4. Steering angle in degrees
Drivetrain Menu 2WD/4WD

MULTIMEDIA 309
ACCESSORY G AUGE 1 — Oil Temperature

The Accessory Gauge page displays the current 2 — Coolant Temperature
status of the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature, Oil 3 — Oil Pressure
Temperature, Oil Pressure, Transmission 4 — Battery Voltage
Temperature, and Battery Voltage. 5 — Transmission Temperature
Accessory Gauge Menu 2WD/4WD

310 MULTIMEDIA
PITCH & ROLL NOTE:

Pitch & Roll values may show upon startup. These
The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s current numbers will update once the vehicle is driven.
pitch (angle up and down) and roll (angle side to
side) in degrees. The Pitch & Roll gauges provide a
visualization of the current vehicle angle.
Pitch & Roll Menu 2WD/4WD

MULTIMEDIA 311
SUSPENSION FORWARD F ACING C AMERA

The Suspension page displays the current status of Your vehicle may be equipped with a Forward
the vehicle’s suspension system and the current Facing Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
ride height of the vehicle. The Suspension page will image of the front view of your vehicle. The image
also indicate when the vehicle’s height changes. will be displayed on the touchscreen along with a
caution note “Check Entire Surroundings” across
the top of the screen.
To activate, press the Forward Facing Camera
button on the touchscreen.
Suspension Menu
312
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES The ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification WARNING!
ANTI-L OCK BRAKE S YSTEM (ABS) may result in degraded ABS performance.  The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and WARNING! following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
brake performance under most braking conditions. planing.
 The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
The system automatically prevents wheel lock and
equipment that may be susceptible to interfer-  The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
enhances vehicle control during braking.
ence caused by improperly installed or high must never be exploited in a reckless or
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that output radio transmitting equipment. This dangerous manner that could jeopardize the
the ABS is working properly each time the vehicle interference can cause possible loss of user’s safety or the safety of others.
is started and driven. During this self-check, you anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some such equipment should be performed by qual-
related motor noises. ified professionals. Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
The ABS is activated during braking when the Light
 Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
system detects one or more wheels are beginning their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the
to lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may
bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you stay on for as long as four seconds.
may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s). need to slow down or stop. If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on
You also may experience the following normal while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion
 The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
characteristics when the ABS activates: of the brake system is not functioning and that
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
 ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may service is required. However, the conventional
increase braking or steering efficiency beyond
continue to hear for a short time after the stop) brake system will continue to operate normally if
that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
the ABS Warning Light is on.
 Brake pedal pulsations brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
 A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the (Continued)
stop
SAFETY 313
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system Brake Assist System (BAS) Brake System Warning Light
should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the ABS Warning
braking capability during emergency braking when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode
Light does not come on when the ignition is placed
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
in the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as
braking situation by sensing the rate and amount If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or
soon as possible.
of brake application, and then applies optimum comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC) pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce system is not functioning properly and that
braking distances. The BAS complements the
SYSTEM Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes
immediate service is required. If the Brake System
Warning Light does not come on when the ignition
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This system receive the benefit of the system, you must apply repaired as soon as possible.
includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake continuous braking pressure during the stopping
Assist System (BAS), Electronic Brake Force sequence (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
Distribution (EBD), Electronic Roll Mitigation reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no EBD manages the distribution of the braking
(ERM), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Hill Start longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, torque between the front and rear axles by limiting
Assist (HSA), and Traction Control System (TCS). the BAS is deactivated. braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to 6
These systems work together to enhance both prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle
vehicle stability and control in various driving WARNING! instability, and to prevent the rear axle from
conditions. The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent entering the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) before
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer the natural laws of physics from acting on the the front axle.
Sway Control (TSC) and Hill Descent Control (HDC). vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot
prevent collisions, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a
BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner, which could
jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of
others.
314 SAFETY
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) Electronic Stability Control (ESC) The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
located in the instrument cluster will start to flash
The ERM system anticipates the potential for ESC enhances directional control and stability of
as soon as the ESC system becomes active. The
wheel lift by monitoring the driver’s steering wheel the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also
input and the speed of the vehicle. When ERM corrects for oversteering or understeering of the
flashes when the TCS is active. If the ESC
determines that the rate of change of the steering vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to
wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to wheel(s) to counteract the above conditions.
flash during acceleration, ease up on the
potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the Engine power may also be reduced to help the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine vehicle maintain the desired path.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will  Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more prevailing road conditions.
occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
lift occurring during severe or evasive driving
 Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less WARNING!
maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to
other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the than appropriate for the steering wheel position.  Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
roadway, striking objects or other vehicles. ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the prevent the natural laws of physics from
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
WARNING! it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual traction afforded by prevailing road condi-
path does not match the intended path, ESC tions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
conditions and driving conditions, influence the
assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM
condition. planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers,
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to
especially those that involve leaving the roadway
inappropriate driver input for the conditions.
or striking objects or other vehicles. The
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
manner which could jeopardize the user's safety
reckless or dangerous manner which could
or the safety of others.
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
(Continued)
SAFETY 315
Partial Off Full Off — If Equipped

WARNING!
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road
 Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly stuck. This mode may modify TCS and ESC use only and should not be used on any public
maintain your vehicle, may change the thresholds for activation, which allows for more roadways. In this mode, TCS and ESC features are
handling characteristics of your vehicle, and wheel spin than normally allowed. turned off. To enter the “Full Off” mode, push and
may negatively affect the performance of the hold the ESC OFF button for five seconds while the
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push
ESC system. Changes to the steering system, vehicle is stopped with the engine running. After
the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator
suspension, braking system, tire type and size five seconds, a chime will sound, the ESC OFF
Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again,
or wheel size may adversely affect ESC perfor- Indicator Light will illuminate, and the “ESC OFF”
momentarily push the ESC OFF button and the ESC
mance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn message will display in the instrument cluster. To
OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any turn ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF
vehicle modification or poor vehicle mainte- NOTE: button.
nance that reduces the effectiveness of the For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, the
push and release of the button will toggle the ESC NOTE:
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of
modes. Multiple attempts may be required to System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to “Partial
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
return to “ESC On”. Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined
injury and death. 6
speed. When the vehicle speed slows below the
WARNING! predetermined speed the system will return to ESC
ESC Operating Modes “Full Off”.
 When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS function-
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes (if
ality of ESC (except for the limited slip feature
ESC system may have multiple operating modes. equipped).
described in the TCS section) has been
ESC On disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode,
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system the engine power reduction feature of TCS is
will be in this mode. This mode should be used for disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
most driving conditions. Alternate ESC modes offered by the ESC system is reduced.
should only be used for specific reasons as noted  Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
in the following paragraphs. the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
316 SAFETY
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been  The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
WARNING! driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
 In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
reduction and stability features are disabled. as soon as possible to have the problem following the maneuver that caused the ESC
Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered diagnosed and corrected. activation.
by the ESC system is unavailable. In an emer- The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
gency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
not engage to assist in maintaining stability. HDC is intended for low speed off-road driving
the ESC system becomes active. The ESC
ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for while in 4WD Low. HDC maintains vehicle speed
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes
off-highway or off-road use only. while descending hills during various driving
when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/
situations. HDC controls vehicle speed by actively
 The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during
controlling the brakes.
prevent the natural laws of physics from acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your HDC Has Three States:
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road condi- speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions. 1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
tions. ESC cannot prevent all accidents, The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates activate).
including those resulting from excessive that the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) 2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
speed in turns, driving on very slippery is in a reduced mode. activation conditions are not met, or driver is
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot actively overriding with brake or throttle
prevent collisions. NOTE: application).
 The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light 3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on controlling vehicle speed).
And ESC OFF Indicator Light momentarily each time the ignition is placed in
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator the ON/RUN mode.
Light in the instrument cluster will come  Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/ mode, the ESC system will be on even if it was
RUN mode. It should go out with the turned off previously.
engine running. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light comes on continuously with the
engine running, a malfunction has been detected
in the ESC system. If this light remains on after
SAFETY 317
Enabling HDC  6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h) Disabling HDC

HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the  7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h) HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the
following conditions must also be met to enable  8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h) following conditions occur:
HDC:  The driver pushes the HDC switch.
 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
 The driveline is in 4WD Low.  The driveline is shifted out of the 4WD Low.
NOTE:
 The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).  The parking brake is applied.
During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC
 The parking brake is released. target speed selection, but will not affect the gear  The driver door opens.
 The driver door is closed. chosen by the transmission. When actively
 The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
controlling HDC the transmission will shift appro-
Activating HDC priately for the driver-selected set speed and corre- (32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically sponding driving conditions.  The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
if driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The Driver Override (64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately).
set speed for HDC is selectable by the driver, and  HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
can be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. The The driver may override HDC activation with
throttle or brake application at any time. Feedback To The Driver
following summarizes the HDC set speeds: 6
HDC Target Set Speeds Deactivating HDC The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any HDC switch has an LED icon, which offers feedback
 P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will to the driver about the state HDC is in.
not activate. of the following conditions occur:
 The driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle  The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate
 R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h) and remain on solid when HDC is enabled or
or brake application.
 N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h) activated. This is the normal operating condition
 The vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) for HDC.
 D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h) but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)  The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
 The vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient several seconds, then extinguish when the
 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h) magnitude, is on level ground, or is on an uphill driver pushes the HDC switch but enable condi-
 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h) grade. tions are not met.
 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)  The vehicle is shifted to PARK.
 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)

318 SAFETY
 The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for  The parking brake must be off. Disabling And Enabling HSA
several seconds, then extinguish when HDC  The driver door must be closed. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
disables due to excess speed.
 The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade. change the current setting, proceed as follows:
 The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when
 The gear selection must match vehicle uphill If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings
HDC deactivates due to overheated brakes. The Ú page 234.
flashing will stop and HDC will activate again direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward
once the brakes have cooled sufficiently. gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear). Towing With HSA
 HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
WARNING! gears. The system will not activate if the trans- back while towing a trailer.
mission is in PARK or NEUTRAL.
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when descending hills. WARNING!
WARNING!
The driver must remain attentive to the driving  If you use a trailer brake controller with your
conditions and is responsible for maintaining a There may be situations where the Hill Start trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
safe vehicle speed. Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a may not be enough brake pressure to hold
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when
Hill Start Assist (HSA) not a substitute for active driving involvement. It the brake pedal is released. In order to avoid
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a is always the driver’s responsibility to be rolling down an incline while resuming accel-
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, eration, manually activate the trailer brake or
releases the brake while stopped on an incline, and objects, and most importantly brake apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to
HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle releasing the brake pedal.
short period. If the driver does not apply the under all road conditions. Your complete
throttle before this time expires, the system will attention is always required while driving to  HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle.
down the hill as normal. follow these warnings can result in a collision or Also, be certain to place the transmission in
serious personal injury. PARK.
The following conditions must be met in order for
HSA to activate:  Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
 The feature must be enabled.
collision or serious personal injury.
 The vehicle must be stopped.

SAFETY 319
Rain Brake Support (RBS) spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque
to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
RBS may improve braking performance in wet
may remain enabled even if TCS and Electronic BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount
Stability Control (ESC) are in reduced modes.
of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on I F E QUIPPED
the front brake rotors. It functions when the Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
windshield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When Rain BSM uses two radar sensors, located inside the
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
Brake Support is active, there is no notification to taillights, to detect highway licensable vehicles
excessively swaying trailer and will take the
the driver and no driver interaction is required. (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.
the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of
Ready Alert Braking (RAB) NOTE: the vehicle.
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always
braking during emergency braking situations. It use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
anticipates when an emergency braking situation trailer tongue weight recommendations
may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is Ú page 212.
released by the driver. The Electronic Brake When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Control system will prepare the brake system for a Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine 6
panic stop. power may be reduced and you may feel the
Traction Control System (TCS) brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is Off” or “Full Off” modes.
detected, the TCS may apply brake pressure to the
Rear Detection Zones
spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce engine power to WARNING!
provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light
feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD) If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle will momentarily illuminate in both outside
functions similarly to a limited slip differential and down, stop at the nearest safe location, and rearview mirrors to let the driver know that the
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway. system is operational. The BSM system sensors
wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear
other, the system will apply the brake of the and enters standby mode when the vehicle is in
PARK.
320 SAFETY
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one The system will automatically recover and resume If the blockage message is still present after
lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft function when the condition clears. To minimize cycling the ignition and driving in traffic, check
(3.8 m). The zone length starts at the outside system blockage, do not block the area of the rear again for a blockage.
rearview mirror and extends approximately 10 ft fascia/bumper where the radar sensors are The system may also detect a blockage if the
(3 m) beyond the rear fascia/bumper of the located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, vehicle is operated in areas with extremely low
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection bicycle racks, etc.) and keep it clear of road radar returns such as a desert or parallel to a large
zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle contaminations. elevation drop.
speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or
higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
areas. detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning
light located in the outside mirrors, in addition to
NOTE: sounding an audible (chime) alert and reducing the
 The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver radio volume Ú page 322.
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
 BSM may experience dropouts (blinking on and
off) of the side mirror warning indicator lamps
when a motorcycle or any small object remains
at the side of the vehicle for extended periods of Radar Sensor Locations
time (more than a couple of seconds).
If the system detects degraded performance due
The BSM system can become blocked if snow, ice,
to contamination or foreign objects, a message will
mud, or other road contaminations accumulate on
warn you of a blocked sensor and the warning
the rear fascia/bumper where the radar sensors
indicators in side view mirrors will be on. The
are located. The system may also detect blockage
warning indicators will remain illuminated until Warning Light Location
if the vehicle is operated in areas with extremely
blockage clearing conditions are met. First clear
low radar returns such as a desert or parallel to a
the taillights around the sensors of the blockage.
large elevation drop. If blockage is detected, a
After removing the blockage, the following
“Blind Spot Temporarily Unavailable, Wipe Rear
procedure can be used to reset the system:
Corners” message will display in the cluster, both
mirror lights will illuminate, and BSM and RCP Cycle the ignition from ON to OFF and then back
alerts will not occur. This is normal operation. ON.
SAFETY 321
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from Entering From The Rear
three different entry points (side, rear, front) while Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on
driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM either side and enter the rear detection zone with
system will issue an alert during these types of a relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from
either side of the vehicle.
Overtaking/Approaching
Rear Monitoring 6
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
speed less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle
Side Monitoring
remains in the blind spot for approximately 1.5
seconds, the warning light will be illuminated. If the
difference in speed between the two vehicles is Overtaking/Passing
greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning light
will not illuminate. The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert
on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts,
walls, foliage, berms, snow banks, car washes, etc.
However, occasionally the system may alert on
such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
322 SAFETY
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that Rear Cross Path (RCP) NOTE:
are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out
in adjacent lanes Ú page 480. blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the
of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming
vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and sensors are blocked by other structures or
cautiously out of the parking space until the rear vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the
end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will driver.
then have a clear view of the cross traffic, and if an
WARNING!
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a backup
aid system. It is intended to be used to help a
driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking
lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you,
Opposing Traffic and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
For information on how Blind Spot Monitoring other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
functions when pulling a trailer Ú page 323. before backing up. Failure to do so can result in
WARNING!
RCP Detection Zones Blind Spot Modes
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid
to help detect objects in the blind spot zones. RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both Blind Spot has three selectable modes of
The BSM system is not designed to detect sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving operation that are available in the Uconnect
pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum system.
vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to objects
check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph
shoulder, and use your turn signal before (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE (R),
serious injury or death. the driver is alerted using both the visual and
audible alarms, including reducing the radio
volume.
SAFETY 323
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only When the system is in RCP, the system shall Trailer Merge Assist consists of three sub
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM respond with both visual and audible alerts when a functions:
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate detected object is present. Whenever an audible  Automatic Trailer Detection
side view mirror based on a detected object. alert is requested, the radio is also muted.
Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state  Trailer Length Detection
However, when the system is operating in Rear
Cross Path (RCP) mode, the system will respond always requests the chime.  Trailer Merge Warning
with both visual and audible alerts when a Blind Spot Alert Off
detected object is present. Whenever an audible When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
alert is requested, the radio is muted. visual or audible alerts from either the BSM, RCP,
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime or Trailer Merge Assist systems.
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime NOTE:
mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in The BSM system will store the current operating
the appropriate side view mirror based on a mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the
detected object. If the turn signal is then activated, vehicle is started the previously stored mode will
and it corresponds to an alert present on that side be recalled and used.
of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be
6
Trailer Merge Assist — If Equipped
sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected Blind Spot Zones With Trailer Merge Assist
object are present on the same side at the same Trailer Merge Assist is a function of the Blind Spot
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be Monitoring (BSM) system that extends the blind 1 — Vehicle
issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio (if spot zone to work while pulling a trailer. 2 — Trailer
on) will also be muted. NOTE:
NOTE: When Trailer Merge Assist is activated, Rear Cross
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the Path is disabled.
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
324 SAFETY
Automatic Trailer Detection Trailer Length Detection NOTE:

There are two modes of operation for the detection Once the trailer presence has been established, The ability to detect a trailer may be degraded in
of the trailer length: the trailer length will be established (by making a crowded or busy environments. Busy parking lots,
90 degree turn) and then the trailer length narrow areas surrounded with trees, or any other
 Automatic Mode — When “Auto Mode” is
category (example 10-20 ft (3 m to 6 m)) will be crowded area may prevent the radar sensors from
selected, the system will use the blind spot being able to adequately detect the trailer. The
sensors to automatically determine the pres- displayed. This can take up to 30 seconds after
completing the turn. system will try to detect a trailer at every ignition
ence and length of a trailer. The presence of a cycle or 90 seconds of standstill.
trailer will be detected using the blind spot radar NOTE:
within 90 seconds of forward movement of the During the same ignition cycle, if the vehicle is at a
vehicle. The vehicle must be moving above standstill for a minimum of 90 seconds, a new
6 mph (10 km/h) to activate the feature. Once “trailer detection request” is enabled by the
the trailer has been detected, the system will system once the vehicle resumes motion.
default to the maximum blind spot zone until the The maximum trailer length supported by the
length has been verified. You will see “Auto” in Trailer Merge Assist feature is 39.5 ft (12 m).
the instrument panel cluster . Trailer length is considered the forward most
portion of the trailer hitch to the rearward most
 Maximum Mode — When “Max Mode” is portion of the body, fascia/bumper, or ramp of the
selected, the system will default to the trailer.
maximum blind spot zone regardless of what
The maximum width supported by the Trailer Trailer Length Detection
size trailer is attached . Merge Assist feature is 8.5 ft (2.59 m). Trailer
width is measured at the widest portion of the 1 — Trailer Length
NOTE: 2 — Trailer Hitch
Selected setting is stored when the ignition is trailer and may include wheels, tires, finders, or
rails. 3 — Trailer Width
placed in the OFF position. To change this setting,
it must be selected through the Uconnect Settings NOTE:
Ú page 234. Fifth wheel or gooseneck trailers are not supported
by Trailer Merge Assist.
SAFETY 325
Trailer length will be identified and placed into one the outside mirror on the side the other vehicle is FORWARD C OLLISION WARNING (FCW)
of the following categories: detected on. In addition, an audible (chime) alert
will be heard and radio volume will be reduced WITH MITIGATION — I F EQUIPPED
 Trailer length up to 10 ft (3 m) — Blind spot zone
Ú page 322. FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with
will be adjusted to 10 ft (3 m) . audible warnings, visual warnings (within the
NOTE:
 Trailer length between 10 ft to 20 ft (3 m to instrument cluster display), and may apply a brake
 The Trailer Merge Alert system DOES NOT alert
6 m) — Blind spot zone will be adjusted to 20 ft jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential
the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles
frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking
(6 m) . that are outside the detection zones.
are intended to provide the driver with enough time
 Trailer length between 20 ft to 30 ft (6 m to  The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
9 m) — Blind spot zone will be adjusted to 30 ft experience drop outs (blinking on and off) of the
side mirror warning indicator lamps when a NOTE:
(9 m) . motorcycle or any small object remains at the FCW monitors the information from the forward
side of the vehicle for extended periods of time looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake
 Trailer length between 30 ft and 39.5 ft (9 m to
(more than a couple of seconds). Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a
12 m) — Blind spot zone will be adjusted to Max
forward collision. When the system determines
distance .
 Crowded areas such as parking lots, neighbor- that a forward collision is probable, the driver will 6
hoods, etc. may lead to an increased amount of be provided with audible and visual warnings as
NOTE: false alerts. This is normal operation. well as a possible brake jerk warning.
Trailer length is determined within +/- 3 ft (1 m) of
actual length. Trailers that are the same size as the WARNING! If the driver does not take action based upon these
category limit, 10/20/30 ft (3/6/9 m), could be progressive warnings, then the system will provide
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid a limited level of active braking to help slow the
subject to being placed in the category above or
to help detect objects in the blind spot zones. vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision.
below the correct one.
The BSM system is not designed to detect If the driver reacts to the warnings by braking and
Trailer Merge Warning pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your the system determines that the driver intends to
Trailer Merge Warning is the extension of the blind vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always avoid the collision by braking but has not applied
spot function to cover the length of the trailer, plus check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your sufficient brake force, the system will compensate
a safety margin, to warn the driver when there is a shoulder, and use your turn signal before and provide additional brake force as required.
vehicle in the adjacent lane. The driver is alerted by changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
the illumination of the BSM warning light located in serious injury or death.
326 SAFETY
If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed NOTE:

below 32 mph (52 km/h), the system may provide WARNING!
 The minimum speed for FCW activation is
the maximum braking possible to mitigate the 3 mph (5 km/h). Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended
potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW
 The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle detect every type of potential collision. The driver
completely, the system will hold the vehicle at other than vehicles such as guardrails or sign
has the responsibility to avoid a collision by
standstill for two seconds and then release the posts based on the course prediction. This is
controlling the vehicle via braking and steering.
brakes. expected and is a part of normal FCW activation
Failure to follow this warning could lead to
and functionality.
 It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent
such misuse of the system, after four Active
Braking events within a key cycle, the Active Turning FCW On Or Off
Braking portion of FCW will be deactivated until The FCW button is located in the Uconnect display
the next key cycle. in the control settings Ú page 234.
 The FCW system is intended for on-road use  To turn the FCW system on, press the forward
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW collision button once.
system should be deactivated to prevent unnec-  To turn the FCW system off, press the forward
essary warnings to the surroundings. collision button once.
 FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
FCW Message NOTE:
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects
not in the path of the vehicle, stationary objects  When the FCW is “on”, this allows the system to
When the system determines a collision with the
that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the
vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed. vehicle in front.
warning message will be deactivated Ú page 480.
 When the FCW is “off”, this prevents the system
 FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavail-
able screens. from warning the driver of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front. If the FCW is set to “off”,
“FCW OFF” will be displayed in the instrument
cluster display.
SAFETY 327
 When FCW status is set to “Only Warning”, this  Medium FCW Limited Warning
prevents the system from providing limited  When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW
active braking, or additional brake support if the “Medium” setting and the system status is Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited
driver is not braking adequately in the event of “Only Warning”, this allows the system to Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
a potential frontal collision. warn the driver of a possible collision with momentarily, there may be a condition that limits
 When FCW status is set to “Warning and the vehicle in front using audible/visual FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
Braking”, this allows the system to warn the warnings. driveable under normal conditions, the active
driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in  Near braking may not be fully available. Once the
front using audible/visual warnings and it condition that limited the system performance is
applies autonomous braking.  When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
no longer present, the system will return to its full
“Near” setting and the system status is
 The FCW system state is defaulted to “Full On” performance state. If the problem persists, see an
“Only Warning”, this allows the system to
from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system authorized dealer.
warn the driver of a possible closer collision
is turned off, it will reset to “Full On” when the with the vehicle in front using audible/ Service FCW Warning
vehicle is restarted. visual warnings. If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity  This setting provides less reaction time than displays: 6
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are the “Far” and “Medium” settings, which  ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
programmable through the Uconnect system allows for a more dynamic driving experi-
 Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
Ú page 234. ence.
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
 Far  More dynamic or aggressive drivers that
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
want to avoid frequent warnings may prefer
 When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the conditions, have the system checked by an
this setting.
“Far” setting and the system status is “Only authorized dealer.
Warning”, this allows the system to warn the
driver of a possible more distant collision
Pedestrian Emergency Braking
with the vehicle in front using audible/ (PEB) — If Equipped
visual warnings. PEB is a subsystem of the FCW system that
 More cautious drivers that do not mind provides the driver with audible and visual
frequent warnings may prefer this setting. warnings in the instrument cluster display, and
may apply automatic braking when it detects a
potential frontal collision with a pedestrian.
328 SAFETY
If a PEB event begins at a speed below 37 mph Turning PEB On Or Off NOTE:
(60 km/h), the system may provide braking to NOTE: The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the
mitigate the potential collision with a pedestrian. If The default status of PEB is “On.” This allows the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
the PEB event stops the vehicle completely, the system to warn you of a possible frontal collision tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active
system will hold the vehicle at a standstill for two with the pedestrian. road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster will
seconds and then release the brakes. When the display a graphic showing the pressure values of
system determines a collision with the pedestrian The PEB button is located in the Uconnect display
each tire with the low tire pressure values in a
in front of you is no longer probable, the warning in the controls settings Ú page 234.
different color, or the Uconnect radio will display a
message will be deactivated. To turn the PEB system off, push the Pedestrian TPMS message; when this occurs you must
The minimum speed for PEB activation is 3 mph Emergency Braking button once. increase the tire pressure to the recommended
(5 km/h). To turn the PEB system back on, push the cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS
Pedestrian Emergency Braking button again. Warning Light to turn off.
WARNING! Changing the PEB status to “Off” deactivates the The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
system, so no warning or active braking will be about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is not
available in case of a possible frontal collision with means that when the outside temperature
intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can
the pedestrian. decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
PEB detect every type of potential collision with
pressure should always be set based on cold
a pedestrian. The driver has the responsibility to NOTE: inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via The PEB system will retain the last setting selected pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for
braking and steering. Failure to follow this by the driver after ignition shut down. at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
(TPMS) inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle
based on the vehicle recommended cold placard is driven — this is normal and there should be no
pressure. adjustment for this increased pressure.
See Ú page 444 on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires.
SAFETY 329
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn
if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure on the TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle CAUTION!
warning limit for any reason, including low may cause the tire pressure to rise to  After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
temperature effects and natural pressure loss approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the TPMS always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
through the tire Ú page 480. Warning Light will still be on. In this situation, the prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after the tires valve stem, which could damage the TPMS
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold sensor.
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above placard pressure value.
the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the NOTE:
low TPMS Warning Light illuminates, increase the CAUTION!
 The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire
tire pressure to the recommended cold placard  The TPMS has been optimized for the original care and maintenance or to provide warning of
pressure in order for the TPMS Warning Light to equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures a tire failure or condition.
turn off. The system will automatically update and and warning have been established for the tire
the TPMS Warning Light will turn off once the size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable  The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
system receives the updated tire pressures. The system operation or sensor damage may gauge while adjusting your tire pressure, unless
your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Fill Alert
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes result when using replacement equipment 6
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. (TFA) system.
receive this information. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor  Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
NOTE: damage. causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel effi-
 Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
sensor to become inoperable. After using an
order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off. aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended
For example, your vehicle may have a that you take your vehicle to an authorized
recommended cold (parked for more than three dealership to have your sensor function
hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the checked.
ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the (Continued)
measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the
tire pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa).
330 SAFETY
 The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire NOTE:

maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility It is particularly important for you to check the tire
to maintain correct tire pressure using an accu- pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
rate tire pressure gauge, even if underinflation and to maintain the proper pressure.
has not reached the level to trigger illumination The TPMS consists of the following components:
of the TPMS Warning Light.
 Receiver module
 Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
 Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors
pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual
tire pressure in the tire.  Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
messages, which display in the instrument
cluster Low Tire Pressure Display
 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure
Pressure Warnings condition (those in a different color in the
instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System
recommended cold placard pressure inflation
(TPMS) Warning Light will illuminate in
value as shown in the "Inflate to XX" message.
the instrument cluster and a chime will
Once the system receives the updated tire
sound when tire pressure is low in one or
pressures, the system will automatically update,
more of the four active road tires. In addition, the
the graphic display in the instrument cluster will
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display instrument cluster will display a graphic showing
return to its original color, and the Tire Pressure
the pressure values of each tire with the low tire
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses Monitoring System Warning Light will turn off. The
pressure values in a different color. An "Inflate to
wireless technology with wheel rim mounted vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
XX" message will also be displayed.
electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the receive this information.
valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the
receiver module.
SAFETY 331
NOTE:  Installing aftermarket window tinting that Vehicles With Non-Matching Full Size Spare Or
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need contains materials that may block radio wave Compact Spare
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) signals  The non-matching full size spare or compact
above the recommended cold placard pressure in  Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor. There-
order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring System or wheel housings fore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in
Warning Light off. the non-matching full size spare or compact
 Using tire chains on the vehicle
Service TPMS Warning spare tire.
 Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
If a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure sensors  If you install the non-matching full size spare or
Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light will flash compact spare tire in place of a road tire that
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on A system fault may occur due to an incorrect TPMS has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In sensor location condition. When a system fault limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the Tire
addition, the instrument cluster will display a occurs due to an incorrect TPMS sensor location, Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning
"SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Light and a “LOW TIRE” message will remain on
of five seconds and then display dashes (--) in Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic
place of the pressure value to indicate which and then remain on solid. The system fault will also in the instrument cluster will still display a pres-
sensor is not being received. sound a chime. In addition, the instrument cluster sure value in a different color and an “Inflate to 6
will display a Tire Pressure Temporarily Unavailable XX” message.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will message in place of the tire pressure display
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the screen. If the ignition switch is cycled, this  After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
system fault no longer exists, the Tire Pressure sequence will repeat, providing the system fault above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will no longer still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light will
flash, and the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message “Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light” flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
will no longer display, and a pressure value will will no longer flash and the tire pressure display on solid. In addition, the instrument cluster will
display in place of the dashes. A system fault can screen will be displayed showing the tire pressure display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a
occur due to any of the following: values the correct locations. minimum of five seconds and then display
 Signal interference due to electronic devices or
dashes (--) in place of the pressure value.
driving next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System sensors
332 SAFETY
 For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a NOTE: Operation:

chime will sound, the Tire Pressure Monitoring  Only one tire can be filled at a time when using  The horn will sound once to let the user know
System (TPMS) Warning Light will flash on and the Tire Fill Alert system. when to stop filling the tire, when it reaches
off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, recommended pressure.
 The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if an
and the instrument cluster will display a
"SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a existing TPMS fault is set to “active” or if the  The horn will sound three times if the tire is over-
minimum of five seconds and then display system is in deactivation mode (if equipped). filled and will continue to sound every five
dashes (--) in place of the pressure value. The system will be activated when a positive seconds if the user continues to inflate the tire.
increase in tire pressure is detected by the TPMS  The horn will sound once again when enough air
 Once you repair or replace the original road tire
while inflating the tire. The ignition must be in the is let out to reach proper inflation level.
and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the
RUN mode, with the transmission in PARK.  The horn will also sound three times if the tire is
non-matching full size spare or compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, NOTE: then underinflated and will continue to sound
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) It is not required to have the engine running to every five seconds if the user continues to
Warning Light will turn off and the graphic in the enter Tire Fill Alert mode. deflate the tire.
instrument cluster will display a new pressure The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System
value instead of dashes (--), as long as no tire vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode.
pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit (TTPMS) — If Equipped
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire
in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle The Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System
pressure display screen will be displayed in the
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes (TTPMS) is a feature that displays the trailer tire
instrument cluster.
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS pressure values and warns the driver of a low tire
to receive this information. If the hazard lamps do not come on while inflating pressure event based on the driver’s set target tire
the tire, the TPMS sensor may be out of range pressure value, through TTPMS settings found in
Tire Fill Alert preventing the TPMS sensor signal from being the radio.
This feature notifies the user when the placard tire received. In this case, the vehicle may need to be
The TTPMS monitors the pressure of each tire and
pressure is attained while inflating or deflating the moved either forward or backward slightly to exit
warns the driver through the instrument cluster,
tire. the null spot.
when either a low tire pressure condition falls
You may choose to disable or enable the Tire Fill below 25% of the driver’s set pressure or if a
Alert feature through use of the Uconnect Settings system malfunction occurs. The instrument cluster
in the radio. will display the actual tire pressure or dashes for
each of the trailer tires in the correct trailer
position, based on trailer configuration.
SAFETY 333
The TTPMS can support up to 12 trailer tires per NOTE: Follow the on screen prompts to select the number
configured trailer on up to four configurable trailers The vehicle may not be driven until the pairing of axles (1 - 3), the number of trailer tires (2, 4, 6,
Ú page 234. process is complete. 8, or 12), and the set trailer tire pressure. The
range is selectable anywhere between 25-125 psi
(172-862 kPa).
Once psi (kPa) is programmed, the pairing screen
appears. Tire sensors must be paired in order
shown. Starting with Tire 1, deflate tire by 5 psi (34
kPa) and wait for a horn chirp. It may take up to
three minutes for the chirp to occur, indicating that
the sensor has paired. Repeat process on each
tire, in order, until complete. Do not exit the pairing
screen until process is complete. If pairing was
unsuccessful, a double horn chirp will sound, and
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System a prompt on the touchscreen will allow you to retry
Trailer Tire Pressure Sensor Pairing
the procedure; “Retry” will only appear when setup 6
Trailer Tire Pressure Settings fails. Each tire must be successfully paired during
In order use this feature, the provided tire pressure a single pairing process to receive the success
sensors must be installed in the desired trailer screen.
tires and the sensors must be paired to the truck.
If the target trailer requires more than the provided NOTE:
four sensors, additional sensors can be purchased If the pairing process times out after three minutes
at an authorized Ram dealership. of no communication with a sensor, a double horn
chip will occur indicating the pairing has failed and
With the sensors installed and the trailer near or a message will display on the radio indicating the
connected to your Ram truck, initiate the pairing process was unsuccessful. Under certain circum-
process by entering the settings menu in the radio stances, the double horn chirp may continue to
and selecting trailer. Select the desired trailer happen every three minutes indicating the failed
profile to pair to, open the “Tire Pressure” menu, pairing. If this happens, the horn chirping may be
and hit “Setup All Tires” Ú page 234. canceled by cycling the ignition button OFF and
then back to RUN position.
Trailer Tire Pressure Pairing
334 SAFETY
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low Pressure

Warnings
Once the system fault is corrected the "Trailer Tire
Pressure System Service Required" message will
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
When a tire pressure low in one or more of the no longer be displayed. The vehicle may need to be Some of the most important safety features in your
active road tires is detected, the instrument cluster driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph vehicle are the restraint systems:
(24 km/h) in order for the TTPMS to receive the
will display a message stating “Trailer Tire
trailer tire pressure information.
OCCUPANT R ESTRAINT S YSTEMS
Pressure Low”. The instrument cluster will then
display the TTPMS graphic showing the pressure Trailer Tire Pressure System Not Configured FEATURES
values of each tire with the low tire pressure values A “Trailer Tire Pressure System Not Configured”  Seat Belt Systems
in a different color. message will be displayed in the instrument  Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as cluster on the TTPMS instrument cluster graphic
 Child Restraints
possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure when a trailer number is selected that has not had
condition (those in a different color in the trailer tire pressure sensors paired. To correct this Some of the safety features described in this
instrument cluster graphic) to the customer condition, see Ú page 234. section may be standard equipment on some
programmed target tire pressure value as shown models, or may be optional equipment on others. If
Trailer Sensors Detected Do Not Match Active
at the top of the TTPMS instrument cluster graphic. you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
Trailer
Once the tire(s) are inflated, the system will
automatically update the graphic display in the The “Trailer Sensors Detected Do Not Match Active I MPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
instrument cluster, returning to its original color. Trailer” message will be displayed in the Please pay close attention to the information in
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to instrument cluster when the trailer sensors being this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for received by the TTPMS module do not match the system properly, to keep you and your passengers
the TTPMS to receive the updated information. trailer sensors paired to the current trailer number as safe as possible.
selected. This message will be displayed when the
Service TTPMS Warning sensors being received completely match the
If a system fault is detected, the instrument cluster sensors paired to another trailer number
will display a “Trailer Tire Pressure System Service configured in the TTPMS module.
Required” message for a minimum of five seconds. To correct this condition, the correct trailer number
must be selected in the radio Ú page 234.
SAFETY 335
Here are some simple steps you can take to 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your SEAT BELT S YSTEMS
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag: vehicle has side air bags, and deployment
occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver,
1. Children 12 years old and under should
into the space between occupants and the even on short trips. Someone on the road may be
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
door and occupants could be injured. a poor driver and could cause a collision that
vehicle with a rear seat.
includes you. This can happen far away from home
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
or on your own street.
vehicle seat belt properly must be secured in modified to accommodate a disabled person,
see Ú page 477 for customer service contact Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and
the appropriate child restraint or
information. they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a
belt-positioning booster seat in a rear seating
collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when
position Ú page 354.
people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a WARNING! reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
front passenger seat, move the seat as far front of an air bag. A deploying passenger Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all
back as possible and use the proper child front air bag can cause death or serious injury times.
restraint Ú page 354. to a child 12 years or younger, including a Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System 6
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt child in a rear-facing child restraint.
(BeltAlert)
behind them or under their arm.
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
5. You should read the instructions provided with front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
your child restraint to make sure that you are child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind
using it properly. does not have a rear seat, do not transport a the driver and outboard front seat
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle. passenger (if equipped with outboard
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle
shoulder belts properly.
their seat belts. The BeltAlert feature is active
7. The driver and front passenger seats should whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/
be moved back as far as practical to allow the RUN position.
front air bags room to inflate.
336 SAFETY
Initial Indication Change Of Status Lap/Shoulder Belts

If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped
is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime equipped with outboard front passenger seat with lap/shoulder belts.
will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely
unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not with you under normal conditions. However, in a
START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder active when the outboard front passenger seat is collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown
front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front animal or other items are placed on the outboard out of the vehicle.
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be WARNING!
BeltAlert Warning Sequence restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
 Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
speed range and the driver or outboard front seat BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t
passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front recommend deactivating BeltAlert. though you have air bags.
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the NOTE:
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The  In a collision, you and your passengers can
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or suffer much greater injuries if you are not
BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be
on and remain on until the driver and outboard sure you and others in your vehicle are
Light will remain on until the seat belts are front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may buckled up properly.
repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and (Continued)
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
SAFETY 337
WARNING! WARNING! WARNING!

 It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside  A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk  A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri- won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
ously injured or killed. but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
part of your seat belt as low as possible and worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
 Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
keep it snug. ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
seat belts.  A twisted seat belt may not protect you prop-
your strongest bones will take the force in a
erly. In a collision, it could even cut into you.
 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat collision.
Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body,
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat  A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
including the driver, should always wear their
belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized protect you from injury during a collision. You
seat belts whether or not an air bag is also
dealer immediately and have it fixed. are more likely to hit your head in a collision if
provided at their seating position to minimize
you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap
the risk of severe injury or death in the event  A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
and shoulder belt are meant to be used 6
of a crash. buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
together.
portion could ride too high on your body,
 Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
possibly causing internal injuries. Always  A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest collision and leave you with no protection.
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
you. Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and  A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
to keep your passengers safe, too. properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat
far forward, increasing the possibility of injury.
 Two people should never be belted into a belt system. If your vehicle is involved in a
Wear your seat belt snugly.
single seat belt. People belted together can collision, or if you have questions regarding
crash into one another in a collision, hurting (Continued) seat belt or retractor conditions, take your
one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or autho-
belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no rized FCA Certified Collision Care Program
matter what their size. facility for inspection.
338 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
and adjust the seat.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of shoulder belt.
the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat).
on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically
Grab the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow
necessary to allow the seat belt to go around
the seat belt to retract fully.
your lap.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen. To Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on lap/shoulder belt.
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap the anchor point.
belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding 2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
under the seat belt in a collision. the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert slot at the top of the latch plate.
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
“click.” clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is
no longer twisted.
Positioning The Lap Belt

SAFETY 339
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage NOTE: Seat Belt Extender

In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even
the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature when the webbing is fully extended and the
upward or downward to position the seat belt away allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage in the upward position without pushing or equipped) is in its lowest position, an authorized
button to release the anchorage, and move it up or squeezing the release button. To verify the dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender.
down to the position that serves you best. shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the
on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
into position. Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different
occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
 Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make WARNING!
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
 ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
required in order to properly fit the original
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
Extender if, when worn, the distance between 6
to keep your passengers safe, too.
the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender
 Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder buckle and the center of the occupant’s body
Adjustable Anchorage and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is LESS than 6 inches.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
 Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
can increase the risk of serious injury or death
position, and if you are taller than average, you will shoulder belt.
in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher  Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce when the lap belt is not long enough and only
position. After you release the anchorage button, the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. use in the recommended seating positions.
try to move it up or down to make sure that it is Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender
locked in position.  Always make all seat belt height adjustments
when not needed.
when the vehicle is stationary.
340 SAFETY
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the
pretensioners are single use items. A deployed Automatic Locking Retractor — (ALR) Locations (All
pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be Models)
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women replaced immediately. If the passenger seating position is equipped with
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including Energy Management Feature an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of The front outboard seat belt system is equipped pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
an accident is reduced for the mother and the with an Energy Management feature that may help comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt. further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR
Position the lap belt snug and low below the collision. The seat belt system has a retractor is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips. assembly that is designed to release webbing in a seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract
Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away controlled manner. completely in this case and then carefully pull out
from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt only the amount of webbing necessary to
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
behind the back or under the arm.
(ALR) mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
Seat Belt Pretensioner until you hear a "click."
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
with pretensioning devices that are designed to Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a restraint system Ú page 363. The figure below
collision. These devices may improve the illustrates the locking feature for each seating
position.
SAFETY 341
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT S YSTEMS
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic (SRS)
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child Locking Mode. Some of the safety features described in this
restraint is installed in a seating position that has section may be standard equipment on some
a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode models, or may be optional equipment on others. If
and under should always be properly restrained in Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. allow it to retract completely to disengage the The air bag system must be ready to protect you in
Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
WARNING! sensitive (emergency) locking mode. (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in interconnecting wiring associated with the
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger WARNING! electrical Air Bag System Components. Your
front air bag can cause death or serious injury  The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
to a child 12 years or younger, including a switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) System Components:
child in a rear-facing child restraint. feature or any other seat belt function is not Air Bag System Components
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the working properly when checked according to 6
the procedures in the Service Manual.  Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle  Failure to replace the seat belt assembly  Air Bag Warning Light
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a could increase the risk of injury in collisions.  Steering Wheel and Column
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
 Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to  Instrument Panel
restrain occupants who are wearing the seat  Knee Impact Bolsters
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode belt or children who are using booster seats.
 Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder The locked mode is only used to install
belt. rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints  Seat Belt Buckle Switch
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward that have a harness for restraining the child.
until the entire seat belt is extracted.
342 SAFETY
 Supplemental Side Air Bags The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning WARNING!
 Front and Side Impact Sensors
Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
 Seat Belt Pretensioners the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the instrument panel could mean you won’t have the
 Seat Track Position Sensors nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the
 Occupant Classification System is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the light does not come on as a bulb check when the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start
Air Bag Warning Light service the air bag system immediately. the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)  The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on an authorized dealer service the air bag system
monitors the readiness of the electronic during the four to eight seconds when the igni- immediately.
parts of the air bag system whenever the tion switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position  The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on four to eight-second interval. If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
and the air bags will not inflate.  The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit- detected, which could affect the
The ORC contains a backup power supply system tently or remains on while driving. Supplemental Restraint System (SRS),
that may deploy the air bag system even if the NOTE: the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
battery loses power or it becomes disconnected If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine illuminate on the instrument panel. The
prior to deployment. related gauges are not working, the Occupant Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
instrument panel for approximately four to eight this condition the air bags may not be ready to
inflate for your protection. Have an authorized Warning Light has come on and a fault has been
seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
first in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, dealer service the air bag system immediately.
comes on intermittently or remains on while driving
the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it immediately Ú page 128.
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
initial startup.
SAFETY 343
Front Air Bags The first stage inflator is triggered immediately

WARNING! during an impact that requires air bag deployment.
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
 Being too close to the steering wheel or instru- A low energy output is used in less severe
belts for both the driver and front passenger. The
ment panel during front air bag deployment collisions. A higher energy output is used for more
front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
could cause serious injury, including death. Air severe collisions.
restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfort- This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or
passenger front air bag is mounted in the ably extending your arms to reach the steering front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. wheel or instrument panel. detects whether the driver or front passenger seat
The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may
embossed on the air bag covers. front of an air bag. A deploying passenger adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air
front air bag can cause death or serious injury Bags.
to a child 12 years or younger, including a This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
child in a rear-facing child restraint. front passenger seat track position sensors that
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
Air Bags based upon seat position.
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
This vehicle is equipped with a right front
6
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a passenger Occupant Classification System (“OCS”)
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle. that is designed to provide Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occupant’s
seated weight input, as determined by the OCS.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations Features
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters driver and front passenger air bags. This system
provides output appropriate to the severity and
type of collision as determined by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive
information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
344 SAFETY
Front Air Bag Operation The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
WARNING! passenger side of the instrument panel separate
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
 No objects should be placed over or near the and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front
air bag on the instrument panel or steering their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less
air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of
wheel because any such objects could cause time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air
injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front
harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
enough to cause the air bag to inflate. the driver and front passenger.
including some that may produce substantial
 Do not put anything on or around the air bag vehicle damage — for example, some pole Occupant Classification System
covers or attempt to open them manually. You collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset (OCS) — Front Passenger Seat
may damage the air bags and you could be collisions.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part
injured because the air bags may no longer be On the other hand, depending on the type and of a Federally regulated safety system for this
functional. The protective covers for the air location of impact, front air bags may deploy in vehicle. It is designed to provide Passenger
bag cushions are designed to open only when crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but Advanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to the
the air bags are inflating. that produce a severe initial deceleration. occupant’s seated weight, as determined by the
 Relying on the air bags alone could lead to Because air bag sensors measure vehicle OCS.
more severe injuries in a collision. The air deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you by themselves are not good indicators of whether of the following:
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t or not an air bag should have deployed.
 Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
though you have air bags.  Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
Sensor located in the front passenger seat
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)  Air Bag Warning Light
detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air
bags.
SAFETY 345
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor

The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is located beneath the passenger seat cushion foam.
Any weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input from the Sensor to determine the front passenger’s most probable classification. The
OCM communicates this information to the ORC. The ORC may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deployment based on occupant
classification. In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
if the OCS estimates that:
 The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very light objects on it; or
 The front passenger seat is occupied by a small passenger, including a child; or
 The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing child restraint; or
 The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status Front Passenger Air Bag Output
Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power deployment 6
Child, including a child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat* Reduced-power deployment OR full-power deployment
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment OR reduced-power deployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power deployment
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult, allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deployment. Never allow children to ride in the
front passenger seat and never install a child restraint system, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passenger seat.
346 SAFETY
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
WARNING! important for the front passenger to be seated When a lighter weight passenger, including a small
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in properly and properly wearing the seat belt. adult, occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger Properly seated passengers are: may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury  Sitting upright Advanced Front Air Bag. This does not mean that
to a child 12 years or younger, including a the OCS is working improperly.
 Facing forward
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
 Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the comfortably on or near the floor seated weight on the front passenger seat
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing The front passenger’s seated weight must be
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle  Sitting with their back against the seatback and
the seatback in an upright position properly positioned on the front passenger seat.
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a Failure to do so may result in serious injury or
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle. death. The OCS determines the most probable
 Children 12 years or younger should always classification of the occupant that it detects. The
ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or
with a rear seat. increased seated weight, which may result in an
adjusted inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not mean that
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
the OCS is working improperly. Decreasing the
probable classification. The OCS estimates the
front passenger’s seated weight on the front
seated weight on the front passenger seat and
passenger seat may result in a reduced-power
where that weight is located. The OCS
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air
communicates the classification status to the ORC.
Bag. Increasing the front passenger’s seated
The ORC uses the classification to determine Seated Properly
weight on the front passenger seat may result in a
whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
full-power deployment of the Passenger Advanced
inflation rate should be adjusted.
Front Air Bag.
SAFETY 347
Examples of improper front passenger seating

include:
 The front passenger’s weight is transferred to
another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm
rest or instrument panel).
 The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or
turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
 The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full
upright position.
 The front passenger carries or holds an object Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly
while seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
 Objects are lodged under the front passenger
seat.
 Objects are lodged between the front passenger
seat and center console. 6
 Accessories that may change the seated weight
on the front passenger seat are attached to the
front passenger seat.
 Anything that may decrease or increase the
front passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly
probable classification. If an occupant in the front
passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant
may provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different from the occupant’s properly seated
weight input, for example:
348 SAFETY
The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument  Do not use prior or future model year seat
WARNING! covers or cushions not designated by FCA US
panel will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to
 If a child restraint system, child, small teen- classify the front passenger seat status. A LLC for the specific model being repaired.
ager or adult in the front passenger seat is malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation of Always use the correct seat cover and cushion
seated improperly, the occupant may provide the air bag system. specified for the vehicle.
an output signal to the OCS that is different  Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
from the occupant’s properly seated weight If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come on,
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
input. This may result in serious injury or death or stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes
on as you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized  Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
in a collision.
dealer for service immediately.  At no time should any Supplemental Restraint
 Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, System (SRS) component or SRS related
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS
with the seatback in an upright position, your component or fastener be modified or replaced
components that may affect the Passenger
back against the seatback, sitting upright, with any part except those which are approved
Advanced Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the
facing forward, in the center of the seat, with by FCA US LLC.
OCS to properly classify the seated weight of a
your feet comfortably on or near the floor.
front seat passenger, the OCS components must
 Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., back- function as designed. Do not make any WARNING!
packs, boxes, etc.) while seated in the front modifications to the front passenger seat  Unapproved modifications or service proce-
passenger seat. Holding an object may components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the dures to the passenger seat assembly, its
provide an output signal to the OCS that is seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for any related components, seat cover or cushion
different than the occupant’s properly seated reason, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. may inadvertently change the air bag deploy-
weight input, which may result in serious injury Only FCA US LLC approved seat accessories may ment in case of a frontal collision. This could
or death in a collision. be used. result in death or serious injury to the front
 Placing an object on the floor under the front The following requirements must be strictly passenger if the vehicle is involved in a colli-
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from followed: sion. A modified vehicle may not comply with
working properly, which may result in serious  Do not modify the front passenger seat required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
injury or death in a collision. Do not place any assembly or components in any way. dards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor
objects on the floor under the front passenger Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS).
seat.  If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
for persons with disabilities, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
SAFETY 349
Knee Impact Bolsters Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains

(SABICs)
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees
of the driver and front passenger, and position the This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side
front occupants for improved interaction with the Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
front air bags. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows. The
WARNING! trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG”
 Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee or “AIRBAG.”
impact bolsters in any way.
 Do not mount any accessories to the knee Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos,
citizen band radios, etc. When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the
outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The
inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into
Supplemental Side Air Bags the space between the occupant and the door. The
SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a
6
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
high force that it could injure occupants if they are
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
not seated properly, or if items are positioned in
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
are located in the outboard side of the front seats. Label Location
The SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or WARNING!
“AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat trim on the SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
outboard side of the seats. Do not use accessory seat covers or place injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants
objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the in certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant performance could be adversely affected and/or reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
injury during certain side impacts, in addition to objects could be pushed into you, causing body structure.
the injury reduction potential provided by the seat serious injury.
belts and body structure.
350 SAFETY
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side Side Impacts

windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside WARNING!
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint  Occupants, including children, who are up
window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to Controller (ORC) determines whether the against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
injure occupants if they are not belted and seated deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
properly, or if items are positioned in the area impact event is appropriate, based on the severity including children, should never lean on or
where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid sleep against the door, side windows, or area
greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag. the ORC in determining the appropriate response where the side air bags inflate, even if they are
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or to impact events. The system is calibrated to in an infant or child restraint.
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the  Seat belts (and child restraints where appro-
side windows in certain side impact events. vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag priate) are necessary for your protection in all
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air collisions. They also help keep you in position,
WARNING! Bags deploy independently; a left side impact away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side best protection from the Side Air Bags, occu-
 Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle pants must wear their seat belts properly and
other cargo up high enough to block the
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether sit upright with their backs against the seats.
deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering
or not Side Air Bags should have deployed. Children must be properly restrained in a child
above the side windows where the SABIC and
its deployment path are located should The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for
remain free from any obstructions. collisions, including some collisions at certain the size of the child.
angles, or some side collisions that do not impact
 In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do
the area of the passenger compartment. The Side
not install any accessory items in your vehicle Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal
which could alter the roof. Do not add an after- collisions where the front air bags deploy.
market sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add
roof racks that require permanent attach- Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
ments (bolts or screws) for installation on the restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time
vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the than it takes to blink your eyes.
vehicle for any reason.
SAFETY 351
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will  Instrument Panel
WARNING! not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover  Knee Impact Bolsters
 Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean sensing system determines if a rollover event may
be in progress and whether deployment is  Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat. appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a  Seat Belt Buckle Switch
rollover or near rollover event, and deployment is  Supplemental Side Air Bags
 Being too close to the Side Air Bags during appropriate, the rollover sensing system will deploy
deployment could cause you to be severely  Front and Side Impact Sensors
the side air bags and seat belt pretensioners on
injured or killed. both sides of the vehicle.  Seat Belt Pretensioners
 Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or  Seat Track Position Sensors
to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side complete ejection of vehicle occupants through  Occupant Classification System
Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain side windows in certain rollover or side impact
you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags events. If A Deployment Occurs
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt The front air bags are designed to deflate
even though you have Side Air Bags. Air Bag System Components
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: NOTE: 6
NOTE: The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all colli-
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
sions. This does not mean something is wrong with
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment. associated with electrical Air Bag System Compo-
the air bag system.
nents listed below:
Rollover Events
 Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events. The  Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines  Steering Wheel and Column
whether deployment in a particular rollover event
is appropriate, based on the severity and type of
collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good
indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and seat
belt pretensioners should have deployed.
352 SAFETY
If you do have a collision which deploys the air  Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as
bags, any or all of the following may occur: WARNING! long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes
 The air bag material may sometimes cause Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu- cannot protect you in another collision. Have the Response System
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat  Unlock the power door locks
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or belt retractor assemblies replaced by an
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any
those you might get sliding along a carpet or authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the
of these other functions in response to the
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced
Enhanced Accident Response System:
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent as well.
and normally heal quickly. However, if you  Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
NOTE:
if you have any blistering, see your doctor imme-  Cut off battery power to the:
 Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
diately.  Engine
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
 As the air bags deflate, you may see some ment.  Electric Motor (if equipped)
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal
 After any collision, the vehicle should be taken  Electric power steering
by-product of the process that generates the
to an authorized dealer immediately.
non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These  Brake booster
airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, Enhanced Accident Response System  Electric park brake
nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, In the event of an impact, if the communication  Automatic transmission gear selector
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat network remains intact, and the power remains
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation intact, depending on the nature of the event, the  Horn
continues, see your doctor. If these particles Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will determine  Front wiper
settle on your clothing, follow the garment whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response  Headlamp washer pump (if equipped)
manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning. System perform the following functions:
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have  Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
deployed. If you are involved in another collision,
 Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
equipped)
 Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power
SAFETY 353
NOTE: Maintaining Your Air Bag System

After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to WARNING!
the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key WARNING!  Do not attempt to modify any part of your air
from the ignition switch to avoid draining the bag system. The air bag may inflate acciden-
 Modifications to any part of the air bag system
battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in tally or may not function properly if modifica-
could cause it to fail when you need it. You
the engine compartment and on the ground near tions are made. Take your vehicle to an
could be injured if the air bag system is not
the engine compartment and fuel tank before authorized dealer for any air bag system
there to protect you. Do not modify the compo-
resetting the system and starting the engine. If service. If your seat, including your trim cover
nents or wiring, including adding any kind of
there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub
electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an (including removal or loosening/tightening of
trim cover or the upper passenger side of the
accident, reset the system by following the seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an
instrument panel. Do not modify the front
procedure described below. If you have any doubt, authorized dealer. Only manufacturer
fascia/bumper, vehicle body structure, or add
contact an authorized dealer. approved seat accessories may be used. If it is
aftermarket side steps or running boards.
Enhanced Accident Response System necessary to modify the air bag system for
 It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the persons with disabilities, contact an autho-
Reset Procedure air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone rized dealer. 6
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response who works on your vehicle that it has an air
System functions after an event, the ignition switch bag system.
must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN Event Data Recorder (EDR)
(Continued)
to ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel This vehicle is equipped with an event data
leaks in the engine compartment and on the recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
ground near the engine compartment and fuel record, in certain crash or near crash-like
tank before resetting the system and starting the situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
engine. After an accident, if the vehicle will not a road obstacle, data that will assist in
start after performing the reset procedure, the understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
vehicle must be towed to an authorized dealer to The EDR is designed to record data related to
be inspected and to have the Enhanced Accident vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
Response System reset. period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
354 SAFETY
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such CHILD R ESTRAINTS There are different sizes and types of restraints for
data as: children from newborn size to the child almost
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check
 How various systems in your vehicle were oper-
all times, including babies and children. Every the child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you
ating;
state in the United States, and every Canadian have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read
 Whether or not the driver and passenger safety province, requires that small children ride in and follow all the instructions and warnings in the
belts were buckled/fastened; proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the
 How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the can be prosecuted for ignoring it. labels attached to the child restraint.
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, Children 12 years or younger should ride properly Before buying any restraint system, make sure that
 How fast the vehicle was traveling. buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable
crash statistics, children are safer when properly Safety Standards. You should also make sure that
These data can help provide a better
restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front. you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur. NOTE:
WARNING!
NOTE:  For additional information, refer to http://
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required
call: 1–888–327–4236
recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi- to hold even an infant on your lap could become
so great that you could not hold the child, no  Canadian residents should refer to Transport
tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, Canada’s website for additional information:
age, and crash location) are recorded. However, matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding https://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
other parties, such as law enforcement, could
in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for child-car-seat-safety.html
combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash the child’s size.
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or
the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
SAFETY 355
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Children who are two years old or younger and who Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Infants and Toddlers have not reached the height or weight limits of their Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
child restraint vehicle
Children who are at least two years old or who have Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Small Children outgrown the height or weight limit of their Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
rear-facing child restraint vehicle
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat
Larger Children child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the
belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
Children Too Large for Child Restraints outgrown the height or weight limit of their booster
vehicle
seat 6
356 SAFETY
Infant And Child Restraints

WARNING! WARNING!
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear
old or until they reach either the height or weight front of an air bag. A deploying passenger support leg in this vehicle. The floor of this
limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of front air bag can cause death or serious injury vehicle is not designed to manage the crash
child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant to a child 12 years or younger, including a forces of this type of car seat. In a crash, the
carriers and convertible child seats. child in a rear-facing child restraint. support leg may not function as it was designed
by the car seat manufacturer, and your child may
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
be more severely injured as a result.
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
until they reach the weight or height limit of the child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
Convertible child seats often have a higher weight
limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who
have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less
than at least two years old. Children should remain
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or
height allowed by their convertible child seat.
SAFETY 357
Older Children And Child Restraints Children Too Large For Booster Seats
WARNING!
Children who are two years old or who have Children who are large enough to wear the
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat  Improper installation can lead to failure of an shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. infant or child restraint. It could come loose in enough to bend over the front of the seat when
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child a collision. The child could be badly injured or their back is against the seatback, should use the
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for killed. Follow the child restraint manufac- seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test
children who are over two years old or who have turer’s directions exactly when installing an to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of infant or child restraint. seat belt alone:
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children  After a child restraint is installed in the 1. Can the child sit all the way back against the
should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward back of the vehicle seat?
harness for as long as possible, up to the highest or rearward because it can loosen the child
weight or height allowed by the child seat. 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
restraint attachments. Remove the child the front of the vehicle seat while the child is
All children whose weight or height is above the restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat still sitting all the way back?
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a position. When the vehicle seat has been
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s adjusted, reinstall the child restraint. 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with shoulder between the neck and arm? 6
 When your child restraint is not in use, secure
knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH
the child’s back is against the seatback, they touching the child’s thighs and not the
anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The stomach?
not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden
child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in stop or accident, it could strike the occupants 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole
the vehicle by the seat belt. or seatbacks and cause serious personal trip?
injury.
358 SAFETY
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check
seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt
contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which may result
in serious injury or death. A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Combined Weight of Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
Restraint Type the Child + Child LATCH – Lower Anchors LATCH – Lower Anchors Seat Belt + Top Tether
Restraint Seat Belt Only
Only + Top Tether Anchor Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs
X X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
Rear-Facing Child More than 65 lbs
X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs
X X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Child More than 65 lbs
X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
SAFETY 359
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren LATCH Positions For Installing Child
(LATCH) Restraint System Restraints In This Vehicle
Crew Cab Full Bench, Quad Cab Full Bench And 60/40
LATCH Label Split Bench LATCH Positions
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Crew Cab 60/40 Split Bench LATCH Positions
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The Top Tether Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position) 6
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for Lower Anchorage Symbol
installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one
top tether anchorage located behind the seating
position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the
vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may
have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat
belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to
install the child restraint. Please see the following
table for more information.
360 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of combined weight of the child and the child restraint
the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage 65 lbs (29.5 kg) is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether
system to attach the child restraint? anchor instead of the LATCH system once the
combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH
anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be forward-facing child restraint.
used together to attach a rear-facing or No Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
forward-facing child restraint? anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position Quad Cab or Crew with Full bench rear seat: Use
using the inner LATCH lower anchorages from the No the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child
outboard seating positions? seat in the center seating position
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more
child restraints. If the center position does not have
Can two child restraints be attached using a dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat
No
common lower LATCH anchorage? belt to install a child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in
an outboard position.
The child seat may touch the back of the front
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer
Yes
the front passenger seat? also allows contact. See your child restraint
owner’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
SAFETY 361
Locating The LATCH Anchorages LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be

equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each
The lower anchorages are round bars
side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach
that are found at the rear of the seat
to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the
cushion where it meets the seatback,
connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child
below the anchorage symbols on the
restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will
seatback. They are just visible when you lean into
also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether
the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will
strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the
easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Outboard Tether Anchorage Center Seat LATCH
All Quad Cabs Or Crew Cab Full Bench Rear Seat:
No Lower Center LATCH Anchorages Available
WARNING!
6
 Do not install a child restraint in the center
position using the LATCH system. This position
is not approved for installing child seats using
the LATCH attachments. You must use the
Rear Outboard Seats Driver Side (Example Shown) seat belt and tether anchor to install a child
seat in the center seating position.
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages Center Tether Anchorage Over Head Rest  Never use the same lower anchorage to
There are tether strap anchorages attach more than one child restraint
located behind each of the rear seats. Ú page 362.
362 SAFETY
Crew Cab Split Bench Rear Seat: Center LATCH 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
Anchorages Available on the tether strap of the child seat so that restraint rearward and downward into the
If a child restraint installed in the center position you can more easily attach the hooks or seat. Remove slack in the straps according to
blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the connectors to the vehicle anchorages. the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
outboard position, do not use that outboard 2. Place the child seat between the lower 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
position. If a child seat in the center position blocks anchorages for that seating position. If the by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not second row seat can be reclined, you may the belt path. It should not move more than
install a child seat in that outboard position. recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
(if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat
WARNING! can be moved forward and rearward in the How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its (ALR) Seat Belt:
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach
rear-most position to make room for the child
more than one child restraint Ú page 362. When using the LATCH attaching system to install
seat. You may also move the front seat forward
a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not
to allow more room for the child seat.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint being used by other occupants or being used to
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure
manufacturer when installing your child restraint.
child restraint to the lower anchorages in the a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as
selected seating position. seat belt retractor. Before installing a child
described here.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child it to the top tether anchorage. See belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s
Restraint Ú page 365 for directions to attach a tether reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the
If the selected seating position has a Switchable anchor. child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
the seat belt, following the instructions below. See through the child restraint belt path and then
Ú page 363 to check what type of seat belt each buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
seating position has. children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
SAFETY 363
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing

WARNING! WARNING!
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
 Improper installation of a child restraint to the  Improper installation or failure to properly
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
restraint. The child could be badly injured or the restraint. The child could be badly injured
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac- or killed.
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
 Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
infant or child restraint.
directions exactly when installing an infant or
 Child restraint anchorages are designed to child restraint.
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
circumstances are they to be used for adult are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap
items or equipment to the vehicle. portion of the seat belt tight around the child Automatic Locking Retractor — (ALR) Locations
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking (All Models)
clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a
6
Installing Child Restraints Using The ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Vehicle Seat Belt locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
retractor and then letting the webbing retract back
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
of a lap/shoulder belt. into the retractor.
See the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
Ú page 340 for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
364 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s Always use the tether anchor when
weight + weight of the child restraint) using the seat belt to install a forward
for using the Tether Anchor with the Weight limit of the Child Restraint facing child restraint, up to the
seat belt to attach a forward facing recommended weight limit of the
child restraint? child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger
Can the rear-facing child restraint
seat and the child restraint is allowed,
touch the back of the front passenger Yes
if the child restraint manufacturer
seat?
also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be
No Head restraints may not be removed.
removed?
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
tighten the seat belt against the belt No
seating position with an ALR retractor.
path of the child restraint?
Installing A Child Restraint With A 1. Place the child seat in the center of the
WARNING! seating position. If the second row seat can
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
 Improper installation or failure to properly be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or
(ALR): raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured the restraint. The child could be badly injured better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion or killed. forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may
of a lap/shoulder belt. wish to move it to its rear-most position to
 Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
make room for the child seat. You may also
directions exactly when installing an infant or move the front seat forward to allow more
child restraint. room for the child seat.
SAFETY 365
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the tighten the lap portion around the child Tether Anchorage
child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in restraint while you push the child restraint
the belt path. rearward and downward into the vehicle seat. WARNING!
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car
hear a “click.” the seating position has a top tether
seat to any location in front of the car seat,
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
including the seat frame or a tether anchorage.
tight against the child seat. anchorage and tighten the tether strap
Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car
Ú page 365.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for
part of the belt until you have pulled all the 9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly that seating position, located behind the top of
seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the vehicle seat. For the location of approved
allow the webbing to retract back into the the belt path. It should not move more than tether anchorages in your vehicle, see
retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction. Ú page 359.
a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. 6
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it
is locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat
step 5.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front
of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a
rear-facing child restraint.
366 SAFETY
The top tether anchorages in this vehicle NOTE:

are tether strap loops located between If there are child seats in both of the outboard (left
the rear glass and the back of the rear and right) seating positions, the tether strap hooks
seat. There is a tether strap loop located of both child seats should be connected to the
behind each seating position. Follow the steps center tether strap loop. This is the correct way to
below to attach the tether strap of the child tether two outboard child seats.
restraint. Center Seat:
Right Or Left Outboard Seats: 1. Reach between the rear seat and rear glass
1. Reach between the rear seat and rear glass to access the tether strap loop.
to access the tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust
the tether strap so that it will reach over the 4. Attach the hook to the center tether strap loop
seat back, through the space between the (see diagram). Tighten the tether strap
head restraint and the seat back, through the according to the child seat manufacturer’s
tether strap loop behind the seat and over to instructions.
the tether strap loop behind the center seat.
3. Pass the tether strap hook through the space
between the head restraint and the seat back
behind the child seat, through the tether strap
loop behind the seat and over to the center
Center Tether Strap Loop Location
tether strap loop.
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust
the tether strap so that it will reach over the
seat back and headrest, through the tether
strap loop behind the seat and over to the
tether strap loop behind either the right or left
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop And outboard seat.
Attached To Center Tether Strap Loop
SAFETY 367
3. Pass the tether strap hook over the headrest

behind the child seat, through the tether strap
loop behind the seat and over to the right or
left outboard tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop And Outboard And Center Seating Positions Shown
Attached To Outboard Tether Strap Loop
5. Tighten the tether straps according to the child
Installing Three Child Restraints: seat manufacturer’s instructions, tightening
the right and left tether straps before the
1. Place a child restraint on each outboard rear center tether strap.
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop 6
seat. Route the tether straps following the
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap directions for right and left seating positions,
loop (see diagram). Tighten the tether strap above. WARNING!
according to the child seat manufacturer’s 2. Attach both hooks to the center tether strap  An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
instructions. loop, but do not tighten the straps yet. lead to increased head motion and possible
3. Place a child restraint on the center rear seat. injury to the child. Use only the anchorage
Route the tether strap following the directions position directly behind the child seat to
for the center seating position, above. secure a child restraint top tether strap.
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap  If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
loop. seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip
into the opening between the seatbacks as
you remove slack in the strap.
368 SAFETY
SAFETY TIPS Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if

equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has
been detected. It will stay on until the fault is
TRANSPORTING P ASSENGERS secured by seat belts. removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO SAFETY CHECKS Y OU S HOULD M AKE dealer service the vehicle immediately.
AREA. I NSIDE THE VEHICLE See Ú page 334 for further information.
WARNING! Seat Belts Defroster
 Do not leave children or animals inside parked Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts place the blower control on high speed. You should
may cause serious injury or death. must be replaced immediately. Do not be able to feel the air directed against the
disassemble or modify the system. windshield. See an authorized dealer for service if
 It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo your defroster is inoperable.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-
have questions regarding the seat belt or retractor Floor Mat Safety Information
sion, people riding in these areas are more
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the
 Do not allow people to ride in any area of your Program facility for inspection.
operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
Air Bag Warning Light pedals. Only use a floor mat that is securely
seat belts.
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot
 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat four to eight seconds as a bulb check slip out of position and interfere with the
and using a seat belt properly. when the ignition switch is first placed in accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe
the ON/RUN position. If the light is either operation of your vehicle in other ways.
TRANSPORTING P ETS not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm authorized dealer as soon as possible. After the
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about bulb check, this light will illuminate with a single
and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during
panic braking or in a collision.
SAFETY 369
WARNING! WARNING! WARNING!

An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or  ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the  If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat driver’s side floor area. To check for interfer- re-installed, always properly attach carpet to
fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere ence, with the vehicle properly parked with the the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and engine off, fully depress the accelerator, the secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress
cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to each pedal to check for interference with the
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH: check for interference. If your floor mat inter- accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then
feres with the operation of any pedal, or is not re-install the floor mats.
 ALWAYS securely attach your floor
secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from
mat using the floor mat fasteners.  It is recommended to only use mild soap and
the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
DO NOT install your floor mat upside water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,
trunk.
down or turn your floor mat over. always check your floor mat has been properly
Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured using the  ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on installed and is secured to your vehicle using
floor mat fasteners on a regular basis. the passenger’s side floor area. the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
 ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING  ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
6
FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE into the driver’s side floor area when the PERIODIC S AFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
before installing any other floor mat. vehicle is moving. Objects can become
NEVER install or stack an additional trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
MAKE OUTSIDE T HE V EHICLE
floor mat on top of an existing floor mat. pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle Tires
control.
 ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot  NEVER place any objects under the floor mat wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or
be properly attached and secured to your (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall.
vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced, change the position of the floor mat and may Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect
only use a FCA approved floor mat for the cause interference with the accelerator, sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the
specific make, model, and year of your brake, or clutch pedals. lug nut/bolt torque for tightness. Check the tires
vehicle. (Continued) (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
(Continued)
370 SAFETY
Lights
WARNING!
CARBON M ONOXIDE W ARNINGS
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the  If you are required to drive with the trunk/lift- WARNING!
controls. Check turn signal and high beam gate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent
Door Latches use the recirculation mode. carbon monoxide poisoning:
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.  Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
 If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
Fluid Leaks the engine running, adjust your heating or carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
cooling controls to force outside air into the gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
a parked vehicle with the engine running for
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or
an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should The best protection against carbon monoxide entry an open area with the engine running for more
be located and corrected immediately. into the vehicle body is a properly maintained than a short period, adjust the ventilation
engine exhaust system.
EXHAUST GAS system to force fresh, outside air into the
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the vehicle.
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be
WARNING!  Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have an maintenance. Have the exhaust system
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and authorized dealer inspect the complete exhaust inspected every time the vehicle is raised.
odorless. Breathing it can make you system and adjacent body areas for broken, Have any abnormal conditions repaired
unconscious and can eventually poison you. To damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips: Open seams or loose connections could permit windows fully open.
exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
 Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust
confined areas any longer than needed to
system each time the vehicle is raised for
move your vehicle in or out of the area.
lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
(Continued)
371
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the button is activated, all
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located on directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
the upper switch bank just below the radio. oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the button
a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should
not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use only
when your vehicle is disabled or signaling a safety
hazard warning for other motorists.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button When leaving the vehicle to seek assistance, the
NOTE: Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate
If your vehicle is equipped with a 12–inch even though the ignition is placed in the OFF
Uconnect display, the Hazard Warning Flashers position.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button button is located above the display. NOTE: 7
With extended use the Hazard Warning Flashers
may wear down your battery.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button with 12-inch display

372 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED NOTE: SOS Call

 Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho- 1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead
rized by the subscriber Ú page 480. console.
 The ASSIST and SOS buttons will only function if NOTE:
you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/ In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
data) or 4G (data) network, which comes as a there will be a ten second delay before the SOS
built in function. Other Uconnect services will Call system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To
only be operable if your SiriusXM Guardian™ cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS call
service is active and connected to an operable button on the overhead console or press the
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network. cancellation button on the Device Screen. Termi-
ASSIST Call nation of the SOS Call will turn off the green LED
light on the overhead console.
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
Assist And SOS Buttons connect you to any one of the following support 2. The LED lights located within the ASSIST and
centers: SOS buttons on the overhead console will turn
1 — ASSIST Button
green once a connection to a SOS operator has
2 — SOS Button  Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or been made.
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and
you’ll be connected to someone who can help. 3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a
If equipped, the overhead console contains an SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system
Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle
ASSIST and a SOS button. may transmit the following important vehicle
you’re driving and its location. Additional fees
may apply for roadside assistance. information to a SOS operator:
WARNING!
 SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – In-vehicle  Indication that the occupant placed a SOS
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to Call
support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
 Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all  The vehicle brand
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the other vehicle issues.  The last known GPS coordinates of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only  Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for vehicle
use the features and applications when it is safe Radio, Phone and NAV issues. 4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an operator through the vehicle audio system to
accident involving serious injury or death. determine if additional help is needed.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 373
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact

WARNING! appropriate emergency responders and WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to provide them with important vehicle  The SOS Call system is embedded into the
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on information and GPS coordinates. vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add after-
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility market electrical equipment to the vehicle’s
and assume all risks related to the use of the WARNING! electrical system. This may prevent your
features and applications in this vehicle. Only vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an
use the features and applications when it is safe  If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger emergency call. To avoid interference that can
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an (e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
accident involving serious injury or death. conditions or location), do not wait for voice aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile
contact from an Emergency Services Agent. All radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
occupants should exit the vehicle immediately vehicle’s electrical system or modify the
NOTE: and move to a safe location. antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE
 Your vehicle may be transmitting data as LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON
authorized by the subscriber.  Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable network and GPS antennas. You (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
 Once a connection is made between the could prevent operable network and GPS DENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper- signal reception, which can prevent your SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
ator, the SOS operator may be able to open vehicle from placing an emergency call. An OPERATE.
a voice connection with the vehicle to deter- operable network and GPS signal reception is 7
 Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
mine if additional help is needed. Once the required for the SOS Call system to function system could cause the air bag system to fail
SOS operator opens a voice connection with properly. when you need it. You could be injured if the
the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator
(Continued) air bag system is not there to help protect you.
should be able to speak with you or other
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occur-
ring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call
system will attempt to remain connected
with the SOS operator until the SOS oper-
ator terminates the connection.
SOS Call System Limitations  The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
WARNING! disconnected during a vehicle crash
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call
system capabilities.  Ignoring the overhead console light could  LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
mean you will not have SOS Call services. If Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavail-
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico
the overhead console light is illuminated, have able or obstructed
may not answer or respond to SOS system calls.
an authorized dealer service the SOS Call
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any  Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
system immediately.
of the following may occur at the time the facility
malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of  The Occupant Restraint Control module turns  Operator error by the SOS operator
each ignition cycle: on the air bag Warning Light on the instrument
panel if a malfunction in any part of the  LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network conges-
 The overhead console lights located within the system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning tion
ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously illumi- Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer  Weather
nate red. service the Occupant Restraint Control system  Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
 The Device Screen will display the following immediately. tunnels
message: “Vehicle device requires service.
Please contact an authorized dealer.” Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, WARNING!
 An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
device requires service. Please contact an or stop the SOS Call system operation. These the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
authorized dealer.” include, but are not limited to, the following the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
factors: and assume all risks related to the use of the
 The ignition is in the OFF position features and applications in this vehicle. Only
 The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
 The SOS Call system software and/or hardware
accident involving serious injury or death.
are damaged during a crash
NOTE: JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING NOTE:

If your vehicle is equipped with an air suspension
 Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber. WARNING! system, there is a feature which allows the auto-
matic leveling to be disabled to assist with
 Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s  Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of changing a tire. This feature can be activated
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far through the Uconnect system Ú page 253.
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/data) or enough off the road to avoid the danger of
4G (data) and GPS signal reception, which can being hit when operating the jack or changing PREPARATIONS FOR J ACKING
prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency the wheel.
call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) NOTE:
network connection and a GPS signal is  Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. If your vehicle is equipped with Air Suspension, you
required for the SOS Call system to function The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on will need to enable Tire Jack Mode in the Uconnect
properly. you. You could be crushed. Never put any part system Ú page 165 before changing the tire.
of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. 1. Park on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
NOTE: If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take slippery areas.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved it to a service center where it can be raised on
by the party responsible for compliance could void a lift. WARNING!
the user's authority to operate the equipment.
 Never start or run the engine while the vehicle Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
is on a jack. the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far 7
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that
 The jack is designed to be used as a tool for enough off the road to avoid being hit when
can immediately connect you with help in the event
changing tires only. The jack should not be operating the jack or changing the wheel.
that your vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to
your provided radio supplement for complete used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
information. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas. 3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Shift the transmission into Park (P).
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear wheel diagonally REMOVAL O F JACK A ND T OOLS
opposite of each jacking position. For example,
if the driver’s front wheel is being changed, To access the jack and tools, you must remove the
block the passenger’s rear wheel. plastic access cover located on the side of the
front passenger’s seat. To remove the cover, pull
the front part of the cover (closest to the front of
the seat) toward you to release a locking tab. Once
the front of the cover is loose, slide the cover
toward the front of the seat until it is free from the
seat frame.
Jack And Tools
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when
the vehicle is being raised or lifted.
J ACK L OCATION Pull Jack Access Cover From Front
The jack and tools are stored under the front
Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing bolt Fuel Funnel Location
passenger seat.
counterclockwise. After removing the wing bolt,
slide the assembly out from under the seat.
Release the tool bag straps from the jack and Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising NOTE:
remove tools from bag. If the tailgate is lowered, adding the shorter
extension 5 to jack extension 4 will enable
lowering the spare tire without having to raise the
tailgate.
CAUTION!
 The lug wrench can only be attached to exten-
sion 2.
 When attaching the tool to the winch mecha-
nism be sure the large flared end opening on
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising extension 4 is positioned correctly over the
Jack And Tool Bag winch mechanism adjusting nut.
1 — Lug Wrench
 Damage to the lug wrench, extensions and
There are two ways to assemble the tools: 2 — Long Extension Without Spring Clip 2
winch mechanism may occur from improper
3 — Long Extension With Spring Clip 3 tool assembly.
4 — Long Extension With Spring Clip 4
5 — Short Extension 5 7
Assembled For Jack Operation REMOVING THE S PARE TIRE CAUTION!

1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to The winch mechanism is designed for use with
jack up the truck. Attach the lug wrench to the the jack extension tube only. Use of an air
extension tubes with the curved angle facing wrench or other power tools is not
away from the vehicle. recommended and can damage the winch.
2. Remove the protective cover over the access
hole for the winch mechanism by sliding the
cover upward.
Assembled For Jack Operation

1 — Lug Wrench
2 — Long Extension 2
Winch Mechanism Tube
5 — Short Extension 5
6 — Extension With Hook
Access Hole Cover Location
3. Insert the extension tube through the access
WARNING! hole between the lower tailgate and the top of
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall the fascia/bumper and into the winch
them in the original carrier and location. While mechanism tube.
driving you may experience abrupt stopping,
rapid acceleration or sharp turns. A loose jack,
tools, bracket or other objects in the vehicle may
move around with force, resulting in serious
injury. Inserting The Extension Tubes Into The Access Hole
4. Rotate the lug wrench handle counter- 6. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give
clockwise until the spare tire is on the ground clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of the WARNING!
with enough cable slack to allow you to pull it cable.  Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
out from under the vehicle. 7. Pull the retainer through the center of the transmission in PARK.
wheel.  Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel
to be raised.
 Never start or run the engine with the vehicle
on a jack.
 Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is
on a jack.
 Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be
Rotating The Lug Wrench Handle raised on a lift.
5. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to Disengaging The Retainer  Only use the jack in the positions indicated
gain access to the spare tire retainer. and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
J ACKING INSTRUCTIONS 7
 If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
WARNING!
 To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to securely stowed, spares must be stowed with
help prevent personal injury or damage to your the valve stem facing the ground.
vehicle:
 Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before
raising the vehicle.
 Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Pulling The Spare Tire Out
(Continued)
Front Jacking Location

When changing a front wheel, place the
scissor jack under the rear portion of the
lower control arm as shown. Access the
front jacking location from behind the front
tire.
Jack Warning Label Assembled Jack And Tools

4. Placement for the front and rear jacking
CAUTION! locations are critical. See below images for
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on proper jacking locations.
locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and tools from Front Lifting Point
the stored location.
2. Using the lug wrench, loosen the wheel nuts
(but do not remove), by turning them counter-
clockwise one turn while the wheel is still on
the ground.
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools. Connect
the jack handle driver to the extension, then to Jack / Extensions Placement
the lug wrench.
CAUTION!
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make
sure that the jack will not damage surrounding
truck parts and adjust the jack position as
required.
5. By rotating the lug wrench clockwise, raise the

vehicle until the wheel just clears the ground
surface.
Front Jacking Location Rear Lifting Point
WARNING!
Rear Jacking Location
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
Operate the jack using the extension with jack make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the
hook and the lug wrench. The extension tubes jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle
may be used but are not required. only enough to remove the tire.
When changing a rear wheel, assemble the ex-
tension with jack hook to the jack and connect 6. Remove the lug nuts and pull the wheel off. 7
the extension tubes. Access the rear jacking lo- Install the spare wheel and lug nuts with the
cation from behind the rear tire. Place the jack cone shaped end of the lug nuts toward the
under the Jack Lifting Point located on the rear wheel. Hand tighten the lug nuts with the
axle lower control arm bracket. Then locate the Rear Jacking Location vehicle lifted. To avoid the risk of forcing the
slot in the jack lift plate onto the rear axle Jack vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the lug
Connect the long extensions to the lug nuts until the vehicle has been completely
Lifting Point. Attach the extension with jack
wrench. lowered.
hook extending to the rear of the vehicle.
7. Lower the vehicle to the ground and finish TO STOW THE FLAT OR S PARE 3. Remove the extension with the hook and
tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the reattach the short extension 5. Attach the lug
wrench handle for increased leverage. Tighten 1. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give wrench to the extension tubes with the curved
the lug nuts in a star pattern until each lug nut clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of the angle facing away from the vehicle
has been tightened twice Ú page 466. If in cable. Ú page 376. Insert the extension tubes
doubt about the correct tightness, have them 2. Position the wheel behind the rear fascia/ through the access hole between the lower
checked with a torque wrench by an bumper facing outward. Push the end of the tailgate and the top of the fascia/bumper and
authorized dealer or at a service station. winch’s cable, spring and steel sleeve through into the winch mechanism tube.
the back of the road wheel. Making sure the
WARNING! valve stem is facing the ground when the CAUTION!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision wheel is stowed. The winch mechanism is designed for use with
or hard stop, could endanger the occupants of the jack extension tube only. Use of an air
the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the wrench or other power tools is not
spare tire in the places provided. recommended and can damage the winch.
8. If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel center

cap, install the cap and remove the wheel
blocks. Do not install chrome or aluminum
wheel center caps on the spare wheel. This
may result in cap damage.
9. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. Stow
the replaced tire, and secure the jack and tools Reinstalling The Retainer
in the proper location.
10. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
Reinstalling The Flat Or Spare Tire

4. Rotate the lug wrench handle clockwise until NOTE:

the wheel is drawn into place against the Have the flat tire repaired or replaced immediately.
underside of the vehicle. Continue to rotate
until you feel the winch mechanism slip, or WARNING!
click three or four times. It cannot be A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
overtightened. Push against the tire several or hard stop could endanger the occupants of
times to ensure it is firmly in place. the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the
spare tire in the places provided. Have the
deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced
immediately.
Jack And Tool Bag
REINSTALLING T HE JACK A ND T OOLS 3. Secure the tool bag straps to the jack.
1. Tighten the jack all the way down by turning
the jack turn-screw counterclockwise until the
jack is snug.
2. Position the jack and tool bag. Make sure the
Rotating The Lug Wrench Handle lug wrench is under the jack near the jack 7
turn-screw.
Jack And Tools Tied

4. Place the jack and tools in the storage position

holding the jack by the jack turn-screw, slip the WARNING! CAUTION!
jack and tools under the seat so that the After using the jack and tools, always reinstall Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
bottom slot engages into the fastener on the them in the original carrier and location. While any other booster source with a system voltage
floor. driving you may experience abrupt stopping, greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery,
NOTE: rapid acceleration or sharp turns. A loose jack, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may
Ensure that the jack slides into the front hold down tools, bracket or other objects in the vehicle may occur.
location. move around with force, resulting in serious
injury.
5. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the NOTE:
floor pan. Reinstall the plastic cover. When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
JUMP STARTING the manufacturer's operating instructions and
precautions.
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be
jump started using a set of jumper cables and a PREPARATIONS FOR J UMP START
battery in another vehicle, or by using a portable The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of
battery booster pack. Jump starting can be the engine compartment, behind the left headlight
dangerous if done improperly, so please follow the assembly.
procedures in this section carefully.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
Jack Hold Down Wing Bolt frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the J UMP S TARTING P ROCEDURE

battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables’ reach, apply the parking brake and WARNING!
make sure the ignition is OFF.
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
WARNING! could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
CAUTION!
Positive (+) Battery Post Location Failure to follow these procedures could result in
4. Pull upward and remove the protective cover
over the positive (+) battery post. damage to the charging system of the booster
NOTE: vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
The positive battery post may be covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to WARNING!
the positive battery post. Do not jump off fuses. Connecting The Jumper Cables
Only jump directly off positive post which has a  Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper
positive (+) symbol on or around the post. whenever the hood is raised. It can start cable to the positive (+) post of the discharged
Follow the below steps to prepare for jump anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be vehicle. 7
starting: injured by moving fan blades.
NOTE:
1. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK,  Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off
apply the parking brake and turn the ignition watch bands and bracelets that could make positive post.
OFF. an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
seriously injured.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
accessories.  Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn booster battery.
your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas
which is flammable and explosive. Keep open
flames or sparks away from the battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the If frequent jump starting is required to start your
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster booster battery, let the engine idle a few vehicle you should have the battery and charging
battery. minutes, and then start the engine in the system inspected at an authorized dealer.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) vehicle with the discharged battery.
jumper cable to a good engine ground. A CAUTION!
“ground” is an exposed metallic/unpainted CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
part of the engine, frame or chassis, such as Do not connect jumper cable to any of the fuses outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
an accessory bracket or large bolt. The ground on the positive battery terminal. The resulting even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.).
must be away from the battery and the fuel electrical current will blow the fuse. Eventually, if plugged in long enough without
injection system. engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will
6. Once the engine is started, follow the discon- discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
nection procedure below. and/or prevent the engine from starting.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables

1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED
cable from the engine ground of the vehicle The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel for
with the discharged battery. a Cap-Less Fuel System. The refueling funnel can
be found with the jack and tools Ú page 376. If
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
refueling is necessary, while using an approved
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
gas can, insert the refueling funnel into the filler
booster battery.
neck opening. Take care to open both flappers with
Jump Starting Label 3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper the funnel to avoid spills.
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster
NOTE:
WARNING! battery.
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative 4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on
(-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the the fuel door to break the ice buildup and
electrical spark could cause the battery to vehicle with the discharged battery, and re-release the fuel door using the inside release
explode and could result in personal injury. reinstall the protective cap. button. Do not pry on the door.
WARNING!
 A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
You could be burned. Always place fuel
containers on the ground while filling.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be
Refueling Funnel Inserting Funnel serviced by an authorized dealer.
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper In any of the following situations, you can reduce
CAUTION! doors open. the potential for overheating by taking the
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top appropriate action.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
off” the fuel tank after filling.  On the highways — slow down.
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior
to putting back in the spare tire storage area.  In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
Emergency Gas Can Refueling: mission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the
engine idle speed while preventing vehicle 7
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors. A WARNING! motion with the brakes.
funnel is provided to allow emergency refueling
with a gas can.  Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or
See below steps for refueling:
the tank is being filled.
1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage
 Never add fuel when the engine is running.
area.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as fire regulations and may cause the Malfunc-
the fuel nozzle. tion Indicator Light to turn on.
(Continued)
NOTE: In order to move the vehicle in cases where the

There are steps that you can take to slow down an
CAUTION! transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such as
impending overheat condition: Driving with a hot cooling system could damage a depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is
 If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads available.
A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the Follow these steps to activate the Manual Park
system and turning the A/C off can help remove vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until Release:
this heat. the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while
the pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear
 You can also turn the temperature control to seated in the driver’s seat.
continuous chimes, turn the engine off
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and 2. Apply the parking brake if possible.
immediately and call for service.
the blower control to high. This allows the heater
core to act as a supplement to the radiator and 3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, open
the Manual Park Release cover, which is
aids in removing heat from the engine cooling
system.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE located to the lower left of the steering column.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine parking brake before activating the Manual Park
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. Release. In addition, you should be seated in the
If you see or hear steam coming from under the driver’s seat with your foot firmly on the brake
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator pedal when activating the Manual Park Release.
has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling Activating the Manual Park Release will allow
system pressure cap when the radiator or your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the
coolant bottle is hot. parking brake, or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on
an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious Manual Park Release Access Cover
injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.
4. Behind the Manual Park Release access cover To Reset The Manual Park Release: 4. Verify the transmission is in PARK.
is the orange tether strap. Pull the tether strap 1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while 5. Confirm that the tether has retracted fully and
out as far as it will go, then release it. The seated in the driver’s seat. reinstall the access cover. If the access cover
tether and lever will remain outside of the trim cannot be reinstalled, repeat steps 1 through
panel and the transmission should now be in 2. Pull the tether strap out again, then release it.
4.
NEUTRAL, allowing the vehicle to be moved. 3. Allow the tether to retract with the lever back
to its original position. NOTE:
When the lever is locked in the released position
the access cover cannot be reinstalled.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE

If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Then shift
back and forth between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE
Manual Park Release Tether (R), while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the
Manual Park Release Tether least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that 7
will maintain the rocking motion, without spinning
the wheels or racing the engine.
CAUTION!
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
 Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or This section describes procedures for towing a
lead to transmission overheating and failure. less. Whenever the transmission remains in disabled vehicle using a commercial towing
Allow the engine to idle with the transmission NEUTRAL (N) for more than two seconds, you must service.
in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or If the transmission and drivetrain are operable,
five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize REVERSE. disabled vehicles may also be towed as described
overheating and reduce the risk of transmis- Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic on Ú page 227.
sion failure during prolonged efforts to free a Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial OFF” NOTE:
stuck vehicle. mode, before rocking the vehicle Ú page 314. Vehicles equipped with the Active-Level Four
 When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC OFF Corner Air Suspension System must be placed in
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the button to restore “ESC On” mode. Transport mode, before tying them down (from the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or body) on a trailer or flatbed truck Ú page 165. If
drivetrain damage may result.
WARNING! the vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces (for example, engine will not run), tie-downs must
 Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too
generated by excessive wheel speeds may be fastened to the axles (not to the body). Failure
fast may lead to transmission overheating and to follow these instructions may cause fault codes
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and
failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not to be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-down
tires. A tire could explode and injure someone.
spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) tension.
Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than
while in gear (no transmission shifting occur-
30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
ring).
seconds continuously without stopping when
you are stuck and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Wheels OFF The

Towing Condition 2WD Models 4WD Models
Ground
Ú page 227
• Automatic Transmission in PARK
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
• Transfer Case in NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Tow Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to  The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N).
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars CAUTION! Instructions on shifting the transmission to
and other equipment designed for this purpose,  Do not use sling type equipment when towing. NEUTRAL (N) when the engine is OFF
following equipment per FCA US LLC instructions. Vehicle damage may occur. Ú page 388.
Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar  The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph
 When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck,
or other towing device to main structural members (48 km/h).
of the vehicle, not to fascia/bumpers or associated do not attach to front or rear suspension 7
brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles components. Damage to your vehicle may  The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles
under tow must be observed. result from improper towing. (48 km).
If you must use the accessories (wipers, If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition TWO-W HEEL DRIVE MODELS must be towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) and
must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode. farther than 30 miles (48 km), tow with the rear
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with wheels OFF the ground. An acceptable method to
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's battery all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. tow the vehicle on a flatbed are as follows:
is discharged, find Instructions on shifting the
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the  Using a suitable steering wheel stabilizer to hold
transmission out of PARK in order to move the
transmission is operable, the vehicle may be towed the front wheels in the straight position with the
vehicle Ú page 388.
(with front wheels on the ground) under the rear wheels raised and the front wheels ON the
following conditions: ground.
CAUTION! EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — CAUTION!

Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
I F E QUIPPED Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue
requirements can cause severe transmission Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow a vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow
damage. Damage from improper towing is not hooks. hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing.
covered under the New Vehicle Limited You could damage your vehicle.
Warranty.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM

FOUR-W HEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing with all wheels
(EARS)
OFF the ground. This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
CAUTION! This feature is a communication network that
 Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if takes effect in the event of an impact Ú page 352.
the remaining wheels are on the ground).
Internal damage to the transmission or
Emergency Tow Hooks EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with an event data
lift is used when towing. For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
 Towing this vehicle in violation of the above both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of record data that will assist in understanding how a
requirements can cause severe transmission damage to the vehicle. vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
improper towing is not covered under the New
WARNING! deployment or hitting a road obstacle Ú page 353.
Vehicle Limited Warranty.  Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or
death.
 Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged,
causing serious injury.
393
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULED SERVICING — GASOLINE An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the scheduled
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
 Check engine oil level.
ENGINE oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed
 Check windshield washer fluid level.
by someone other than an authorized dealer, the
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil message can be reset by referring to the steps  Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear
change indicator system. The oil change indicator described under Instrument Cluster Display or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irreg-
system will remind you that it is time to take your Ú page 114. ular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indi-
vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. cator system turns on.
NOTE:
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil  Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
Under no circumstances should oil change
change indicator message will illuminate. This brake master cylinder, and fill as needed.
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
means that service is required for your vehicle.
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,  Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
trailer tow, and extremely hot or cold ambient
run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet
temperatures will influence when the “Oil Change
customers.
Required” message is displayed. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next
500 miles (805 km).
8
394 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE P LAN
Refer to the Maintenance Plan for required maintenance. More frequent maintenance may be needed in severe conditions, such as dusty areas and very short
trip driving. In some extreme conditions, additional maintenance not specified in the maintenance schedule may be required.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:

 Change the oil and filter.
 Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
 Inspect the battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
 Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
 Inspect the brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and hoses.
 Inspect the engine cooling system protection and hoses.
 Inspect the exhaust system.
 Inspect the engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions, replace the engine air cleaner, as necessary.
 Inspect and replace the Evaporative System Fresh Air Filter as necessary; replacement may be more frequent if vehicle is operated in extreme dusty condi-
tions.
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge roller pivot joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 395
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first)
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends,
X X X X X X X
and replace if necessary.
Inspect the front and rear axle surfaces.
If gear oil leakage is suspected, check
the fluid level. If using your vehicle for X X X X X
police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent
trailer towing, change axle fluid.
Inspect the brake linings, replace as
X X X X X X X 8
necessary.
Inspect transfer case fluid. X
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
comes first)
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Additional Maintenance
Replace cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 mi (19,000 km).
For severe dusty driving conditions,
inspect and replace the Evaporative
System Fresh Air Filter as necessary; X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
replacement may be more frequent
depending on conditions.
Replace engine air cleaner. X X X X X
If equipped with Stop/Start, replace
accessory drive belt with OEM grade X
Mopar® belt.
Replace spark plugs. 1 X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) X X
whichever comes first.
Inspect the transfer case fluid, change for
any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or X X
frequent trailer towing.
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
comes first)
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Change the transfer case fluid. X

Inspect and replace PCV valve if
X
necessary.
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage-based only; yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
 You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have
any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
 Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could
8
cause an accident.
SCHEDULED SERVICING — DIESEL ENGINE An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the scheduled
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
 Check engine oil level.
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed
change indicator system. The oil change indicator by someone other than an authorized dealer, the  Check windshield washer fluid level.
system will remind you that it is time to take your message can be reset by referring to the steps  Check the tire inflation pressures and look for
vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. described under Instrument Cluster Display unusual wear or damage.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil Ú page 114.  Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
change indicator message will illuminate. This NOTE: brake master cylinder, and power steering, and
means that service is required for your vehicle. Under no circumstances should oil change fill as needed.
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or  Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient 12 months, whichever comes first.
temperatures will influence when the “Oil Change
Required” message is displayed. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next
500 miles (805 km).
MAINTENANCE P LAN — D IESEL FUEL UP TO B5 BIODIESEL

Refer to the Maintenance Schedules for required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:

 Change oil and filter.
 Completely fill the Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank.
 Drain water from fuel filter assembly.
 Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
 Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
 Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
 Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
 Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
 Inspect exhaust system.
 Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions. Replace engine air cleaner, as necessary.
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge roller pivot joints twice a year to prevent premature wear. 8
At Every Second Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
 Change fuel filter.
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Additional Inspections
Completely fill the Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and replace if necessary. X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid. If gear oil leakage is
suspected, check the fluid level. If using your vehicle for police,
X X X X X
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing change the axle
fluid.
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Additional Maintenance
Replace cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 mi (19,000 km).
Drain water from fuel filter assembly. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Fuel filter replacement intervals should be every second oil change and must not exceed
Replace fuel filter and drain water from the fuel filter assembly.1 20,000 miles (32,000 km) if using diesel fuel up to B5.
Replace engine air cleaner. X X X X X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,
X X
000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
Replace accessory drive belt(s). X
8
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Inspect the transfer case fluid, change for any of the following:
X X
police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
Change transfer case fluid. X
1. Under normal conditions the diesel fuel filter should be replaced every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) (every other oil change). If the vehicle is being used in severe operating conditions,
or In certain geographical areas of the country (Pennsylvania, New York, Ohio, Maryland, West Virginia, Arkansas, Oklahoma, Kansas, Iowa, Missouri and Nebraska) due to fuel
cleanliness issues, it’s recommended to replace the fuel filter every 10,000 miles (16,000 km).
WARNING! ADDITIONAL M AINTENANCE — B6 TO  Fuel filter change interval is maintained at every

second oil change. This is especially important
 You can be badly injured working on or around
B20 B IODIESEL with biodiesel usage.
a motor vehicle. Do only service work for NOTE: For more information on using biodiesel
which you have the knowledge and the right  Under no circumstances should oil change inter- Ú page 470.
equipment. If you have any doubt about your vals exceed 8,000 miles (12,875 km) or six
ability to perform a service job, take your months, whichever comes first when using
vehicle to a competent mechanic. biodiesel blends greater than 5% (B5).
 Failure to properly inspect and maintain your  The owner is required to monitor mileage for
vehicle could result in a component malfunc- B6-B20 biodiesel, the automatic oil change indi-
tion and effect vehicle handling and perfor- cator system does not reflect the use of
mance. This could cause an accident. biofuels.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L E NGINE WITH STOP/START
1 — Motor Generator Unit Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap 6 — Battery

2 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap 7 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
5.7L E NGINE WITHOUT STOP/START
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 6 — Battery

2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 7 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
5.7L E NGINE WITH STOP/START
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 6 — Battery

2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 7 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
3.0L DIESEL E NGINE
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap

2 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap 6 — Battery
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
CHECKING OIL L EVEL CAUTION! WARNING!

To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will Commercially available windshield washer
must be maintained at the correct level. Check the cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel could damage your engine. burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or
stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is working around the washer solution.
about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine
is shut off. ADDING W ASHER FLUID
After the engine has warmed up, operate the
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and defroster for a few minutes to reduce the
will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. should be checked for fluid level at regular possibility of smearing or freezing the fluid on the
There are four possible dipstick types: intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer cold windshield. Windshield washer solution used
solvent only (not radiator antifreeze). When with water as directed on the container, aids
 Crosshatched zone.
refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some cleaning action, reduces the freezing point to avoid
 Crosshatched zone marked SAFE. washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and line clogging, and is not harmful to paint or trim.
 Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low wipe the wiper blades clean. This will help blade
end of the range and MAX at the high end of the performance.
range. To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
 Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture
MIN and the MAX ends of the range. that meets or exceeds the temperature range of
NOTE: your climate. This rating information can be found
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
on most washer fluid containers. 8
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1.0 liter) of oil when the reading is
at the low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil
level to the high end of the range marking.
MAINTENANCE-F REE BATTERY CAUTION! VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free  It is essential when replacing the cables on An authorized dealer has the qualified service
battery. You will never have to add water, and the battery that the positive cable is attached personnel, special tools, and equipment to
periodic maintenance is not required. to the positive post and the negative cable is perform all service operations in an expert
attached to the negative post. Battery posts manner. Service Manuals are available which
WARNING! are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and include detailed service information for your
 Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and are identified on the battery case. Cable vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow clamps should be tight on the terminal posts attempting any procedure yourself.
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or and free of corrosion. NOTE:
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when  If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is Intentional tampering with emissions control
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery systems may void your warranty and could result in
on skin, flush the area immediately with large cables before connecting the charger to the civil penalties being assessed against you.
amounts of water Ú page 384. battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide
WARNING!
 Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep starting voltage.
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not You can be badly injured working on or around a
use a booster battery or any other booster motor vehicle. Only do service work for which
source with an output greater than 12 Volts.
PRESSURE WASHING you have the knowledge and the proper
Do not allow cable clamps to touch each Cleaning the engine compartment with a high equipment. If you have any doubt about your
other. pressure washer is not recommended. ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle
to a competent mechanic.
 Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
CAUTION!
hands after handling. Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the pressures
generated by these machines is such that
complete protection against water ingress
cannot be guaranteed.
ENGINE OIL — GAS ENGINE American Petroleum Institute (API) Materials Added To Engine Oil
Approved Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against
Engine Oil Selection — Gasoline Engine
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified the addition of any additives (other than leak
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluids by the API. The manufacturer only recommends API detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an
Ú page 473. trademark oils. engineered product and its performance may be
NOTE: impaired by supplemental additives.
The API Starburst trademark certifies
Hemi engines (5.7L) at times can tick right after 0W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils. Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
startup and then quiet down after approximately
Filters
30 seconds. This is normal and will not harm the
engine. This characteristic can be caused by short The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40 Care should be taken in disposing of used engine
drive cycles. For example, if the vehicle is started and 5W-40 engine oil. oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil
then shut off after driving a short distance. Upon filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a
restarting, you may experience a ticking sound. problem to the environment. Contact an
Other causes could be if the vehicle is unused for authorized dealer, service station or governmental
an extended period of time, incorrect oil, extended CAUTION! agency for advice on how and where used oil and
oil changes or extended idling. If the engine Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
continues to tick or if the Malfunction Indicator the chemicals can damage your engine. Such
Light (MIL) comes on, see the nearest authorized
ENGINE OIL FILTER
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
dealer. Limited Warranty. The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new
Engine Oil Selection — Diesel Engine filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection 8
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluids Synthetic Engine Oils
Ú page 473. Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils, A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used
only use synthetic API approved engine oils. for replacement. The quality of replacement filters
varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar®
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the certified filters should be used.
correct API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity
grade numbers should not be used.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER F ILTER Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal

1. With suitable tool fully loosen (six) fasteners
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 394.
on the engine air cleaner filter cover.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the
case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless
such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the Engine Air Cleaner Filter
engine compartment before starting the vehicle
with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, 1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in 2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
serious personal injury. Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
1 — Fasteners
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection NOTE:
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
The quality of replacement filters varies Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
considerably. Only high quality Mopar® certified present before replacing the engine air cleaner
filters should be used. 2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to access filter.
the engine air cleaner filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection And 1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the housing assembly with the engine air cleaner
Replacement — Except G/T Model housing assembly. filter inspection surface facing downward.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover onto
debris, if you find evidence of either dirt or debris
the housing assembly.
you should change your engine air cleaner filter.
3. Tighten the fasteners (six) on the engine air
cleaner filter assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection And 2. With suitable tool fully loosen (four) fasteners
Replacement — G/T Model on the engine air cleaner filter cover.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or 3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter cover from
debris, if you find evidence of either dirt or debris the engine air cleaner filter assembly.
you should clean your engine air cleaner filter per
the recommended procedure or replace it.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Release and remove the engine cover from
ball studs by lifting up on each side edge of
the engine cover. Engine Air Cleaner Filter
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Assembly NOTE:
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Fasteners Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
present before replacing the engine air cleaner
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter onto the
4. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the engine air cleaner filter assembly. 8
vehicle.
Engine Cover 2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover onto
the engine air cleaner filter assembly.
1 — Engine Cover Ball Stud Location
3. Tighten the fasteners (four) on the engine air
2 — Engine Cover cleaner filter assembly.
4. Install the engine cover.
G/T AIR FILTER MAINTENANCE NOTE:

Clean Engine Air Filter Do not use forced air pressure as it may damage
the filtering capabilities of the filter’s microfibers
The scheduled air filter cleaning interval is 30, and also void its warranty.
000 miles (48,280 km), or if in a dusty
environment the engine air filter should be DRAINING FUEL/WATER SEPARATOR
checked periodically to ensure optimal air flow.
1. Spray the air filter with the recommended
FILTER — D IESEL ENGINE
Mopar® air filter cleaner or apply mild The fuel/water separator filter housing is located
dishwashing detergent and water and let sit inside the frame rail, behind the left front wheel.
for at least 10 minutes to loosen dir before The best access to this water drain valve is from Fuel Filter Assembly
rinsing. under the vehicle.
1 — Water In Fuel Drain Valve
NOTE:
Never use strong detergents, high pressure, or
CAUTION!
gasoline on the air filter.  Do not drain the fuel/water separator filter
CAUTION!
2. Rinse the air filter with cool low-pressure water when the engine is running.
applied from the inside (clean side) out in If the Water In Fuel Indicator Light remains on,
 Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving
order to flush the dirt out of the filter. Continue DO NOT START the engine before you drain water
surfaces. Drain the filter into an appropriate
to rinse the filter until all traces of the cleaner from the fuel filter to avoid engine damage.
container.
have been removed.
NOTE: If the Water In Fuel Indicator Light comes on and a
If water is detected in the water separator while the
It may be necessary to repeat steps 1 and 2 if the single chime is heard while you are driving, or with
engine is running, or while the ignition switch is in
air filter is not completely clean. the ignition in the ON position, there may be a
the ON/RUN position, the Water In Fuel Indicator
3. After rinsing the air filter, gently shake off the problem with your water separator wiring or
Light will illuminate and an audible chime will be
excess water and allow air filter to dry sensor. See an authorized dealer for service.
heard. At this point, you should stop the engine
naturally. and drain the water from the filter housing.
Upon proper draining of the water from the fuel UNDERBODY MOUNTED FUEL FILTER
filter, the Water In Fuel Indicator Light will remain
illuminated for approximately 10 seconds. If the REPLACEMENT — DIESEL E NGINE
water was drained while the engine was running, NOTE:
the Water In Fuel Indicator Light may remain on for Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manufac-
approximately three minutes. turer’s filtration and water separating require-
NOTE: ments can severely impact fuel system life and reli-
Care should be taken in disposing of used fluids ability. Under normal conditions the diesel fuel
from your vehicle. Used fluids, indiscriminately filter should be replaced every 20,000 miles (every
discarded, can present a problem to the envi- other oil change). If the vehicle is being used in
ronment. Contact an authorized dealer, service severe operating conditions, or In certain Fuel Filter Assembly
station, or government agency for advice on recy- geographical areas of the country (Pennsylvania,
cling programs and for where used fluids and New York, Ohio, Maryland, West Virginia, Arkansas, 1 — Water In Fuel Drain Valve
filters can be properly disposed of in your area. Oklahoma, Kansas, Iowa, Missouri and Nebraska) 2 — Fuel Filter Access
Drain the fuel/water separator filter when the due to fuel cleanliness issues, it’s recommended
Water In Fuel Indicator Light is ON. Within to replace the fuel filter every 10,000 miles. 1. Turn engine off.
10 minutes of vehicle shutdown, turn the filter 2. Place a drain pan under the fuel filter
CAUTION!
drain valve (located on the bottom of the filter assembly.
housing) counterclockwise to drain fuel/water,  Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving
surfaces. Drain the filter into an appropriate 3. Open the water drain valve, and let any
then turn the ignition switch to the ON position,
accumulated water drain.
and allow any accumulated water to drain. Leave container. 8
the drain valve open until all water and 4. Close the water drain valve.
 Do not prefill the fuel filter when installing a
contaminants have been removed. When clean 5. Remove bottom cover using a strap wrench.
new fuel filter. There is a possibility debris
fuel is visible, close the drain valve by turning it Rotate counterclockwise for removal. Remove
could be introduced into the fuel filter during
clockwise, and turn the ignition switch to OFF. the used o-ring and discard it.
this action. It is best to install the filter dry and
If more than two ounces or 60 milliliters of fuel allow the in-tank lift pump to prime the fuel
have been drained Ú page 414. system.
6. Remove the used filter cartridge from the 3. Start the engine using the “Normal Starting” NOTE:
housing and dispose of it according to your procedure Ú page 144.  Use of biodiesel mixture in excess of 20% can
local regulations. negatively impact the fuel filter's ability to sepa-
7. Wipe the sealing surfaces of the lid and CAUTION! rate water from the fuel, resulting in high pres-
housing clean. sure fuel system corrosion or damage.
The starter motor will engage for approximately
8. Install a new o-ring into the ring groove on the 30 seconds at a time. Allow two minutes  In addition, commercially available fuel addi-
filter housing and lubricate with clean engine between cranking intervals. tives are not necessary for the proper operation
oil. of your diesel engine.
 For extreme cold conditions, "Mopar® Premium
PRIMING IF THE ENGINE HAS RUN OUT NOTE:
Diesel Fuel Treatment" is recommended to
The engine may run rough until the air is forced
OF FUEL — DIESEL E NGINE from all the fuel lines.
assist with cold starting.
I NTERVENTION REGENERATION
WARNING! WARNING!
STRATEGY — MESSAGE P ROCESS F LOW
Do not open the high pressure fuel system with Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending
the engine running. Engine operation causes agent. They can be unstable under certain
(D IESEL ENGINE)
high fuel pressure. High pressure fuel spray can conditions and be hazardous or explosive when This engine meets all required diesel engine
cause serious injury or death. mixed with diesel fuel. emissions standards. To achieve these emissions
standards, your vehicle is equipped with a
1. Add a substantial amount of fuel to the tank, state-of-the-art engine and exhaust system. These
approximately 2 to 5 gal (8 L to 19 L). CAUTION! systems are seamlessly integrated into your
vehicle and managed by the Powertrain Control
2. Press ignition switch twice without your foot on Due to lack of lubricants in alcohol or gasoline,
Module (PCM). The PCM manages engine
brake to put vehicle in ON/RUN position. This the use of these fuels can cause damage to the
combustion to allow the exhaust system’s catalyst
will activate the in tank fuel pump for approxi- fuel system.
to trap and burn Particulate Matter (PM)
mately 30 seconds. Repeat this process twice. pollutants, with no input or interaction on your part.
Additionally, your vehicle has the ability to alert you
to additional maintenance required on your vehicle
or engine Ú page 114.
WARNING! AIR CONDITIONER M AINTENANCE CAUTION!

A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park For best possible performance, your air conditioner Do not use chemical flushes in your air
over materials that can burn, such as grass or should be checked and serviced by an authorized conditioning system as the chemicals can
leaves, and those items that come into contact dealer at the start of each warm season. This damage your air conditioning components. Such
with your exhaust system. Do not park or service should include cleaning of the condenser damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
operate your vehicle in areas where your fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension Limited Warranty.
exhaust system can contact anything that can should also be checked at this time.
burn.
WARNING! Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
 Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri- R–1234yf
DIESEL E XHAUST F LUID cants approved by the manufacturer for your R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) sometimes known air conditioning system. Some unapproved Hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
simply by the name of its active component, refrigerants are flammable and can explode, Environmental Protection Agency and is an
UREA—is a key component of Selective Catalytic injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or ozone-friendly substance with a low
Reduction (SCR) systems, which help diesel lubricants can cause the system to fail, global-warming potential. It is recommended that
vehicles meet stringent emission regulations. DEF requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty air conditioning service be performed by an
is a liquid reducing agent that reacts with engine Information Book, for further warranty infor- authorized dealer using recovery and recycling
exhaust in the presence of a catalyst to convert mation. equipment.
smog-forming Nitrogen Oxides (NOx) into harmless  The air conditioning system contains refrig- NOTE:
nitrogen and water vapor. erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of Use only the manufacturer approved A/C system 8
Refer to Engine Fluids And Lubricants Ú page 473 personal injury or damage to the system, PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
for further information. adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines
to be disconnected should be done by an
experienced technician.
Cabin Air Filter Replacement

WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air filter
removed and the blower operating, the blower
can contact hands and may propel dirt and
debris into your eyes, resulting in personal injury.
Right Side Of Glove Compartment Glove Compartment
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet 1 — Glove Compartment Door 1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop
behind the glove compartment. Perform the 2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether 2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
following procedure to replace the filter: 3 — Glove Compartment Door
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all 3. There are glove compartment travel stops on
contents. both sides of the glove compartment door. 4. Disengage the glove compartment door from
2. With the glove compartment door open, Push inward on both sides of the glove its hinges by opening the glove compartment
remove the glove compartment tension tether compartment to release the glove past the travel stop and pulling it toward you.
and tether clip by sliding the clip toward the compartment travel stops.
5. Remove the filter cover by pushing in on the
face of the glove compartment door. Lift the finger tabs on each end of the filter cover.
clip out of glove compartment door and
release into dash panel.
6. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it straight 9. Pull the tension tether outward and reinstall
out of the housing. the glove compartment past the travel stops by
pushing in on the glove compartment sides.
Filter Cover
Cabin Air Filter

Glove Compartment
7. Install the cabin air filter with the arrow on the
filter pointing toward the floor. When installing 1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop
the filter cover, press on each end until you 2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
hear an audible click. 3 — Glove Compartment Door
CAUTION!
NOTE: 8
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and
Filter Cover Removal indicate airflow direction through the filter. glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged.
Failure to properly install the filter will result in
1 — Finger Tabs the need to replace it more often. 10. Reattach the glove compartment tension
tether by inserting the tether clip in the glove
compartment and sliding the clip away from
8. Reinstall the glove compartment on the the face of the glove compartment door.
hinges.
ACCESSORY D RIVE BELT INSPECTION NOTE:

Identify and correct problem before new belt is
WARNING! installed.
NOTE:
 Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive
If your vehicle is equipped with a Stop/Start, belt
belt with vehicle running.
must be replaced with an OEM grade Mopar® belt.
 When working near the radiator cooling fan, Some conditions can be caused by a faulty
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys
temperature controlled and can start at any should be carefully inspected for damage and
time regardless of ignition mode. You could be proper alignment.
injured by the moving fan blades. Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Belt replacement on some models requires the
 You can be badly injured working on or around Conditions that would require replacement: use of special tools, we recommend having your
a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which  Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
you have the knowledge and the proper equip- from belt body)
ment. If you have any doubt about your ability BODY LUBRICATION
to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a  Rib or belt wear
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
competent mechanic.  Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and
ribs) rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small  Belt slips hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically. Use
cracks that run across the ribbed surface of the  “Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain a lithium-based grease, such as Mopar® Spray
belt from rib to rib, are considered normal. This is correct position on pulley) White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to
not a reason to replace the belt. However, cracks protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
 Belt broken application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
running along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any
belt with cracks running along a rib must be  Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit;
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has is heard or felt while drive belt is in operation) after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
excessive wear, frayed cords or severe glazing. removed. Particular attention should also be given
to hood latching components to ensure proper
function. When performing other underhood
services, the hood latch release mechanism, and
safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated The wiper blades and wiper arms should be 1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off
twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. inspected periodically, not just when wiper of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full
Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant, performance problems are experienced. This up position.
such as Mopar® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly inspection should include the following points:
into the lock cylinder.  Wear or uneven edges
WINDSHIELD WIPER B LADES  Foreign material
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the  Hardening or cracking
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth  Deformation or fatigue
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace
accumulations of salt or road film. the affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long not attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper damaged.
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice CAUTION! 1 — Wiper Blade
from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of 2 — Wiper Arm
contact with petroleum products such as engine Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade in 3 — Release Tab
oil, gasoline, etc.
place or the glass may be damaged.
NOTE: 8
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. If chat-
tering, marks, water lines or wet spots are present,
clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper Installing The Front Wipers
arm, press the release tab on the wiper blade WARNING!
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
and while holding the wiper arm with one wiper arm is in the full up position.  Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
hand, slide the wiper blade down towards the Carbon Monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
base of the wiper arm. 2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the
odorless. Breathing it can make you uncon-
tip of the wiper arm.
scious and can eventually poison you. To
3. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the avoid breathing CO see Ú page 368.
wiper arm, latch engagement will be
accompanied by an audible click.  A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such mate-
4. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass. rials might be grass or leaves coming into
contact with your exhaust system. Do not park
EXHAUST SYSTEM or operate your vehicle in areas where your
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry exhaust system can contact anything that can
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained burn.
engine exhaust system.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust CAUTION!
system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected
1 — Wiper Blade  The catalytic converter requires the use of
inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of
2 — Wiper Arm J Hook the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
3 — J Hook Retainer technician inspect the complete exhaust system destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an
and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, emissions control device and may seriously
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams reduce engine performance and cause
wiper blade from the wiper arm. or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes serious damage to the engine.
to seep into the passenger compartment. In (Continued)
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass. addition, have the exhaust system inspected each
time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter

CAUTION! damage: WARNING!
 Damage to the catalytic converter can result if  Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmis-  When working near the radiator cooling fan,
your vehicle is not kept in proper operating sion is in gear and the vehicle is in motion. disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the igni-
condition. In the event of engine malfunction, tion to the OFF mode. The fan is temperature
 Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
particularly involving engine misfire or other controlled and can start at any time the igni-
towing the vehicle.
apparent loss of performance, have your tion is in the ON mode.
vehicle serviced promptly. Continued opera-  Do not idle the engine with any ignition compo-
tion of your vehicle with a severe malfunction nents disconnected or removed, such as when
diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods Engine Coolant Checks
could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter during very rough idle or malfunctioning oper- Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection
and vehicle. ating conditions. every 12 months (before the onset of freezing
weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant is
COOLING SYSTEM dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic drained, flushed and refilled with fresh coolant.
converter will not require maintenance. However, it WARNING! Check the front of the A/C condenser (if equipped)
is important to keep the engine properly tuned to or radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,
assure proper catalyst operation and prevent  You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
possible catalyst damage. garden hose vertically down the face of the A/C
radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from
NOTE: under the hood, do not open the hood until the condenser (if equipped) or the back of the radiator
Intentional tampering with emissions control radiator has had time to cool. Never open a core.
systems can result in civil penalties being 8
cooling system pressure cap when the radi- Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle
assessed against you. ator or coolant bottle is hot. rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the
In unusual situations involving grossly connection at the coolant recovery bottle and
malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor  Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away
radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.
may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is
raised. The fan starts automatically and may DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off
start at any time, whether the engine is WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a
tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should running or not.
be obtained immediately. (Continued)
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill  Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine Please review these recommendations for using
coolant products. Do not use additional rust Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant
NOTE: inhibitors or anti-rust products, as they may not that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant be compatible with the radiator engine coolant Material Standard MS.90032. When adding
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly and may plug the radiator. engine coolant:
could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any
coolant is needed to be added to the system  This vehicle has not been designed for use with  We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/
please contact an authorized dealer. propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not Formula OAT that meets the requirements of the
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
recommended. manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant  Some vehicles require special tools to add  Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
(conforming to MS.90032). coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems coolant that meets the requirements of the
properly could lead to severe internal engine manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
Selection Of Coolant the system please contact an authorized dealer. (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
For further information Ú page 473. −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact
Adding Coolant
an authorized dealer for assistance.
NOTE: Your vehicle has been built with an improved
 Use only high purity water such as distilled or
 Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance deionized water when mixing the water/engine
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT)
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be coolant solution. The use of lower quality water
engine coolant, may result in engine damage
used up to 10 years or 150,000 miles will reduce the amount of corrosion protection
and may decrease corrosion protection. OAT
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent in the engine cooling system.
engine coolant is different and should not be
mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology reducing this extended maintenance period, it is
(HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally compat- important that you use the same engine coolant
ible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout
introduced into the cooling system in an emer- the life of your vehicle.
gency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE: The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there Disposal Of Used Coolant
 It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the is any accumulation of foreign material on the
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is
proper level of protection against freezing sealing surfaces.
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal.
according to the temperatures occurring in the Check with your local authorities to determine the
area where the vehicle is operated. WARNING!
disposal rules for your community. To prevent
 Some vehicles require special tools to add  Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never ingestion by animals or children, do not store
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers
properly could lead to severe internal engine engine is overheated. Do not loosen or or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground,
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. clean up any ground spills immediately. If ingested,
the system, please contact an authorized Heat causes pressure to build up in the seek emergency assistance immediately.
dealer. cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
Checking Coolant Level — 3.6L Engine
do not remove the pressure cap while the
 Mixing engine coolant types is not recom- The level of the coolant in the pressurized coolant
system is hot or under pressure.
mended and can result in cooling system bottle should be between the “MIN” and “MAX”
damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in  Do not use a pressure cap other than the one range on the bottle when the engine is cold.
an emergency, have an authorized dealer drain, specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to The radiator normally remains completely full, so
engine damage may result.
MS.90032) as soon as possible. there is no need to remove the cap unless
checking for coolant freeze point or replacing
Cooling System Pressure Cap engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of attendant of this. As long as the engine operating
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle 8
engine coolant will return to the radiator from the need only be checked once a month. When
coolant expansion bottle/recovery tank (if additional engine coolant is needed to maintain
equipped). the proper level, it should be added to the coolant
bottle. Do not overfill.
Checking Coolant Level — 5.7L Engines When additional engine coolant is needed to  Maintain engine coolant concentration at a
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
With the engine off and cold, the level of the engine
coolant bottle. Do not overfill. MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corro-
coolant should be between the ADD and SAFE
sion protection of your engine which contains
range on the dipstick. Cooling System Notes
aluminum components.
To check the coolant level: NOTE:  Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
1. Open the coolant reservoir. When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilo- overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
meters of operation, you may observe vapor
2. Lift and remove the plastic dipstick from the  Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
coming from the front of the engine compartment.
reservoir neck. vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep
This is normally a result of moisture from rain,
snow, or high humidity accumulating on the the front of the condenser clean.
radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat  Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to Winter operation. If replacement is ever neces-
enter the radiator. sary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat.
If an examination of your engine compartment Other designs may result in unsatisfactory
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the engine cooling performance, poor gas mileage,
vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon and increased emissions.
dissipate.
CHARGE AIR COOLER — I NTER-COOLER
 Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
(D IESEL ENGINE)
 Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
Coolant Reservoir Dipstick and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine The charge air cooler is positioned in front of the
coolant needs to be added, the contents of the radiator and the air conditioner condenser. Air
3. Check the coolant level on the dipstick.
coolant expansion bottle must also be protected enters the engine through the air cleaner and
The radiator normally remains completely full, so against freezing. passes through the turbocharger, where it is
there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless pressurized. This pressurized air rapidly reaches
 If frequent engine coolant additions are
checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze high temperature. The air is then directed through
required, the cooling system should be pressure
point or replacing engine coolant. Advise your a hose to the charge air cooler and through
tested for leaks.
service attendant of this. As long as the engine another hose to the intake manifold of the engine.
operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant This cooling process enables more efficient
bottle need only be checked once a month. burning of fuel resulting in fewer emissions.
To guarantee optimum performance of the system, Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
keep the surfaces of the charge air cooler, WARNING!
The fluid level of the brake master cylinder should
condenser and radiator clean and free of debris.  To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced, or
Periodically check the hoses leading to and from moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
immediately if the Brake System Warning Light is
the charge air cooler for cracks or loose clamps has been in a tightly closed container. Keep
on. If necessary, add fluid to bring level within the
resulting in loss of pressure and reduced engine the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at
designated marks on the side of the reservoir of
performance. all times. Brake fluid in an open container
the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top
absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a
BRAKE SYSTEM of the master cylinder area before removing cap.
lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil
With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall
In order to ensure brake system performance, all as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
brake system components should be inspected checked when pads are replaced. If the brake fluid braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This
periodically Ú page 394. is abnormally low, check the system for leaks could result in a collision.
Ú page 476.  Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result
WARNING!
in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts,
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and WARNING! causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting  Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl
or riding on the brake pedal can result in fluid Ú page 476. Using the wrong type of surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its
abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive brake fluid can severely damage your brake contact with these surfaces.
lining wear, and possible brake damage. You system and/or impair its performance. The  Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contam-
would not have your full braking capacity in an proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is inate the brake fluid. Brake seal components
emergency. also identified on the original factory installed could be damaged, causing partial or
8
hydraulic master cylinder reservoir. complete brake failure. This could result in a
(Continued) collision.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Fluid Level Check Fluid And Filter Changes

The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
Special Additives
require adjustment under normal operating installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
The manufacturer strongly recommends against conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
using any special additives in the transmission. required, therefore the transmission has no Routine fluid and filter changes are not required.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
engineered product and its performance may be transmission fluid level using special service tools. becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the
impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission transmission is disassembled for any reason.
not add any fluid additives to the transmission.
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may Selection Of Lubricant
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
adversely affect seals. It is important to use the proper transmission fluid
checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper
fluid level can cause severe transmission damage. to ensure optimum transmission performance and
CAUTION! life. Use only the manufacturer recommended
Do not use chemical flushes in your CAUTION! transmission fluid Ú page 476. It is important to
transmission as the chemicals can damage your maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an using the recommended fluid. No chemical flushes
transmission components. Such damage is not
authorized dealer immediately. Severe should be used in any transmission; only the
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
transmission damage may occur. An authorized approved lubricant should be used.
dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid
level accurately. CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause
deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or
torque converter shudder Ú page 476.
REAR AXLE AND 4X4 F RONT DRIVING Limited-Slip Differentials FUSES

AXLE FLUID L EVEL Rear axles equipped with a Limited Slip Differential
General Information
require that 5 oz. (148 ml) Mopar® Limited Slip
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are Additive be added to the gear lubricant
not required. When the vehicle is serviced for other WARNING!
Ú page 476. The Mopar® Limited Slip Additive
reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be added to the gear lubricant whenever a  When replacing a blown fuse, always use an
should be inspected. If gear oil leakage is fluid change is made to an axle equipped with a appropriate replacement fuse with the same
suspected inspect the fluid level Ú page 476. This Limited Slip Differential. amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace
inspection should be made with the vehicle in a a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating.
NOTE:
level position. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indi-
When refilling a limited slip differential axle which
The fluid level should be even with the bottom of requires a friction modification additive, the cated may result in a dangerous electrical
the fill hole (within 1/4 in (6.4 mm) of edge of hole) additive should be added before the gear lubricant system overload. If a properly rated fuse
for the front axle and rear axle. to ensure proper additive fill. continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the
circuit that must be corrected. Never replace a
Drain And Refill TRANSFER C ASE blown fuse with metal wires or any other mate-
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 394. rial. Do not place a fuse inside a circuit
Fluid Level Check breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to use
Lubricant Selection
This fluid level can be checked by removing the proper fuses may result in serious personal
For further information Ú page 476. filler plug. The fluid level should be to the bottom injury, fire and/or property damage.
NOTE: edge of the filler plug hole (or within 1/8 inch of the
 Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
The presence of water in the gear lubricant will bottom) with the vehicle in a level position.
ignition is off and that all the other services 8
result in corrosion and possible failure of differ-
Drain And Refill are switched off and/or disengaged.
ential components. Operation of the vehicle in
water, as may be encountered in some off-highway For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 394.  If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
types of service, will require draining and refilling Selection Of Lubricant authorized dealer.
the axle to avoid damage.
Use only the manufacturer recommended fluid  If a general protection fuse for safety systems
Ú page 476. (air bag system, braking system), power unit
systems (engine system, transmission
system) or steering system blows, contact an
authorized dealer.
External Power Distribution Center

CAUTION!
The Power Distribution Center is located in the
If it is necessary to wash the engine engine compartment near the battery. This center
compartment, take care not to directly hit the contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and
fuse box, and the windshield wiper motors with circuit breakers. A description of each fuse and
water. component may be stamped on the inside cover,
otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is
The fuses protect electrical systems against stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to
excessive current. the following chart.
When a device does not work, you must check the
Blade Fuses CAUTION!
fuse element inside the blade fuse for a break/
melt. 1 — Fuse Element  When installing the power distribution center
Also, please be aware that using power outlets for 2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
extended periods of time with the engine off may element properly positioned and fully latched. Failure
result in vehicle battery discharge. to do so may allow water to get into the power
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse el-
distribution center and possibly result in an
ement (blown fuse)
electrical system failure.
Underhood Power Distribution Center 8
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

* If Equipped
F01 – 25 Amp Clear Fuel Pump Motor
F02 – – Spare
F03 – 5 Amp Tan MGU *
F04 – – Spare

* If Equipped
F05 – – Spare
F06 – 10 Amp Red OUTPUT TO UPFITTER PDC *
F07 – – Spare
F08 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup
F09 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Stop / Turn Lamp Left
F10 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Stop / Turn Lamp Right
F11 – 15 Amp Blue ID/CLEARANCE LIGHTS *
F12 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Park Lamp
F13 – – Spare
F14 – 10 Amp Red AC Clutch
F15 – 5 Amp Tan Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
F16 – – Spare *
F17 – 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension
F18 – 15 Amp Blue AGS / Rear Axle Cooling Valve / Active Air Dam
F19 – – Spare
F20 – 20 Amp Yellow Adjustable Pedals *
F21 30 Amp Pink – Power Side Step *
F22 50 Amp Red – Air Module *
F23 – – Spare
F24 – 20 Amp Yellow TCM SBW

* If Equipped
F25 40 Amp Green – MOD CBC 4 Exterior Lights 2
F26 50 Amp Red – ESP Module
F27 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper
F28 – 10 Amp Red PCM / ECM
F29 40 Amp Green – ESP Module
F30 – – Spare
F31 – – Spare
F32 20 Amp Blue – ECM / PCM
F33 30 Amp Pink – Brake Vacuum Pump
F34 – – Spare
PCM / ECM / Power Pack Unit (PPU) Motor Generator Unit
F35 – 10 Amp Red
(MGU) Wake Up * / EPS / ESP
F36 – – Spare
F37 – 5 Amp Tan R / S Output to iPDC 8
F38 – 10 Amp Red DTCM / Active CL TEMP VLV
F39 – 15 Amp Blue MOD ATMM *
F40 40 Amp Green – Starter
F41 – 10 Amp Red IRCAM Heaters
F42 20 Amp Blue – AUX SWITCH #5 *
F43 – 20 Amp Yellow MGU Coolant Pump / ADCM *

* If Equipped
F44 – 10 Amp Red Trailer Camera *
F45 – 10 Amp Red ADCM *
F46 30 Amp Pink – Fuel Heater *
F47 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster
F48 – – Spare
F49 30 Amp Pink – Htr Ctrl *
F50 20 Amp Blue – AUX SWITCH #6 *
F51 25 Amp White – FUEL PUMP MOTOR #1 *
F52 – – Spare
F53 – 10 Amp Red Supply / Purging Pump *
15 Amp Blue PCM *
F54 –
10 Amp Red Vapor Blocking Valve *
F55 – 15 Amp Blue RT HID Headlamp
F56 – – Spare
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F58 25 Amp White – FUEL PUMP MOTOR #2 *
F59 – 25 Amp Clear Injectors / IGN Coil / Glow Plug Module *
F60 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM / PCM / ACT Short Running Valve / LTR Coolant Pump *
F61 – 15 Amp Blue LT HID Headlamp

* If Equipped
60 Amp Blue Glow Plug *
F62 –
40 Amp Green LTR Coolant Pump *
F63 20 Amp Blue – NOx Sensor *
F64 – 10 Amp Red PM Sensor *
Internal Power Distribution Center See below steps for accessing fuses: 2. After removing the screws, gently pull both the
1. Locate and remove the two screws from the left and right side of the fuse panel cover to
The Power Distribution Center is located under the
lower portion of the fuse panel cover. release the fastener clips.
driver’s side instrument panel. This center
contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and
circuit breakers.
Fuse Panel Screws Location Interior Fuse Box Location

3. Reverse the procedure to reinstall the fuse
Fuse Cover Panel panel cover.
Internal Fuse Chart

* If Equipped
F01 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Receptacle
F02 – – Spare
F03 – 20 Amp Yellow Module Seat Heater Front (Pass)
F04 – – Spare
F05 – 20 Amp Yellow Module PPU Cooling Fan *
F06 – – Spare
F07 40 Amp Green – Mod CBC 3 PWR Locks
F08 – – Spare
F09 – – Spare
F10 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blower Motor
Output to Under-hood Power Distribution Center (UPDC) Run
F11 – 5 Amp Tan
Coil
F12 – 25 Amp Clear Mod Audio Amplifier / Active Noise Cancellation
F13 – 20 Amp Yellow Mod Seat Heater Front (Driver)
F14 – 15 Amp Blue Mod Seat Heater Front (Steering Wheel)
F15 – – Spare
F16 – – Spare
F17 – 20 Amp Yellow LT Spot Lamp *
F18 30 Amp Pink – Motor Sunshade Sunroof

* If Equipped
F19 – – Spare
F20 – 20 Amp Yellow Comfort Rear Seat Module (CRSM) (Heat Rear RT)
F21 – – Spare
F22 – – Spare
F23 – – Spare
F24 – 15 Amp Blue Mod RF Hub / Mod Ignition / Mod Cluster CNN
F25 40 Amp Green – Mod Integrated Trailer Brake
Mod Cluster CCN / Mod Cyber Security / Trailer Gateway
F26 – 15 Amp Blue
Module (360 Camera)
F27 – 5 Amp Tan Mod Cluster CCN / Mod SGW
F28 – 10 Amp Red Mod ORC
F29 – 20 Amp Yellow Mod CRSM (Heat Rear LT)
F30 30 Amp Pink – Mod DTCM / Mod Tailgate
F31 30 Amp Pink – Mod CBC 1 Interior Light 8
F32 – 20 Amp Yellow RT Spot Lamp *
Assy Overhead Console / Switch 911 / Switch Assist /
F33 – 10 Amp Red
Sunshade / HUD
F34 – 15 Amp Blue Frt & RR Ventilated Seat Motor
Mod Inverter / Mtr Sunshade Sunroof / Mtr Dual Sunroof /
F35 – 10 Amp Red
USB Charge Only
F36 40 Amp Green – Mod CBC 2 Exterior Light 1

* If Equipped
F37 – – Spare
F38 – – Spare
F39 – – Spare
F40 20 Amp Blue – Dome Pursuit Vehicle *
Lumbar Support & Pass SW / Steering Column Control
F41 A&B – 15 Amp Blue Module / HVAC Control Module / ICS Switch Bank / Upper
Switch Bank
Mod Transfer Case Switch Module (TCSM) / SBW / Electric
F42 A&B – 10 Amp Red Park Brake SW / Module TPM Trailer / Module Gateway Can-C
Trailer TPM / Seat LT & RT Vent
F43 A&B – 10 Amp Red Port Diagnostics / Front & Rear USB
Radio / DCSD / Telematics Box Mod / Trailer Gateway Module
F44 – 20 Amp Yellow
(360)
F45 30 Amp Pink – Mod Door MUX Driver
F46 30 Amp Pink – Mod Door MUX Passenger
F47 – – Spare
Rear View Mirror / SW Window Passenger / Rear USB /
F48A – 10 Amp Red
Wireless Charging Pad Mod
Mod CVPM / SNSR Blind Spot / HDLP Adaptive Front Lighting
F49 – 15 Amp Blue
Sensor (AFLS)
F50A – 10 Amp Red Battery PACK Control Mod *
F51 A&B – – Spare

* If Equipped
F52 20 Amp Blue – Direct Battery Feed *
Trailer Reverse Steering Control / Trailer Steering Control
F53 – 10 Amp Red
Knob
Power Outlet Center Seat Battery Fed Position
F54A & F54B – 20 Amp Yellow
Power Outlet Center Seat Ignition Fed Position
F55 25 Amp White – Upfitter *
F56 30 Amp Pink – Mod Network Interface *
F60 50 Amp Red – Mod Inverter
F61 – – Spare
ITBM / Mod Occupant Class / Mod IAIR Suspension / Mod
HVAC / Snsr In car Temp / Integrated Radar Camera Mod
F62 A&B – 10 Amp Red
(IRCM) / Humidity Rain & Light Sensor (HRLS) / Parktronics
System Mod (PTS) / Gateway Can-C Trailer TPM Mod 8
F63 – – Spare
F64 – – Spare
F65 – 10 Amp Red Mod ORC
F66 – 10 Amp Red Run - Accessory Feed
Circuit Breakers
Cavity Circuit Breaker Description

Driver Window SW Rear PWR Windows / Overhead
CB1 25 Amp
SW Rear Defrost
CB2 25 Amp Driver PWR Seat / Driver Seat Memory Mod
Passenger Power Seat / Passenger Seat Memory
CB3 25 Amp
Mod
BULB R EPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this section includes bulb description and replacement part numbers. All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass-wedge
base. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Overhead Console Lamps TS 212–9
Dome Lamp 7679
NOTE:
For lighted switches, see an authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Low Beam (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) H11LL
High Beam (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) 9005LL
Low & High Beam (LED Reflector Headlamp) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Low & High Beam (LED Projector Headlamp) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Turn Signal / Front Position (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) 7444NA
Turn Signal / Front Position (LED Headlamps) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Side Marker (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) W5W
Front Side Marker (LED Headlamps) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Fog Lamps (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) H11LL
Front Fog Lamps (LED Headlamps) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Side Indicators (Front And Side View Mirror) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Base Rear Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp 7440LL/W21WLL
Premium Rear Tail/Turn/Backup and Stop Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
8
Base Backup Lamp 7440/W21W
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) 921
Cargo Lamp 921
Rear License Plate Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Base Turn Lamp 7440NA / WY21W
Replacing Exterior Bulbs NOTE: High Beam

It may be necessary to remove/reposition Air
BASE QUAD: LOW BEAM HEADLAMP, HIGH Cleaner Assembly to access passenger side
BEAM HEADLAMP, FRONT PARK AND TURN — headlamp/side marker light bulbs.
IF EQUIPPED 4. Disengage the bulb access cover by rotating
Low Beam counterclockwise.
See below steps to replace: 5. Disconnect the internal lamp wiring harness
connector from the low beam bulb.
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery CAUTION!
cable.
 Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching
3. Locate the low beam access cover, which can it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact High Beam Headlight Cover
be found on the back side of the headlamps. other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will
result. See below steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
 Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type 2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery
may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, cable.
the bulb socket, or the lamp wiring. 3. Locate the high beam access cover, which can
be found on the back side of the headlamps.
6. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter NOTE:
turn to unlock the bulb from the lamp. It may be necessary to remove/reposition Air
7. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing. Cleaner Assembly to access passenger side
headlamp/side marker light bulbs.
8. Reverse the procedure for installation of new
Low Beam Headlight Cover
bulb and covers.
4. Reach behind the headlamp and disengage Front Park And Turn 4. Reach behind the headlamp and unlock the
the access cover by rotating counterclockwise. See below steps to replace: park and turn socket from the lamp by rotating
5. Disconnect the internal lamp wiring harness counterclockwise a quarter turn.
1. Open the hood.
connector from the high beam bulb. 5. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery
cable. 6. Separate the bulb from the socket without
CAUTION! twisting.
3. Locate the park and turn socket, which can be
 Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching 7. Reverse the procedure for installation of new
found on the back side of the headlamps.
it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact bulb and covers.
other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will
result. Side Marker Lamp
 Always use the correct bulb size and type for See below steps to replace:
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type 1. Open the hood.
may overheat and cause damage to the lamp,
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery
the bulb socket, or the lamp wiring.
cable.
3. Locate the side marker lamp, which can be
6. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter found on the back side of the headlamps.
turn to unlock the bulb from the lamp.
7. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
Park And Turn Socket
8. Reverse the procedure for installation of new 8
bulb and cover.
Side Marker Lamp

4. Disengage the side marker socket by rotating REAR TAIL/STOP, TURN SIGNAL AND BACKUP
counterclockwise a quarter turn. LAMPS
5. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the See below steps to replace:
housing.
1. Remove the two screws and push pin
6. Separate the bulb from the socket without retainers that pass through the bed sheet
twisting. metal.
7. Reverse the procedure for installation of new
bulb and covers.
FOG LAMPS — IF EQUIPPED

Fog Lamp Bulb
Please see an authorized dealer for service on LED
and Halogen front fog lamps. 3. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter
turn to unlock the bulb from the housing.
Halogen
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
See below steps to replace:
5. Reverse the procedure to install the bulb and
1. Reach under and behind the front fascia/ cover.
bumper to access the back of the front fog
lamp housing. Tail Lamp Locations
2. Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness
CAUTION!
1 — Tail Lamp
connector from the fog lamp bulb. Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it 2 — Fasteners
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other 3 — Push - Pin Retainers
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
2. Pull the outboard side of the lamp rearward far

enough to unsnap the two receptacles on the
outboard side of the lamp housing from the
two plastic snap post retainers in the outer box
side panel.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
6. Reverse the procedure to install the bulb and

housing.
CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP (CHMSL)

Tail Lamp Removal WITH CARGO LAMP CHMSL Bulb Location
3. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors See below steps to replace: 3. Turn the desired bulb socket a quarter turn
from the bulb socket. 1. Remove the four screws holding the housing/ counterclockwise and remove the socket and
lens to the body as shown. bulb from housing.
4. Pull the desired bulb straight from the socket.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contract
other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will 8
result.
 Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps

Wiring Harness Connector  Inside Bulb: Center High Mounted Stop
4. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise a CHMSL Mounting Screw Locations Lamp
quarter turn to unlock it from the housing. 2. Separate the connector holding the housing 5. Reverse the procedure for installation of bulbs
5. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket. and wiring harness to the body. and housing.
TIRES Tire Markings NOTE:

 P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter
“P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the designation.
following information: Tire Markings, Tire Example: P215/65R15 95H.
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.  European — Metric tire sizing is based on Euro-
pean design standards. Tires designed to this
standard have the tire size molded into the side-
wall beginning with the section width. The letter
"P" is absent from this tire size designation.
Example: 215/65R15 96H.
Tire Markings  LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code US design standards. The size designation for
LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires
(TIN) except for the letters “LT” that are molded into
2 — Size Designation the sidewall preceding the size designation.
3 — Service Description Example: LT235/85R16.
 Temporary spare tires are designed for tempo-
4 — Maximum Load
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pres-
5 — Maximum Pressure sure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Tempera- “S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
ture Grades
 High flotation tire sizing is based on US design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter
molded into the sidewall.
Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
 Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
 "R" means radial construction, or
 "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in) 8
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
 A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
 A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
 The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading,
road conditions, and posted speed limits)
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
 XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
 LL = Light load tire or
 C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The Tire Identification Number (TIN) may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls
will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
 This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
 03 means the 3rd week
EXAMPLE:
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
 01 means the year 2001
 Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could
represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa
(kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
Maximum Inflation Pressure
this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure The manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the 8
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure This placard tells you important information about
the:
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on 1. Number of people that can be carried in the
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the vehicle.
driver's side door. 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear,
inflate to the recommended pressure for your
and spare tires.
vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar) Loading
Tire And Loading Information Placard The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your
vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying
capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions,
tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified
on the Tire and Loading Information placard in
Vehicle Loading Ú page 211.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Gross
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWR, vehicle loading,
Tire And Loading Information Placard and trailer towing Ú page 211.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of (4) The resulting figure equals the Metric Example For Load Limit
your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined available amount of cargo and luggage For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and
weight of occupants and cargo should never
load capacity. For example, if “XXX” there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle,
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading the amount of available cargo and luggage load
Information placard. The combined weight of amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as
occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue be five 150 lb passengers in your
shown in step 4.
weight (if applicable) should never exceed the vehicle, the amount of available cargo
weight referenced here. and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. NOTE:
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)  If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
Steps For Determining Correct Load your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Limit— (5) Determine the combined weight of The following table shows examples on how to
(1) Locate the statement “The combined luggage and cargo being loaded on the calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing
weight of occupants and cargo should vehicle. That weight may not safely capacities of your vehicle with varying seating
exceed the available cargo and luggage configurations and number and size of occu-
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your pants. This table is for illustration purposes only
vehicle's placard. load capacity calculated in Step 4.
and may not be accurate for the seating and
(2) Determine the combined weight of (6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load carry capacity of your vehicle.
the driver and passengers that will be load from your trailer will be transferred  For the following example, the combined weight
riding in your vehicle. to your vehicle. Consult this manual to of occupants and cargo should never exceed
determine how this reduces the 865 lbs (392 kg).
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
available cargo and luggage load 8
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
capacity of your vehicle.
XXX lbs.

Safety Both underinflation and overinflation affect the

WARNING! stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. WARNING! sluggish response or over responsiveness in the
Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle steering.
 Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
handling, and increase your stopping distance. can cause collisions. NOTE:
Use tires of the recommended load capacity for
 Underinflation increases tire flexing and can  Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
your vehicle. Never overload them.
result in overheating and tire failure. cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
TIRES — G ENERAL I NFORMATION  Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion
 Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Tire Pressure can cause damage that result in tire failure.
Fuel Economy
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the  Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire resulting in loss of vehicle control. resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
pressure: Tread Wear
 Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
 Safety problems. You could lose control of your Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
 Fuel Economy vehicle. abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
 Tread Wear  Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
 Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
drift to the right or left. Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable 8
ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and
 Always drive with each tire inflated to the
uncomfortable ride.
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Tire Inflation Pressures Check tire pressures more often if subject to a

wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire WARNING!
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
pressures vary with temperature changes. High speed driving with your vehicle under
the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's
side door. Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi maximum load is dangerous. The added strain
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. on your tires could cause them to fail. You could
At least once a month: have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle
Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure
 Check and adjust tire pressure with a good inside a garage, especially in the Winter. loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
make a visual judgment when determining
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated
even when they are underinflated.
the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased Radial Ply Tires
by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for
 Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature WARNING!
damage. condition.
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
CAUTION! Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce handle poorly. The instability could cause a
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will will be too low. four. Never combine them with other types of
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the tires.
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem. Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where Tire Repair
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct it meets the following criteria:
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least  The tire has not been driven on when flat
tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)  The damage is only on the tread section of your
required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold tire (sidewall damage is not repairable)
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment
tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating  The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. (6 mm)
sidewall.
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at Tread Wear Indicators
and additional information. full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have Run Flat mode.
tires to help you in determining when your tires
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced For more information Ú page 328. should be replaced.
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
Tire Spinning
size and service description (Load Index and
Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions,
as well as it is not designed to be reused. do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped continuously without stopping.
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive For further information Ú page 389.
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of WARNING!
inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run
Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could Tire Tread
reaches the Run Flat mode it has limited driving
capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. explode and injure someone. Do not spin your 1 — Worn Tire
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a Run Flat vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
2 — New Tire
tire is changed after driving with underinflated tire for more than 30 seconds continuously when
condition, please replace the TPMS sensor as it is you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
not designed to be reused when driven under Run spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. These indicators are molded into the bottom of the 8
Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition. tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the
tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm).
NOTE: When the tread is worn to the tread wear
The TPMS Sensor must be replaced after driving indicators, the tire should be replaced.
the vehicle on a flat tire condition.
For further information Ú page 454.
Life Of Tire Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as

little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires WARNING!
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.  Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
factors including, but not limited to:
Replacement Tires speed rating other than that specified for your
 Driving style vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved
 Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pres- The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of tires and wheels may change suspension
sures can cause uneven wear patterns to many characteristics. They should be inspected dimensions and performance characteristics,
develop across the tire tread. These abnormal regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in pressures. The manufacturer strongly braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpre-
the need for earlier tire replacement recommends that you use tires equivalent to the dictable handling and stress to steering and
originals in size, quality and performance when suspension components. You could lose
 Distance driven replacement is needed Ú page 453. Refer to the control and have a collision resulting in
 Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V Tire and Loading Information placard or the serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
or higher, and Summer tires typically have a Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your vehicle.
the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly your tire will be found on the original equipment
recommended tire sidewall.  Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
For more information relating to the Load Index
WARNING! and Speed Symbol of a tire Ú page 445.
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a
smaller load index could result in tire over-
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after It is recommended to replace the two front tires or loading and failure. You could lose control and
six years, regardless of the remaining tread. two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can have a collision.
Failure to follow this warning can result in seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever
sudden tire failure. You could lose control and replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s  Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
have a collision resulting in serious injury or specifications match those of the original wheels. adequate speed capability can result in
death. sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any
NOTE: questions you may have on tire specifications or
Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well when capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and
tires. ride of your vehicle.
Summer tires do not contain the all season authorized tire dealer for recommended safe
CAUTION! designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
Replacing original tires with tires of a different tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four; pressures.
size may result in false speedometer and failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and While studded tires improve performance on ice,
odometer readings. handling of your vehicle. skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces
may be poorer than that of non-studded tires.
WARNING! Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local
TIRE TYPES laws should be checked before using these tire
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions.
All Season Tires — If Equipped You could lose vehicle control, resulting in types.
severe injury or death. Driving too fast for
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
conditions also creates the possibility of loss of
SPARE T IRES — IF E QUIPPED
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season tires. vehicle control. NOTE:
All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S, For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all Snow Tires of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so “In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
Some areas of the country require the use of snow
may adversely affect the safety and handling of
tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified CAUTION!
your vehicle.
by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If sidewall. Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car
Equipped If you need snow tires, select tires wash with a compact or limited use temporary
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry equivalent in size and type to the spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may 8
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in original equipment tires. Use snow tires result.
snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with only in sets of four; failure to do so may
Summer tires, be aware these tires are not adversely affect the safety and handling of your
designed for Winter or cold driving conditions. vehicle. For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient designated for temporary emergency use
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads Ú page 220.
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
are covered with ice or snow. For more should not be operated at sustained speeds over
information, contact an authorized dealer. 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
And Wheel — If Equipped conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
since the wheel is designed specifically for the and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and compact spare tire. Do not install more than one opportunity.
wheel equivalent in look and function to the compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any
original equipment tire and wheel found on the Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
given time. properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If collapsible tire using the electric air pump before
WARNING! lowering the vehicle.
your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized
tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation Compact and collapsible spares are for Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
pattern. temporary emergency use only. With these conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel,
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph since the wheel is designed specifically for the
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited collapsible spare tire.
The compact spare is for temporary emergency tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire WARNING!
equipped with a compact spare by looking at the needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to Compact and Collapsible spares are for
Information Placard located on the driver’s side do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of temporary emergency use only. With these
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. vehicle control. spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation. tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread
Example: T145/80D18 103M. Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at the do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) spare tire description on the Tire and Loading vehicle control.
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first Information Placard located on the driver’s side
opportunity. door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description
example: 165/80-17 101P.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration

WARNING! caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
only. This tire may look like the originally equipped
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to
not. This spare tire may have limited tread life.
more than the speed listed on the limited use wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire
inflation pressures listed on your Tire and protective coating that helps keep them from
needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
Loading Information Placard located on the corroding and tarnishing.
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original CAUTION!
at the first opportunity.
equipment tire at the first opportunity and Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or
The limited use spare tire is for temporary result in loss of vehicle control. harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label cleaners and automatic car washes may
located on the limited use spare wheel. This label damage the wheel's protective finish. Such
contains the driving limitations for this spare. This WHEEL A ND W HEEL TRIM CARE
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
tire may look like the original equipped tire on the All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar®
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to
vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including 8
Wash wheels with the same soap solution
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
recommended for the body of the vehicle and
at the first opportunity. selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and
remember to always wash when the surfaces are
equipment to prevent damage to the wheels.
not hot to the touch.
Mopar® Wheel Treatment or Mopar® Chrome
Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for
aluminum or chrome wheels.
CAUTION!
This activity will remove the red rust on the brake SNOW TRACTION D EVICES
rotors and prevent vehicle vibration when braking.
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Use of traction devices require sufficient
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These Gloss Clear Coat Wheels tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance,
products may damage the wheel's protective the following snow traction devices are
finish. Such damage is not covered by the New CAUTION! recommended. Follow these recommendations to
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, guard against damage:
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is  Snow traction device must be of proper size for
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives,
recommended. the tire, as recommended by the snow traction
or polishing compounds. They will permanently
device manufacturer.
damage this finish and such damage is not
NOTE: covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.  No other tire sizes are recommended for use
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND with the snow traction device.
extended period after cleaning the wheels with WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular  Please follow the table below for the recom-
wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the basis; this is all that is required to maintain this mended tire size, axle and snow traction device:
brakes to remove the water droplets from the finish.
brake components.
Snow Traction Device (maximum

4x2 (2WD)
Axle Tire/Wheel Size projection beyond tire profile or
Trim Level
equivalent)
HFE
Tradesman 275/65R18
Rear S Class
Bighorn Lonestar 275/55R20
Laramie
Longhorn
Sport Rear 275/55R20 S Class
Limited
REBEL Not Chainable
Snow Traction Device (maximum

4x4 (4WD)
Axle Tire/Wheel Size projection beyond tire profile or
Trim Level
equivalent)
Tradesman
275/65R18
Bighorn Lonestar Rear S Class
275/55/R20
Laramie
Longhorn
Sport Rear 275/55R20 S Class
Limited
REBEL Not Chainable
WARNING! CAUTION! CAUTION!

Using tires of different size and type (M+S, To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe  Install device as tightly as possible and then
Snow) between front and rear axles can cause the following precautions: retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
unpredictable handling. You could lose control Autosock traction devices do not require
 Because of restricted traction device clear-
and have a collision. retightening.
ance between tires and other suspension
components, it is important that only traction  Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). 8
devices in good condition are used. Broken
 Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
devices can cause serious damage. Stop the
large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could
indicate device breakage. Remove the  Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
damaged parts of the device before further pavement.
use. (Continued)
(Continued)
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward All passenger vehicle tires must conform
CAUTION! cross” shown in the following diagram. This to Federal safety requirements in
 Observe the traction device manufacturer’s rotation pattern does not apply to some directional
addition to these grades.
instructions on the method of installation, tires that must not be reversed.
operating speed, and conditions for use. TREADWEAR
Always use the suggested operating speed of
the device manufacturer’s if it is less than The Treadwear grade is a comparative
30 mph (48 km/h). rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
 Do not use traction devices on a compact
when tested under controlled conditions
spare tire. on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
the government course as a tire graded
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles 100. The relative performance of tires
operate at different loads and perform different Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross) depends upon the actual conditions of
steering, driving, and braking functions. For these
reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
their use, however, and may depart
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION significantly from the norm due to
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES variations in driving habits, service
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as practices, and differences in road
those on all season type tires. Rotation will The following tire grading categories characteristics and climate.
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow were established by the National
and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth, Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
quiet ride. The specific grade rating assigned by the
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 394. tire's manufacturer in each category is
More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. shown on the sidewall of the tires on
The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should your vehicle.
be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
TRACTION G RADES Sustained high temperature can cause STORING THE VEHICLE
the material of the tire to degenerate
The Traction grades, from highest to and reduce tire life, and excessive
If you are storing your vehicle for more than three
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades temperature can lead to sudden tire
weeks, we recommend that you take the following
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle's
failure. The grade C corresponds to a battery:
pavement, as measured under level of performance, which all
controlled conditions on specified  Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
passenger vehicle tires must meet
government test surfaces of asphalt and under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
 Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A run the air conditioning system at idle for about
traction performance. represent higher levels of performance five minutes in the fresh air and high blower
WARNING! on the laboratory test wheel, than the setting. This will ensure adequate system lubri-
minimum required by law. cation to minimize the possibility of compressor
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based damage when the system is started again.
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and WARNING!
does not include acceleration, cornering,
The temperature grade for this tire is
BODYWORK
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
established for a tire that is properly inflated and PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,
TEMPERATURE G RADES or excessive loading, either separately or in AGENTS
The Temperature grades are A (the combination, can cause heat buildup and Vehicle body care requirements vary according to 8
possible tire failure. geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
make roads passable in snow and ice and those
resistance to the generation of heat and that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in
under controlled conditions on a your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on
which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold
weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody
protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to CAUTION!
corrosion resistance built into your vehicle. clean the lenses.  Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning mate-
What Causes Corrosion? Tri-Fold Soft Tonneau Cover Care rials such as steel wool or scouring powder
that will scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal For cleaning and protecting the vinyl Tri-Fold
of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle. Tonneau cover, use Mopar® Whitewall & Vinyl Top  Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
Cleaner and Mopar® Leather and Vinyl (8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal
The most common causes are:
Conditioner/Protectant. of paint and decals.
 Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
 Stone and gravel impact. PRESERVING T HE BODYWORK
Fascia/Bumper Care
 Insects, tree sap and tar. Washing The customer is responsible to clean and maintain
 Salt in the air near seacoast localities.  Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your the chrome components of the vehicle. Wash away
 Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants. vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or road debris and salt using an automotive soap.
a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels Fascia/bumpers should be cleaned regularly using
BODY A ND UNDERBODY M AINTENANCE completely with water. mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their
 If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have luster and to prevent corrosion.
Cleaning Headlights
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar® Your fascia/bumpers are susceptible to
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove. deterioration caused by salt, sodium chloride,
and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible
 Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar® magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and
to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to other road chemicals used to melt ice or control
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and dust on dirt roads. Do not use harsh chemicals or
protect your paint finish. Use precautions to not
therefore different lens cleaning procedures must a stiff brush. They can stain or damage the
scratch the paint.
be followed. protective coating that helps keep them from
 Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses corroding and tarnishing.
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
the paint finish.
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
solution followed by rinsing.
 If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or To Help Maintain The Appearance Of Your
CAUTION! similar cause that destroys the paint and protec- Spray-On Bedliner, Follow The Steps Below:
 Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle tive coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon 1. Rinse your truck bed out with water to remove
brush, metal polishes, or oven cleaner. These as possible. any loose dirt and debris.
products may damage the bumper’s protec-  If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, 2. Mix a mild soap or detergent with water. Then
tive finish. Such damage is not covered by the fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such apply solution with a soft cloth or brush.
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash materials are well packaged and sealed.
soap, Mopar® Chrome Cleaner, or equivalent 3. Rinse bedliner with water.
 If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
is recommended. 4. Once dry, apply a small amount of Mopar®
consider mud or stone shields behind each
 Avoid products or automatic car washes that wheel. Spray-On Bedliner Conditioner to a moist towel
use acidic solutions, strong alkaline additives, or sponge and wipe over the entire surface of
 Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as the truck bedliner.
or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket cleaners soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
and automatic car washes may damage the touch up paint to match the color of your
bumper’s protective finish. Such damage is vehicle. WARNING!
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar® Spray-On Bedliner – If Equipped Do not use silicon-based protection products to
Chrome Cleaner, or equivalent is recom- clean your bedliner. Silicon-based products can
During ownership, the shine and luster of the
mended. become slippery and may result in personal
Spray-On Bedliner can fade from oxidation, road
injury.
dirt, heavy-duty hauling and hard water stains.
Weathering and UV exposure will lead to fading.
Special Care
To help maintain the appearance of your Spray-On Spray-On Bedliners are chemically-resistant to 8
 If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you many different types of chemicals (including
Bedliner, the manufacturer recommends you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage gasoline, oil, hydraulic fluids) for short periods of
periodically rinse all loose dirt from your truck bed
at least once a month. time. If a spill occurs on your Spray-On Bedliner,
and clean your truck at least twice per year using
 It is important that the drain holes in the lower the Mopar® Spray-On Bedliner Conditioner rinse the truck out as soon as possible to avoid
edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be available at a local authorized dealer. permanent damage.
kept clear and open.
 If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the
paint, touch them up immediately.
Repairing The Spray-On Bedliner Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution
While extremely tough, it is possible to damage a Equipped or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from
Spray-On Bedliner. One common condition is when the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following
loading a heavy pallet and dragging that pallet manner: Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Replace
across the floor of the bed. If a nail or sharp point the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
is exposed under the weight of the pallet a scratch  Remove as much of the stain as possible by buckles do not work properly.
or tear is possible. While not covered by your new blotting with a clean, dry towel.
NOTE:
vehicle warranty, a cosmetic fix to cover the metal  Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp
If the belts retract slowly, inspect the upper turning
exposed by the scratch is required. To repair a tear towel. loop for soiling. If soiling is present, clean with a
or gouge, follow the directions provided in the  For tough stains, apply Mopar® Total Clean, or wet soft cloth until all residue is removed.
Mopar® Quick Repair Kit. a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and
remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to WARNING!
INTERIORS remove soap residue.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
 For grease stains, apply Mopar® Multi-Purpose collision and leave you with no protection.
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
and carpeting. residue. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
 Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
WARNING! of protectants on Stain Repel products. system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision,
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning or if you have questions regarding seat belt or
Seat Belt Maintenance retractor conditions, take your vehicle to an
purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and
if used in closed areas they may cause Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical authorized FCA dealer or authorized FCA
respiratory harm. solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the Certified Collision Care Program facility for
fabric. inspection.
PLASTIC AND C OATED PARTS Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution
CAUTION!
may be used, but do not use high alcohol content
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery. or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a soft cloth. Ketone based cleaning products to clean leather
CAUTION! upholstery, as damage to the upholstery may
LEATHER SURFACES result.
 Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repel-
lents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended
plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the for leather upholstery.
interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe
GLASS SURFACES
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by
away immediately. regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular
 Damage caused by these type of products particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage basis with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any
may not be covered by your New Vehicle the leather upholstery and should be removed commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never
Limited Warranty. promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar® Total cleaning the inside rear window equipped with
Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp
Lenses use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, instruments that may scratch the elements.
The lenses in front of the instruments in this detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning your leather upholstery. on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not
the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching NOTE: spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
the plastic. If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to 8
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather is
designed for easy cleaning, and the manufacturer
recommends Mopar® Total Clean leather cleaner
applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as
needed.
466
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) BRAKE SYSTEM TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
The VIN is found on the left front corner of the If power assist is lost for any reason (for example, Lug Nut/
instrument panel, visible through the windshield. repeated brake applications with the engine off), Lug Nut/ **Lug
Lug Nut/ Bolt
the brakes will still function. However, you will Bolt Nut/Bolt
Bolt Type Socket
experience a substantial increase in braking effort Torque Size
Size
to stop the vehicle.
130 Ft-Lb M14 x
If either the front or rear hydraulic system lose Cone 22 mm
(176 N·m) 1.50
normal braking capability, the remaining system
will still function with some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. This will be evident by increased **Use only authorized dealer recommended lug
pedal travel during application, greater pedal force nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil
required to slow or stop, and the Brake Warning before tightening.
Light and the ABS Warning Light will activate NOTE:
during brake use. Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do not
Vehicle Identification Number substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
NOTE: WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN. mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
loose particles.
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the
vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and
reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts
should be torqued using a properly calibrated
torque wrench using a six-sided (hex) deep wall
socket.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 467
WARNING! 3.6L E NGINE

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until than 15% in this engine.
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow This engine is designed to meet all
this warning may result in personal injury. emissions regulations and provide
optimum fuel economy and
performance when using high quality
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE ENGINE unleaded “Regular” gasoline having a posted
While operating on gasoline with the required octane number of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/
Wheel Mounting Surface octane number, hearing a light knocking sound 2 method. The use of higher octane “Premium”
from the engine is not a cause for concern. gasoline is not required, as it will not provide any
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until benefit over “Regular” gasoline in these engines.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
knocking sound, see a dealer immediately. Use of 5.7L E NGINE
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt
gasoline with a lower than recommended octane
(do not insert it halfway). Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater
number can cause engine failure and may void or
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited than 15% in this engine.
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are Warranty. This engine is designed to meet all
properly seated against the wheel. emissions regulations and provide
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as
hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you satisfactory fuel economy and
experience these symptoms, try another brand of performance when using high-quality
gasoline before considering service for the vehicle. unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to
89 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of
89 octane “Plus” gasoline is recommended for
9
optimum performance and fuel economy.
Four, Five, And Six Lug Nuts/Bolts Torque Pattern

468 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
REFORMULATED G ASOLINE Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents DO N OT U SE E-85 IN N ON-FLEX F UEL
should be avoided. Many of these materials
Many areas of the country require the use of intended for gum and varnish removal may contain VEHICLES
cleaner-burning gasoline referred to as active solvents or similar ingredients. These can Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with
“reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials. gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
contains oxygenates and are specifically blended of gasoline with higher ethanol content may void
to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
quality.
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. oxygenates such as ethanol. E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will symptoms:
provide improved performance and durability of CAUTION!
engine and fuel system components.  Operate in a lean mode.
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol,
 OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting  Poor engine performance.
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper and drivability problems, damage critical fuel  Poor cold start and cold drivability.
octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents, system components, cause emissions to exceed
corrosion and stability additives are  Increased risk for fuel system component corro-
the applicable standard, and/or cause the
recommended. Using gasolines that have these sion.
Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. Please
additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce observe pump labels as they should clearly CNG AND LP F UEL SYSTEM
emissions, and maintain vehicle performance. communicate if a fuel contains greater than
Designated TOP TIER Detergent 15% ethanol (E-15).
MODIFICATIONS
Gasoline contains a higher level of Modifications that allow the engine to run on
detergents to further aide in minimizing Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane
Problems that result from using gasoline
engine and fuel system deposits. When (LP) may result in damage to the engine,
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
available, the usage of TOP TIER Detergent emissions, and fuel system components. Problems
gasoline containing methanol are not the
Gasoline is recommended. Visit that result from running CNG or LP are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void
Detergent Gasoline retailers. the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL CAUTION! FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE

MANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) I N  An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition Federal law requires that you must fuel this vehicle
GASOLINE malfunctions can cause the catalytic with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm
converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent Sulfur maximum) and prohibits the use of Low
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur
that is blended into some gasoline to increase burning odor or some light smoke, your engine
may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may maximum) to avoid damage to the emissions
octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no control system.
performance advantage beyond gasoline of the require immediate service. Contact an autho-
same octane number without MMT. Gasoline rized dealer for service assistance. Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable
blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and supplier in your vehicle. For most year-round
 The use of fuel additives, which are now being
reduces emissions system performance in some service, No. 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM (formerly
sold as octane enhancers, is not recom-
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that known as the American Society for Testing and
mended. Most of these products contain high
gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The Materials) specification D-975 Grade S15 will
concentrations of methanol. Fuel system
MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on provide good performance. If the vehicle is
damage or vehicle performance problems
the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask the exposed to extreme cold (below 20°F or -7°C), or
resulting from the use of such fuels or addi-
gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains is required to operate at colder-than-normal
tives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California conditions for prolonged periods, use Climatized
turer and may void or not be covered under
reformulated gasoline. Number 2 diesel fuel or dilute the Number 2 diesel
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
fuel with 50% Number 1 diesel fuel. This will
FUEL S YSTEM CAUTIONS provide better protection from fuel gelling or
NOTE: wax-plugging of the fuel filters.
CAUTION! Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed WARNING!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your against you. 9
vehicle’s performance: Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending
agent. They can be unstable under certain
 The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by conditions and hazardous or explosive when
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair mixed with diesel fuel.
engine performance and damage the emis-
sions control system.
(Continued)
Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of water. To NOTE: For regular use of biodiesel blends between 6%
prevent fuel system trouble, drain the  If you accidentally fill the fuel tank with gasoline and 20% (B6–B20) it is important that you
accumulated water from the fuel/water separator or DEF on your diesel vehicle, do not start the understand and comply with these requirements.
filter using the fuel/water separator drain provided engine. Damage to the engine and fuel system For further direction Ú page 402.
on the fuel filter housing. If you buy good quality could occur. Please call an authorized dealer for
fuel and follow the cold weather advice above, fuel service. CAUTION!
conditioners should not be required in your vehicle.
 A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel meeting Failure to comply with Oil Change requirements
If available in your area, a high cetane “premium”
ASTM specification D-975 may be used with for vehicles operating on biodiesel blends
diesel fuel may offer improved cold-starting and
your diesel engine without any adjustments to between 6% and 20% (B6–B20) will result in
warm-up performance.
regular service schedules. premature engine wear. Such wear is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!  Commercially available fuel additives are not
necessary for the proper operation of your
If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on, Biodiesel is a fuel produced from renewable
diesel engine.
DO NOT START engine before you drain the water resources typically derived from animal fat,
from the fuel filter(s) to avoid engine damage  Number 1 Ultra Low Sulfur diesel fuel should
only be used where extended arctic conditions rapeseed oil (Rapeseed Methyl Ester (RME) base),
Ú page 412. or soybean oil (Soy Methyl Ester (SME or SOME)
(-10°F or -23°C) exist.
base).
DIESEL F UEL SPECIFICATIONS BIODIESEL FUEL R EQUIREMENTS Biodiesel fuel has inherent limitations which
A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel meeting ASTM require that you understand and adhere to the
This diesel engine has been developed to take
specification D975 is recommended for use with following requirements if you use blends of
advantage of the high energy content and
your diesel engine. If frequent operation with Biodiesel between 6% and 20% (B6–B20). There
generally lower cost Number 2 Ultra Low Sulfur
Biodiesel blends that are between 6% and 20% are no unique restrictions for the use of B5.
diesel fuel or Number 2 Ultra Low Sulfur Climatized
diesel fuels. (B6–B20) is desired, the maintenance schedule is
subject to shorter intervals. CAUTION!
The oil and filter change along with fuel filter Use of blends greater than 20% is not approved.
replacement is subject to shorter intervals when Use of blends greater than 20% can result in
operating your engine on biodiesel greater than engine damage. Such damage is not covered by
5%. Do not use biodiesel greater than 20%. the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Petrodiesel fuel meeting ASTM specification D-975 routinely operating on biodiesel between 6% and
CAUTION! and Biodiesel fuel (B100) meeting ASTM 20%, oil and filter replacement intervals must not
In the event that the vehicle is filled with specification D-6751 exceed 8,000 Miles (12,900 km) or six months,
biodiesel and not used for more than a month, which ever comes first.
Fuel Oxidation Stability — Must Use Fuel
the fuel should either be used up by driving (up Biodiesel Fuel Filter Change Intervals
to quarter tank) and filled with standard diesel
Within Six Months Of Manufacture
blends with less than 5% that is normally Biodiesel fuel has poor oxidation stability which The use of biodiesel requires more frequent fuel
available. This will help prevent the fuel filter can result in long term storage problems. Fuel filter change intervals. When operating on
clogging and potential damage to the fuel produced to approved ASTM standards, if stored biodiesel between 6% and 20%, fuel filter
injection system due to degraded biodiesel, properly, provides for protection against fuel replacement intervals should be every second oil
which is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited oxidation for up to six months. change, and must not exceed 16,000 miles
Warranty. (25,750 km).
Fuel Water Separation — Must Use
NOTE:
Mopar® Approved Fuel Filter Elements
Under no circumstances should oil change
Biodiesel Fuel Properties — Low Ambient Biodiesel fuel has a natural affinity to water and intervals exceed 8,000 miles (12,875 km) or six
Temperatures water accelerates microbial growth. Your Mopar® months, if regular operation occurs with 6% - 20%
Biodiesel fuel may gel or solidify at low ambient filtration system is designed to provide adequate biodiesel blends. Under no circumstances should
temperatures, which may pose problems for both fuel water separation capabilities. fuel filter replacement intervals exceed every
storage and operation. Precautions can be Fuel In Oil Dilution — Must Adhere To second oil change and must not exceed
necessary at low ambient temperatures, such as 16,000 miles (25,750 km), if regular operation
Required Oil Change Interval
storing the fuel in a heated building or a heated occurs with 6% - 20% biodiesel blends. Failure to
storage tank, or using cold temperature additives. Fuel dilution of lubricating oil has been observed comply with these oil change and fuel filter require-
with the use of Biodiesel fuel. Fuel in oil must not ments for vehicles operating on biodiesel blends
Fuel Quality — Must Comply With ASTM exceed 5%. To ensure this limit is met your oil up to B20 may result in premature engine wear. 9
Standards change interval must be maintained with in the Such wear is not covered by the New Vehicle
The quality of Biodiesel fuel may vary widely. Only suggested schedule. The regular use of biodiesel Limited Warranty. The engine may suffer severe
fuel produced by a BQ9000 supplier to the between 6% and 20% requires intervals shorter damage if operated with concentrations of
following specifications may be blended to meet than the outlined 10,000 miles (16,100 km) and biodiesel higher than 20%.
Biodiesel blend B6 – B20 fuel meeting ASTM must not exceed the suggested schedule. When
specification D-7467:
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
1500 Regular Cab Shortbed/Crew Quad Cab Models 23 Gallons 87 Liters
1500 Regular Cab Shortbed/Crew Quad Cab Models 26 Gallons 98 Liters
1500 Regular Cab Longbed/Crew Quad Cab Models (Optional) 33 Gallons 121 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters
5.7L Engine 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System
3.6L Engine 13.7 Quarts 13 Liters
3.6L Motor Generator Unit 1.8 Quarts 1.7 Liters
5.7L Engine 18.3 Quarts 17.3 Liters
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.0L Turbo Diesel Engine 26 Gallons 98.5 Liters
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank
Tradesman/Rebel Models 5.14 Gallons 19.5 Liters
All Other Models 5.74 Gallons 21.7 Liters
US Metric
Engine Oil With Filter
3.0L Turbo Diesel Engine 8.5 Quarts 8.0 Liters
Cooling System
3.0L Turbo Diesel Engine 11.6 Quarts 11 Liters
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Gasoline Engine Coolant
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Motor Generator Unit – 3.6L Engine (If Equipped)
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which
meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395.
Engine Oil – 3.6L & 5.7L Engine
Equivalent full synthetic SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the
API Starburst trademark Ú page 409.
We recommend using a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter
Gasoline Engine Oil Filter is unavailable only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter
Performance Requirements. 9
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% ethanol (Do not use E-85).
89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15%
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
ethanol (Do not use E-85).

We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Diesel Engine Coolant
Technology).
Engine Oil — 3.0L Turbo We recommend using 5W-40 synthetic engine oil such as Mopar® that meets the manufacturer Material Standard MS-12991
Diesel Engine and the API SP engine oil category is required.
We recommend using Mopar® engine oil filters. Using an oil filter that does not meet the manufacturer’s filtration
Diesel Engine Oil Filter
requirements can severely impact engine life and reliability.
We recommend using Mopar® fuel filter. Must meet 3 micron rating. Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manufacturer’s
filtration and water separating requirements can severely impact fuel system life and reliability. Under normal conditions the
Fuel Filters — 3.0L Turbo diesel fuel filter should be replaced every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) (every other oil change). If the vehicle is being used in
Diesel Engine severe operating conditions, or In certain geographical areas of the country (Pennsylvania, New York, Ohio, Maryland, West
Virginia, Arkansas, Oklahoma, Kansas, Iowa, Missouri and Nebraska) due to fuel cleanliness issues, it’s recommended to
replace the fuel filter every 10,000 miles (16,000 km).
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in your vehicle. Federal law requires that you must fuel this vehicle with
Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits the use of Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (500
ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid damage to the emissions control system.
Fuel Selection — 3.0L Turbo
For most year-round service, Number 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM specification D-975 Grade S15 will provide good
Diesel Engine
performance. We recommend you use a blend of up to 5% biodiesel, meeting ASTM specification D-975 with your diesel engine.
This vehicle is compatible with biodiesel blends greater than 5% but no greater than 20% biodiesel meeting ASTM specification
D-7467 provided the shortened maintenance intervals are followed as directed.
Mopar® Diesel Exhaust Fluid (API Certified) (DEF) or equivalent that has been API Certified to the ISO 22241 standard. Use of
Diesel Exhaust Fluid
fluids not API Certified to ISO 22241 may result in system damage.
NOTE:
If Climatized or Number 1 ULSD fuel is not available, and you are operating below 20°F (-6°C), in sustained arctic conditions, Mopar® Premium Diesel Fuel
Treatment (or equivalent) is recommended to avoid gelling.
CAUTION!
 Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and
may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Tech-
nology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
 Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be
compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
 This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze)
is not recommended.
9
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
Automatic Transmission equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case – 48-11 Active On-Demand 2–speed Transfer Case (With 4WD
We recommend using Mobil Fluid LT.
AUTO)
Transfer Case – 48-12 Part Time 2–Speed Transfer Case (Without 4WD AUTO) We recommend using Shell Spirax S2 ATF A389.
Front Axle We recommend using Mopar® GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
We recommend using Mopar® Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-90
Rear Axle (3.21/3.55) (MS-A0160). Limited-Slip Rear Axles require the addition of 5 oz. (148 ml)
Mopar® Limited Slip Additive (MS-10111).
We recommend using Mopar® Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-140
Rear Axle (3.92) (MS-8985). Limited-Slip Rear Axles require the addition of 5 oz. (148 ml)
Mopar® Limited Slip Additive (MS-10111).
Max Tow Rear Axle (3.92) We recommend using Dana SAE 80W90 Axle Lubricant.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1709.
477
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE Any communication to FCA US LLC's customer
center should include the following information:
FOR YOUR VEHICLE FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally  Owner's name and address
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be
 Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and
PREPARE F OR T HE APPOINTMENT happy with our products and services.
office)
All work to be performed may not be covered by the Warranty service must be done by an authorized
dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the  Authorized dealer name
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the
service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your  Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
vehicle's service history. This can often provide a vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you  Vehicle delivery date and mileage
clue to the current problem. get prompt and high quality service. FCA US LLC's
authorized dealers have the facilities, FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
PREPARE A L IST factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the
latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed P.O. Box 21–8004
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the correctly and in a timely manner. Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
specific work you want done. If you've had an
accident or work done that is not on your This is why you should always talk to an authorized Phone: (866) 726-4636
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
you are still not satisfied, talk to the general
FCA C ANADA INC. C USTOMER CENTER
BE R EASONABLE WITH REQUESTS manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They P.O. Box 1621
want to know if you need assistance. If an
If you list a number of items and you must have Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
you may contact FCA US LLC's Customer
situation with the service advisor and list the items French
Assistance center.
in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you 10
may obtain a rental vehicle (additional charges
may apply). If you need a rental, it is advisable to
make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
478 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
MEXICO Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
require assistance can use the special needs relay contract you may have purchased from another
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY manufacturer. If you require service after FCA US
Sante Fe C.P. 05109 teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, LLC’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires,
dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay please refer to the contract documents, and
Mexico, D. F.
Service operator. contact the person listed in those documents.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
SERVICE CONTRACT We appreciate that you have made a major
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568 investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
You may have purchased a service contract for a authorized dealer has also made a major
PUERTO R ICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of investment in facilities, tools, and training to
FCA Caribbean LLC unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New Vehicle ensure that you are absolutely delighted with the
P.O. Box 191857 Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar® Vehicle ownership experience.
Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle extended
San Juan 00919-1857 protection plans authorized, endorsed and backed WARNING!
Phone: (866) 726-4636 by FCA US LLC to provide additional protection
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
Fax: (787) 782-3345 beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you purchased a
only), some of its constituents, and certain
Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you will receive
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in
known to the State of California to cause cancer
HEARING O R S PEECH I MPAIRED the mail within three weeks of the vehicle
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In
delivery date. If you have any questions about
(TDD/TTY) the service contract, call FCA US LLC's Service
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain, or
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, Contract National Customer Hotline at
emit, chemicals known to the State of California
FCA US LLC has installed special TDD (Telecommu- 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call
to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
nication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
reproductive harm.
customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired French).
customer, who has access to a TDD or a
conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United
States, can communicate with FCA US LLC by
dialing 1-800-380-2479.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 479
WARRANTY INFORMATION REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to
I N T HE 50 U NITED STATES AND 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
this vehicle and market. Refer to WASHINGTON, D.C. 1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.mopar.com/om for further information. www.safercar.gov; or write to:
If you believe that your vehicle has a
See the Warranty Information for the terms and Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
defect that could cause a crash or cause
provisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
injury or death, you should immediately
applicable to this vehicle and market. Refer to D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
inform the National Highway Traffic
www.owners.mopar.ca/en for further information about motor vehicle safety
information. Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
from http://www.safercar.gov.
For French, refer to www.owners.mopar.ca/fr for
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
further information. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it I N C ANADA
Use this QR code to access your may open an investigation, and if it finds If you believe that your vehicle has a
digital experience. that a safety defect exists in a group of safety defect, you should contact the
vehicles, it may order a recall and Customer Service Department
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA immediately. Canadian customers who
cannot become involved in individual wish to report a safety defect to the
problems between you, an authorized Canadian government should contact
MOPAR® PARTS dealer or FCA US LLC. Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories Investigations and Recalls at
and factory filled fluids are available from an 1-800-333-0510 or go to
authorized dealer. They are recommended for your wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP.
vehicle to keep it operating at its best and maintain
its original condition. 10
480 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To access your Owner's Information online, visit

www.mopar.com/om (US) or
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
To order the following manuals, you may use either www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
the website or the phone numbers listed below. licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
Or
Service Manuals conditions suivantes:
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
 1-800-890-4038 (US) et
complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components and is written in Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
straightforward language with illustrations, Information Books can be ordered through brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
diagrams, and charts. Archway at: brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals  1-800-387-1143 (Canada) le fonctionnement.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These GENERAL INFORMATION La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
manuals make it easy to find and fix problems on The following regulatory statement applies to all
computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
They show exactly how to find and correct cause interferencia perjudicial y
vehicle:
problems, using step-by-step troubleshooting and 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
a complete list of all tools and equipment. pueda causar su operación no deseada.
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic standard(s). Operation is subject to the following NOTE:
Procedure manuals, visit: two conditions: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada). 1. This device may not cause harmful by the party responsible for compliance could void
Owner's Manuals interference, and the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with 2. This device must accept any interference
the assistance of service and engineering received, including interference that may
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA cause undesired operation.
vehicles.
481
INDEX
A Air Bag Light................................128, 342, 368 Automatic Door Locks ......................................32
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection .....................418 Air Cleaner, Engine Automatic Headlights .......................................56
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) ............................. 410 Automatic High Beams.....................................55
(Cruise Control) .........131, 136, 137, 176, 178 Air Conditioner Maintenance ........................ 415 Automatic Tailgate Release .............................86
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............422 Air Conditioner Refrigerant ........................... 415 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..............67
Adding Fuel .......................................... 207, 208 Air Conditioner System ................................. 415 Automatic Transmission....................... 154, 426
Additives, Fuel ...............................................468 Air Conditioning......................................... 62, 65 Adding Fluid .............................................. 426
Adjust Air Conditioning Filter ..............................68, 416 Fluid And Filter Change............................. 426
Down ........................................................... 38 Air Conditioning System ...................................67 Fluid Change............................................. 426
Forward ....................................................... 38 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .......................68 Fluid Level Check...................................... 426
Rearward..................................................... 38 Air Filter ............................................... 410, 412 Fluid Type ........................................ 426, 476
Up................................................................ 38 Air Pressure Special Additives ...................................... 426
Adjustable Pedals ............................................ 44 Tires ......................................................... 452 Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode... 158
Advance Phone Connectivity .........................280 Air Suspension ......... 131, 134, 135, 165, 169 AutoPark ....................................................... 142
Air Bag Alarm AUX Camera .................................................. 203
Air Bag Operation ......................................344 Security Alarm ....................................27, 131 Auxiliary Driving Systems .............................. 319
Air Bag Warning Light ...................... 342, 344 Alterations/Modifications Axle Fluid.............................................. 427, 476
Enhanced Accident Response ......... 352, 392 Vehicle.........................................................13 Axle Locker System ....................................... 172
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................392 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 422, 472 Axle Lubrication ............................................ 427
Front Air Bag .............................................344 Disposal ................................................... 423
If Deployment Occurs ................................351 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 312 B
Knee Impact Bolsters ................................349 Anti-Lock Warning Light ................................ 131 Back-Up Camera ........................................... 199
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............353 Assist, Hill Start............................................. 318 Battery ................................................. 129, 408
Maintenance .............................................353 Audio Settings ............................................... 268 Charging System Light .............................. 129
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .............342 Audio Systems (Radio) .................................. 233 Keyless Key Fob Replacement ....................21 11
Transporting Pets ......................................368 Auto Down Power Windows .............................80 Battery Saver Feature ......................................59
482
Bed Divider ...................................................... 97 Camera, Trailer 360...................................... 203 Clean Air Gasoline ......................................... 468
Bed Step .......................................................... 90 Capacities, Fuel ............................................ 472 Cleaning
Bedliner .........................................................463 Caps, Filler Wheels ...................................................... 457
Belts, Seat .....................................................368 Oil (Engine) ............................................... 403 Climate Control ................................................62
Blind Spot Monitoring ....................................319 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ..................... 423 Automatic ....................................................62
Bluetooth Car Washes................................................... 462 Manual ........................................................65
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Carbon Monoxide Warning............................ 370 Cold Weather Operation ................................ 145
Phone Or Audio Device After Pairing .....276 Care And Maintenance ................................. 461 Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 456
Body Builders Guide ........................................ 11 Cargo Light..............................................57, 135 Connected Services ...................................... 282
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................418 CD ................................................................. 270 Connected Services FAQ ............................... 297
Bodywork .......................................................461 Cellular Phone .............................................. 302 Connected Services Features ....................... 286
B-Pillar Location.............................................448 Center High Mounted Stop Light ................... 443 Connected Services, Getting Started ............ 284
Brake Assist System ......................................313 Center Seat Storage Compartment ..................70 Connected Services, Introduction ................. 283
Brake Control System ....................................313 Charge Air Cooler .......................................... 424 Contract, Service ........................................... 478
Brake Fluid .......................................... 425, 476 Chart, Tire Sizing ........................................... 445 Controls ........................................................ 262
Brake System ...................................... 425, 466 Check Engine Light Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 423
Fluid Check ...............................................425 (Malfunction Indicator Light) ......................... 139 Cooling System .................................... 130, 421
Master Cylinder .........................................425 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................. 368 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 422
Parking ......................................................150 Checks, Safety .............................................. 368 Coolant Level ..........................421, 423, 424
Warning Light ............................................128 Child Restraint .............................................. 354 Cooling Capacity ....................................... 472
Brake/Transmission Interlock .......................154 Child Restraints Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 423
Bulb Replacement .........................................438 Booster Seats ........................................... 357 Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 422
Bulbs, Light.......................................... 370, 438 Child Seat Installation ..................... 363, 364 Inspection ........................................ 423, 424
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .... 362 Points To Remember ................................ 424
C Infant And Child Restraints....................... 356 Pressure Cap ............................................ 423
Camera ..........................................................199 Locating The LATCH Anchorages .............. 361 Radiator Cap............................................. 423
Camera, AUX ..................................................203 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Selection Of Coolant
Camera, Rear ................................................199 Children................................................ 359 (Antifreeze) .........................422, 472, 473
Camera, Surround View .................................200 Older Children And Child Restraints ......... 357 Corrosion Protection ..................................... 461
Seating Positions ...................................... 358
483
Cruise Control Disc Drive ..................................................... 270 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ...... 129
Accel/Decel ...............................................177 Disconnecting ............................................... 276 Electronically Shifted Transfer Case .... 160, 162
Cancel .......................................................177 Disposal Emergency Braking ....................................... 327
Resume .....................................................177 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...................... 423 Emergency Gas Can Refueling ...................... 386
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ... 133, 176, 178 Disturb .......................................................... 279 Emergency, In Case Of
Cruise Light ......................................... 136, 137 Door Ajar Light ..................................... 129, 130 Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ..................... 389
Customer Assistance .....................................477 Door Locks Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 371
Cybersecurity .................................................233 Automatic ....................................................32 Jump Starting ........................................... 384
Doors ...............................................................28 Emission Control System Maintenance......... 139
D Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter............ 412 Engine ........................................................... 403
Daytime Running Lights ................................... 55 Driver Memory Presets ................................. 268 Air Cleaner ................................................ 410
Dealer Service ...............................................408 Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ......................................35 Block Heater ............................................. 149
Defroster, Windshield ......................62, 65, 368 Driving Break-In Recommendations ..................... 150
Deleting A Phone ...........................................276 Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Compartment ............... 403, 404, 405, 406
Diagnostic System, Onboard .........................138 Standing Water .................................... 231 Compartment
Diesel Exhaust Fluid ......................................209 Driving Tips ................................................... 230 Identification ............ 403, 404, 405, 406
Adding .......................................................209 Dual Rear Wheels ......................................... 466 Coolant (Antifreeze) .................................. 473
Fill Procedure ............................................210 Exhaust Gas Caution ................................ 370
Storage......................................................209 E Fails To Start............................................. 143
Diesel Fuel .....................................................469 Electric Brake Control System....................... 313 Flooded, Starting ...................................... 143
Diesel Fuel Requirements .............................469 Anti-Lock Brake System ............................ 312 Fuel Requirements .......................... 467, 472
Bulk Storage Of .........................................209 Electronic Roll Mitigation ................. 314, 319 Idling ......................................................... 147
Diesel Fuel System, Re-Priming .....................414 Electric Parking Brake................................... 150 Jump Starting ........................................... 384
Differential, Limited Slip ................................173 Electric Power Steering ................................. 173 Oil ...........................................409, 472, 473
Dimmer Control Switch .................................... 60 Electrical Power Outlets ...................................76 Oil Filler Cap ............................................. 403
Disable Vehicle Towing ..................................390 Electronic Range Select (ERS) ...................... 158 Oil Filter .................................................... 409
Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) ........................................... 131, 132, 314 11
484
Oil Selection .................................... 409, 472 Fog Lights ..................................... 57, 136, 442 Glass Cleaning .............................................. 465
Oil Synthetic ..............................................409 Fold-Flat Seats .................................................35 Grocery Bag Retainer .......................................41
Oil Temperature ........................................130 Forward Collision Warning .......... 133, 135, 325 Gross Axle Weight Rating .............................. 213
Overheating ...............................................387 Four Wheel Drive ...............133, 135, 137, 160 Gross Combination Weight Rating ................ 213
Starting ........................................... 141, 144 Four-Way Hazard Flasher .............................. 371 Gross Trailer Weight ...................................... 213
Enhanced Accident Response Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................................ 389 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ......................... 213
Feature ................................................ 352, 392 Front Axle (Differential) ................................. 427 Guide
Entry System, Illuminated ................................ 60 Fuel ............................................. 208, 467, 469 Body Builders...............................................11
Ethanol ..........................................................468 Adding ............................................. 207, 208 GVWR ............................................................ 211
Exhaust Gas Cautions....................................370 Additives ................................................... 468
Exhaust System ................................... 370, 420 Clean Air ................................................... 468 H
Exterior Lights .........................................54, 370 Ethanol ..................................................... 468 Hazard
Filter ......................................................... 412 Driving Through Flowing, Rising,
F Gasoline ................................................... 467 Or Shallow Standing Water ................... 231
Family Alerts ..................................................296 Light ......................................................... 132 Hazard Warning Flashers .............................. 371
Filters Materials Added ....................................... 468 Head Restraints ...............................................41
Air Cleaner.................................................410 Methanol .................................................. 468 Head Rests ......................................................41
Air Conditioning ..................................68, 416 Octane Rating.................................. 467, 473 Headlights ............................................ 136, 440
Engine Fuel ...............................................412 Requirements ......................... 467, 469, 472 Cleaning.................................................... 462
Engine Oil ........................................ 409, 473 Specifications ........................................... 470 Delay ...........................................................56
Engine Oil Disposal ...................................409 Tank Capacity ........................................... 472 High Beam ......................................... 55, 137
Flashers Fuel Saver Technology .................................. 174 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..........55
Turn Signals .................................... 137, 370 Fuses ............................................................ 427 Lights On Reminder .....................................56
Flash-To-Pass .................................................. 55 On With Wipers ............................................56
Flat Tire Stowage ...........................................382 G Passing ........................................................55
Fluid Capacities .............................................472 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .....................49 Switch ..........................................................54
Fluid Leaks ....................................................370 Gasoline, Clean Air........................................ 468 Heads Up Display (HUD)....................... 121, 122
Fluid Level Checks Gasoline, Reformulated ................................ 468 Heated Mirrors .................................................49
Brake ........................................................425 Gauges Heated Seats ...................................................39
Fluid, Brake ...................................................476 Voltage ..................................................... 146 Heated Steering Wheel ....................................34
485
Heater, Engine Block .....................................149 Instrument Cluster Display Key Fob Programming
High Beam/Low Beam Select Audio ........................................................ 121 (Remote Keyless Entry) ....................................22
(Dimmer) Switch .............................................. 55 Driver Assist ............................................. 117 Keyless Enter-N-Go ................................ 30, 141
Hill Descent Control ............................. 137, 316 Fuel Economy ........................................... 120 Passive Entry ...............................................30
Hill Descent Control Indicator ........................316 Off-Road ................................................... 117 Keys .................................................................19
Hill Start Assist ..............................................318 Speedometer ............................................ 116
Hitches StopStart .................................................. 120 L
Trailer Towing ............................................216 Stored Messages...................................... 121 Lane Change Assist..........................................57
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .................... 49 Trailer Tow ................................................ 121 LaneSense ........................ 132, 136, 137, 196
Hood Trip ........................................................... 120 Lap/Shoulder Belts ....................................... 336
Opening .....................................................130 Vehicle Info............................................... 116 Latches ......................................................... 370
Hood Release .................................................. 85 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................... 465 Hood ............................................................85
HUD ..................................................... 121, 122 Integrated Trailer Brake Control ................... 221 Lead Free Gasoline ....................................... 467
Interior Appearance Care .............................. 464 Leaks, Fluid ................................................... 370
I Interior Lights...................................................59 Life Of Tires ................................................... 454
Ignition ............................................................ 23 Intervention Regeneration Strategy ..... 124, 414 Light Bulbs ........................................... 370, 438
Switch ......................................................... 23 Inverter Outlet (115V) ......................................77 Lights ............................................................ 370
Ignition Park Interlock ....................................154 4WD.......................................................... 135
Illuminated Entry ............................................. 60 J 4WD AUTO ................................................ 137
Inside Rearview Mirror ............................45, 372 Jack Location ................................................ 375 4WD High ................................................. 135
Instrument Jump Starting ............................................... 384 4WD Low .................................................. 135
Cluster ............ 106, 108, 110, 111, 113, 114 Air Bag ....................................128, 342, 368
Descriptions .................. 107, 109, 111, 114 K Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height ......... 134
Display ......................................................114 Key Fob ............................................................19 Air Suspension Fault ................................. 131
Engine Oil Reset ........................................116 Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............22 Air Suspension Off-Road 1 ........................ 134
Location And Controls ...............................115 Key Fob Battery Replacement .........................21 Air Suspension Off-Road 2 ........................ 134
Menu Items ...............................................116
11
486
Air Suspension Payload Protection ............134 Lights On Reminder .....................................56 Locks

Air Suspension Ride Height Lowering ........135 Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid .......................... 135 Automatic Door ............................................32
Air Suspension Ride Height Raising ..........134 Low Fuel ................................................... 136 Child Protection ...........................................32
Anti-Lock Brake System.............................131 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine)....... 132 Power Door ..................................................29
Brake Assist Warning ................................316 NEUTRAL .................................................. 135 Low Tire Pressure System ............................. 328
Brake Warning ..........................................128 Oil Temperature........................................ 130 Lubrication, Body .......................................... 418
Bulb Replacement .....................................438 Passing ........................................................55 Lug Nuts........................................................ 466
Cargo ..................................................57, 135 Rear Axle Lock .......................................... 135 Lug Nuts/Bolts .............................................. 466
Center Mounted Stop ................................443 Rear Axle Lock Fault ................................. 133
Courtesy/Reading ....................................... 59 Rear Tail Lamps ....................................... 442 M
Cruise .............................................. 136, 137 Seat Belt Reminder .................................. 130 Maintenance .............................................83, 85
Daytime Running......................................... 55 Security Alarm .......................................... 131 Maintenance Free Battery ............................ 408
ECO Mode .................................................136 Service ..................................................... 438 Maintenance Schedule ...............393, 398, 399
Electric Power Steering .............................130 Service Stop Start..................................... 133 Malfunction Indicator Light
Electronic Park Brake ................................131 Stop Start Active ....................................... 136 (Check Engine) .............................................. 132
Electronic Stability Control ........................131 TOW HAUL ................................................ 135 Manual
Electronic Throttle Control .........................129 Traction Control ........................................ 316 Service ...................................................... 480
Engine Coolant Temperature.....................130 Transmission Temperature....................... 131 Media Hub .......................................................75
Exterior ...............................................54, 370 Turn Signals .................................... 137, 440 Media Mode .................................................. 270
Fog .................................................. 136, 442 Wait To Start ............................................. 135 Memory Seat ....................................................34
Forward Collision Warning .........................135 Warning Instrument Cluster Memory Settings ..............................................34
Hazard Warning Flasher ............................371 Descriptions ......................................... 137 Methanol....................................................... 468
Headlights ............................................ 54, 56 Limited-Slip Differential ....................... 173, 427 Mirrors .............................................................45
High Beam .........................................55, 137 Load Shed Battery Saver Mode .................... 127 Automatic Dimming .....................................45
High Beam/Low Beam Select ..................... 55 Load Shed Battery Saver On ......................... 127 Digital ..........................................................46
Hill Descent Control Indicator.......... 137, 316 Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ........... 127 Electric Powered ..........................................48
Hood Open ................................................130 Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor............ 127 Heated .........................................................49
Illuminated Entry ......................................... 60 Loading Vehicle ............................................ 211 Manual Dimming .........................................45
Interior ........................................................ 59 Tires ......................................................... 448 Memory .......................................................34
LaneSense ...................................... 136, 137 Outside ........................................................47
487
Power Folding.............................................. 48 Oil Pressure Light .......................................... 130 ParkSense System, Rear ............................... 186
Rearview ............................................45, 372 Oil, Engine ............................................ 409, 473 Passive Entry....................................................30
Tilt Side In Reverse ..................................... 49 Capacity.................................................... 472 Pedals, Adjustable ...........................................44
Trailer Towing .............................................. 49 Dipstick .................................................... 407 Pedestrian Warning System .......................... 327
Vanity .......................................................... 46 Disposal ................................................... 409 Performance Features .................................. 118
Mobile App ....................................................284 Filter ................................................ 409, 473 Pets ............................................................... 368
Modifications/Alterations Filter Disposal........................................... 409 Phone Mode .................................................. 272
Vehicle ........................................................ 13 Identification Logo .................................... 409 Pickup Box ................................................92, 94
Monitor, Tire Pressure System.......................328 Materials Added To .................................. 409 Pinch Protection ........................................83, 85
Mopar Parts ...................................................479 Pressure Warning Light ............................ 130 Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 448
MP3 Control .................................................... 75 Recommendation ............................ 409, 472 Power
Multi-Function Control Lever............................ 55 Synthetic .................................................. 409 Distribution Center (Fuses) .............. 428, 433
Multifunction Tailgate ...................................... 87 Viscosity ................................................... 472 Door Locks...................................................29
Onboard Diagnostic System.......................... 138 Mirrors .........................................................48
N Operating Precautions .................................. 138 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet)..........76, 77
New Vehicle Break-In Period..........................150 Operator Manual Seats ...........................................................38
Owner's Manual ........................................ 480 Side Steps ...................................................30
O Outside Rearview Mirrors ................................47 Sliding Rear Window ....................................81
Occupant Restraints ......................................334 Overheating, Engine...................................... 387 Steering ........................................... 130, 173
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ......................467 Sunroof .................................................82, 83
Off Road Pages ..............................................306 P Windows ......................................................79
Accessory Gauges .....................................309 Paddle Shifters ............................................. 159 Power Seats
Pitch And Roll ............................................310 Paint Care ..................................................... 461 Down ...........................................................38
Status Bar .................................................307 Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Forward .......................................................38
Vehicle Dynamics ......................................308 Mobile Phone b ........................................ 274 Rearward .....................................................38
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) ....................232 Parallel Parking............................................. 193 Recline.........................................................38
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) ....................232 Parking Brake ...................................... 131, 150 Tilt................................................................38
Oil Filter, Change ...........................................409 Parking Lights ..................................................56 Up ................................................................38 11
Oil Filter, Selection.........................................409 ParkSense Active Park Assist........................ 192
488
Power Steering ..............................................173 Recreational Towing ..................................... 227 Roadside Assistance ............................ 291, 298
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts...................340 Four-Wheel Drive Models ......................... 228 Rotation, Tires ............................................... 460
Presets ..........................................................268 Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) ..... 229
Pressure Washing ..........................................408 Shifting Out Of Transfer Case S
Pretensioners Neutral (N) ........................................... 230 Safety ............................................................ 261
Seat Belts..................................................340 Two-Wheel Drive Models .......................... 228 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ........................ 368
Profile Settings ..............................................236 Reformulated Gasoline ................................. 468 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...................... 369
Refrigerant .................................................... 415 Safety Defects, Reporting ............................. 479
R Registering SiriusXM Guardian ..................... 284 Safety Features ............................................. 261
Radial Ply Tires ..............................................452 Release, Hood .................................................85 Safety Information, Tire................................. 444
Radiator Cap Release, Tailgate .............................................86 Safety Tips .................................................... 368
(Coolant Pressure Cap) ........................ 421, 423 Reminder, Seat Belt ...................................... 335 Safety, Exhaust Gas ...................................... 370
Radio Remote Features, Door Lock/Unlock ... 290, 298 Satellite Radio............................................... 264
Off Road Pages .........................................306 Remote Features, Horn And Lights ............... 291 Saved Radio Stations .................................... 268
Presets ......................................................268 Remote Features, Starting ................... 290, 299 Schedule, Maintenance ..............393, 398, 399
Settings .....................................................234 Remote Keyless Entry Seat Belt Reminder ....................................... 130
Sound Setting............................................255 Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............22 Seat Belts ............................................ 335, 368
Radio Controls ...............................................262 Remote Sound System (Radio) Control ......... 262 Adjustable Shoulder Belt .......................... 339
Radio Mode ...................................................262 Remote Start (Diesel) ......................................27 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 339
Radio Operation .................................. 262, 302 Remote Start (Gasoline) ..................................24 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Radio Remote Controls..................................262 Remote Starting Anchorage ............................................ 339
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ........................... 62 Comfort Systems .........................................26 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ........... 340
RamBox ........................................................... 94 Exit Remote Start Mode ..............................25 Child Restraints ........................................ 354
RamBox Safety ................................................ 96 Remote Starting System ........................... 24, 27 Energy Management Feature ................... 340
Rear Axle (Differential)...................................427 Remove, Tailgate .............................................88 Extender ................................................... 339
Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails ............................ 93 Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 438 Front Seat ...............................335, 336, 338
Rear Cross Path .............................................322 Replacement Tires ........................................ 454 Inspection ................................................. 368
Rear ParkSense System ................................186 Reporting Safety Defects .............................. 479 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................... 338
Rear Window, Sliding ....................................... 81 Restraints, Child ........................................... 354 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................... 338
Reclining Rear Seats ....................................... 37 Restraints, Head ..............................................41 Lap/Shoulder Belts................................... 336
489
Operating Instructions ...............................338 Service Manuals ........................................... 480 Starting .......................................140, 141, 144
Pregnant Women ......................................340 Settings, Audio .............................................. 268 Automatic Transmission ........................... 141
Pretensioners ............................................340 Shifting ......................................................... 153 Button..........................................................23
Rear Seat ..................................................336 Automatic Transmission ........................... 154 Cold Weather ............................................ 145
Reminder ..................................................335 Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer Engine Fails To Start ................................. 143
Seat Belt Extender ....................................339 Case Neutral (N).......................... 135, 229 Starting And Operating ................135, 141, 144
Seat Belt Pretensioner ..............................340 Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer Starting Procedures ............................. 141, 144
Seat Belt Reminder ...................................335 Case Neutral (N)................................... 230 Steering
Untwisting Procedure ................................338 Shoulder Belts .............................................. 336 Power........................................................ 173
Seat Belts Maintenance ................................464 Side Steps, Power ............................................30 Tilt Column...................................................33
Seats ................................................. 35, 37, 38 Signals, Turn ................................. 57, 137, 370 Wheel, Heated ......................................33, 34
Adjustment ........................................... 35, 38 Sirius Satellite Radio..................................... 264 Wheel, Tilt ....................................................33
Easy Entry ................................................... 39 Favorites................................................... 267 Wheel, Voice Recognition ............................43
Head Restraints .......................................... 41 Replay ...................................................... 266 Steering Wheel Audio Controls...................... 262
Memory ....................................................... 34 SiriusXM Satellite Radio Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System ....... 262
Power .......................................................... 38 Browse in SXM ......................................... 267 Steps, Power Side ............................................30
Rear Folding ................................................ 35 Favorites................................................... 267 Stolen Vehicle Assistance .................... 294, 299
Reclining Rear ............................................. 37 Replay ...................................................... 266 Stop/Start ............................................ 133, 174
Tilting .......................................................... 35 Sliding Rear Window, Power ............................81 Storage ............................................................69
Second Row USB ............................................. 75 Smart Watch ................................................. 296 Below Seat...................................................74
Security System ......................................27, 131 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ............................ 458 Door .............................................................69
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................473 Snow Plow .................................................... 225 Front Bench Seat .........................................72
Send & Go ........................................... 292, 298 Snow Tires .................................................... 455 Glove Compartment.....................................69
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) .................................. 22 SOS Call ............................................... 286, 298 In Floor ........................................................73
Service Assistance .........................................477 Spare Tires ................................. 455, 456, 457 Rear Console ...............................................73
Service Contract ............................................478 Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..................... 178 Storage Compartment, Center Seat .................70
11
490
Storage, Vehicle......................................68, 461 Tire Safety Information ................................. 444 To Open Hood ..................................................85
Store Radio Presets .......................................268 Tire Terminology And Definitions .................. 447 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ............. 213, 217
Storing Your Vehicle ......................................461 Tires ......................... 369, 451, 455, 456, 460 Tonneau Cover ....................................... 98, 462
Sun Roof ............................................ 82, 83, 85 Aging (Life Of Tires) .................................. 454 Tonneau Cover Cleaning ............................... 462
Sunglasses Storage ......................................... 72 Air Pressure .............................................. 451 Tow/Haul Mode ............................................ 160
Sunshade Operation ................................. 83, 84 Chains ...................................................... 458 Towing .........................................135, 212, 390
Surround View Camera ..................................200 Compact Spare......................................... 456 Disabled Vehicle ....................................... 390
Suspension Dual .......................................................... 466 Guide ........................................................ 217
Air .................................................... 165, 169 General Information ............... 451, 455, 456 Recreational ............................................. 227
Sway Control, Trailer ......................................319 High Speed ............................................... 452 Weight ...................................................... 217
Symbol Glossary .............................................. 13 Inflation Pressure ..................................... 452 Towing Behind A Motorhome ........................ 227
Synthetic Engine Oil .......................................409 Life Of Tires .............................................. 454 Traction ......................................................... 230
Load Capacity ........................................... 448 Traction Control ............................................ 319
T Pressure Monitoring System Trailer Reverse Steering Control ................... 217
Tailgate ............................................................ 86 (TPMS) ........................................ 133, 328 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) .................... 213, 319
Tailgate Removal ............................................. 88 Quality Grading ......................................... 460 Trailer Tire Pressure ...................................... 332
Tailgate, Electronic Lowering ........................... 86 Radial ....................................................... 452 Trailer Towing ....................................... 131, 212
Tailgate, Multifunction ..................................... 87 Replacement ............................................ 454 Frontal Area .............................................. 213
Telescoping Steering Column .......................... 33 Rotation.................................................... 460 Hitches ..................................................... 216
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ............ 67 Run Flat .................................................... 453 Minimum Requirements ........................... 219
Tilt Safety .............................................. 444, 451 Mirrors .........................................................49
Down ........................................................... 38 Sizes ......................................................... 445 Tips ........................................................... 225
Up................................................................ 38 Snow Tires ................................................ 455 Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................ 217
Tilt Steering Column ........................................ 33 Spare Tires .............................455, 456, 457 Weight Carrying Hitch ............................... 213
Tip Start .........................................................141 Spinning ................................................... 453 Weight Distributing Hitch .......................... 214
Tire And Loading Information Placard ...........448 Trailer Towing ........................................... 220 Wiring ....................................................... 223
Tire Identification Number (TIN) ....................446 Tread Wear Indicators .............................. 453 Trailer Towing Guide ..................................... 217
Tire Markings .................................................444 Types ........................................................ 455 Trailer Weight ................................................ 217
Wheel Nut Torque..................................... 466
491
Transfer Case ................................................427 Uconnect 4C/4C Nav With 8.4-Inch Phonebook Download ............................... 277
Electronically Shifted ....................... 160, 162 Display .......................................................... 233 Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold............... 279
Fluid ..........................................................476 Uconnect Phone ........................................... 274 Power-Up .................................................. 282
Transmission .................................................154 Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Recent Calls.............................................. 278
Automatic ........................................ 154, 426 Call Currently In Progress ..................... 279 Redial ....................................................... 280
Fluid ..........................................................476 Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — To Remove A Favorite ............................... 277
Maintenance .............................................426 No Call Currently In Progress................ 279 Toggling Between Calls ............................. 280
Shifting ......................................................153 Bluetooth Communication Link ................ 282 Touch-Tone Number Entry ........................ 278
Temperature .............................................131 Call Continuation ...................................... 280 Transfer Call To And From
Transporting Pets ..........................................368 Call Controls ............................................. 278 Mobile Phone ....................................... 280
Tread Wear Indicators ...................................453 Call Termination ....................................... 280 Voice Command ....................................... 280
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover .................................... 98 Cancel Command ..................................... 274 Uconnect Settings
Cleaning ....................................................105 Connecting To A Particular Mobile Customer Programmable Features .... 30, 235
Install ........................................................102 Phone Or Audio Device After Pairing .... 276 Passive Entry Programming .........................30
Removal ...................................................... 99 Help Command......................................... 274 Uconnect System .......................................... 259
Turn Signals ......................... 57, 137, 440, 442 Join Calls .................................................. 280 Uniform Tire Quality Grades .......................... 460
Making A Phone Or Audio Device Universal Garage Door Opener
U A Favorite ................................................. 276 (Homelink®) — If Equipped b .......................50
Uconnect Making A Second Call While Current Unleaded Gasoline ........................................ 467
Phone Call Features ..................................277 Call Is In Progress................................. 280 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt.................... 338
Things You Should Know About Your Managing Your Favorites .......................... 277 USB ..................................................................75
Uconnect Phone....................................280 Natural Speech......................................... 274 Utility Rails, Rear Cargo Area ...........................93
Uconnect Settings .....................................234 Operation ................................................. 273
Uconnect (Radio) ...........................................233 Overview ................................................... 272
Uconnect 4C Nav With 12-Inch Display .........233 Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A
Mobile Phone ....................................... 274
11
492
V W Window Lockout Switch ...................................81

Vehicle Finder ...................................... 293, 299 Warning Lights And Messages ...................... 128 Windows ..........................................................79
Vehicle Health Alert .......................................295 Warranty Information .................................... 479 Power...........................................................79
Vehicle Health Report ....................................294 Washers, Windshield .................................... 407 Rear Sliding .................................................81
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ...............466 Washing Vehicle ........................................... 462 Reset Auto-Up ..............................................80
Vehicle Loading ................................... 211, 448 Water Windshield Defroster .................................... 368
Vehicle Maintenance .....................................408 Driving Through ........................................ 231 Windshield Washers ..................... 61, 132, 407
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations .................... 13 Water Separator Fluid.......................................................... 407
Vehicle Notifications ......................................295 Diesel Fuel....................................... 136, 412 Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 419
Vehicle Settings .............................................234 Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .......................... 457 Windshield Wipers ...........................................61
Vehicle Storage ......................................68, 461 Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 457 Wipers Blade Replacement ........................... 419
Ventilated Seats .............................................. 40 Wi-Fi .............................................................. 293 Wipers, Rain Sensitive .....................................62
Voice Command .............................................. 43 Wind Buffeting .................................................81 Wireless Charging Pad .....................................79
Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................ 43 Window Fogging ...............................................68
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in
This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation
changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also
to install them on products previously manufactured. dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It
substitution therefore. is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/ This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference
Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. for common questions.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle,
Booklet by calling 1-866-726-4636 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com. visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the
Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public
vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and transportation.
lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary,
service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when
servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
2022 RAM 1500
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing
what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you will find the app an important
extension of your Ram vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go
directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
U.S. CANADA
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,

RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
MOPAR.COM/OM OWNERS.MOPAR.CA 2022 RAM 1500

OWNER’S MANUAL
©2021 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. FIRST EDITION V1
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google. 22_DT_OM_EN_USC

The Most Up-To-Date Owner'S Manual, Radio and Warranty Books

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

The Most Up-To-Date Owner'S Manual, Radio and Warranty Books

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2022 RAM 1500

DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,

MOPAR.COM/OM OWNERS.MOPAR.CA 2022 RAM 1500

2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ................................................................................. 19 2

3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ......................................................106 3

4 STARTING AND OPERATING .............................................................................................. 140 4

5 MULTIMEDIA .............................................................................................................................. 233 5

6 SAFETY ......................................................................................................................................... 312 6

INTRODUCTION REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL) .........27 SEATS ...................................................................... 35

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE..........................390 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE..................................... 408 TIRES .....................................................................444

SYMBOLS KEY VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS

A — Forward Limit of Camper CG

Red Warning Lights Red Warning Lights

Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light Vehicle Security Warning Light

Hood Open Warning Light

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning Light

Air Suspension Fault Warning Light

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light

Cruise Control Fault Warning Light

Yellow Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights

Low Washer Fluid Warning Light

Air Suspension Payload Protection Indicator Light

Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator Light

Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator Light

Yellow Indicator Lights Yellow Indicator Lights

Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height Indicator Light NEUTRAL Indicator Light

Cargo Light Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light

Entry/Exit Indicator Light 4WD Indicator Light

Yellow Indicator Lights Green Indicator Lights

4WD High Indicator Light ECO Mode Indicator Light 1

Wait To Start Light Indicator Light Front Fog Indicator Light

Water In Fuel Indicator Light LaneSense Indicator Light

Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Light

White Indicator Lights White Indicator Lights

Cruise Control Ready Indicator LaneSense Indicator Light

Cruise Control SET Indicator Light With Base/Midline Instrument

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21

22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

5. Replace the battery by using your thumb to

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23

24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

 For more information on normal engine starting,

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25

 If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low,

26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: menu screen within Uconnect Settings NOTE:

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27

28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29

knob is down when the door is closed, the door will

Rear Door Lock Knob

30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31

Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking

32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: AUTOMATIC UNLOCK D OORS ON E XIT — CHILD-P ROTECTION DOOR LOCK

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33

34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

HEATED S TEERING WHEEL — WARNING!

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35